Time Navigator Administration Guide

Transcription

Version 4.2
Ref: ADM42EW-0108
Time Navigator Administration Guide
for Microsoft Windows
Atempo Copyrights
Atempo retains all property rights concerning the documentation of Time Navigator
software.
Your right to copy the Time Navigator software documentation is limited by the
legislation on copyright. Copies or adaptations without Atempo’s prior written consent are
forbidden by law and constitute a reprehensible breach.
This documentation is provided "as is" without any warranty of any kind, either expressed
or implied, including (but not limited to) the implied warranties or conditions of
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Atempo shall not be liable for loss of
profits, decreasing or interrupted business activity, for loss of data or data use, nor for
any indirect, special or consequential damages whatsoever, even if Atempo has been
advised of the possibility of such damages arising out of a fault or an error in the
documentation or in Time Navigator software.
Atempo retains all rights to modify this documentation periodically without notice. No
part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted, for any purpose, by any means,
electronic or mechanical, without Atempo’s express and written permission.
Atempo, Atempo’s logo and Time Navigator are registered trademarks of Atempo.
All brand or product names mentioned in this guide are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
Copyright © 1992-2008 Atempo. All rights reserved.
Third Party Copyrights
Time Navigator uses certain Opensource components listed here:
■
The International Component for Unicode (libicu). For more information, consult
http://www-306.ibm.com/software/globalization/icu/index.jsp
■
lesstif: the Hungry Programmers' version of OSF/Motif®. For more information, consult
http://www.lesstif.org/
■
The Year-2038 bug. For more information, consult
http://2038bug.com/
■
OpenSSL. "The OpenSSL Project is a collaborative effort to develop a robust,
Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows
commercial-grade, full-featured, and Open Source toolkit implementing the Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL v2/v3) and Transport Layer Security (TLS v1) protocols as well
as a full-strength general purpose cryptography library. The project is managed by
a worldwide community of volunteers that use the Internet to communicate, plan,
and develop the OpenSSL toolkit and its related documentation."
For more information, consult
http://www.openssl.org/
■
Perl. For more information, consult
http://www.perl.org.
■
Apache 2.0. For more information, consult
http://www.apache.org
The licenses for these components can be consulted in the Time Navigator Release Notes
guide.
Contents
i
Contents
Introduction
Time Navigator Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup/Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Navigator Documentation . . . . . . . . .
Time Navigator Release Notes . . . . . .
Time Navigator Getting Started Guide
Other Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Navigator Online Help . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Navigator Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Web Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Comments are Welcome . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
2
2
3
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
Time Navigator Administration Console Presentation
Prerequisites to Opening Time Navigator Administration Console .
Unix Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnected Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connected Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening Time Navigator Administration Console . . . . . . .
Connecting to Another Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting the Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refreshing the Catalog Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Time Navigator Administration Console Start Faster
Quitting Time Navigator Administration Console . . . . . . .
Shutting Down the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Navigator Administration Console Main Window . . . . . . .
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Information Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Icon Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
10
12
13
13
13
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
19
20
25
27
28
ii
Alarm Area . . . . . . . .
Handling Platforms . . . . . . .
Displaying Platforms . . .
Searching for a Platform
Grouping Platforms . . .
Sorting Platforms . . . . .
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
31
31
32
33
35
About the catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Editor Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Catalog Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspending a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backing up the Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backing up a Single Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Application Creation Parameters . . . . .
Configuring the Catalog Application . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Catalog Application Content . . . . .
Backing up Several Catalogs on the same Server
Backing up a Remote Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring the Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring the Catalog with the Boot Catalog . . .
Restoring Another Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring the Catalog Configuration . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
38
39
43
45
47
49
50
51
52
52
54
55
59
59
62
63
64
64
67
68
About Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firewalls and Backup Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a New Host Detected by Time Navigator
Creating Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Platform Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabling Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
70
70
70
71
73
74
74
79
81
83
84
84
Catalog Management
Platform Management
Contents
Setting Platform Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Preferences Tool . . . . . . . . .
Tunables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Domain Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help/Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Web Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NDMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VMware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabling/Enabling Drive-Host connections
Deleting Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Hosts Detected by Time Navigator . .
List Administration of Platforms . . . . . . . . . .
Host List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Host Information . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting the Host List . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying the Host Status . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying the Host Comment . . . . . . . .
Deleting Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application List Window . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Application Information . . . . . .
Exporting the Application List . . . . . . . .
Editing an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying the Application Status . . . . . .
Modifying Application Comment . . . . . .
Deleting Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4
iii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 86
. 86
. 87
. 90
. 96
. 99
.100
.101
.101
.102
.103
.104
.104
.105
.106
.106
.106
.107
.108
.110
.111
.111
.112
.113
.113
.113
.114
.114
.115
.115
.116
.116
.117
.117
.117
.118
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.120
.120
.120
.120
Users and Access Rights
About Users and Access Rights . . . . . .
Platform Access . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backed up or Archived File Access
Catalog and Functionality Access .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
iv
System Users . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User and Access Rights Operations . . . .
Defining Default Access Rights . .
Defining Personal Access Rights .
Creating a User . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a User . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining or Modifying a Password
Changing the User Identity . . . . .
Creating a User Group . . . . . . .
Editing a User Group . . . . . . . .
Deleting a User Group . . . . . . .
Chapter 5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.121
.122
.123
.123
.123
.129
.130
.131
.131
.132
.133
.134
.135
About Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Configuration of Devices in Time Navigator
Device Detection Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library Split Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library Drive Position Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Library Properties . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinitializing a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Mode of the Drive . . . . . . . .
Supervising Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatically Cleaning Drives . . . . . . . . . .
Manually Cleaning Drives . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ejecting a Media from a Drive . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Administration of Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.137
.139
.140
.147
.148
.152
.157
.159
.159
.161
.165
.165
.166
.166
.167
.167
.170
.182
.182
.183
.184
.185
.186
.187
.188
.188
.189
Device & Media Management
Contents
Drive List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Drive Information . . . . . . . . .
Exporting the Drive List . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying the Drive Status . . . . . . . . .
Modifying the Drive Connection Type . .
Identifying Drive content . . . . . . . . . .
Ejecting a Media from a Drive . . . . . .
Testing Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Media Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Media Pool . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Media Pool . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Media Pool . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available Cartridge Operations . . . . . .
Viewing Media Information . . . . . . . .
Exporting Media Information . . . . . . .
Recycling a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reopening a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplicating a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . .
Putting a Cartridge Off-line . . . . . . . .
Viewing Cartridge Statistical Information
Externalizing a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing a Cartridge Label . . . . . . . . .
Reading a Cartridge Label . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Prefix to a Cartridge Label . . .
Editing the Cartridge Life Cycle . . . . .
Displaying the Cartridge Wear Level . . .
Setting the Cleaning Cartridge Parameters
Chapter 6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
v
.189
.191
.191
.191
.191
.192
.192
.193
.193
.193
.194
.195
.195
.196
.198
.199
.200
.200
.204
.210
.213
.215
.217
.217
.218
.218
.219
.220
.221
.224
.226
.226
.228
.228
.228
.229
.229
Time Navigator Library Manager
Managing Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Viewing a Different Catalog or Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Label vs. Bar Code Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
vi
Modifying Slots Arrangement . . . .
Library Operations . . . . . . . . . . .
Library Properties . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinitializing Libraries . . . . . . . .
Launching a Library Reinitialization
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying a Drive Mode . . . . . . .
Enabling/Disabling . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ejecting a Media from a Drive . . .
Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slot/Cartridge Information . . . . . .
Media Operations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cartridge Status . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying a Cartridge . . . . . . . .
Putting Cartridges On-line . . . . . .
Putting Cartridges Off-line . . . . . .
Moving Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Cartridge . . . . . . . . .
Slot Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling/Disabling a Slot . . . . . . .
Changing Slot Content . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.235
.235
.237
.237
.238
.240
.240
.241
.242
.243
.243
.244
.245
.245
.247
.247
.248
.249
.250
.251
.252
.252
.252
.253
.253
About Time Navigator Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup without Using the Cache of the Server
Scheduling issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administration Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring a Backup with the Backup Wizard
Backup Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Backup Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Backup Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Triggering of a Backup . . . . . . . . .
Editing Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.286
.286
.286
.288
.288
.289
.290
.291
.291
.291
.300
.300
.301
.315
.316
Automatic Backup Configuration
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
Deleting Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Administration of Strategies . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Strategy List . . . . . . . . . . .
Strategy List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting the Strategy List . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Strategy Media Pools . . . . . .
Modifying Strategy Schedules . . . . . . . .
Resetting Pending Strategies . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Scheduler . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of Schedule Creation . . . . . . .
Scheduling a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a Schedule Rule . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying a Schedule Rule . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Schedule Rule . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Backup Selection . . . . . . . . .
Filter Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Nested Selections . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Selection Representation . . . . . .
Viewing Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Backup Selection . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Backup Selection . . . . . . . . .
List Administration of Backup Selections . . . . .
List of all Backup Selections . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Backup Selection Information . . .
Exporting the Backup Selection List . . . .
Editing Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Backup Selection Parameters . .
Modifying Backup Selection Filters . . . . .
Modifying Backup Selection Security Rule
Deleting Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . .
Macro-multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
vii
.316
.317
.317
.317
.319
.319
.320
.321
.322
.322
.323
.323
.324
.326
.333
.335
.336
.336
.336
.337
.337
.337
.338
.338
.339
.339
.339
.347
.352
.353
.353
.355
.355
.357
.357
.358
.359
.359
.359
.360
.361
.362
.364
viii
Cache Space Management . . . . . . . . . .
Simple Backup without Macro-multiplexing
Backup with Macro-multiplexing . . . . . .
Configuring Macro-multiplexing . . . . . . .
Backup Status by Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Backup Status by Platform . .
Backup Status by Platform Parameters . . .
Viewing Backup Details . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Details Window . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-running a Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.364
.365
.365
.366
.368
.368
.368
.369
.370
.370
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Time Navigator Agent . . . . . . .
Backing up Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows 2000/2003/XP/Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Navigator Daemon . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Navigator Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifics of the Mac OS X agent . . . . . . .
Known Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OES NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OES Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NDMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer . . . . . . . . .
Starting Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer
Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refreshing the Displayed Information . . . .
Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.372
.372
.372
.372
.372
.372
.373
.373
.374
.374
.374
.375
.377
.380
.380
.383
.384
.385
.386
.386
.389
.391
.392
.394
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.406
.406
.407
.408
Agents
On Demand Backup
Configuring On Demand Backup
Defining Users . . . . . . .
Defining Strategies . . . . .
Managing Load . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
Using On Demand Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows and Unix: Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer . .
On Demand Backup Unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring On Demand Backup in Time Navigator Job Manager
ix
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.411
.411
.414
.414
Chapter 10 Time Navigator in SAN Environments
About Time Navigator in SAN Environments . . .
About Multiple Server Architecture . . . . . .
About Storage Node Architecture . . . . . . .
About Mixed Architecture . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Servers or Storage Nodes . . . . . .
Device Descriptor Re-allocation . . . . . . . .
SAN Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Server Architecture Implementation . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Node Architecture Implementation . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAN Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shared Drive Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying the Drive Connection type . . . .
Disabling/Enabling Drive-Host Connections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.419
.420
.421
.422
.422
.423
.424
.425
.425
.425
.428
.428
.428
.429
.429
.430
.430
Chapter 11 Alarms
Alarm Description . . . . . . . .
Alarm IDs and categories
Alarm Severity . . . . . .
Alarm Type . . . . . . . .
Alarm Messages . . . . .
Viewing Alarms . . . . . . . . .
Sorting Alarms . . . . . .
Processing Alarms . . . . . . . .
Notifying Alarms . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.434
.434
.434
.435
.435
.436
.439
.440
.443
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.446
.446
.447
.447
.448
Chapter 12 Time Navigator Event Viewer
About Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Events in Connected Mode
Viewing Events in File Mode . . . .
General Operations on Events . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
x
Connecting to a Catalog . . . . . .
Updating the Event Manager . . .
Setting User Preferences . . . . .
Preferences Window . . . . . . . .
Event Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Events to Display .
Selecting the Columns to Display
Adjusting Columns . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Line Break . . . . . . . .
Filtering Events . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Filter Parameters . . . . . .
Clearing Events . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Events . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Events Window . . . . . .
Event Purging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
event File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
log or log_debug File . . . . . . .
Notifying Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.448
.448
.450
.450
.451
.451
.452
.452
.453
.453
.454
.457
.458
.459
.459
.459
.462
.463
.463
.465
Viewing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Selection Window . . . . . . . . . .
Job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Job History . . . . . . . . . . . .
Column Choice Job Window . . . . . . . . .
Sorting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Manager Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refreshing Time Navigator Job Manager
Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Alarm Details . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Details Window - General Tab . . . . .
Job Details Window - Advanced Tab . . . .
Job Details Window - Specific Tab . . . . .
Job Details Window - Events Tab . . . . . .
Column Choice Window - Events . . . . . .
Export Events Window . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.468
.469
.469
.469
.470
.470
.470
.474
.474
.475
.475
.476
.476
.476
.477
.479
.481
.483
.484
.485
Chapter 13 Time Navigator Job Manager
Contents
.......................
Job Details Window - Alarms Tab .
Filtering Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Filtering Window . . . . . . . . .
Purging Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purging Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Purge Window . . . . . . . . . . .
Processing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Job Window . . . . . . . . . .
Duplicating Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplicating Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Duplication Window . . . . . . .
Job Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Job Behavior using Parameters
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xi
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.487
.487
.489
.489
.490
.492
.492
.492
.494
.494
.495
.495
.495
.497
.497
.497
.499
.500
Time Navigator Task Viewer Interface . . . . . . . . . .
Platform List Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Scale Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Zoom Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pop-up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering the Display of the Platforms . . . . . . .
Updating Time Navigator Task Viewer Contents
Exporting Data to a Text File . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Simultaneous Backups . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Backup Evolution of Performed Backups
Selecting a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalogs Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.503
.503
.504
.505
.505
.506
.508
.508
.513
.513
.513
.514
.516
.516
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.520
.521
.522
.522
.523
.524
Chapter 14 Time Navigator Task Viewer
Chapter 15 Time Navigator Media Request Console
Viewing Requests . . . . .
Selecting Catalogs . . . .
Managing Requests . . . . . . .
Handling a Request . . . .
Responding to a Request
Processed Requests . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xii
Viewing Handled Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Information in the Handled Requests Area
Viewing Information in the Pending Requests Area
Request Status and Evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redirecting Operator Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.525
.525
.526
.527
.527
.528
.529
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.531
.532
.532
.532
.535
.541
.542
.543
.545
.546
.546
.547
.547
Chapter 16 Backup to Disk with Virtual Library System
About the Virtual Library System . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring a Virtual Library System . . . . . . .
Virtual Library System Configuration Files
Using the Atempo VLS Wizard . . . . . . .
Creating a Virtual Library System . . . . .
Virtual Library System Parameters . . . . .
Cartridge File Location . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Virtual Library System . . . . . . . . . .
Managing the Virtual Library System . . . . . . .
Adding Spare Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . .
Bringing Cartridges Offline . . . . . . . . . .
Bringing Cartridges Online . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 17 Exporting Data Backed up to Disk to a Tape Library
Duplication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting Data Using Cartridge Duplication . . . . . . . . .
Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Virtual Library System Application
Virtual Library System Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting Data Using Job Duplication . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Library System Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.549
.551
.551
.552
.554
.567
.567
.572
.573
.574
.574
.583
.583
Chapter 18 List Application
Application Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
List File Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Contents
Basic Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a dynamic List file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Application Creation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager . .
Restore Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List File Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphical Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the List Application to back up a MYSQL database
xiii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.591
.592
.603
.604
.604
.606
.612
.614
.618
.620
.620
.623
.624
Chapter 19 Mapped Network Drives
Net Disk Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Net Disk Application Creation Parameters . . .
Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back up and Restore without the Net Disk Application
Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.627
.627
.629
.632
.632
.633
.635
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.637
.637
.638
.639
.640
.641
.641
.642
.642
.643
.643
Chapter 20 Filesystem Application
Application Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and Enabling a Filesystem Application
Filesystem Application Creation Parameters . .
Creating or Editing a Media Pool . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Backup Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Backup Selection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Application Contents . . . . . . . . .
Restoring data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix
Appendix 1: Advanced Library Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Appendix 2: Specific Library Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Cartridge Management when Partitioning an Adic Scalar i500 Library 650
Appendix 3: TCP Parameter Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
xiv
Glossary
Index
1
Introduction
Welcome to Time Navigator.
Time Navigator is a software product that automatically backs up, archives and restores
data. Its flexible and dynamic architecture brings both performance and security to your
data storage needs.
Available on a variety of platforms, Time Navigator interfaces directly with the most
popular DBMS such as Oracle, SQL Server, Sybase, as well as Notes, MS Exchange...
etc. Innovative developments such as Time Navigation simplify the restore process and
reduce restore time.
Time Navigator’s user oriented graphical interface facilitates product administration and
brings you a high level of security and reliability.
Time Navigator supports an ever increasing number of storage peripherals (drives and
libraries). Consult our on-line Compatibility Guide at www.atempo.com for up-to-date
information.
This Time Navigator Administration Guide contains instructions on how to configure,
control and administer Time Navigator. Several graphical applications are available,
such as Time Navigator Library Manager, that allows you to view and easily manage
your library content, and Time Navigator Media Request Console to manage media
requests.
2
Time Navigator Features
Backup/Restore
Backup consists of copying data on a regular basis to ensure timely restore in case of
accidental data loss.
Time Navigator offers automatic backup scheduling, and provides easy steps to restore
information.
The advantages of the Time Navigator solution are the following:
■
■
■
■
The possibility for users to perform restore operations themselves, without the help
of the administrator and without knowing how the backup robotized library is
organized.
The possibility for administrators to schedule backups easily, manage the robotized
library automatically and monitor backup operations on the network.
The on-line backup of the main types of database.
The possibility to work in a very heterogeneous environment: Unix, Windows,
NetWare, Mac OS X and VMS operating systems can all be backed up.
Archiving
Archiving meets another need in data management, that of storing data (projects,
measurement results, etc.) in the medium to long term, for security as well as space
saving reasons. Archiving operations consist in copying data into an archive folder and
associating this folder with keywords for identification purposes.
Time Navigator offers:
■
The ability for users to create archive folders with indexes and to archive and
restore data by themselves, with key word search capabilities.
■
An efficient time navigation method for searching folders.
■
The possibility to archive to a central media library.
■
The on line consultation of authorized archive folders.
■
The automatic archiving of selected directories or files.
Introduction
3
Time Navigation
Designed by Atempo, Time Navigation greatly simplifies the consultation and restore of
backed up or archived data. At any time, the user can navigate in the past on his machine
and view the exact image of his files or directories as they were on a given date,
regardless of their actual location on the storage media. Restoring them is then just a click
away.
4
Conventions
This guide uses conventions to make information easy to access and understand.
■
Text in Time Navigator graphical application windows is displayed in the following font:
Window text.
■
Time Navigator commands and scripts related to the different operating systems
(Unix, Windows, etc.) are displayed in the following font:
scripts and commands.
■
■
➤
■
Cross-references to further information are indicated by the ☞ symbol.
Procedures indicating the steps to follow to perform an action with
Time Navigator are presented as follows:
Procedure title
1.
First step.
2.
Next step, etc.
Command syntax is presented as follows:
■
■
■
Square brackets [ ] indicate an option.
The - sign refers to a parameter. The parameter is either followed by the
type of information to provide, or is self-sufficient.
The | sign indicates a choice between several parameters.
Introduction
5
Time Navigator Documentation
Time Navigator documentation consists of a series of PDF format files located on the
delivery CD-ROM.
The PDF format requires the use of Adobe Acrobat Reader, which can be downloaded
from the Adobe web site, at www.adobe.com.
Note
The Time Navigator Release Notes and Time Navigator Getting Started
Guide manuals are also available in print format.
Time Navigator Release Notes
The Time Navigator Release Notes contain Time Navigator version-specific
information such as new features, new behaviors and performance improvements.
Time Navigator Getting Started Guide
The Time Navigator Getting Started Guide is an introductory guide to familiarize
users with Time Navigator. This guide contains information concerning
Time Navigator Server and Agent installation, backup configuration and restore
methods.
Other Guides
The Reference guides (Time Navigator Installation Guide, Time Navigator
Administration Guide and Time Navigator Restore Guide) describe the installation,
administration and use of the software for backing up and restoring file systems.
The Specific guides describe installation, configuration and use of Time Navigator
options, such as Time Navigator Archiving Server, Time Navigator for Oracle,
Time Navigator for MS-SQL Server, Time Navigator for NDMP, etc.
6
Time Navigator Online Help
All the Time Navigator graphical interfaces include a context-sensitive online help
system available for:
■
■
Windows (HtmlHelp format),
Unix (HTML format). This format is compatible with the Netscape Navigator 4.0
browser, or any other compatible browser.
This online help system allows you to find the information you need easily and quickly:
■
■
From any dialog box within the application, click on Help to access context-sensitive information describing the parameters of the dialog box.
From any graphical interface, choose Help - Help Topics to get the online help for this
interface. You can also search for information through the Contents tab, the Index
tab or the Search tab that offers a powerful full-text search.
Time Navigator Tutorials
Discover Time Navigator through the Flash-based Tutorials delivered with the product:
■
Setup Tutorial: How to install, use the Preferences tool and configure the Device
Detection Wizard.
■
Backup Tutorial: How to configure an automatic backup.
■
Restore Tutorial: How to restore missing files or previous versions of existing files.
■
Monitoring Tutorial: How to monitor your backups and analyze problems.
■
Architecture Tutorial: How Time Navigator can be integrated with various
architectures (Client/Server, Multi-site, Secured, Firewall and SAN
Architectures).
■
Archiving Tutorial: How to use Time Navigator for long-term storage and
classification of your file sytems.
To access these tutorials, choose Help-Tutorial from the Time Navigator Administration
Console or Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. The tutorials are also
available from the Autorun (Windows) or from the CD-ROM index.htm file (Unix).
To view these tutorials, you need:
■
A web browser.
Introduction
7
A Shockwave Player (or Macromedia Flash Player) program. If needed, download
the program corresponding to your machine’s operating system from:
■
http://www.macromedia.com/shockwave/download/alternates/
Note
The Shockwave Player and Macromedia Flash Player programs are not
available for IBM AIX and VMS.
Technical Support
Web Support
If you have subscribed a maintenance contract and you encounter a problem with
Time Navigator, consult the Atempo Web Support at:
http://support.atempo.com
Complete information on Atempo Web Support, including how to get a login, the range
of tools and services available and how to use each of them, can be found in the
Time Navigator Troubleshooting Guide, on your Time Navigator delivery CD-ROM.
The Knowledge Base includes:
■
Time Navigator PDF documentation.
■
Time Navigator patches.
■
Time Navigator Known Issues.
■
Technical Notes.
If you are unable to solve your problem or find the information you need, Atempo and
its partners will help you. Web support includes an interactive interface through which
you can log your inquiries directly and follow them up. Support is also available by email
and by phone.
When calling the Atempo Technical Support team, please provide your maintenance
contract number. We also recommend that for all Support inquiries you generate the
Time Navigator Environment Report.
8
For more details on the Environment Report, see the Time Navigator Troubleshooting
Guide.
Your Comments are Welcome
We value and appreciate your opinion as a Time Navigator user and reader of our
documentation. As we write, revise and evaluate our guides, your comments are the
most important input we receive. Please do not hesitate to send us any remarks you have
to the following address: [email protected]
9
C H A P T E R
1
Time Navigator Administration
Console Presentation
1
Time Navigator Administration Console is one of the main interfaces you will
encounter when using Time Navigator. It offers a truly interactive and centralized
administration that includes:
■
■
■
■
A representation of your backup network, displaying catalogs, servers, clients,
SAN, databases, automated libraries and drives.
Access to a series of monitoring tools, such as Time Navigator Job Manager,
Time Navigator Event Viewer and Time Navigator Task Viewer.
Real time information concerning various components of the backup network.
Configuration tools to set up your backup environment and schedule automatic
backups.
This chapter describes the functioning of Time Navigator Administration Console both
in disconnected and connected mode.
10
Prerequisites to Opening Time Navigator
Administration Console
The following items are prerequisites to opening Time Navigator Administration
Console:
■
The tina_daemon process must be running on the Time Navigator server.
■
The Time Navigator service must be started on the Time Navigator server.
Unix Prerequisites
A script called runtina is provided in the $TINA_HOME/Bin directory which loads the
Time Navigator environment at the moment a command is run. It takes the command
itself as its argument.
Example:/usr/Atempo/tina/Bin/runtina tina_adm -language English
It is also possible to add $TINA_HOME/Bin to the PATH variable in your .profile file.
If you do this, you do not need to include the path every time to execute runtina. For
example, you can directly type
runtina tina_adm -language English
in any console window.
Any other commands can be launched in the same way.
Alternatively, the environment can be set by running tina.sh or tina.csh, depending
on the shell you are using. For shell and bash, type
. $TINA_HOME/Bin/.tina.sh
For csh, run
Chapter 1
11
source $TINA_HOME/Bin/.tina.csh
Note:
Atempo recommends using runtina rather than the shell script to set the
environment, because certain system libraries in the environment can disrupt
the running of standard Unix commands such as ls.
Note:
If the script is run at reboot, it may prevent the launching of the window
manager. Make sure not to set the script in a user profile (.cshrc, .profile ...).
An X-Window graphical display is required. You must check that the environment
variable DISPLAY is correctly defined or use the [-display display] option of the
tina_adm command.
12
Disconnected Mode
When you are in disconnected mode, no catalog is displayed in Time Navigator
Administration Console. This does not mean that the Time Navigator service or
daemon is not running. One or more catalogs may be active, but you are not connected
to any one of them, hence no catalog contents appear in Time Navigator Administration
Console.
In disconnected mode, you can perform the following operations:
■
Creating a Catalog
■
Editing a Catalog
■
Opening Time Navigator Event Viewer
Warning:
To create or edit a catalog, you must be logged in as root or with
administrator’s rights.
To start Time Navigator Administration Console in disconnected mode
1.
Choose /Applications/Atempo/tina41/Administration Console.app
Make sure the Time Navigator service is running (enter $TINA_HOME/
Bin/runtina tina_daemon).
Then enter $TINA_HOME/Bin/runtina tina_adm
Choose Start-Programs-Time Navigator-Time Navigator
2.
If some catalogs have already been created, the Catalog Selection window appears.
Select “none” and click on OK.
3.
Time Navigator Administration Console appears.
Note:
For a full description of the options available with the tina_adm command
and their default value, see the "tina_adm" section in the Time Navigator
Command Line Interface guide.
Chapter 1
13
Connected Mode
Prerequisites
In addition to the prerequisites for opening Time Navigator Administration Console in
disconnected mode, opening in connected mode, meaning to connect to a catalog, implies
that at least one catalog has already been created on the server.
Opening Time Navigator Administration Console
To connect to a catalog and access the various functionalities offered by Time Navigator,
you must have the appropriate permissions to do so. Thus, you should choose a Catalog
Identity according to the Level of Catalog Access you require. The following two
sections provide information concerning the catalog login. Information concerning Users
can be found in “Users and Access Rights”, page 119.
Catalog Identity
■
First connection to a catalog:
By default, when you create a catalog, the Privileged User is the only one allowed
to connect to the catalog. Thus if you are connecting to a catalog for the first time,
you must use the privileged user identity with or without a password depending on
whether you defined one or not.
Tip:
■
While you are logged in as the privileged user you can grant other users
access to the catalog (see “To define user specific rights”, page 123) as
well as modify the default rights (see “Defining Default Access Rights”,
page 123).
Logging in as the privileged user:
On subsequent login, if you need to be logged as the privileged user, provide the
privileged user name and password if you have defined one.
■
Logging in as a user known to the catalog:
Enter the user name and password exactly as defined in the catalog. The user must
at least have the General Task permission to connect to the catalog. If you did not
specify a password for a user, just provide the user name. To define users in the
catalog, see “To create a user”, page 129.
■
Logging in as a user unknown to the catalog:
If the user name you provide is unknown to the catalog, whether you provide a
14
password or not, the user will be assigned default permissions. The default
permissions do not allow a user to connect to the catalog. The privileged user can
modify the default rights to allow access to the catalog to any user, see “Defining
Default Access Rights”, page 123 for details.
Level of Catalog Access
The following table presents the permissions required to perform catalog operations:
Operation
User(s) allowed to perform the operation
Creating or editing a catalog
root or user with administrator’s rights only
Starting, stopping or suspending a
catalog
Privileged user only
Connecting to the catalog in
Console
Privileged user and any user with the General Task permission. See
“Users and Access Rights”, page 119.
Accessing the Time Navigator
functionalities.
Privileged user and any user with the General Task permission and
the permission specific to each functionality. See “Defining
Personal Access Rights”, page 123 for details.
Granting catalog access permissions
to users.
Privileged user only
To start Time Navigator Administration Console in connected mode
Choose /Applications/Atempo/tina41/Administration Console.app
1.
Enter ./tina_adm in the Bin directory of the installation directory
($TINA_HOME).
Choose Start-Programs-Time Navigator-Time Navigator
Note:
2.
For a full description of the options available with the tina_adm
command and their default value, see the "tina_adm" section in the
Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide.
The List of Catalogs Window window appears. Select the catalog you want to connect
to and click on OK. You can only be connected to one catalog at a time.
Chapter 1
3.
15
The Catalog Login Window appears. Enter the name and password of the user you
want to log in as. See “Catalog Identity”, page 13 to choose the appropriate user.
If the user you provide does not have the permission to connect to the catalog a
warning message is displayed. If the password you provide is incorrect, the
Catalog Login window reappears to let you enter the password again.
Once you have provided a correct login, Time Navigator Administration Console
appears.
Connecting to Another Catalog
If you are working in a multi-catalog environment, you can connect to another catalog to
display its contents in Time Navigator Administration Console (you can only view a
single catalog at a time in that window).
Note:
You can only connect to a running catalog. If a catalog is stopped, you must
start it before you can connect to it, see “To start a catalog”, page 49.
To connect to another catalog
1.
In the Catalog Information area, select the catalog you want to connect to.
2.
Choose Catalog-Connect.
3.
If the catalog user currently connected has the permission to access the catalog you
are trying to connect to, no login is required. If not (or if no catalog user is
currently connected, i.e., you are in disconnected mode) you have to provide a
login allowing the connection to the new catalog. See “Catalog Identity”, page 13
and “Level of Catalog Access”, page 14 for details.
4.
The catalog previously displayed is disconnected and the newly selected one
appears.
Disconnecting the Catalog
Disconnecting the current catalog allows you to switch to the disconnected mode. This
is useful if you want to create or edit a catalog.
To disconnect the catalog
■
Choose Catalog-Disconnect. All the catalog information disappears, the window is
empty.
16
Refreshing the Catalog Status
To refresh the status of all the catalogs
Choose Catalog-Refresh the Catalog List.
To refresh the status of one catalog
In the Catalog tab of the Catalog information area, right-click a catalog then choose
Refresh Catalog Status.
Making Time Navigator Administration Console Start Faster
By default, the catalog list is refreshed when Time Navigator Administration Console
starts and regularly afterwards. If your environment has a great number of catalogs and/
or if there is a heavy load on your network, disabling the automatic refresh of the catalog
list will make Time Navigator Administration Console start faster.
To disable the automatic refresh of the catalog list:
■
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Catalog and uncheck Automatic
Refresh of the Catalog List.
Next time you start Time Navigator Administration Console, the
icon will appear
beside each catalog except the one you are connected to. This icon means the catalog
status is unknown.
To manually refresh the status of one or several catalogs, see “Refreshing the Catalog
Status”, page 16.
To enable the automatic refresh of the catalog list:
■
Note:
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Catalog and check Automatic
Refresh of the Catalog List.
Until you start Time Navigator Administration Console again, the automatic
refresh only applies to the catalogs which you have already manually refreshed.
Next time you start Time Navigator Administration Console, it will return to its default
configuration and refresh the entire catalog list.
Chapter 1
17
Quitting Time Navigator Administration Console
To quit Time Navigator Administration Console
Choose Catalog-Quit.
Shutting Down the server
This section concerns Unix platforms only.
Prior to shutting down the server, you must manually stop the Time Navigator
service to prevent damages to the catalog.
18
Time Navigator Administration Console Main Window
Menu
Bar
Network
Area
Catalog
Information
Area
Status Bar
Icon
Area
Alarm
Area
Time Navigator Administration Console consists of:
■
■
■
The Menu bar which includes all the application menus.
The Network area which allows you to view platforms, libraries and drives in its
upper part, and in the lower part, the shared drives.
The Catalog Information area which indicates the name of all the catalogs located on
the server and their current status, (Catalogs tab) and the catalog and cache spaces
(Current Catalog tab).
The list of catalogs shows the alarm with the highest security level for each
reachable catalog.
Chapter 1
■
■
■
19
The Status bar which indicates the current catalog, the current user and the number
of platforms.
The Icon area which represents the list of all platform groups managed in the
Time Navigator configuration.
The Alarm area which allows you to view alarms initiated by the application
graphically. The three buttons represent different severity levels. See “Alarms”,
page 433, for additional information.
The Network, Alarms, and Real Time Information areas are updated every five seconds.
Several instances of Time Navigator Administration Console can run at the same time.
Any action performed in one instance will be also viewed in the others, except when
removing or creating a platform.
Menu Bar
The Menu bar includes all the administration menus:
Catalog Menu
The Catalog menu allows performance of catalog operations such as creating, starting,
connecting, etc.
See “Opening Time Navigator Administration Console”, page 13.
Monitoring Menu
The Monitoring Menu allows opening of the Time Navigator monitoring interfaces:
■
“Alarms”, page 433
■
“Time Navigator Event Viewer”, page 445
■
“Time Navigator Job Manager”, page 467
■
“Time Navigator Task Viewer”, page 501
■
“Time Navigator Media Request Console”, page 519
Platform Menu
The Platform menu allows handling of hosts and applications.
See “Handling Platforms”, page 31.
Backup Menu
The Backup menu allows to create backup objects such as strategies, backup selections,
groups, etc, to schedule automatic backups. See “Automatic Backup Configuration”,
page 285.
20
Archiving Menu
The Archiving menu allows management of archive folders.
See the Time Navigator Archiving Server guide.
Devices Menu
The Devices menu allows to detect and manage devices, as well as perform library and
drive operations.
See “Device & Media Management”, page 137 and “Time Navigator Library
Manager”, page 233.
Storage Menu
The Storage menu allows management of media, media pools, cartridges, snapshots and
replications.
See “Device & Media Management”, page 137.
Security Menu
The Security menu provides access to Time Navigator Security & Compliance
Manager (if you installed this fonctionality) and allows management of users and access
rights for Time Navigator.
See “Users and Access Rights”, page 119 and Time Navigator Security & Compliance
Manager.
Help Menu
The help menu provides access to Time Navigator Online Help, tutorial, Web support
zone and information concerning the Time Navigator Licenses and version used.
Network Area
The Network area contains the platforms, libraries and drives in its upper part, and in
the lower part, the shared drives.
Selecting Items in the Network Area
To perform any operation on a platform, platform group, drive or library, you must first
select it in the Network area.
To select an object in the network area
1.
Display the object to select in the Network area if it is not already displayed (see
“Displaying Platforms”, page 31).
2.
Click on the object icon. The outer frame turns to a darker blue: the object is
selected.
Chapter 1
21
To select a platform group
■
In the Icons area, click on the icon of any platform belonging to the group. All the
group is selected and is displayed with a black background.
Note:
Only one object can be selected at a time, whatever its nature (platform, drive,
library or group).
Platform Representation
A platform can be either a host or an application.
Click here
to select
the
1. Alarms
2. Host/Application Status
3. Network Information
4. Host/Application Name
5. Host/Application Type
6. Backup strategies
(A, B, C or D)
Line # Platform Information
1
Alarms concerning the host/application.
The color of the box indicates the alarm severity level:
Background color : no alarm.
Yellow
: minor alarm.
Orange
: major alarm.
Red bar
: critical alarm.
The blinking of the bar indicates the alarm status (viewed or not):
Blinking bar
: non acknowledged alarms.
Non blinking bar : acknowledged alarms.
Note: When a platform has several alarms of different severity levels, the color of the bar indicates
the maximum severity level (ex: a minor alarm and a major alarm = orange bar).
2
Host/Application Status.
Background color
: platform is enabled, backup authorized.
Black cross on an ocher background : platform is disabled, backup not authorized.
22
Line # Platform Information
3
Network Information (applies to hosts only)
Drive icon
: host has access to a shared drive.
Lightning
: host is connected to one or more local drive.
4
Host/Application Name
The name corresponds to a hostname and not an alias (ex: hercule), except if you declared it in
the localhostname field of the hosts file in the Conf directory of the Time Navigator
installation directory.
5
Host/Application Type: model and architecture (ex: SGI, Windows 2000...).
6
Backup strategies associated with the host/application (A, B, C and D) up to 4 strategies for any
given platform.
If a letter appears in the box, it indicates that the backup strategy is defined. If a backup is being
performed, the box of the concerned strategy is displayed with a green background.
Drive Representation
Click here
to select
the drive
1. Alarms concerning the drive
2. Status (Disabled, Enabled or Maintenance).
3. Drive Operation
4. Drive Name
5. Drive Type
6. Cartridge Name
7. Volume of data processed
Chapter 1
Line n#
Drive Information
1
Alarms concerning the drive.
The color of the bar indicates the alarm severity level:
Blue bar
: no alarm.
Yellow bar
: minor alarm.
Orange bar
: major alarm.
Red bar
: critical alarm.
The blinking of the bar indicates the alarm status (viewed or not):
Blinking bar
: non acknowledged alarms.
Non blinking bar : acknowledged alarms.
23
Note: When a drive has several alarms of different severity levels, the color of the bar indicates
the maximum severity level (ex: a minor alarm and a major alarm = orange bar).
2
Drive Status.
Enabled, green background
Disabled, ocher background
Maintenance, ocher background
: drive is available
: drive is unavailable
: drive is in maintenance mode
3
A different icon appears for each operation being performed by the drive. The operations are:
■
Writing on media
■
Reading from media
■
Forwarding media
■
Rewinding media
■
Writing a label
■
Testing the drive
■
Recycling media
■
Deleting media
4
Drive Name
This is the logical name of a drive.
5
Drive Type: Manufacturer and type (ex: Exabyte 5GB-C).
6
Media Name
*
: non labelled media.
Label
: labelled media.
The background color indicates the nature of the request:
A Red background means that the media is required.
A background of the same color as the overall background means that the media has been
identified and is being used.
7
Volume of data processed on media (not just for the current session).
Line #1 is only active when an alarm concerning the drive is detected.
Lines #5, 6, and 7 are only active during the reading or writing session of a backup or
24
archiving of data on media.
Note:
During maintenance operation or while using a drive for a non
Time Navigator action (e.g., reading a tar-formatted file under Unix), you
should disable the drive to inform Time Navigator not to use it, to avoid any
conflict.
Displaying Drives
In order to optimize the network area display you have the option of showing or hiding
drives in Time Navigator Administration Console.
To Show/Hide a drive
1.
Choose Drive-Display-Show.../Hide....The Drives to Show/Hide window appears.
2.
Select the drives you want to show or hide and click on OK.
Tip:
The Show/Hide drive menu is also available when you right click on a host or
drive icon. Right clicking on the host icon allows you to display/hide all the
drives attached to that host at once. Right clicking on a drive icon allows you
to hide that drive only.
Library Representation
Click here
to select
the library
1. Alarms concerning the library
2. Reinitialization of the library
3. Library Name
4. Library Type
Line #1 is only active when an alarm concerning the library is detected.
Line #2 is only active during the library reinitialization.
Chapter 1
25
Network Representation
1. Drive display toggle
Click here
to select
the
Line
#
2. Number of drives attached to the network
3. Network Name
Network Information
1
Drive display toggle.
Use this button to show or hide the drives attached to the network. The plus sign indicates that
drives are hidden. The minus sign indicates that the drives are displayed.
2
Number of drives attached to the network
3
Network Name
Catalog Information Area
Catalogs Tab
The Catalogs tab indicates the name of all the catalogs located on the server and their
current status.
For running catalogs, and if the user has the access permission to the catalogs, the
background color of the icon indicates the active alarm with the highest severity present
on the catalog. A tool tip provides a list of all active alarms per alarm level for a
particular catalog.
Icon
Description
The catalog is running and is the catalog currently
displayed in Time Navigator Administration Console.
The catalog is running but is not currently displayed in
Time Navigator Administration Console.
The catalog is running but the current user does not have
the permission to access that catalog.
26
Icon
Description
The catalog is stopped.
The catalog status is unknown due to an error.
The catalog status is unknown (the automatic refresh is
turned off).
Current Catalog Tab
The Current Catalog tab provides real time catalog and cache usage information.
Catalog Area
In the Catalog area, you can monitor the modifications occurring in the catalog space.
Field
Description
Volume
This is the catalog size you declared when you first created your catalog. This figure will
not change unless you edit your catalog and modify it. See “Editing a Catalog”, page 45
for details on how to increase the catalog size.
Free
This is the amount of available space in your catalog expressed as a percentage of total
catalog volume.
This percentage decreases when the number of backup selections and versions increases. It
increases when media are recycled or objects are deleted.
The free space should not be allowed to be too low as it could seriously hinder
Time Navigator functioning. Thus, when you reach 20% of remaining free space, the field
will be displayed in orange to warn you (this value can be modified using the tunable
Catalog Filling Rate Alarm). If you reach 5%, the field will be red.
The catalog will cease functioning when it is 98% full.
Objects
Number of all distinct objects (files and directories) contained in the catalog.
Instances
Number of all object versions contained in the catalog.
Backing up a new backup selection involves the creation of one object and one version
in the catalog. The object and the first version created use an average of 512 bytes. The
following versions use approximately 128 bytes (Unix, Windows XP) or 256 bytes for
systems such as 2000/2003, NetWare, VMS with extended security management (ACL
or access list type). Backing up an existing object only involves the creation of a new
version.
Chapter 1
27
If backup strategies or archive folders have multiple writing media pools, several file
copies are written. In this case, one version is created for each copy. For example, if
your strategy has a multiple writing media pool, each file is backed up in two copies and
two new versions are recorded in the catalog for each file.
Cache Area
The Cache area enables you to follow the evolution of the cache occupied space.
Fields
Information
Volume
Total cache volume as determined when the catalog was created (sums up disk and memory
cache).
Free
Percentage of available cache.
This figure actually refers to the percentage of free container in the cache, thus it will appear
constant even if data is being processed by the cache, until it leaps to a new threshold.
When the free cache space falls below 10%, the field is displayed with an orange background.
When the free cache space falls below 5%, the field is displayed with a red background.
Writing
Percentage of cache used for writing sessions (e.g., during backup and archiving operations).
Reading
Percentage of cache used for reading sessions (e.g., during restore operations).
The Status Bar
The status bar contains the following information:
Numbered
Area
Description
1
Current catalog name
2
Button to launch Time Navigator Media Request Console
User Status and User Name:
3
■
Key icon: privileged user
■
Yellow icon: user known to the catalog
■
No icon: user unknown to the catalog
28
Numbered
Area
4
Description
The first number represents the number of platforms currently displayed. The
second number represents the total number of platforms in the catalog
Alarm area. Displays the alarms issued by Time Navigator:
5
■
Green means no alarm
■
Yellow means minor
■
Orange means major
■
Red means critical
Icon Area
The Icon area contains all the platforms declared in the application. Platforms belonging
to a group are represented in a group area containing an icon for each platform. Only the
first ten characters of the name are displayed.
Using the icon area right click menu, you can:
■
■
Enable/disable platforms. If you right click on a platform belonging to a group, all
the platforms in the group are enabled/disabled at once.
Sort platforms
The platform status is indicated by its icon color and by symbols whose meaning is
explained in the following table:
Chapter 1
Visual Clue
Description
Example
Dark green icon
Enabled platform.
adele.fs2
Ocher icon
Disabled platform.
hobbes.list
Green icon
Automatic backup being performed on the
platform.
adele
Dark blue icon
The platform is highlighted.
aria
Red, Orange and yellow icon
Non-acknowledged alarm on the platform of fatal, adele.fs
major or minor severity level.
No symbol (platform name
alone)
Platform displayed in the Network area.
adele.fs2
Circle
Platform not displayed in the Network area.
axle
Vertical bar
Platform displayed in the Network area, and
connected to one or several drives.
adele
Vertical bar to the right of circle. Platform not displayed in the Network area and
connected to one or several drives.
29
athanagor
Dimmed circle with ocher
background.
Platform Disabled and not viewed in the Network
area.
gaston.list
Thick line between platforms
Platforms are grouped
aragorn and hobbes
Note:
When a platform is selected in the Network area, its icon blinks in the Icon
area to allow the user better to view it.
Alarm Area
The Alarms area allows you to view alarms initiated by the application. It contains three
buttons which correspond to different severity levels.
The color of the button indicates the alarm severity level:
■
Green button:
no alarm.
■
Yellow button: minor alarm.
■
Orange button: major alarm.
■
Red button:
critical alarm.
30
The blinking of the button indicates the alarm status:
■
Non blinking button: acknowledged alarms.
■
Blinking button:
not acknowledged alarms.
If you click on an alarm button, the list of alarms of the selected severity level is
displayed.
You can acknowledge the displayed alarms. The list contains information on alarms such
as name and type of the object, severity level, first and last dates of occurrence, number
of occurrences and message.
For more information on managing alarms, see “Alarms”, page 433.
Chapter 1
31
Handling Platforms
Displaying Platforms
In the Icons area, the presence of symbols on a platform icon indicates that the platform,
and the libraries and drives, attached to it (if any) are not displayed in the Network area.
The platform button in the Icons area acts as a toggle to view, or not, the platform in the
Network area.
Note:
To display a drive or a library, you must display the host it is connected to.
For more information on the meaning of symbols associated with icons, see“Icon Area”,
page 28.
To display a platform in the Network area
1.
Choose Platform-Display-View. The Platforms to Display window appears, listing all
the platforms that are not displayed in the Network area.
2.
Select one or several platforms in the list and click on OK.
In the Icons area, the symbol the platform icon contains disappears and the platform,
along with the libraries and drives connected to it (if any), is displayed in the Network
area.
Tip:
You can also double-click on the platform icon in the Icons area to display the
platform in the Network area.
To remove a platform display from the Network area
1.
Choose Platform-Display-Iconify. The Platforms to iconify window appears, listing all
the platforms that are displayed in the Network area.
2.
Select one or several platforms and click on OK.
The selected platforms, along with the libraries and the drives connected to them (if any),
are no longer displayed in the Network area. A symbol appears among the corresponding
32
icons of the Icons area.
Tip:
You can also double-click on the platform icon in the Icons area to remove the
platform from the Network area.
Searching for a Platform
It is possible to search for a platform in the Network area. This feature is very useful if
many objects are declared in the Network area and you have to scroll back and forth to
find a platform.
To search for a platform
1.
Choose Platform-Search-Host/Application. The host/application list appears.
2.
Select a platform in the list or fill in the Search field to filter platforms according
to their names.
You can use, among others, the following special characters:
3.
■
*: specifies any characters from 0 to n.
■
?: specifies any single character, including the space character.
■
[ab]: specifies only one character among those mentioned (a or b).
Click on OK.
The focus is set on the searched platform.
Note:
If the platform was minimized in the Icon area, it is maximized and appears in
the Network area.
Chapter 1
33
Grouping Platforms
Platform groups allow you to define backup settings for the whole group at once. All
platforms belonging to the group will have identical backup settings.
Only users authorized to edit backup strategies and backup selections can perform this
operation.
Note:
Platforms must be compatible in order to be grouped. For example, you can
only group hosts that are of the same type. Likewise, you can only group
applications that are of the same type, except for the Filesystem and List
applications that are grouped according to the host type they are attached to.
If the platforms are not compatible, you can use the backup strategy import
feature. See “To create a backup strategy”, page 301.
Warning:
If the platform you plan to add to a group already has backup selections and
strategies defined, they will be replaced with the group backup selections
and strategies.
To group platforms
1.
Choose Backup-Groups. The Modify Groups window appears.
2.
In the Existing groups list, select the platform or the platform group that you want
to associate with a group.
Tip:
3.
You can select more than one group or platforms using the Ctrl key.
In the Destination groups list, select the group with which you want to associate
the selected platform.
34
4.
Click on Apply to take the modifications into account without closing the window
and click on OK to close the window.
A dialog box reminds you that the platform adopts the backup selections and
strategies of the group it is associated with and prompts you to confirm your
decision.
Warning:
5.
Tip:
Platforms belonging to the same group have identical backup
selections. The same directory must exist on all the platforms of the
group.
Click on Yes to validate the operation.
You can also select a platform in the Icons area and drag and drop it on top of
the platform with which you want to associate it.
To remove a platform from a group
1.
Choose Backup-Groups. The Modify Groups window appears.
2.
In the Existing groups list, select the platform to remove from the group.
3.
In the Destination groups list, select New group.
4.
Click on Apply to take the modifications into account without closing the window
and click on OK to close the window.
Tip:
You can also drag and drop the platform outside of the group in Icons area.
Note:
When a platform is removed from a group, it keeps the strategies and backup
selections of the group with which it was associated. If you are allowed to, you
can modify its backup selections and strategies. See “Editing Strategies”,
page 316 and “Editing a Backup Selection”, page 355.
Chapter 1
35
Sorting Platforms
When you open Time Navigator Administration Console, the platforms in a group are
automatically sorted in alphabetical order, and the groups are sorted in the alphabetical
order of the first platform in each group. You have the option, if you modify the groups,
to manually sort platforms.
To sort platform groups
Choose Platform-Display-Sort. The platforms in the icon area are sorted in
alphabetical order within each group and the groups are sorted by their first
platform.
Tip:
You can also right click in the icon area and select Sort.
36
37
C H A P T E R
2
Catalog Management
This section describes how to perform the following operations:
■
“Creating a Catalog”, page 39
■
“Editing a Catalog”, page 45
■
“Setting Catalog Parameters”, page 47
■
“Starting a Catalog”, page 49
■
“Stopping a Catalog”, page 50
■
“Suspending a Catalog”, page 51
■
“Backing up the Catalog”, page 52
■
“Restoring the Catalog”, page 64
2
38
About the catalog
The Catalog is the core Time Navigator database. It contains all the information required to
run Time Navigator, such as the configuration of platforms, drives, libraries, users,
cartridges...etc. It also contains the meta-data recorded in the catalog during write
operations. This meta-data consists of the description and location of all backed up files.
In most cases, a catalog will be created during the installation phase. Otherwise, creating a
catalog is the first operation you have to perform to configure your Time Navigator
environment.
Multicatalog
The multicatalog functionality allows you to set up backup and archiving operations with a
lot of freedom. For instance, one catalog can be dedicated to backing up data and another to
archiving data.
The different catalogs work independently from one another although they may share
resources such as drives and libraries through Time Navigator Library Sharing Manager.
Some Time Navigator applications such as Time Navigator Task Viewer,
Time Navigator Job Manager or Time Navigator Media Request Console, will let you
access several catalogs at the same time, while others, such as Time Navigator
Administration Console will require you to choose a single working catalog.
Note:
Each catalog must be backed up on a regular basis to secure your Time Navigator
environment.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
39
Creating a Catalog
When you create a catalog, Time Navigator automatically creates a Data.catalog_name
directory in the installation directory, containing a series of odb, ... odb_n files that represent
the catalog. The maximum size of an .odb file is 1 GB, thus depending on the size of your
catalog, 1 to 32 odb files will be created.
For performance reasons, you may want to locate your odb files elsewhere than in the default
directory. To do so, use the Split Catalog File (odb_translation_path_)# or Catalog File
Location (global_odb_translation_path) tunables prior to creating the catalog.
Note:
The catalog must be created on a local disk, not on a network disk via NFS for
instance.
See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details on how to use these tunables.
Preliminary Steps
■
■
While logged in as root or with administrator’s rights, open Time Navigator
Administration Console in disconnected mode (see “Opening Time Navigator
Administration Console”, page 13).
If Time Navigator Administration Console is already open and connected to a
catalog, choose Catalog-Disconnect to switch to the disconnected mode.
To create a catalog
1.
Choose Catalog-New.
The Time Navigator Catalog Editor window appears.
40
2.
Provide a catalog name and size, and an identity for the privileged user as
described in “Catalog Parameters Area”, page 43.
3.
Click on Add in the Cache area to define your cache space. The following window
appears:
4.
Choose the Type and Size of the cache space and click on OK.
■
■
You must define at least one type of cache. In order to improve
performances, both cache space types can be segmented. The following tables
summarize the cache caracteristics for each cache type, and the disk cache
maximum size according to the catalog size.
For the Disk Cache, you must specify a path for the disk cache file to be created
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
as well as a size. Repeat the operation for each disk cache to be created.
Cache Characteristics
Cache type
Characteristic
Value
Maximum Size
2047 MB
Minimum Size
32 MB, at least 64 MB recommended
Maximum Number of Segments 32
Minimum Number of Segments 0 if at least 1 disk cache segment has been defined,
otherwise 1
Maximum Segment Size
Unix: 2047MB
Windows: 64 MB except if tunable
max_memory_axes_size is set (see the
Time Navigator Tunables guide for details)
If the tunable is not set, the cache size you provide is
automatically divided into 64 MB segments and
rounded up to the nearest multiple of 64. For
instance if you request 200 MB of memory cache,
four segments are created.
Minimum Segment Size
32 MB
Maximum Size
32 GB to 512 GB depending on the catalog size (see
“Maximum Disk Cache Size”, page 41)
Minimum Size
1 GB
Memory
Maximum Number of Segments 32
Disk
Minimum Number of Segments 0 if at least 1 memory cache segment has been
defined, otherwise 1
Maximum Segment Size
32 GB to 512 GB depending on the catalog size (see
“Maximum Disk Cache Size”, page 41)
and on the number of segments
Minimum Segment Size
32 MB
Maximum Disk Cache Size
If the catalog size is...
...the maximum disk cache size is..;
< 2 GB
32 GB
>= 2 GB and < 8 GB
128 GB
>= 8 GB and < 16 GB
256 GB
> 16 GB
512 GB
41
42
5.
To modify the structure of your cache, click on the Advanced Tab. See “Advanced
Tab”, page 44 for details.
6.
Click on OK to launch the catalog creation.
Modifying Memory Cache Size in MacOS
When you configure a memory cache in Time Navigator Configurator, the maximum
size allowed is proportional to the size of the shared memory defined in your machine.
The default values defined at setup are:
■
sysctl -w kern.sysv.shmmax=536870912
■
sysctl -w kern.sysv.shmmin=1
■
sysctl -w kern.sysv.shmmni=128
■
sysctl -w kern.sysv.shmseg=32
■
sysctl -w kern.sysv.shmall=131072
This means that, by default, you cannot create a memory cache larger than 512 MB.
However, if you want to have memory cache larger than this, you can modify the size of
the shared memory in your Mac system. You can do this manually by modifying the shm
values in the file /etc/rc.
To Modify the Memcache Default Values in MacOS
The general principle is to set the shmmax and shmall values according to the following
formula:
shmmax=total size in bytes to allocate to your shared memory
shmall=shmmax/4096
For example, the following values will allow the creation of memcache of up to 1 GB:
shmmax=1073741824
shmall=262144
Warning
Atempo recommends that you do not allocate more than 1/4 of the system
memory to Time Navigator cache. Example: if your server has 4GB system
memory, do not allocate anymore than 1GB for Time Navigator.
Chapter 2
Note
Catalog Management
43
After any modification of the file /etc/rc, the machine needs to be rebooted.
Catalog Editor Window
Catalog Parameters Area
■
Catalog Name: Name that appears in the Time Navigator interfaces. The catalog
name is not case sensitive and always appears in lower case.You can use the
following characters:
■
■
Any letter.
■
Any number from “0” to “9”.
■
Underscore “_”.
Catalog Size (MB)
At least 128 MB, at most 128 GB. To determine your catalog size, be aware that
the first version of a backed up object will use up approximately 1024 bytes.
Subsequent instances will use up approximately 256 bytes for Unix, clients and 512
bytes for Windows, MAC OS X, NetWare, and VMS clients (the difference in size
is due to the presence of security attributes and/or ACLs).
Note:
The catalog size must be a multiple of 4. It will be automatically rounded
if you enter a size that is not a multiple of 4.
Auto-expanding catalog size
By default, a catalog is in auto-expanding mode. The size you provide when
creating the catalog is automatically increased as needed up to a maximum of
128 GB, provided that you have enough disk space. Alarms warn you when you are
close to reaching the maximun size of the catalog and when your file system is
nearly full.
Note:
To disable the auto-expansion of the catalog, use the tunable
-disable_auto_expand. See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details
on how to set a tunable.
The size of the catalog is then limited to the size you define when creating
the catalog.
44
■
Privileged User Name
Enter a name for the privileged user. This user needs not exist at the operating
system level. You can use any characters.
The privileged user is the only user that can grant access rights to other users. He
has all the rights to perform any operations on the catalog, except editing the
catalog. Editing the catalog can only be performed by root or a user with
administrator’s rights.
■
Password
Enter a password for the privileged user and confirm it in the Confirm field.
Note:
■
If you choose not to define a password for the privileged user at this point,
you can define one later, just as you would for any catalog user.
Server Name
This field is automatically filled by Time Navigator and contains the name of the
server you are working on.
■
Comments
Enter a comment if you wish. This comment will appear next to the catalog name
in the Catalog List window.
Cache Tab
■
Add: Lets you create a new cache space.
■
Modify: Lets you modify a cache space.
■
Delete: Lets you delete a cache space.
■
File Pathname: Displays the access path to the cache space.
■
Cache Size: Displays the size of the cache space.
Advanced Tab
Note:
■
The default container size is calculated according to the cache size you
specify in the Cache tab. You may change the size of the containers as
needed, without modifying the size of the cache.
Average number of Versions per objet: Allows Time Navigator to optimize the catalog
structure by keeping versions of a same object in the same location. The default
value is 5, i.e., each time a new object is backed up in the catalog, Time Navigator
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
45
reserves enough space near the object to hold 4 more versions of that object. Keep
the default value if you are unsure of what information you should provide. This
field only appears when you are creating a catalog, not when you are editing it.
■
■
■
Memory cache layout is xx containers of yy MB: Indicates the current memory cache
layout based on the memory cache information found in the Cache Tab. xx is the
number of containers, yy is the size of each container.
New Size of Memory Containers (MB): Allows you to modify the size of the memory
cache containers, if the default cache container size does not suit your needs.
Choose a size between 4 MB and 256 MB.
Disk cache layout is xx containers of yy MB: Indicates the current disk cache layout based
on the disk cache information found in the Cache Tab. xx is the number of
containers, yy is the size of each container.
■
New Size of Disk Containers (MB): Allows you to modify the size of the disk cache
containers, if the default cache container size does not suit your needs. Choose a
size between 4 MB and 256 MB.
Editing a Catalog
Once a catalog has been created, you may need to edit it, for instance to increase its size.
Note:
If the catalog is in auto-expanding mode (default mode when creating a catalog),
you do not need to increase the catalog size, it is automatically increased when
needed.
You need to stop the catalog in order to modify it.
To edit a catalog
1.
Open Time Navigator Administration Console with the catalog administrator
login.
2.
Stop the catalog. Right click on the catalog to edit in the Catalog Information area and
choose Stop.
3.
Choose Catalog-Properties. The Catalog List window appears. Select the catalog to edit
and click on OK.
46
4.
Edit the catalog settings as needed.
■
■
5.
All fields but the Host Id and the catalog name can be edited.
For all other fields, follow the procedure described in “Creating a Catalog”,
page 39.
Restart the catalog. In the catalog information area, right click on the catalog and
choose Start. Log in as the privileged user of the catalog.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
47
Setting Catalog Parameters
Parallel Restore Parameters
It is possible to perform several simultaneous restore jobs. This is known as parallel restore.
Parallel restore works by initiating a father job that then handles several child jobs. These
child jobs appear as parallel jobs. Child jobs may also be fathers. All these jobs remain
active until at least one has ended. They will only appear in the job history once all child
jobs have completed.
Note:
Parallel restore does not depend on having backed up the original data with a
parallel backup. You can perform a parallel restore on data that was backed up
without parallelism if the backup was done on several cartridges.
You can set limits to the maximum number of snapshots or cartridges to use. The limits
concerning snapshots are mostly related to your network abilities. The practical limit on
cartridges is the number of drives available. The limits apply to each individual restore and
not all of the current restores.
If a child job is interrupted or fails for some reason, the other child jobs will continue
normally.
During a parallel restore job, if a file is split across two cartridges, parallel performance is
reduced as this will require two passes on the job:
■
■
Note:
a first pass to restore data from the first cartridge and perform other complete jobs.
a second pass to complete the restoration of data on the second cartridge for the job(s)
split across two cartridges.
Parallel backup only applies to hosts and filesystem applications. It does not
apply to any other application type including the catalog application.
On Demand Backup Parameters
See “On Demand Backup”, page 405.
To set catalog parameters
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Catalog-Parameters.
48
2.
Set the restore parameters as specified in “Catalog Parameters Window”, page 48.
3.
Click on OK.
Catalog Parameters Window
Restore Parameters
Maximum Number of Parallel Cartridge Restore Jobs: Specifies the maximum number of
resources (cartridges, drives) that can be allocated simultaneously to a single restore job.
The default value is 3.
Maximum Number of Parallel Snapshot Restore Jobs: Specifies the maximum number of restore
processes that can be launched simultaneously by a single snapshot restore job. The default
value is 3.
Note:
The job limitation is currently based on using all enabled drives. Resource
management then determines what can be done with available resources.
On Demand Backup
Maximum of On Demand Backup per day and per host: Specifies the global maximum number of
On Demand Backups that authorized users throughout the network are permitted to launch
within a 24-hour period on any given host. The default value is 5.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
49
Starting a Catalog
If a catalog is not running, you cannot display its contents in Time Navigator
Administration Console. You must start it before performing any action on it.
Note:
The privileged user is the only user allowed to start the catalog.
Tip:
A running catalog is represented in the Time Navigator Administration Guide
Catalog Information area with a green icon.
To start a catalog
1.
If you are already connected to a catalog, switch to disconnected mode, unless the
currently logged user is the privileged user of the catalog you want to start.
2.
In the catalog information area, select the catalog you want to start and choose
Catalog-Start.
3.
If you are in disconnected mode, the catalog login window appears. Log in as the
privileged user of the catalog you want to start.
4.
The catalog is started, its icon in the catalog information area becomes green.
50
Stopping a Catalog
It is possible to stop a catalog without stopping the Time Navigator service or daemon.
Stopping a catalog allows you to edit that catalog. A stopped catalog remains so until it is
manually started again using the Catalog-Start menu.
Note:
The privileged user is the only user allowed to stop the catalog.
Tip:
A stopped catalog is represented in the Catalog Information area with a black
square on top of a red icon.
To stop a catalog
1.
Connect to the catalog as the privileged user.
2.
In the catalog information area, select the catalog to stop and choose
Catalog-Stop.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
51
Suspending a Catalog
It is possible to suspend a catalog without stopping the Time Navigator service or daemon.
Suspending a catalog allows you to edit the catalog. Unlike a stopped catalog, a suspended
catalog is automatically restarted if the Time Navigator service or daemon is shut down and
then restarted. A suspended catalog can also be restarted manually using the Catalog-Start
menu.
Note:
The privileged user is the only user allowed to suspend the catalog.
Tip:
A suspended catalog is represented in the Catalog Information area with a black
square on top of a red icon.
To suspend a catalog
1.
Connect to the catalog as the privileged user.
2.
In the catalog information area, select the catalog to suspend and choose
Catalog-Suspend.
52
Backing up the Catalog
The backup and restore of the catalog are performed via the Time Navigator Catalog
Application.
Note:
All the catalog operations performed by the Catalog application are also available in
command line. See the tina_init and tina_odbsave commands, as well as the Catalog
Manual Procedures appendix in the Time Navigator Command Line Interface
guide for details.
Catalog Application
The Catalog Application allows you to back up the catalog contents. It is automatically
created when you create a catalog. Its name is: <catalog_name>.cat
Warning:
On Mac OS X platforms, you must imperatively have a root account in order
to use the Catalog application.
The Catalog application copies the catalog on the backup media and creates a small
meta-catalog file: the Boot Catalog. The boot catalog contains all the necessary information
to locate and restore the backed up catalog files. The boot catalog is saved on disk for ease
of access, in a directory named Boot in the Data.<catalog name> directory
The boot catalog files are named as follows: bootxxxx_<catalog_name>.cod
Using environment variables (see “Available Environment Variables”, page 55 for
details), it is possible to forward a copy of the boot catalog through email, and to perform
a duplicate (mirror) backup of the boot catalog.
The Catalog Application appears in Time Navigator Administration Console with the
following icon:
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
53
The Catalog Application is attached to a server. It is catalog specific, i.e., it can back up
only one catalog. However, you may have several Catalog applications located in the
same catalog. In this way, you can centralize backups of different catalogs into one
catalog.
Possible Configuration of the Catalog Application
The Catalog Application can be configured for the following cases:
■
■
■
Catalog Application A: to back up its own catalog.
The Catalog Application is installed in the catalog it is backing up.
Catalog Application B: to back up a catalog located on the same server.
The Catalog Application is not installed in the catalog it is backing up, but in a catalog
belonging to the same server.
Catalog Application C: to back up a remote catalog.
The Catalog Application is not installed in the catalog it is backing up. It is installed
in a catalog belonging to a different server.
54
Backing up a Single Catalog
Backing up the Catalog is based on the same principles as other Time Navigator database
applications backup, such as Oracle, Sybase, Microsoft SQL Server, ... etc. A backup
selection is automatically set on the root meta-directory of the file tree at the application
creation.
This default backup selection has the following settings:
■
It is associated with all the backup strategies
■
No filter is set
■
No time phase is excluded
■
The data format is not compressed and not encoded
Once the application is created, you must define its environment variables and configure it
for automatic backups.
Configuring the Catalog Application backup consists in defining:
■
A backup strategy, to indicate the backup schedule.
Warning:
■
The creation of the boot catalog takes place once the backup job is complete.
As a result, if a postprocessing is defined via the backup strategy, it will run
prior to the creation of the boot catalog and thus it will not perform any
operation on the boot catalog.
A media pool, to indicate the backup location.
To set the Catalog Application environment variables
1.
Select the Catalog Application icon in the Network Area.
2.
Choose Platform-Properties. The following window will appear:
Chapter 2
3.
Catalog Management
55
Edit the fields of this interface as described in the following section, “Catalog
Application Creation Parameters”, page 55.
Catalog Application Creation Parameters
Host Name: Name of the host the application is connected to. Click on Host Name to select
another host.
Application Name: Name of the application you want to create. The application name can be
edited at a later date if needed without losing backups.
Warning:
Each application must be given a unique name.
User Name: Name of the user who has access to the application.
Password: Allows to provide a password and confirm it. Use of a password is optional.
Available Environment Variables
Warning:
If you do not remove the parenthesis, the variable will not be taken into
consideration.
56
Environment Variable
Name
Default
Value
Possible
Value
TINA_SDB_BOOT_HISTORY
7
any integer
Maximum number of boot catalogs to
keep. 0 means all files are kept.
TINA_SDB_CATALOG
Current
catalog name
Catalog
name
Name of the catalog to be backed up.
TINA_SDB_MAIL_TO
No default
value
Email
address
Address to send the boot catalog to,
e.g., [email protected].
TINA_SDB_MAIL_FROM
tina@
atempo.com
Email
address
Address from which the boot catalog is
sent.
TINA_SDB_HOME
$TINA_HOME
Path
Catalog backup Binaries installation
directory.
TINA_SDB_LIB_PATH
(Unix only)
No default
value
Path
Time Navigator libraries path.
TINA_SDB_MAIL_SERVER
No default
value
Server name
Name of the SMTP mail server.
TINA_SDB_MIRROR_PATH
No default
value
Path
Duplicate boot catalog destination
directory.
Note: on Windows platforms, due to
permissions issues, the boot catalog
cannot be located on a mapped network
drive.
TINA_SDB_RECOVER
Yes
Yes, No
Restores the catalog backup and
launches a tina_init
TINA_SDB_RESTORE_PAT
H
$TINA_HOME
/Bin
Path
Catalog restore path if
TINA_SDB_SAVE_EVENTS
Yes
Yes, No
Specifies whether the events and
parameters files are backed up during
catalog backup
TINA_SDB_SAVE_HISTORY
3
any integer
Maximum number of full backup disk
copies to keep. 0 means all files are
kept.
Description
TINA_SDB_RECOVER = no
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
57
Name
Default
Value
Possible
Value
TINA_SDB_SAVE_PATH
No default
value
Path
Full backup disk copy destination
directory. Define this variable if you
want a disk backup in addition to the
media backup.
Note: on Windows platforms, due to
permissions issues, the catalog disk
backup cannot be located on a mapped
network drive.
TINA_SDB_SERVICE_NAM
E
Current
Time Naviga
tor service
name
Service
name
Service name of the catalog to back up.
Set this variable to back up a catalog
other than the current catalog.
TINA_SDB_SKIP_INDEX
No
Yes, No
Set this variable to Yes if you do not
want to back up indexes. By default,
indexes are backed up by the Catalog
application.
Description
Environment variables can also be edited via Time Navigator Restore & Archive
Manager.
Open the Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager corresponding to the application that you
need to edit variables for. Open the meta-tree and the Information directory. A list of
Information icons appears displaying all the variables that are available for the application.
The variables are represented in the following format:
VARIABLE_NAME = “value”
The color bar on the left identifies the variable status:
Color
Status
Gray
Variable not defined by the user:
- Variable not set in the environment
-or- Variable set by default, without the user defining it
Green
Variable set in the environment
Orange
- Optional variable whose value is incorrect
-or- Variable defined by the user while not supported by Time Navigator
Red
Mandatory variable whose value is incorrect
58
Note
For some applications, it is mandatory to edit the TINA_APP_LIB_PATH environment variable. The environment variable must be edited via the
Time Navigator Administration Console when creating the application in
Time Navigator. This variable is needed for Time Navigator to connect to the
application.
Editing an environment variable in the Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager
1.
Make sure that the user connected to the Time Navigator Restore & Archive
Manager is granted the General Tasks and Platforms rights (Administration tab in the
Access Control window).
☞
For more information on user’s access rights, see the Time Navigator Administration Guide.
2.
Select the variable and choose Tree-Selection-Properties.
The Properties window appears.
3.
Add or modify the value of the variable.
4.
Click on OK to immediately update the environment.
The new value is displayed in the tree.
If you assign an incorrect value to a variable, a red or orange icon (depending on the
severity) appears in the tree, followed by an error message. You can still access the list
of variables and modify the incorrect value with the procedure above.
Information on environment variables
Select the variable and choose Tree-Selection-Help to display information about the variable.
The Help window contains the variable description, the possible values and the default
value, if any.
Note
It is possible to copy and paste text from the Help window to the Properties
window.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
59
Configuring the Catalog Application
To configure the catalog application
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, create a media pool. See “Creating
a Media Pool”, page 196 for details.
2.
Create a backup strategy. See “Creating a Backup Strategy”, page 301 for details.
Choose times and frequency for the catalog application backup. There is no
distinction between full and incremental backups, i.e., whether you schedule full or
incremental backups, all backups will be full.
Note:
Atempo recommends backing up the catalog daily, once the last backup job
has been completed.
3.
Select a media pool.
4.
To trigger manual backups, choose Backup-Strategy-Full Session Now, or right click on
the strategy letter below the application icon and select Full Session Now.
Viewing the Catalog Application Content
You may use Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager to view the content of the
catalog backup. It will show you all the boot catalog files and various other information.
To view the Catalog Application contents
1.
Select the Catalog Application icon.
2.
Choose Platform-Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager,
Tip:
You can also right click on the Catalog Application icon and select
Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. The following window
appears.
60
Catalog Application Contents
■
■
■
The Information directory contains details concerning the catalog and the environment
variables.
The Boot catalog directory contains the boot catalog files as well as the value of the
environment variables defining the directory path and history.
The Catalog save on disk directory contains the catalog backup disk copies, if any, as
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
61
well as the value of the environment variables defining the directory path and history.
Warning:
■
You must define the TINA_SDB_SAVE_PATH environment variable to
use this feature.
The Configuration directory contains the Time Navigator Adm and Conf directories and
allows to back up their contents. Since the Adm directory contains all the
Time Navigator events, it could be quite voluminous. It is thus recommended to
define a backup selection on the Adm directory using the same strategies as the backup
selection set at the root of the application, with the Compressed option enabled. Use
filters to exclude the Adm directory from the root backup (see “Filter Syntax”,
page 347).
If you do not want to back up the events, set the TINA_SDB_SAVE_EVENTS
environment variable to no.
For more information about the events and parameters files, see the Time Navigator
Administration Guide and the Time Navigator Installation Guide.
■
■
The Index directory contains the indexes allowing to perform advanced search of
backed up objects, for instance x2k_index if you are using the MS Exchange Single
Object Restore feature.
The Mirror boot catalog directory contains the mirror boot catalog files, if any, as well
as the value of the environment variables defining the directory path and history.
Warning:
■
You must define the TINA_SDB_MIRROR_PATH environment variable
to use this feature.
The catalog backup files.
62
Backing up Several Catalogs on the same Server
You have the option through a single catalog to back up other catalogs located on the same
server. To do so, you must create as many catalog applications as there are catalogs to be
backed up, and make sure you define the appropriat e environment variables.
Note:
When you back up another catalog on the same server, Time Navigator does not
create a boot catalog and does not display all the directories in Time Navigator
Restore & Archive Manager.
To back up other catalogs on the same server
1.
Select the server icon in the Network Area.
2.
Choose Platform-New-Application.
3.
Select Catalog in the Application Type window. The New Application window appears.
4.
Fill in the fields and define at least the following environment variables. The value of
the variables must be that of the catalog to back up:
Mandatory Variables:
TINA_SDB_CATALOG
Optional Variables:
The following variables need to be set only if their value for the catalog to back up is
different from the value for the catalog performing the backup:
TINA_SDB_HOME
TINA_SDB_SERVICE_NAME
TINA_SDB_LIB_PATH (Unix only)
Repeat the operation until each catalog you want to back up has its own Catalog
Application.
5.
Configure each application for backups. See “To configure the catalog
application”, page 59 for details.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
63
Backing up a Remote Catalog
It is possible through a single catalog to back up a catalog located on a different server.
Note:
When you back up a remote catalog, Time Navigator does not create a boot
catalog and does not display all the directories in Time Navigator Restore &
Archive Manager.
To back up a remote catalog
1.
Select the remote catalog host icon in the Network Area.
2.
Choose Platform-New-Application.
3.
Select Catalog in the Application type window. The New Application window will
appear.
4.
Fill in the fields and define at least the following environment variables. The value of
the variables must be that of the catalog to back up:
Mandatory Variables:
TINA_SDB_CATALOG
Optional Variables:
The following variables need to be set only if their value for the catalog to back up is
different from the value for the catalog performing the backup:
TINA_SDB_HOME
TINA_SDB_LIB_PATH (Unix only)
5.
Repeat the operation until each catalog you want to back up has its own Catalog
Application.
6.
Configure the application for automatic backup. See “To configure the catalog
application”, page 59 for details.
64
Restoring the Catalog
The restore procedure will vary depending on the way you have been using the Catalog
Application, i.e., to back up the current catalog, another catalog on the same server or a
remote catalog.
Restoring a catalog involves two steps: restoring the backed up catalog file, and recreating
the catalog. The extent of the restore depends on the Catalog Application configuration.
Closing Cartridges upon Restoring the Catalog
If you have performed some platform backups between the last catalog backup and the
moment the restore takes place, that data will not be restored since it is not included in the
catalog backup. However that data is written on cartridges, and can be retrieved via the
tina_cart command. Thus, you may want to close all cartridges to avoid overwriting that data
during future backups.
To do so, add the -close_cart option when you launch the tina_init command in the different
cases presented below.
Note:
Using this option closes all cartridges in the catalog. You will have to reopen them
manually if you want to reuse them.
In addition, if all cartridges are closed, make sure you have enough spare
cartridges in your library to handle the upcoming backups.
Restoring the Catalog with the Boot Catalog
These methods apply only in the case where the Catalog Application was used to back up
its own catalog, i.e., Catalog A in “Possible Configuration of the Catalog Application”,
page 53, since it is the only case where a boot catalog is created.
To restore a catalog via the boot catalog
■
In command line, enter the following:
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.<catalog_name>/Boot/ bootxxxx_<catalog_name>.cod
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
65
This command will restore your catalog and recreate it.
Note:
If your library has the capacity to read barcodes, the catalog restore process
automatically includes a barcode reinitialization.
If your library does not support barcodes, a read label reinitialization can
be included in the restore process if you use the following command:
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME$/Data.<catalog_name>/Boot/
bootxxxx_<catalog_name>.cod -force_reinit
This option is only available for non barcode libraries, and it will trigger a
reinitialization of all non barcode libraries associated to the catalog.
Examples
Command to restore the democat catalog:
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod
tina_init -boot \%TINA_HOME%\Data.democat\Boot\boot0023_democat.cod
Command to restore the democat catalog installed in a Time Navigator Library Sharing
Manager configuration:
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod -catalog_name
boot_democat
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod -catalog_name
boot_democat
tina_init -boot \%TINA_HOME%\Data.democat\Boot\
boot0023_democat.cod -catalog_name boot_democat
Command to restore the democat catalog and reinitialize the nonbarcode library
associated to democat:
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod -force_reinit
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod -force_reinit
boot0023_democat.cod -force_reinit
Command to restore the democat catalog and close all cartridges in the catalog:
66
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod -close_cart
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod -close_cart
boot0023_democat.cod -close_cart
To restore a catalog using a multiple writing media pool
If the media pool containing the primary catalog backup is not available and you want to use
a multiple writing media pool, proceed as follows:
1.
Perform a tina_init -file $TINA_HOME/<boot_catalog.cod> to build the boot catalog.
The name of the boot catalog is boot_tina (this step creates a Data.boot_tina file that you
will need to delete once the restore process is complete).
2.
Start the Time Navigator service or daemon.
3.
Open Time Navigator Administration Console for the newly created boot_tina
catalog.
4.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Library-Reinitialization-barcode.
5.
Open Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager for the boot_tina.cat Catalog
application. Restore the catalog backup file you need.
6.
Stop the Time Navigator service or execute a tina_stop to shut down the daemon.
7.
Perform a tina_init -file $TINA_HOME/<restored_catalog_file> to recreate your catalog.
8.
In the file:
$TINA_HOME/Conf/catalogs
$TINA_HOME/Conf/catalogs
%TINA_HOME%/Conf/catalogs.txt,
remove the 4 lines concerning the boot_tina catalog, and delete the Data.boot_tina
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
67
directory.
Note:
If your library has the capacity to read barcodes, the catalog restore process
automatically includes a barcode reinitialization.
If your library does not support barcodes, a read label reinitialization can
be included in the restore process if you use the following command:
tina_init -file $TINA_HOME/<restored_catalog_file>
-force_reinit
This option is only available for non barcode libraries, and it will trigger a
reinitialization of all non barcode libraries associated to the catalog.
Restoring Another Catalog
In this configuration, the value of the TINA_SDB_RECOVER environment variable will
determine whether the restore will include the reconstruction of the catalog or not. Only if
the variable is set to “yes” (default value), will the reconstruction take place.
To restore another catalog on the same server
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, select the Catalog Application icon for
the catalog to be restored and choose Platform-Time Navigator Restore & Archive
Manager.
or
Right click on the Catalog Application icon for the catalog to be restored and select
Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager.
2.
In Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, open the file tree until you see the
file representing your catalog.
3.
Right click on your catalog file and select Information.
4.
Select the version you want to restore and click on Synchronize.
5.
If TINA_SDB_RECOVER is set to Yes, Time Navigator restores your catalog file
and recreates your catalog. No further operation is required.
6.
If TINA_SDB_RECOVER is set to No, Time Navigator only restores the catalog
file. Once the restore is complete, enter the following, in command line:
tina_init -file <restored_catalog_path>
where the restored_catalog_path corresponds to the value of the
TINA_SDB_RESTORE_PATH variable followed by <catalog_name>.cod, for
68
instance: “/home/tina/Bin/newdoc.cod”.
Note:
If you are using a key that does not include the catalog name, you must add
a name for the restored catalog as a parameter in the tina_init command:
tina_init -file <restored_catalog_path> -catalog_name <restored_catalog_name>
See the Time Navigator Restore Guide for details concerning restore procedures.
Restoring the Catalog Configuration
When you restore the Adm or Conf configuration directory Time Navigator creates an
Adm.restored and a Conf.restored file. The catalog configuration restore procedure is
similar to that of any file system restore.
See the Time Navigator Restore Guide for details concerning restore procedures.
69
C H A P T E R
3
Platform Management
3
In this section you will find the necessary procedures to perform the following platform
related tasks:
■
“Creating a Platform”, page 74
■
“Setting Platform Preferences”, page 86
■
“Editing Platforms”, page 106
■
“Deleting Platforms”, page 108
■
“Managing Hosts Detected by Time Navigator”, page 110
■
“List Administration of Platforms”, page 111
70
About Platforms
The Platforms object represents the hosts and applications backed up by
Time Navigator. Host and application backup configuration and management are
centralized in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Hosts
Hosts are Time Navigator client machines; they represent the machines being backed
up. Authorized users can perform archiving on hosts. The following operating systems
are currently supported for hosts:
■
Windows
■
Unix
■
Mac OS X
■
NetWare
■
VMS
In addition to backing up, archiving and restoring the above client file systems,
Time Navigator provides the following features:
■
Time Navigator Disaster Recovery for Windows (Powered by WinPE)
■
Time Navigator for Cluster
See the compatibility guide on the Atempo site, www.atempo.com for details.
Applications
Applications include databases and application software. The applications currently
supported by Time Navigator are:
■
■
■
■
Time Navigator for DB2
Filesystem
The Filesystem application allows you to create a “clone” of the host the
application is attached to. This is very useful for creating additional backup
strategies on the host and for organizing data in a thematic way (e.g. according to
applications, departments, etc.). See “Filesystem Application”, page 637 for
details.
Time Navigator for Informix
List
The List application allows you to create and organize objects logically regardless
Chapter 3
Platform Management
71
of their actual physical location. See “List Application”, page 589 for details.
■
Time Navigator for Lotus Domino
■
Time Navigator for MS-Exchange
■
Time Navigator for MS-SharePoint Portal Server
■
Time Navigator for MS-SQL Server
■
Time Navigator for NDMP
■
NetDisk (the Net Disk application allows you to back up and restore
Windows 2000/2003 mapped network drives). See “Mapped Network Drives”,
page 627 for details.
■
Time Navigator for Oracle
■
Time Navigator for Sybase
■
System State
For information on these applications, see the corresponding Time Navigator
documentation.
The list of supported applications is subject to frequent changes. Please consult the
Time Navigator Compatibility Guide on the Atempo Web site: www.atempo.com for up-todate information.
For information on platform representation in Time Navigator Administration Console,
see “Platform Representation”, page 21.
Firewalls and Backup Masters
A Master is a machine designated to take on the backup process of another host. A
master is useful when the host does not have the tina_backup binaries installed, or when
the host cannot connect to the server, as for instance when the host is behind a firewall.
The master may be either the server itself, or another client machine. The
Time Navigator service or daemon must be running on the machine declared as the
backup master.
The following diagrams show the differences in the backup process with or without a
backup master. When a master is used, the tina_backup process runs on the master rather
than on the host, and the host does not have to initiate a connection toward the server as is not allowed when the host is protected by a firewall.
72
Backing up without a master
Backing up with a master
To assign a master to a host, see “Creating a Platform”, page 74.
Broken Connection during Backup
If the host is behind a firewall, an inactive connection between the server and the agent
may be broken by the firewall after few minutes, usually when a large file is being backed
up, and this may cause backups to fail. In that situation, it is recommended to modify the
TCP idle timeout at the operating system level to keep the connection alive much longer.
For more information on how to modify this TCP parameter on the different operating
systems, see “Appendix 3: TCP Parameter Modification”, page 651.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
73
Mobile Platforms
For machines such as laptop computers that are subject to being disconnected from the
network regularly, Time Navigator includes a Mobile Platform feature, applying to both
host and application. This preventsthe server from trying to connect to an absent
platform, and ensures that if the platform misses a scheduled backup, the backup will run
as soon as it is reconnected to the network.
To configure a mobile platform, see “Creating a Platform”, page 74, and “Backup
Strategy Window - Advanced Tab”, page 306.
74
Creating a Platform
Creating a Host
Upon installing Time Navigator, the setup automatically creates a host in
Time Navigator Administration Console for each client machine declared in the
catalog. In addition, you can:
■
Manually create a host at any point in time.
■
Automatically create a newly installed host detected by Time Navigator.
Note:
The number of hosts you can create is limited by the terms of your license.
To manually create a host
1.
Choose Platform-New-Host. The New Host window appears.
2.
Fill in all the Parameters as described in:
■
“Host Window - General Tab”, page 75.
■
“Host Window - Protocol Tab”, page 76
■
“Host Window - Advanced Tab”, page 77
■
“Host Window - SAN Connection Tab”, page 78
3.
Click on OK to validate the operation.
4.
Enable the host. See “Enabling Platforms”, page 84.
The new host is displayed in the Network area and its icon in the Icons area. It constitutes
a new group.
For more information on host representation in Time Navigator Administration
Console, see “Platform Representation”, page 21.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
75
Host Window - General Tab
Type: Type of the host to be selected from the drop-down list.
Host Name: Name of the new host. You must respect the case of the hostname. The name
must be the hostname known by the network and not an alias.
Note:
If you want to use aliases, you must declare the aliases in the hosts file. See
“Time Navigator Configuration Files” in the Time Navigator Installation
Guide for details.
Software Version: Time Navigator version installed on the host. When creating a host, the
version is "Unknown". The version is only available when editing the host. See “Editing
Hosts”, page 106 for more information.
Comment: Allows you to enter a comment concerning the host you are creating.
An error message is displayed if the host does not exist on the network or if it has already
been created.
76
Host Window - Protocol Tab
The protocol corresponding to the selected host type is automatically checked. For most
hosts, the protocol will be TiNa 4.1.0.
For a Network Appliance host, the protocol will be NDMP and you will be asked to
specify a User name and Password.
Note:
Some hosts support both TiNa and NDMP protocols.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
77
Host Window - Advanced Tab
Backup Master: Select this option if you want to specify a backup master for the created
host. The backup master can either be the Time Navigator server or another host on the
network. If a backup master if selected, the binary used during backup will be running
on the master rather than on the host. This option can be very useful if a firewall is
present or if no binaries can be installed on the host.
Select the Server option or select the Host option, and enter the name of the host in the
Master Name textbox.
An error message is displayed if the selected host cannot be a backup master.
Note:
The Backup Master option will automatically be selected if the host type you are
creating requires a backup master. By default, the server will be the backup
master.
For more information on the backup master, see “Firewalls and Backup Masters”,
page 71.
Storage Node: Check this box if the created host is a storage node.
For more information on Time Navigator in a SAN environment, see “Time Navigator
in SAN Environments”, page 419.
78
Do Not Report Host Unavailability: If your host is a mobile platform, i.e., a laptop computer
or a machine frequently disconnected from the network, check this box, to prevent
Time Navigator from issuing an alarm each time the host is not found on the network.
To configure mobile hosts, see also “Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab”,
page 306.
Secured Agent: Check this box if you want to encrypt and secure Time Navigator network
connections between this host and other Time Navigator agents.
Note:
To secure network connections, you must have created at least one certificate.
See the Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager guide for more
information.
Host Window - SAN Connection Tab
Fill in the fields of the SAN Connection tab if the host you are creating is part of a SAN
environment and if you have already created at least one shared drive in Time Navigator.
Add: Allows you to associate the host to drives in a SAN environment.
Remove: Allows you to disconnect the host from the drives in a SAN environment.
Device Descriptor: Allows you to enter the device descriptor for the host.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
79
For instance: docmac_DocLib
For instance: /dev/nst0
It represents the host SCSI address and must be entered in a cxbytzla format.
Enable connection: Allows you to connect the host to a drive in a SAN environment.
Disable connection: Allows you to disconnect the host from a drive in a SAN environment.
NDMP : This area provides information on the connected shared drives provided that the
drives communicate through NDMP: the drive Network Name, the User, its Password and
the NDMP Version.
For more information on Time Navigator in a SAN environment, see “Time Navigator
in SAN Environments”, page 419.
Creating a New Host Detected by Time Navigator
Time Navigator Server regularly polls the network in order to detect new machines
hosting Time Navigator. Such hosts consist of:
■
■
Hosts on which a Time Navigator service or daemon is running and that are
unknown to the catalog.
Hosts that are known to the catalog but whose operating system has changed.
To create a host detected by Time Navigator
1.
Check whether a host icon appears in the status bar of Time Navigator
Administration Console. The number next to the icon indicates the number of
hosts detected on the network. In the example below, 2 new hosts have been
detected.
2.
Choose Platform-New-Hosts from list. The New Discovered Hosts window appears.
80
3.
In the host list, select the hosts that you want to declare in the catalog and create
in the Network area.
4.
Click on New.
The Host Creation Progress window appears and indicates if the creation was
successful.
5.
Click on Close. The newly created host appears in the Network area.
If you want to disable the automatic host detection feature, you can set the tunable
"Disable Host Automatic Detection" (disable_host_auto_discovery).
If you want Time Navigator to systematically create detected hosts in the catalog without
notifying the user via the graphical interface, you can set the tunable "Automatic Creation
for Detected Hosts" (create_auto_discovered_host).
See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details.
New Discovered Hosts Window
Name: Name of the new host detected by Time Navigator
Type: Operating system of the host
Version: Time Navigator version detected on the host
Status: The status is New if the host has been detected but not processed. The status is
Ignored if you chose to discard this host from the current Time Navigator catalog.
DNS Name: Network name of the host.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
81
Marks the selected host(s) as Ignored. When marked as ignored, hosts disappear from the list.
If you want to display them again, check the Display hosts with "Ignored" status box.
Note:
Ignored host can be created in the catalog at a later stage if needed.
Delete the selected host(s) from the new host list.
Note:
Deleted hosts disappear from the host list but they will reappear as new each
time the machines are rebooted.
Display host with "ignored" status: Allows to display in the list the hosts that were marked as
Ignored.
New: Automatically creates the selected host(s) in the catalog.
Creating Applications
Just as you had to create a host per machine to be backed up, you must create an
application for each application to be backed up. The number of applications you can
create is limited by the terms of your license.
To create an application
1.
In the Network area, select the host where the application is installed.
2.
Choose Platform-New-Application. The list of the supported applications is displayed.
82
3.
Note:
Select an application in the list, then click on OK. The New Application Window
is displayed.
The fields appearing in this window varies according to the application you are
creating. The following screen is for an Oracle application.
Chapter 3
4.
Platform Management
83
Enter the name of the new application in the Application Name textbox. The
application name is the name given to the application backup folder.
The application name can be edited at a later date if needed without losing backups.
Warning:
5.
Each application must be given a different name.
Enter the application owner information in the Owner textbox. Click on Password to
enter a password and confirm it.
The owner is usually the operating system user who installed the application
software.
6.
Enter the access user information in the Access User textbox. Click on Access
Password to enter a password and confirm it.
7.
Enter the Environment Variables required for the application you are creating.
8.
9.
Enable the application. See “Enabling Platforms”, page 84.
For application specific information, see the guide corresponding to the application you
are creating, such as Time Navigator for Oracle, Time Navigator for NDMP, etc.
Creating Platform Groups
Platform groups allow you rapidly to define or modify backups common to several
platforms.
Backup strategies and backup selection modifications made to a platform will be applied
to all platforms in the group.
It is possible to:
■
Associate a new platform with a group.
■
Remove a platform from a group.
For information on creating a platform platform groups, see “Grouping Platforms”,
page 33.
For information on platform groups representation in Time Navigator Administration
Console, see “Icon Area”, page 28.
84
Enabling Platforms
When first created, a platform (host or application) is disabled. A platform must be
enabled to support a backup.
To enable a platform
1.
Choose Platform-Use-Enable-Host/Application. The list of disabled hosts/applications
appears.
2.
Select the platform to enable in the list or fill in the Search field to filter platforms
according to their names.
3.
■
■
■
Click on OK to validate.
Tip:
If you have only one platform to enable, you can also right click on the
platform icon and choose Enable.
If you have a lot of platforms to enable, it is recommended to use the
Platform-Use-Enable-Host/Application menu because it allows for platform
multiple selection.
The cross with an ocher background disappears from the host icon in the Network area.
The host icon is displayed with a green background in the Icons area.
Disabling Platforms
The disabled status indicates that no backup occurs on the platform. You can temporarily
disable a platform for the following reasons:
■
■
Maintenance. If you are disabling a host, it is recommended also to disable the
drives connected to it (see “Changing the Mode of the Drive”, page 182).
To avoid removing a platform from a group if you do not wish to back it up for a
Chapter 3
Platform Management
85
short period of time, etc.
Note:
Devices connected to a disabled host, can still be used, provided that the
tina_daemon process is active on the host.
To disable a platform
1.
Choose Platform-Use-Disable-Host/Application. The list of enabled hosts/applications
appears.
2.
Select the platform to disable in the list or fill in the Search field to filter platforms
according to their names.
3.
■
■
■
Tip:
If you have only one platform to disable, you can also right click on the
platform icon and choose Disable.
If you have a lot of platforms to disable, it is recommended to use the
Platform-Use-Disable-Host/Application menu because it allows for platform
multiple selection.
A cross with an ocher background is displayed on the host icon in the Network area.
The platform icon is displayed with an ocher background in the Icons area.
86
Setting Platform Preferences
Platform Preferences can be defined and edited via the Preferences Tool. They are
divided into the following categories:
■
“Tunables”, page 87
■
“Event Notification”, page 90
■
“Domain Filters”, page 96
■
“License”, page 99
■
“Services”, page 100
■
“Catalog”, page 101
■
“Help/Tutorial”, page 101
■
“Web Interfaces”, page 102
■
“Databases”, page 103
■
“Advanced Indexing”, page 104
■
“VMware”, page 105
Starting the Preferences Tool
The Preferences Tool can be started on any machine on the network if you are using
Time Navigator Administration Console, otherwise it is started on the local machine if
you are using the command mode for Unix or the Start menu for Windows.
To start the Preferences Tool
1.
Select the platform for which you want to set preferences in Time Navigator
Administration Console.
2.
Choose Platform-Set Preferences. The Preferences tool appears.
Chapter 3
Tip:
Platform Management
87
You can also use the tina_pref command on Unix and the Start-All Programs-Time
Navigator-Utilities-Preferences menu on Windows.
Tunables
Tunables are special parameters that modify Time Navigator behavior. They may be
used to tune the application to fit specific needs.
The Preferences tools allows you to:
■
Activate or disable a tunable
■
Set a tunable value
■
Choose the catalogs for which a tunable applies
88
■
Note:
Choose the binaries for which a tunable applies
For an exhaustive list of all the tunables, see the Time Navigator Tunables
guide.
When you set tunables via the Preferences tools, settings are recorded in the following
file:
%TINA_HOME%\Conf\parameters.txt
$TINA_HOME/Conf/parameters
There are two categories of tunables:
■
■
Note:
Category I: Basic tunables that can be used without help from Customer Services.
Category II: Advanced tunables that must be used with help from Customer
Services. Use them cautiously as an inconsiderate use may damage your
configuration and prevent Time Navigator from efficiently protecting your data.
The Time Navigator tunables are dynamic. No restarting of the
Time Navigator service is required. However, if you modify a tunable
impacting a graphical application, the application must be closed an opened
again for the new tunable to be taken into account. See the Time Navigator
Tunables Guide for details.
To set a tunable
1.
In the Preferences tool select Configuration-Tunables. The List of current tunables
appear.
2.
Click on New. The Tunable Selection window appears. It displays the list of all the
tunables available. To display the list of advanced tunables, check the Show
Advanced Tunables box. When you select a tunable, its description appears in the
right pane.
3.
Open a category and select a tunable in the list and click on OK. A tunable
information window appears.
4.
In the Value tab, enter the tunable value in the New Value field, and click on OK. The
default value is also displayed. Click on Reset to return to the default value.
Chapter 3
5.
Platform Management
89
In the Executables tab, check Choose Executables if you want to limit the use of the
tunable to specific binaries or if you want to assign different values to this tunable
for different executables. Select the executables you want in the list.
Note:
By default, if you do not select any executable, the tunable applies to all
executables.
If the executable you want to select does not appear in the list, click on New
Executable and enter the name of the executable.
6.
In the Catalogs tab, check Choose Catalogs if you want to limit the use of the tunable
to specific catalogs or if you want to assign different values to this tunable for
different catalogs. Select the catalogs you want in the list.
Note:
By default, if you do not select any catalog, the tunable applies to all
catalogs.
If the catalog you want to select does not appear in the list, click on New Catalog
and enter the name of the catalog.
7.
The new tunable appears in the Current Tunable List with its value, the binaries
and the catalogs chosen.
8.
Repeat this operation for all the tunables you want to define on the platform. If you
want to assign different values to the same tunables according to the binaries or
catalogs it applies to, you need to define it several times, for each value.
9.
Click on Apply if you want to apply your choices and keep the Preferences window
open, otherwise click on OK.
To modify the value of a tunable
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Configuration-Parameters. The List of current tunables
appears.
2.
Select the tunable that you need to modify and click on Properties . The Tunable
information window appears.
3.
Modify the Value, Executables and Catalogs tabs as needed. See “To set a
tunable”, page 88 for details.
4.
Click on OK to apply changes and close the Preferences window.
90
To remove a tunable
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Configuration-Parameters. The List of current tunables
appears.
2.
Select the tunable that you want to remove and click on Remove.
3.
Confirm your choice.
The tunable is removed from the tunable list.
4.
Click on OK to apply changes and close the Preferences window.
Event Notification
Time Navigator Event Viewer consists of all the logs generated by Time Navigator.
They are used to troubleshoot incidents that occur with any Time Navigator function
or process. They can be consulted either through Time Navigator Event Viewer or in
the file:
%TINA_HOME%\Adm\event.txt
$TINA_HOME/Adm/event
Events can be redirected towards external elements. You can specify the catalog, the
type of events you want to redirect, as well as the kind of information to be displayed
for each event. Using this Event Notification editor fills in the file:
%TINA_HOME%\Conf\logs.xml
$TINA_HOME/Conf/logs.xml
DTD and XSL are provided with the logs.xml file in the Conf directory:
■
■
The logs.dtd file can be used to check for the validity of the xml file.
The logs.xsl stylesheet can be used to view the contents of the logs.xml file via a
browser without using Time Navigator.
Warning:
It is highly recommended to use the Preferences tool to notify events. The
use of the Conf/logs.xml to notify events is not supported.
Several event notifications can be defined on the same Time Navigator Server.
To create an event notification:
1.
Select Event Notification in the tree structure of the Preferences tool. The list of
current notifications appears. It contains the names of event notifications that are
already set on your Time Navigator Server.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
91
2.
Click on New to define a notification. The Notification Parameters window appears.
Set the parameters in the tabs described below: The Destination, Name and Format
tabs are mandatory.
3.
Destination Tab
Mode: Specifies the output mode to be used. You must choose one of the following:
■
■
System Logs sends the output to the internal log system under Unix (syslog), VMS
(central operator) and Windows (Event Viewer).
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) sends the output to SNMP on Unix
and Windows.
SNMP Manager: specifies the SNMP manager machine which must have a daemon
receiving SNMP traps. This field is mandatory.
Community: specifies the listening groups. By default, listening groups are public.
This field is optional.
Trap Port: specifies the listening port of the SNMP daemon which receives traps.
By default, the listening port is snmp-trap (value equal to 162) and must be present
in the services file. This field is optional.
■
■
■
File sends the output to a file.
File Path: specifies the destination file path.
Click on Browse (...) to choose the destination file.
Standard Error Output sends the output to the standard error output of a command
entered on Unix and VMS.
Standard Output sends the output to the standard output of a command entered on
Unix and VMS.
■
Note:
Command sends the output to a command line or a script on Unix and Windows.
Command Path: specifies the absolute path of an executable or a script file.
Click on Browse (...) to provide the absolute path of an executable or a script file.
If several Time Navigator environments are present on the machine, you must
specify the following command line options to be able to use the "command"
output along with Time Navigator commands:
-tina <environment_name> and -tina_service_name <service_name>.
■
Console sends the output to the console on Unix (/dev/console), Windows
(Information window) and VMS (central operator).
On Windows, the information window is displayed on the screen as long as the
92
Time Navigator service is running or as long as you do not click on the OK button
to close it.
■
Email is used to send event information by electronic email.
For instance, you can send an email to the administrator each time a critical or
major alarm is issued.
SMTP Server: specifies the name of the SMTP server.
From: specifies the name of the email sender.
To: specifies the name of the recipient.
Cc: specifies the names of other recipients if any.
Subject: specifies the subject of the email.
Name Tab
Name: Name of the event notification that you are creating. By defalut, the name is
NOTIFICATION_<number>.
Comment: Description identifying the event notification.
Severity Tab
Notified Severity Levels: Types of severity levels that you want to notify.
Click on the column left of the Severity list to select the severity levels to notify.
■
Information: Message of general interest.
■
Accounting: Accounting concerning backups and archiving.
■
Debug: Diagnosis Help.
■
Warning: Warning with no important consequences.
■
Fatal: Fatal error causing the program exit.
■
Error: Serious error that might cause the program to exit.
■
Minor Alarm: Warning with no immediate consequences on processes.
■
Major Alarm: Warning with important consequences on one or several processes.
■
Critical Alarm: Warning with serious consequences on all processes.
Format Tab
Event File Format: specifies the private format of the event file. It enables you to create event
sub-files based on filters. The notified events can be viewed via Time Navigator Event
Viewer.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
93
Customized Format: specifies the types of information that you want to notify.
Click on the column left of the Format list to select the information types to notify.
■
Alarm Object Name: The name of the object with which the alarm is associated. If the
object is a library named takata_vls, the alarm object name will be takata_vls. Only
available when an alarm is notified.
■
Alarm Object Type: The type of the object with which the alarm is associated (drive,
library, host, application, job, etc.). Only available when an alarm is notified.
■
Process ID: The identification number of the process which has generated the event.
■
Job ID: The identification number of the job associated with the event.
■
Date: The date when the event occurred (emission date).
■
Logging Date: The date the event is recorded in the server event file.
■
Severity Short Name: The event severity level abbreviated with letters.
■
I for Info
W for Warning
m for minor alarm
A for Acct
E for Error
M for Major alarm
D for Debug
F for Fatal
C for Critical alarm
Severity Long Name: The event severity level. For having the list of severity levels,
see “Severity Tab”, page 92.
■
Catalog: The catalog associated with the event.
■
User Name: The name of the user associated with the event.
■
Host Name: The name of thehost associated with the event.
■
Server Name: The name of the catalog server associated with the event.
■
Program: The program associated with the event.
■
Function: The name of the function that has generated the event (debug
information).
■
Number: The internal identifier of the function (debug information).
■
Text: The message of the event.
Class Tab
Notified Classes: Types of classes that you want to notify.
Click on the column left of the Class list to select the class types to notify.
■
Standard: Standard events. No specific class is defined for these events.
94
■
Non Restored Object: Events related to an object restore error.
■
I/O Error: Events related to an input/output error on a drive or on a backup media.
■
Fuzzy Object: Events related to a fuzzy object, for instance an object modified while
backup was in progress or an incompletely backed up object.
■
Secure Event: Events related to security and compliance operations. See the
Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager guide for information on
security and compliance.
■
Non Uncompressed Object: Events related to objects that are restored but not
uncompressed.
■
End User: Events easily understandable designed to help the user in case of error
during Time Navigator execution.
Note:
The number of logs concerning fuzzy object encountered when a job is being
performed has been limited by default to 20, to avoid slowing down
performances. You can use the accounting_max_fuzzy_objects tunable to specify
how many fuzzy object logs should be kept in the event file (see the
Time Navigator Tunables guide for details.)
Filter Tab
Filters can be used to specify selection criteria when notifying event information. Enter
the name(s) of the objects you want to filter in the corresponding fields.
These fields accept lists. If you want to specify several names inside the same field, they
must be separated by a blank. They also accept wildcards (* to specify any character from
0 to n and ? to specify any single character).
If no filter is mentioned, all events are notified.
■
■
Catalog: The name of one or several catalogs.
Host Name: The name of one or several event sending machines (machines known
under this name in the catalog).
■
User Name: The name of one or several users.
■
Program: The name of one or several binaries (ex: tina_archive).
Chapter 3
Platform Management
95
Alarm Filter Tab
The Alarm Filter tab is only displayed when an alarm severity level is selected in the Severity
tab (minor, major or critical alarms).
Alarm filters can be used to specify selection criteria when notifying alarm information.
Enter the name(s) of the objects you want to filter in the corresponding fields.
These fields accept lists. If you want to specify several names inside the same field, they
must be separated by a blank. They also accept wildcards (* to specify any character from
0 to n and ? to specify any single character).
If no filter is mentioned, all alarms are notified.
■
Drive: The name of one or several drives.
■
Application: The name of one or several applications.
■
Library: The name of one or several libraries.
■
Alarm ID: One or several alarm identification numbers (ex: 30020).
To modify an event notification:
1.
current notifications appears.It contains the names of event notifications that are
2.
Select a notification in the list and click on Properties.
The Notification Parameters window appears.
Note:
If you have previously configured an event notification by manually
editing the logs text file, a default name is given to the event notification.
You can rename it and add a description so that it can be more easily
identified.
3.
Modify the parameters as needed. See “Event Notification”, page 90.
4.
To disable an event notification:
1.
96
2.
Select a notification in the list and click on Properties.
3.
Select the Name tab.
4.
Check Disable.
5.
Click on OK to validate the operation. The selected event notification is no longer
active.
To delete an event notification:
1.
2.
Select a notification in the list and click on Delete.
3.
Click on OK to validate the operation. The selected event notification is removed
from the list.
Domain Filters
Note:
Domain filtering concerns Time Navigator servers only, not agents.
Domain filtering allows the catalog’s administrator to define which administration
objects can be accessed by which machines or users declared in the domain. The objects
are:
■
Hosts
■
Media pools
■
Users
■
Applications
This filtering feature is enabled by the tunable Time Navigator Administration
Domain Filter (domain_filter). The tunable can have the following values:
■
host
This indicates that access control to the domain is at the host level. A list of host
is defined. Only the hosts defined in this list can access the domain and view the
objects belonging to this domain. In addition these hosts are the only hosts
appearing in the domain.
■
host_user
This indicates that a second level of access control is added, according to the user.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
97
A list of host and a list of users are defined. Access can only be granted for users
belonging to the list and connecting from a host defined in the list. In addition the
hosts and users defined in the lists are the only ones appearing in the domain.
Note:
When you define a new domain in the Preferences, the tunable is automatically
set to the value host. To set it to the value host_user, you must edit the tunable
value as described in “Tunables”, page 87.
See also the Time Navigator Tunables guide for more information on tunables.
A domain filter consists of the following parameters:
In a domain, the parameter ...
defines ...
Privileged
The IP addresses of the machines allowed to
view all the objects of the catalog for all
domains. These machines cannot be viewed in
the domains, unless they are defined in it as
hosts.
Administration
The IP addresses of the domain’s administration
consoles. These machines can view all the
catalog objects in the domain they are
administering. They cannot be be viewed in the
domains, unless they are defined in it as hosts.
Hosts
The hosts allowed to access the domain and the
hosts that belong to the domain.
Pools
The media pools belonging to the domain.
Users
The users belonging to the domain, and, if the
user access control is activated (i.e., the tunable
domain_filter is set to host_user) the list of users
allowed to access the domain.
Application
The applications belonging to the domain.
Important notes and exceptions
1.
When the filtering is enabled, only the machines declared in the file can connect
to the catalog. This means that an undefined host cannot be backed up.
2.
The following objects are always accessible from every client of a catalog:
■
The Time Navigator Server
98
■
The drives and libraries, if the host to which they are connected is accessible
■
The user groups
■
The spare and lost+found media pools
3.
The Time Navigator Server has a privileged access to all the objects in all its
catalogs.
4.
When the filtering is enabled, the server host file must contain the information
required to correctly define all the clients which can connect to the catalogs,
especially concerning the machines’ DNS extensions. The server must be able to
link the network name sent by the client and the host name defined in the domain
filter.
5.
When the filtering is enabled and you want to create a new object in the catalog,
the domain must be updated prior to the object creation.
6.
When filtering is enabled, it may happen that connection is refused to an agent,
and a message "Access denied" appears in the Event Logs. The Event Logs will
also show the following details concerning the agent or user that was refused
access:
■
■
The Hostname (as it apears in the catalog)
The Network Alias (name of the machine as it is known on the network or
in the file etc/hosts)
■
The IP Address
■
The Name of the User that attempted to connect to the catalog
From this information, it should be possible to decide whether you wish to
authorize this agent to connect.
To configure a domain filter
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Configuration-Domain Filters and click on New. The
Domain Parameters Window appears.
2.
In the Name tab, provide:
■
A name for the filter, by default, the name is DomainN.
■
A comment to describe the filter. The comment is optional.
■
The name of the catalog where the domain filter is defined.
Click on Connection to get the hosts, pools, users and applications information
appear in the corresponding tabs.
Chapter 3
3.
Platform Management
99
In the Priviledged tab, click on New and provide the IP address of the machines
allowed to access all the objects in the catalog. Click on OK. Repeat this operation
for all concerned hosts.
Note:
These machines cannot be viewed from the domains, unless they are
defined in it as hosts.
4.
In the Administration tab, click on New and provide the IP address of the domain
administration consoles. Click on OK.
5.
In the Host tab, click on New and select the host allowed to access the domain and
to be included in the domain, from the list.
Click on OK.
6.
In the Pools tab, click on New and select the media pools to be included in the
domain from the list. Click on OK.
7.
In the Users tab, click on New and select the users to be included in the domain
from the list. Click on OK.
Note:
In addition, if you want to restrict access to the domain to the users you
define in this tab, you must set the value of the tunable domain_filters to
host_user. See “Tunables”, page 87 for details.
8.
In the Applications tab, click on New and select the applications to be included in the
domain, from the list. Click on OK.
9.
Click on OK to validate your choice and close the window.
License
Note:
Modifying the license concerns Time Navigator servers only, not agents.
The License preferences shows you the license mode you are currently using as well as
the license contents, and allows you to modify it.
If you are using an evaluation license, you can switch to using a local or remote license
server. If you are already using a license server, either local or remote, you cannot switch
to using an evaluation license.
100
To modify Time Navigator license mode
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Environment-License.
2.
To switch to using a local license server:
■
■
■
3.
■
Note:
Provide the path of the atempo.lic license file that you received by mail from
Atempo administrative services.
The Service button allows you to stop and start the Atempo License Manager
service.
To switch to using a remote license server:
■
4.
Check the option Use Local License Server.
Check the option Use Remote License Server.
Provide the name of the license server in the License Server Name field.
This is the name of the machine where the Atempo License Manager is
installed.
Click on OK to validate your choices and close the window.
See Time Navigator Installation Guide for details.
Services
Note:
Modifying services concerns Time Navigator servers only, not agents.
You can modify the TCP and UDP port numbers that you defined when installing
Time Navigator.
To modify Time Navigator Service parameters
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Environment-Services.
2.
Modify the port numbers as needed.
3.
On Unix machines, click on Search from Service Name to automatically select the TCP
and UDP port associated to the specified service in the etc\services file of the local
machine or NIS.
Chapter 3
4.
Platform Management
101
Click on OK to validate your choice.
Note:
See Time Navigator Installation Guide for details.
Note :
Catalog configuration concerns Time Navigator agents only, not servers.
Catalog
Catalog configuration allows to modify the list of catalogs that can back up the agent.
To modify the catalog list
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Environment--Catalog.
2.
Click on the catalogs to add them to the list of catalogs that will back up the agent.
3.
To update the list of detected catalogs, click on Refresh.
4.
If the catalog you want to add does not appear in the list, click on Add a Catalog and
provide the following information:
5.
■
Name of the server where the catalog to add is located
■
Name of the catalog to add
■
TCP and UDP ports to use to communicate with the server
Help/Tutorial
Note :
The Help/Tutorial preference concerns Time Navigator Unix servers only, not
Windows servers, and not agents.
For theses platforms, you can choose the browser to use to view the online help and
tutorials. In addition, if the setup program is unable to detect a default browser, you must
configure it with the Preferences tool.
To configure the browser to use to view the online help and tutorial
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Interfaces-Help/Tutorial.
102
2.
Check the Online Help option.
3.
Enter the path of the browser you want to use or click on the Browse button to select
it.
4.
Web Interfaces
Note:
Web interfaces configuration concerns Time Navigator servers only, not
agents.
The Web interfaces preferences allow you to specify whether you want to use Atempo
Web Server or another Web server to access Time Navigator Web Restore and Time
Navigator Web Supervision.
By default, an Apache server is installed along with Time Navigator, however this
server is not in service until you configure it.
To configure Atempo Web Server
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Interfaces-Web Interfaces.
2.
Check the option Activate Web Interfaces.
3.
Check the option Use Atempo Web Server.
4.
To use a Web Server other than Atempo Web Server
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Interfaces-Web Interfaces.
2.
Check the option Web.
3.
Check the option Use An Existing Web Server.
Chapter 3
4.
5.
Note:
Platform Management
103
Define the parameters as described in the following table.
Field
Description
Status
Perl Binary Absolute Path
Absolute path of the PERL executable. Must
Mandatory
contain the name of the executable. This path is
copied in the first line of the web interfaces perl
scripts.
HTTP Server Data Root Directory
Absolute path of the root of the data of the http Mandatory
server where the images of the web interfaces and
the online help will be copied.
CGI Script Directory
Absolute path of the directory containing the CGI Mandatory
scripts on the http server where the web
interfaces perl scripts will be copied.
SMTP Server Name
Name of the SMTP Server that will be used by Optional
the restore interface to send mails.
Time Navigator Web Restore only. A mail can
be sent for instance, to inform the user that the
restore is complete and provide an URL where
the user can view restore information.
See the Time Navigator Web Interfaces guide for details.
Databases
The databases parameters allow you to set the installation directory (Windows) or the
name of the administrator (Unix) for the following Time Navigator applications:
■
Sybase
■
DB2 V7
■
DB2 V8
To configure Time Navigator databases
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Components-Databases.
2.
Check the application for which you want to set the parameters.
3.
Enter the path of the installation directory or click on Browse to select it (Windows),
or enter the name of the administrator (Unix).
104
4.
Note:
See the Time Navigator for Sybase or Time Navigator for DB2 guides for
details.
Advanced Indexing
Note:
SER configuration concerns Time Navigator servers only, not agents.
Use the SER parameter to configure the Single Email Restore feature of the
Time Navigator for MS-Exchange application. This parameter lets you define the Path
of the index database.
To configure Time Navigator for MS-Exchange Single Email Restore feature
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Components-Email.
2.
Check Advanced Indexing Database.
3.
Enter the path where you want the indexing database to be located or click on
Browse to select a directory.
4.
Note:
See the Time Navigator for MS-Exchange guide for details.
NDMP
Note:
VMware configuration concerns Time Navigator Windows servers and agents
only, not Unix platforms.
This parameter allows you to configure the NDMP Data Center.
To configure NDMP Data Center
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Components-NDMP.
2.
Check the option Use NDMP Data Center.
Chapter 3
3.
The Configure button allows you to
4.
Note:
Platform Management
105
See the Time Navigator for NDMP guide for details.
VMware
Note:
VMware configuration concerns Time Navigator Windows servers and agents
only, not Unix platforms.
This parameter allows you to configure WMware for VCB.
To configure Time Navigator VMware for VCB Application
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Components-VMware.
2.
Check the VMware Configuration option.
3.
Enter the Name you want to give to the Configuration File. The extension .conf is
automatically appended to this name.
4.
Enter the Name of the Virtual Center (the machine in your VMware network that
handles administrative tasks).
5.
Enter the Name of the User of the Virtual Center, and his/her Password.
6.
Note:
See the Time Navigator for VMware with VCB guide for details.
106
Editing Platforms
Editing Hosts
Editing a host enables you to modify the following parameters:
■
The Type.
■
The Protocol.
■
The Advanced parameters.
■
The SAN parameters.
Editing a host also enables you to view the Time Navigator Software version that is
installed on the selected host.
To edit a host
1.
Select the host to edit in the Network area.
2.
Choose Platform-Properties. The Host Properties window is displayed.
3.
Modify the host settings.
Note:
4.
The Backup Master option cannot be deselected if the host type requires it.
Editing Applications
Editing an application enables you to modify the following parameters:
■
The Application Name.
■
The Username.
■
The Password.
■
The Environment Variables.
The hostname, to which the application is linked cannot be modified.
To edit an application
1.
Select the application to edit in the Network area.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
107
2.
Choose Platform-Properties. The Application Properties window is displayed.
3.
Modify the application settings: the application name, the username, the password
and the environment variables. See “Creating Applications”, page 81 for details.
4.
Disabling/Enabling Drive-Host connections
This feature allows you to temporarily disconnect host from a drive without affecting
other drive-host connections (especially in SAN systems, where a drive is accessed by
several storage nodes). See “Disabling/Enabling Drive-Host Connections”, page 430,
for details.
108
Deleting Platforms
Deleting a platform removes the platform from the network backed up by
Time Navigator. The backup strategies and selections associated with the platform are
lost and all the backed up files are removed from the catalog.
When deleting a host, you can create an archive folder carrying the name of the deleted
host (i.e., host.hostname). All backed up files are thus kept in the folder and can be
recovered from any other host. The folder belongs to the root or Administrator user.
When you delete a host, the devices connected to this host are also deleted.
Note:
The archive folder host.hostname uses media associated with the host strategies.
If the media have a recycling policy, the archive folder will be purged
progressively.
For more information on restoring archived files, see the Time Navigator Archiving
Server guide.
To delete a platform
1.
Select the platform to delete in the Network area.
2.
Choose Platform-Delete. The Delete Host/Application window appears. It contains
all the characteristics of the selected host/application.
Note:
3.
You cannot delete the server.
Click on Delete to delete the platform.
If it is a host, a dialog box asks you if you want to create an archive folder in order
to keep all backups or not. Indicate your choice by clicking on the corresponding
button.
The platform is removed from the Network area. You can no longer open
Chapter 3
Platform Management
109
Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager on this platform.
Note:
Deleting a platform may take a while if it contains a large number of files.
Note:
It is recommended to wait until the platform backups are finished, and to delete
its backup strategies before removing the platform from the network.
110
Managing Hosts Detected by Time Navigator
You can manage the list of detected hosts and decide what action is to be taken on each
host. Apart from creating the hosts in the Network area, you can:
■
■
Ignore the newly detected hosts so that they no longer appear as new. For example,
if the host is already known to another Time Navigator catalog and you do not
want to declare it in the working catalog.
Delete the newly detected hosts from the list. Deleted hosts will reappear as new
whenever the machine is rebooted.
To discard detected hosts
1.
Check whether a host icon appears in the status bar of Time Navigator
Administration Console. The number next to the icon indicates the number of
hosts detected on the network. In the example below, 2 new hosts have been
detected.
2.
Choose Platform-Nex-Hosts from list. The New Discovered Hosts window appears.
3.
In the host list, select the hosts that you want to discard permanently from the
working catalog and click on the arrow icon on the right.
Such hosts disappear from the host list. If you want to display them again, check
the Display hosts with "Ignored" status box. They will appear in the list with the Ignored
status. This allows to create them at a later stage if needed.
4.
Click on Cancel to close the window.
To delete detected hosts
1.
Choose Platform-New-Hosts from list. The New Discovered Hosts window appears.
2.
In the host list, select the hosts that you do not want to declare in the catalog now
and click on the cross icon on the right.
Such hosts disappear from the host list. They will reappear as new each time they
are rebooted.
3.
Click on Cancel to close the window.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
111
List Administration of Platforms
If you want to perform administrative tasks on a great number of platforms at once, you
can use the list of hosts or list of applications windows that allows you to perform a
variety of platform tasks.
Host List Window
Number of hosts: Total number of hosts appearing in the list.
Export: Allows to export the host list to a file.
Host Information
■
Status: Status of the host, either enabled or disabled.
■
Name: Name of the host as defined when the host was created.
■
Type: Operating system of the host.
■
Software Version: Version of Time Navigator installed on the host.
■
Comment: Comment concerning the host if you entered one when you created the
host.
112
■
Mobile: Indicates whether or not the host is a mobile platforms.
■
Storage Node: Indicates whether or not the host is a storage node.
■
Secured: Indicates whether or not the host is secured.
Note:
See the Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager guide for
details.
Properties: Opens the Host Properties window for a single selected host.
Tip:
You can also double click on a host in the list to open the Host Properties
window.
Modify Status: Opens the Host Status window to modify the Enabled/Disabled status for
all the selected hosts.
Modify Parameters: Opens the Host Parameters window to modify parameters for all the
selected hosts.
Modify Comment: Opens the Host Comment window to modify the comment of all the
selected hosts.
Delete: Allows to delete all the selected hosts.
Note:
A message box ask you if you want to create archive folders to archive the
hosts backup files.
Viewing Host Information
To view host information
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Host List. The Host
List window appears.
2.
Browse through the list and click on Close when you are done.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
113
Exporting the Host List
To export the host list
1.
2.
Click on Export, the Export window appears.
3.
Specify the export parameters as described in “Export Window”, page 214.
4.
Click on OK. The exported file is created in the location you specified.
5.
Click on Close in the Host List window when you are done.
Editing a Host
Note:
This feature can only be used to edit a single host at a time.
To edit a host
1.
2.
Select the host you want to edit and click on Properties. The Host Properties window
appears. Modify the parameters as needed and click on OK to apply the
modifications. See “Creating a Host”, page 74 for details.
3.
To edit another host, select it in the list and repeat step 2.
4.
Modifying the Host Status
To modify the host status
1.
2.
Select the hosts for which you want to change the status and click on Modify Status.
The Host Status window appears.
3.
Change the status and click on OK to apply the modification.
4.
114
Modifying Host Parameters
To modify host parameters
1.
2.
Select the hosts for which you want to modify parameters and click on Modify
Parameters. The Host Parameters window appears.
3.
Change the parameters as described in “Host Parameters Window”, page 114and
click on OK to validate your choice.
4.
Host Parameters Window
Modify Mobile Status: Check this box if you want to modify whether or not hosts are mobile
hosts.
Do not report Host Unavailability: This parameter must be checked if hosts are mobile.
Modify Storage Node Status: Check this box if you want to modify whether or not hosts are
storage nodes.
Storage Node: This parameter must be checked if hosts are storage nodes.
Modify Compliance Status: Check this box if you want to modify whether or not hosts are
secured.
Secured Agent: This parameter must be checked if hosts are secured hosts.
See “Host Window - Advanced Tab”, page 77 for details concerning these host
parameters.
Modifying the Host Comment
To modify host comment
1.
2.
Select the hosts for which you want to change or add a comment and click on Modify
Comment. The Host Comment window appears.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
3.
Enter a comment and click on OK to apply the comment to all selected hosts.
4.
115
Deleting Hosts
To delete hosts
1.
2.
Select the hosts you want to delete and click on Delete.
3.
A message box appears asking you if you want to create archive folders to archive
the hosts backup files. Click on Yes if you want to archive the contents of the
deleted hosts backup folders. Otherwise, click on No.
Note:
Archiving the hosts backup files will allow you to restore them should
you need to at a later date.
Application List Window
Number of Applications: Total number of applications appearing in the list.
116
Export: Allows to export the host list to a file.
Application Information
■
Status: Status of the application, either enabled or disabled.
■
Name: Name of the application as defined when the application was created.
■
Type: Type of the application.
■
Host: Name of the host to which the application is attached.
■
Software Version: Version of Time Navigator installed on the host.
■
Comment: Comment concerning the application if you entered one when you created
the application.
Properties: Opens the Application Properties window for the selected application.
Tip:
You can also double click on an application in the list to open the Application
Properties window.
Modify Status: Opens the Application Status window to modify the Enabled/Disabled status
for all the selected applications.
Modify Comment: Opens the Application Comment window to modify the comment of all
the selected applications.
Delete: Allows to delete all the selected applications.
Viewing Application Information
To view application information
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Application List. The
Application List window appears.
2.
Exporting the Application List
To export the application list
1.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Close in the Application List window when you are done.
117
Editing an Application
Note:
This feature can only be used to edit a single application at a time.
To edit an application
1.
2.
Select the application you want to edit and click on Properties. The Application
Properties window appears. Modify the parameters as needed and click on OK to
apply the modifications. See “Creating Applications”, page 81 for details.
3.
To edit another application, select it in the list and repeat step 2.
4.
Modifying the Application Status
To modify the application status
1.
2.
Select the applications for which you want to change the status and click on Modify
Status. The Application Status window appears.
3.
4.
Modifying Application Comment
To modify application comment
1.
118
2.
Select the applications for which you want to change or add a comment and click
on Modify Comment. The Application Comment window appears.
3.
Enter a comment and click on OK to apply the comment to all selected applications.
4.
Deleting Applications
To delete applications
1.
2.
Select the applications you want to delete and click on Delete.
3.
A message box appears asking you to confirm your choice. Click on Yes if you
want to delete the applications, otherwise, click on Cancel.
119
C H A P T E R
4
4
User and Access rights can be defined under the Security menu.
■
■
■
In order to define or modify default or personal access rights for Time Navigator
users, you must be logged in as the Time Navigator privileged user (the Security User Access Rights menu which you must use to perform this operation, only appears
when you are logged in as the privileged user).
Any user who has the right to access Time Navigator Administration Console
and manage user groups can: create a user and modify his password, create user
groups, associate users with a group, remove users from a group.
Any user can be declared as a Time Navigator user even if the user does not exist
at the operating system level.
120
About Users and Access Rights
All Time Navigator operations are associated with specific rights. User profiles can be
defined precisely to allow or restrict access to certain operations. There are three levels
of access which determine a user profile:
■
Access to platforms.
■
Access to backed up or archived files.
■
Access to the catalog and Time Navigator functionnalities.
Platform Access
Platform access is based upon rights defined at the operating system level. To be able to
see the contents of a platform in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, a user
must have the permission to access that platform. A login will thus be required each time
the user wants to display a platform in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager.
Backed up or Archived File Access
File access is based upon rights defined at the operating system level. In Time Navigator
Restore & Archive Manager, the file tree is displayed according to these rights, in the
past as well as the present.
■
The Unix root user can access all files.
■
The Windows 2000/2003 Administrator user can access all files.
■
The MAC OS X user with administration rights can access all files.
■
The NetWare admin user can access all files.
■
The VMS system user can access all files.
Catalog and Functionality Access
Rights to access functions are independent from operating system rights. They are
specific to Time Navigator, and are recorded in the catalog. Users access rights may
vary according to the type of user: the "privileged" user, users known to the catalog or
users unknown to the catalog.
When a user tries to connect to a catalog via one of the graphical interfaces, a login is
required. The user functionality access rights are then assigned for that session according
to the rights defined for that user.
Chapter 4
121
Privileged User
The Time Navigator privileged user name is defined by the administrator when a catalog
is created.
The privileged user is the only user allowed to define the access rights of other users.
Defining rights is performed via the User-Access menu. This menu is only available to the
privileged user and is hidden or dimmed for any other user.
By default, the privileged user has the rights to perform any operations except editing the
catalog or creating another catalog. Editing or creating a catalog can only be performed
by the root or Administrator user. The privileged user's rights cannot be modified and
he can be neither deleted nor removed from a user group. Changing the identity of a
catalog privileged user can only be performed by editing the catalog. The former
privileged user is then assigned default user rights.
Users Known to the Catalog
Users known to the catalog have been individually declared in the catalog. They may
have a password and they may have been assigned specific rights. Once a password is
declared for a user, that password is required each time the user wants to connect to the
catalog. If no specific rights have been defined for a known user, that user access is
limited to the default access right.
Users Unknown to the Catalog
By default, other users only have archiving and restoring rights (provided that they have
the necessary operating system access rights to the files they want to archive or restore).
They do not have the right to open Time Navigator Administration Console.
Some users may be granted the right to open Time Navigator Administration Console
and to manage user groups. They can create, edit, delete users (except the privileged
user) and user groups, move users to another groups, modify user passwords.
To declare users, define users rights and set paswords, see “User and Access Rights
Operations”, page 123.
System Users
Privileges need also to be defined for system users that have to issue Time Navigator
command lines.
For instance, the system user must be the root user (on Unix systems) or must have at
least the backup operator rights (on Windows systems) or administrator’s rights (Mac
OS X systems) to execute the tina_export command.
122
For more information on system user rights with command line, see the Time Navigator
For more information on how to add a system user in a user group, see “Editing a User”,
page 130.
User Groups
User groups are used to perform archiving, and to define personal access rights for users.
A user must belong to a group before he can be granted personal access rights.
Users belonging to a user group are authorized by the administrator to archive data with
the drives allocated to their group. When users need to label a cartridge, archive or
extract archives from a local archiving folder with Time Navigator Restore & Archive
Manager, they must choose one drive in the list of available drives allocated to their
group. The administrator thereby controls the drives a user has access to.
A user cannot belong to several groups at once but a user can be moved from one group
to another.
To create or edit a user group, see “Creating a User Group”, page 133 and “Editing a
User Group”, page 134.
For more information on local archive folders, see the Time Navigator Archiving
Server guide.
Chapter 4
123
User and Access Rights Operations
Defining Default Access Rights
Default access rights are granted to any user unknown to the catalog and to any user
known to the catalog who has not been granted personal rights.
To modify user default rights
1.
Use the privileged user login to connect to the catalog.
2.
Choose Security-User Access Rights-Default. The User Default Access Permissions
window appears.
3.
Click on the tab of the access rights category you want to modify and check the
access rights you want to grant to the default users. See “Defining Personal Access
Rights”, page 123 for details concerning the different access rights.
4.
Note:
In order to take your modifications into account, you must restart the
applications.
Defining Personal Access Rights
Just as you defined default rights for all users, you may define personal access rights for
specific users.
Note:
You can only grant personal rights to a Users Known to the Catalog.
To define user specific rights
1.
Use the privileged user login to connect to the catalog.
2.
Choose Security-User Access Rights-Personal. The list of users declared in
Time Navigator is displayed.
3.
Select a user in the list, and click on OK. The Access Control window appears. The
name of the selected user is displayed in the upper part of the window.
124
4.
Choose between:
■
Share Default Access Rights: Allows the selected user to share all the default
access rights.
■
Define Personal Access Rights: Allows to define customized access rights for the
selected user.
5.
Click on the tab of the access rights category you want to modify and check the
access rights you want to grant to the default users.
6.
For details concerning each type of rights, see:
7.
■
“Access Control Window - Administration Tab”, page 125
■
“Access Control Window - Media Tab”, page 126
■
“Access Control Window - Backup Tab”, page 127
■
“Access Control Window - Archive Tab”, page 127
■
“Access Control Window - Security Tab”, page 128
■
“Access Control Window - Other Tab”, page 128
Check Copy Default Access Rights if you want to apply all the access rights
currently defined as the default for the current tab.
Chapter 4
8.
Note:
125
In order to take your modifications into account, you must restart the
applications.
Access Control Window - Administration Tab
General Tasks: Allows to access a catalog in order to display its contents in
Time Navigator Administration Console and perform the following tasks:
■
■
Process alarms. If the user does not have the Administration right, the Alarms
window is reachable via Time Navigator Library Manager, but in a read-only
mode.
Process jobs via Time Navigator Job Manager. If the user does not have the
Administration right, he can only modify his own jobs.
Also allows to use administration objects (such as platforms, drives, libraries, media,
users, etc.).
Note:
To create, edit or delete objects, it is also necessary to have the access right to
the specific object.
Platforms: Allows to create, edit, delete platforms (hosts and applications) and to enable
or disable platforms.
Drives: Allows to create, edit, and delete manual or robotized drives.
Media Pools: Allows to create, edit, and delete media pools. Also allows to associate media
pools with drives.
Library: Allows to create, edit, and delete libraries. Allows also to associate drives with
a library in Time Navigator Administration Guide and define a cleaning slot via
Time Navigator Library Manager.
126
User Group Management: Allows to create, edit and delete users and user groups. Also
allows to associate drives with user groups.
Note:
If a user does not have this right but has the overall Administration right, he
will be able to change identity and modify his password.
Access Control Window - Media Tab
Allowed Cartridges area
■
All: Provides cartridge administrator rights. The user has complete access to all the
Time Navigator cartridges to perform cartridge operations.
■
Note:
■
User's Only: Allows the user to perform operations on his own cartridges only.
This level of allowed cartridge does not allow the user to duplicate cartridges.
This right is not required to give the user access to media pools during backup
or restore operations.
None: The user cannot perform any cartridge operations.
Mount Request Operator: Allows to perform requests to mount cartridges. Allows to have
access to Time Navigator Media Request Console. Allows to move cartridges within a
library (Time Navigator Library Manager). Allows to bring cartridges on/off line
(Time Navigator Library Manager). Allows to empty drives (Time Navigator
Administration Console and Time Navigator Library Manager).
Drive Use: Allows to perform all operations on drives (identifying contents, cleaning and
testing). Also allows to enable/disable drives.
Note:
The user must have the Drives permission defined in the Administration tab.
Library Use: Allows to reinitialize libraries and enable/disable slots.
Note:
The user must have the Library permission defined in the Administration tab.
Chapter 4
127
Access Control Window - Backup Tab
Allowed Strategies: Allows to use the selected backup strategy(ies) to perform a backup.
You must select at least one strategy.
Strategies: Allows to edit or delete backup strategies for all the platforms among the
strategies selected in Allowed Strategies above.
Backup Selections: Allows to create, edit or delete backup selections that are associated
with the strategies selected in Allowed strategies above.
Platform Use: Allows to start a backup only for the strategies that are selected in Allowed
Strategies above.
Restore Backed up Data: Allows to restore data.
Note:
Restore rights are dependent on the strategies selected in Allowed Strategies
above because you can only synchronize on the versions backed up by a
strategy you have access to.
Choose the Destination Directory: Allows to select a destination directory other than the
original directory when restoring data.
On Demand Backup (start and stop): Allows the end-user to launch On Demand Backups from
agent hosts, and to cancel On Demand Backups already in progress.
Access Control Window - Archive Tab
Archiving Allowed: Allows to use the Time Navigator archive functionality.
Note:
If the access right is not granted, no archive operation is available.
Archive Administrator: Gives the user archive administrator rights. The user has access to
all the Time Navigator folders and archives.
Create Archive Folders: Allows to create archive folders.
Edit Folders: Allows to modify archive folders.
128
Delete Folders: Allows to delete archive folders.
View Folders: Allows to view archive folders.
Restore Archives: Allows to restore archives.
Archive Files: Allows to archive data.
Create Archives: Allows to create archives.
Edit Archives: Allows to modify archives.
Delete Archives:
Allows to delete archives.
Access Control Window - Security Tab
Certificates (create, import, delete): Allows to manage certificates to secure backup and
restore operations.
Security Templates (create, delete): Allows to manage security templates.
Rules (create, delete):
Allows to manage security rules.
Access Control Window - Other Tab
Run Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager: Allows to start Time Navigator Restore &
Archive Manager.
Connect to any Platform via Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager: Allows to view the file
tree of a platform (host or application).
Open Backup Folders: Allows to view the backup folder of another platform (host or
application) in the past.
Choose Working Strategy via Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager: Allows to
view, in the file tree, the objects backed up by a strategy. This right is automatically
selected depending on the number of strategies chosen in the Allowed Strategies as
defined in the Backup tab.
Forbidden Menus
■
Hidden: The user only views the menus he has access to.
Chapter 4
■
129
Dimmed: The user views all the menus but the ones he cannot use are dimmed.
Creating a User
Creating users consists in declaring them in the Time Navigator catalog. The users can
either be known to the machine operating system or not. Users specific to
Time Navigator can be created in order to enhance catalog security. You may grant
specific access rights to the users you create. See “Defining Personal Access Rights”,
To create a user
1.
Use a login that allows for User Group Management to connect to the catalog.
2.
Choose Security-User-New. The New User window appears.
3.
Enter a name for the user or click on User Name to select from the list of operating
system users.You can use the following characters:
■
Any letter (the user name is not case sensitive).
■
■
Underscore “_”.
■
Backslash "\".
Note:
Warning:
The user name cannot be modified at a later stage.
On Windows machine, the domain name is taken into account when
identifying Time Navigator catalog users: the user DOMAIN\userX
is not the same user as userX.
130
4.
Click on Password to define and confirm a password, if needed. The password uses
alphanumeric characters.
5.
Validate the password in the Confirm textbox.
6.
Click on Group to associate the user with a user group. The list of the user groups
available in Time Navigator appears. Select a group in the list, then click on OK.
Note:
7.
A user must belong to a group. Even if you have not yet created any
group in Time Navigator, the system group is available by default.
Tip:
You can also create a user when you create or modify a user group using the
Security-User Group-New and Security-User Group-Properties menus. However, you
cannot use these menus to define a password for the new user. You must choose
the Security-User-Properties command to define a password if any. See “Creating
a User Group”, page 133 for details.
Editing a User
Editing a user allows you to modify the following settings:
■
■
The password (see “To define or modify the password of an existing user”,
page 131)
The group to which the user belongs to.
Note:
A user cannot belong to several groups at once, but he can be moved
from one group to another.
Note:
The privileged user can only belong to the system group which is
automatically created when a catalog is created. The group of the
privileged user cannot be changed.
To edit a user
1.
Chapter 4
131
2.
Choose Security-User-Properties. The User Selection window is displayed. It contains
all the users available in the active catalog.
3.
Select a user in the list, then click on OK. The User Properties window appears.
4.
Modify the user settings as described in “Creating a User”, page 129.
5.
Time Navigator automatically updates the User Group Properties window if you have
modified the group the user belongs to.
Deleting a User
Deleting a user from the Time Navigator catalog removes all his media, and therefore
all his archived files, from the catalog. The operation can be quite lengthy.
To delete a user
1.
2.
Choose Security-User-Delete. The User Selection window appears. It contains all the
users available in the active catalog.
3.
Select the user to be deleted in the list, then click on OK. A dialog box prompts
you to confirm your decision.
4.
Click on Yes to delete the user.
The deleted user is automatically removed from the group he belonged to.
Defining or Modifying a Password
Defining or modifying a password requires certain permission as shown below:
■
■
■
To modify the password of the privileged user, you must be logged in as the
privileged user.
To modify or define the password of any user (except the privileged user), the
catalog login must allow for User Group Management.
To modify or define the password of the user currently connected to the catalog
does not require any specific rights.
To define or modify the password of an existing user
1.
Use the login appropriate to the user type you want to edit.
2.
Choose Security-User-Properties. The User Selection window is displayed.
132
3.
Select the user you want to edit and click on OK.
4.
In the User Properties window, enter the new password, confirm it and click on OK.
You can use the following characters:
Tip:
■
Any letter.
■
■
Underscore “_”.
You also have the option to define a user’s password when you create the user.
See “To create a user”, page 129.
Changing the User Identity
You have the option of changing the current catalog user login without disconnecting and
reconnecting to the catalog. Changing identity is possible only if the new user has the
necessary rights to open Time Navigator Administration Console.
To change user identity
1.
Choose Security-Change Identity. The Catalog Login window appears.
2.
Enter the new username in the User textbox.
3.
Type the user password in the Password textbox.
4.
The identity of the new user appears in the status bar in the lower part of Time Navigator
Chapter 4
133
Creating a User Group
When you create a user, you must imperatively associate that user with a group. A default
group, "system" is present in the catalog. You may create additional groups as needed.
User groups are also necessary to perform archiving. User groups associate users with
drives. The users belonging to a group are allowed by the administrator to archive data on
the drives of their group.
Note :
A user cannot belong to several groups at once. However, a user can be moved
from one group to another.
To create a user group
1.
2.
Choose Security-User Group-New. The New User Group window is displayed.
3.
Enter the name of the new user group in the Group Name textbox
(ex: accounting).
4.
Add users to the group.
Type in a user name in the User texbox, then click on Add.
- or Click on Add to select users from the list of operating system or domain users (if a
domain has been defined).
■
If you enter the name of a user that does not exist, Time Navigator creates
the user.
134
■
If the user you enter already belongs to another group, Time Navigator asks
you if you want to change the group of that user.
Note:
■
Do not remove a user from his old group before adding him to the new
one. Otherwise the user will loose all his archives.
If you mistakenly add a user to the group, click on Remove to delete that user
from the group.
To define passwords for users, see “To define or modify the password of an
existing user”, page 131.
5.
Click on Add in the Drives area to associate a drive with the user group. The list of
drives available in Time Navigator is displayed. Select a drive in the list, then click
on OK.
If you mistakenly add a drive to the group, click on Remove to delete that drive from
the group.
6.
The created user group is automatically displayed in the User Groups tab of the Drive
Properties window with which it is associated.
Editing a User Group
Editing a user group allows you to modify the following settings:
■
The group name.
■
The users belonging to the group.
■
The drives associated with the group.
When editing a user group, a system user can be added to a Time Navigator user group
with the Add button. This button will display the users of the operating system or of the
entire domain if a domain has been defined. The system user will have to be added into a
group in order to give him privileges for Time Navigator operations, especially for
issuing command lines (ex: tina_export).
To edit a user group
1.
2.
Choose Security-User Group-Properties. The user group list appears.
Chapter 4
135
3.
Select a user group in the list, then click on OK. The User Group Properties window
appears.
4.
Add and/or Remove users and drives as described in “Creating a User Group”,
page 133.
5.
Time Navigator automatically updates the User Groups tab of the Drive Properties window
according to the modifications made in the Drives area.
Deleting a User Group
You cannot delete a user group that contains users. You must first remove the users from
the group, by moving them to another group for instance.
Removing a user from a group prevents him from accessing the drives associated with the
group and deletes all his media from the catalog, and therefore, all his archives. This
operation can be quite lengthy.
To delete a user group
1.
2.
Choose Security-User Group-Delete. The user group list appears.
3.
Select a user group in the list, then click on OK. A dialog box prompts you to
confirm your decision.
4.
Click on Yes to delete the user group.
The deleted user group is automatically removed from the User Groups tab of the Drive
Properties window with which it was associated.
136
137
C H A P T E R
5
5
This section describes all the objects you need to manipulate in order to manage your
media as well as the various operations that can be performed on these objects:
■
“About Devices”, page 137
■
“Initial Configuration of Devices in Time Navigator”, page 139
■
“Device Detection Wizard”, page 140
■
“Device Configuration Manager”, page 147
■
“Library Drive Position Test”, page 157
■
“Libraries”, page 159
■
“Drives”, page 167
■
“List Administration of Drives”, page 189
■
“Media Pools”, page 195
■
“Cartridges”, page 200
Note:
All the procedures shown in this section are available via Time Navigator
Administration Console. Be aware however, that many media operations can
also be performed via Time Navigator Library Manager. See
“Time Navigator Library Manager”, page 237 for details.
About Devices
The term Devices designates Libraries and Drives.
■
Libraries may be either
■
Physical peripherals that use tape cartridges or other media to store
138
Time Navigator Administration Guide for Mac OS XMicrosoft WindowsUnix
externalized data, providing an automated system to move these cartridges
into drives,
■
■
Virtual systems that emulate the physical structure on a hard disk, using files
to represent the cartridges. Time Navigator has a proprietary Virtual Library
System, managing access to the library files on disk directly.
Drives connected to the libraries to manage data transfer between the cartridges in
the library slots and the file systems of the protected computers.
Physical and virtual libraries and drives used for backup and restore of data with
Time Navigator need to be recognized and declared within it. This can be done
automatically or manually.
Time Navigator provides four interfaces to assist you with this process at various levels
of detail and expertise:
■
Device Detection Wizard: Detects and declares your libraries and drives automatically,
in a minimum of simple steps.
■
Device Configuration Manager: Detects your libraries and drives automatically, and
provides interfaces for you to edit defaults and alter configuration details before
deciding which devices to declare.
■
■
Library - New or Properties: Advanced setup of Libraries, particularly useful for setting
up Time Navigator Virtual Library Manager. Also needed for manual
configuration of libraries not recognized by Time Navigator.
Drive - New or Properties: Advanced setup of Drives and association with Libraries, for
cases where drives are not recognized by Time Navigator Device Detection.
Chapter 5
139
Initial Configuration of Devices in Time Navigator
The scenario described in this section occurs only once and presupposes the following:
■
■
■
You have physically installed your backup network hosts and devices.
You have installed a Time Navigator 4.2 server on a host, or upgraded a host to
4.2 from an earlier version of Time Navigator.
You are launching Time Navigator Administration Console for the first time on
a given environment.
Time Navigator detects that there are not yet any devices declared in your system. The
Administration Assistant window appears for the purpose of guiding you through the various
declaration options that are open to you:
Devices are essential to the running of Time Navigator for backup and restore
operations. Three options are available to you for handling them:
■
Discover and declare physical devices: This option launches the Device Detection Wizard.
It presupposes that there are physical or virtual devices already present in your
network.
■
Declare a Virtual Device for Backup to Disk (Atempo VLS): Atempo’s proprietary Virtual
Library System cannot be set up via the Device Detection Wizard or the Device
Configuration Manager. Selecting this option will launch a series of interfaces that
permit you to create and declare an Atempo VLS on your system.
■
Declare Devices Later: This option puts off the device declaration process and lets you
get on with something else. If you do not wish to set up your devices at this time,
you will be able to launch the other procedures from Time Navigator
Administration Console at a moment of your choice.
140
Device Detection Wizard
The Device Detection Wizard is a tool that scans selected hosts for the presence of connected
libraries and drives and discovers the parameters needed for them to be declared in
Time Navigator. It leads you step by step through configuring and declaring the devices
you want to use with your Time Navigator installation.
Warning:
Note:
Device detection must not be launched if there are any Time Navigator jobs
running. Please check in Time Navigator Job Manager that this is not the
case and cancel any unterminated jobs.
Software Controlled Libraries (such as ACSLS) and devices connected to an
NDMP filer are not detected by this Wizard.
To run the Device Detection Wizard
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, select the menu Devices -Device
Detection Wizard. Alternatively, if you wish to declare devices directly on a host,
right click the host icon and launch Device Discovery Wizard from the popup menu.
2.
The first screen that appears contains Pre-requisite Conditions for device declaration.
If you do not take this information into account, your device declaration may fail.
Please read the Pre-requisites carefully and make sure that you meet all the
conditions, then click on Next.
Chapter 5
3.
141
If you did not launch the Wizard directly from a selected host, the next window that
appears is Host Selection. Select here the hosts on which you want to launch the
automatic detection and declaration procedures.
The window supports multiple selection. To select several contiguous hosts, hold
the Shift key down as you point and click the cursor. To select disjointed hosts,
hold the CTRL key down as you point and click the cursor. Click on Next when
your selection is complete.
4.
The system may take a few minutes to detect all your devices. You will see a
progress bar while the process is running. Finally, the window below will appear.
142
This window lists all the physical and virtual drives and libraries detected on the
selected hosts in your system, with the parameters they need to be recognized by
Time Navigator. By default, all fully detected devices are selected To Declare. You
may remove a device from the selection by unchecking the box to the left of it.
Time Navigator creates a default name for each device based on its Serial ID and
Type. This is the name by which it will be known in the Time Navigator Catalog
and appear in the interfaces. To change this default name, highlight the device and
type a new name in the New Name box.
When the selection is as you wish, click on Next.
5.
If the Wizard has all the information it needs to declare the devices, the window
below will now appear. If everything is as you want it, simply click on Finish.
6.
The devices are detected and appear in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Chapter 5
143
If the Wizard needs more information
Sometimes the Wizard cannot auto-detect all the information it needs to declare a device
automatically. In this case, you may see one or more of the following dialog boxes during
the procedure. These will enable you manually to supply the missing parameters.
1.
If Time Navigator cannot find any devices on one or more of the hosts you
selected, the following window will appear.
144
2.
If Time Navigator cannot recognize a device that it has detected, you will see the
symbol ??? in the Serial ID column. In this case, depending on what information
is missing, you will be guided through the necessary steps for the device to be
recognized.
3.
The window below appears if Time Navigator was unable to detect the Type of a
library. It allows you to select the Vendor and Model of the library manually. Once
you have checked the box to the left of the vendor and highlighted the model, click
on Next.
4.
A similar window appears if Time Navigator was unable to detect the Type of a
drive. It allows you to select the Model of the drive manually. Once you have
checked the box to the left of the vendor and highlighted the model, click on Next.
Chapter 5
145
5.
The SAN Network Selection window (not shown) appears only when a SAN is
detected. The Wizard puts any device that should be in a SAN in a default SAN
labeled 01_. If this is your only SAN, you may change its name. If several SANs
are detected, then you must manually select which devices go on which SANs. You
may also create a new SAN in the SAN Network Selection window.
6.
If the Wizard finds drives but cannot determine in which library they belong, the
following window appears:
The Wizard tries to judge the most likely configuration. If this is correct, just click
146
on Next. Otherwise, manually select the associated library in the pull-down list, or
define the drive as Standalone.
Chapter 5
147
Device Configuration Manager
Like the Wizard, this interface automatically detects libraries and drives connected to your
network, but it is more powerful and flexible. It covers the whole range of cases of device
detection management. It gives you rapid access to a huge number of devices, including
VTLs and those on SAN configurations, and allows you to make certain modifications
to existing configurations. To access the Device Configuration Manager, select it in the Devices
menu.
To open the Device Configuration Manager
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, launch the menu Devices - Device
Configuration Manager, or right-click on a host and select Device Configuration Manager in
the pop-up menu.
Note:
2.
3.
Time Navigator automatically detects if a host is a storage node or has libraries
attached. If it is not, you will not see the Device Detection Wizard and Device
Configuration Manager items in the right-click pop-up menu for the host.
The first screen to appear is a warning message requesting you to ensure that the
pre-requisite conditions for a detection have been met:
■
Devices are connected, switched on and configured in the system.
■
No backup or restore activities are currently running on the selected hosts.
If you have launched the item from the Devices menu, rather than directly from a
host, the Storage Node Choice for Device Detection Windows appears.
Select the hosts you want to include in the Device Detection procedure. You can
select multiple contiguous nodes with CRTL+Shift and the mouse, or multiple
individual nodes with CTRL and the mouse.
148
4.
If a host you want to include is not on the list, and has been configured in the
current catalog in Time Navigator, the Add Storage Nodes to the List button will be
active. Click on this button to call up a list of configured hosts for selection.
Tip:
If the Add Storage Nodes ot the List button is inactive, it means that there are no
more hosts configured in this catalog of Time Navigator. To add more hosts,
launch the menu Platform - New - Host.
Similarly, you can remove hosts from the Device Detection by selecting them with
the mouse and clicking on the button Remove Storage Nodes from the List.
The detection process can take a few minutes. When it is complete, you will see the Device
List window:
■
Device List Window
Columns
Icon: The icon in the column at extreme left differentiates whether a detected device is a
Library
or Drive
.
Status: This is the status with regard to detection and declaration.
Chapter 5
■
Green: Devices already declared.
■
Yellow: These devices have been detected and are flagged to be declared.
■
■
149
Orange: These devices are declared but not detected. This could present a problem
- for example a device that has been physically removed from the network without
being deleted in Time Navigator.
Grey: All other devices, including ??? devices requiring more information before
they can be declared.
Type: This is the format of the library or drive: 4mm, 8mm, Optical, etc. The Type cannot
always be detected. If it is not, ??? will appear in this column and you will have to select
it manually. If the Type is not provided, the device cannot be declared.
Some Types are not yet supported by Time Navigator (i.e. not present in the
Compatibility Guide). Unrecognized libraries are classed as Generic by default. Drives
cannot be Generic. The Type must be entered manually if it is not detected.
Serial Number: The serial number of the device, as detected. If the device cannot be
detected, this will read ???.
Name: This is the name by which the device will be known in the Time Navigator
Catalog and called for backup and restore operations. A default name, made up from the
type and the serial number, is provided, but it can be changed.
Descriptor: The form of the Device Descriptor depends on the Operating System.
■
■
: The rule is: c(port number)b(bus number)t(target number)l(lun
number) Example: c1b0t0l0.
: Path of the Special file in the /dev/directory for which the no rewind
option has been set, for example, /dev/nstØ. The user must know this path.
: Drives or tapes q0...n, libraries qc0...n.
■
Host: The name of the host on which the device has been detected (if you have run
detection on multiple hosts). If a device is connected to more than one host, it will appear
several times in the list, each connection on a separate line, all with the same serial
number. For example, a device on a SAN can be seen by several hosts or storage nodes.
When one of the lines is selected, the others show up highlighted in white.
Connections: The device can either be connected directly to a host or it can be connected
to a SAN.
■
When a single device is seen simultaneously by more than one host, it is
automatically listed as being on a SAN.
150
■
If it is detected as being on a SAN, it also appears as connected to the SAN.
Library: This column describes to which library a drive is associated. It will only show
information on lines concerning drives and will be blank for libraries.
Position: This column concerns drives only and will be blank for libraries. It designates
the position of the drive within the library (also called index). The first position is 0.
Number of Drives: This column concerns libraries only and details how many drives are in
the detected library.
Product Name: The name and model as coded in the firmware of the product (the product
ID). If the Product Name is not detected, the Type also cannot be detected and the device
cannot be declared.
Buttons
Select New Hosts for Device Detection: Brings up the interface for selection of hosts on which
to run the Device Detection process.
Properties: Calls up the Properties Window, allowing you to modify device parameters such
as name, or manually to enter information needed to declare devices that have not been
completely detected. See “Properties Window”, page 151.
Note:
Double-clicking on the line of a device has the same effect as clicking on this
button.
To Declare: Prepares the detected device to be declared (its status line should turn yellow).
Library Split: This button allows you to split a single library into several logical libraries.
The procedure is described in detail in the section “Library Split Definition”, page 152.
When a library is split, its icon changes to:
Reinitialize: This button returns the selected device to the configuration it had just after the
detection process terminated. This is useful if you wish to cancel your edits on a given
device without having to re-run the detection process on the entire host.
Chapter 5
151
Merge Two Identical Connections: This button permits handling of cases in which two
connections appear, or which one is detected but not declared (without a serial number
or ???), and the other declared but not detected, but in reality they represent the same
connection. When you select both items, the button becomes active and lets you merge
the two connections into a single one.
Associate with a Single Physical Drive: This button permits handling of a case in which a single
drive is attached to two separate hosts, and appears in the list as two unidentified drives
(no serial number or ???). If the user knows that the two items represent the same drive,
this button allows the two drives to be declared as a single drive on a SAN.
Apply: Declares all the devices that have been flagged for declaration.
Close: Exits the Device Configuration Manager.
Properties Window
This window appears when you double click on the line of a device, or click on the
Properties button, in the Device Configuration Manager. It allows you specify configuration
parameters manually for any device that was incompletely or not detected (devices
labeled ???), or change the default name of a detected device prior to its declaration.
General Area:
■
To Declare: Check this box if the device has been parametered as needed and you
want it to be declared when the Apply process is next run.
152
■
Name: This is the name by which the device will be known in the Time Navigator
Catalog and called for backup and restore operations. If you do not like the
provided default name, made up from the type and the serial number, you can
change here.
■
Type: This is the format of the library or drive: 4mm, 8mm, Optical, etc. If the
Type could not be detected (i.e. ??? in the Type column in the Device Configuration
Manager), you will have to select it manually. Click on the Browse button to call up
a list of all supported Types. If you do not see the required Type, select Generic.
Drive Area
■
■
■
■
The settings in this frame are specific to drives:
Connection: This can be Direct if the drive is connected directly to a library, or SAN
if it is connected to a storage node.
Library: Select the library with which the drive is associated in the pull-down list.
The drive can also be a Standalone.
Position: The slot placing of the drive in the library.
Library Split Definition
When you select a library in the Device List Window, and click on the Library Split button, a
series of windows appears allowing you to configure the split.
To configure a Libary Split from the Device Configuration Manager
1.
The Library Split Definition lets you determine the number of splits.
Chapter 5
153
The default, when you open the window, is two splits. This can be changed in the
Number of Splits field. The splits then appear in the box underneath. They take the
name of the library followed by _1 to _n, where n is the number of splits.
2.
Select one of the splits and click on the Split Properties button to configure the drives
and slots in that split. The Drive Choice for Library Split Window appears:
154
3.
Click on the button Add drives in split to call up the Drive Choice window, pictured
below. Here you have a list of all the drives configured on the Library you are
splitting. Select the drives you wish to include in the split. You can do multiple
selections by holding down the Shift key as you click with the mouse from the first
to the last element in your selection, or select all with the CTRL+A key
combination. Click on OK when you have finished.
4.
Click on the button Add slots in split to assign slot numbers to the split. The Slot
Choice window appears. It lists all the slots available in the Library. You can make
multiple selections by holding down the Shift key as you highlight with the mouse,
or select all with the CTRL+A key combination. Once a range of slot numbers have
been assigned to a given split, they disappear from this list so that they cannot be
accidentally assigned to another split. Click on OK when you have made your
selection.
Chapter 5
155
5.
The drives and slots you selected now appear in the Split Properties window that we
saw earlier. You can modify this configuration, if necessary, using the buttons to
add and remove drives and slots, or click on OK to validate it.
6.
Continue the configuration of the other splits in the library by selecting each in
turn and launching the Split Properties window on it. When all the splits have been
configured, the configuration will appear in the lower part of the Library Split
Definition window, as pictured below:
In the line at the bottom, each pair of parentheses represents a split. The numbers
ahead of the pipe symbol (|) are the drives assigned to the split, while the numbers
156
after the pipe represent the slot numbers. For example, the second pair of
parentheses in our illustration, (0,1|11,12,13), shows that two drives, and slot
numbers 11 through 13, have been assigned to the split dev_JGE51A0025_2.
Click on OK to apply the split to the Library. In the “Device List Window”, page 148
window the library will display all the splits and the icon will have changed to the
Split Libray icon.
Chapter 5
157
Library Drive Position Test
This operation consists in mounting a cartridge through each of the drives in a library in
order to calculate their position, also known as their logical index.
■
■
This is useful in cases where a library is unrecognized (i.e. it displays as ??? after
the Device Detection has been run, implying that no serialization method has been
detected for its drives), and has had to be declared manually. In such cases, the
serial numbers and positions of the drives within the library have not been retrieved
automatically.
Test Drive Position is also useful when a library has been split and the drives need to
be reindexed.
To use the Drive Position Test feature
■
■
Drivers for the Library and drives must be installed and configured.
Each drive in the Library must have been declared in Time Navigator and
associated with the Library.
■
Each declared drive in the library must be in Maintenance mode.
■
There must be at least one data cartridge in the library slot.
■
The cleaning cartridge must be defined in the cleaning slot.
Note:
1.
In multi-catalog environments, the Test must be run separately for every
catalog, since when libraries are split and shared over several catalogs, the
drive positions are not necessarily the same in the different splits.
To launch the drive position test on a library, select the library in Time Navigator
Administration Console, then run the menu Devices - Library - Operations - Test Drive
Position. The window below appears:
158
2.
When you are sure that the preconditions have been met, click on the button Start
Library Positions Learn Operation.
3.
The operation can take a while. There is no graphical display associated with it.
When the learn is finished, the window changes and displays a Close button. Click
on this to finish and exit.
Chapter 5
159
Libraries
About Libraries
Time Navigator distinguishes between several different kinds of libraries, depending on
the protocols used to manage them and on their physical architecture.
■
Traditional physical Libraries are devices using the SCSI protocol to control the
mounting and unmounting of cartridges in robotized drives. A device descriptor
designates the SCSI parameters of the configuration. These libraries consist of:
■
■
■
■
One or several drives.
Slots (from a few to several hundred). The library can contain as many
cartridges as it contains slots.
Optionally, one or several mailboxes which are used for adding or removing
cartridges from the library.
Software Controlled Libraries, having more than around 600 slots, are too large to be
managed via the SCSI protocol. An extra software layer is added to interface
between the library and Time Navigator. Time Navigator dialogues with the
software rather than directly via SCSI with the device itself. Hence they do not
have a device descriptor, but are configured by setting parameters in the software.
■
Virtual Libraries
■
■
These are emulations on disk of the traditional SCSI protocol libraries. They
are configured in the same way as physical libraries, and require a device
descriptor, except for one case:
Atempo’s proprietary Virtual Library System must be set up manually using its
own interface. This is covered in a separate chapter of this guide. See
“Backup to Disk with Virtual Library System”, page 531.
Library Representation
Libraries are displayed in the Network area of Time Navigator Administration Console.
They appear between the host they are attached to, and the drives associated with them.
The icons vary according to whether the library is:
■
Physical or Software Controlled (a library with its door open):
160
■
A Virtual SCSI Library other than the Atempo VLS (no door)
■
An Atempo Virtual Library (includes the Atempo logo)
■
Under the library’s name, a second information bar specifies the type of library
(within the range of types supported by Atempo from the vendor.)
For more information on library representation in Time Navigator Administration
Console, see “Network Area”, page 20.
Library Reinitialization
Inconsistency may appear following manual operations (ex: cartridge move not requested
by Time Navigator) and the actual contents of the library may no longer correspond to
the contents of the catalog. The reinitialization of the library is then required.
Reinitializing a library allows Time Navigator to match the library logical status with its
actual physical status. The logical status is the image of the library Time Navigator
builds in the catalog.
Chapter 5
161
Allocating a library and at least one of its drives is required. If allocation fails,
reinitialization will wait until a drive becomes available.
Note:
When a catalog restore is performed, you must reinitialize the library.
Relationship between Libraries, Drives and Cartridges
A distinction must be made between the use of a library and the use of the library drives.
The library is allocated when a cartridge mount request is issued. The picker (mechanical
arm) moves a cartridge from a slot to a drive or from a drive to a slot.
Robotized or not, a drive is allocated to a cartridge if it is used for reading or writing
on cartridges. Drives may be allocated while the library is not and inversely.
You can add or remove cartridges to and from the library. These operations are known
as bringing cartridges on-line and off-line.
Bringing cartridges on-line requires that:
■
■
The library be allocated to move cartridges.
A drive be allocated to read labels of cartridges added into the library. If all library
drives are allocated, the operation is cancelled.
Bringing cartridges off-line only requires that:
■
The library be allocated to move cartridges if a mailbox is used,
■
A library drive be allocated if the cartridge brought off-line is located in a drive.
Creating a Library
In most cases, library creation is handled through the Device Detection Wizard and Device
Configuration Manager that we covered in the first part of this chapter.
Note:
Before creating a library with Time Navigator, make sure that the SCSI
adapter for the library has been installed.
To create a library
1.
In the Network area, click on the icon of the host to which the library is to be
attached.
162
2.
Choose Devices - Library - New.
3.
Choose between Libraries, Software Controlled Libraries and Virtual Libraries. (See
“About Libraries”, page 159 for details).
Note:
The creation and configuration of Virtual Libraries, including Atempo
Virtual Library System, is covered in a separate section of this manual,
“Backup to Disk with Virtual Library System”, page 531,
The creation and configuration of Software Controlled Libraries is
discussed in the Time Navigator Virtual Library Manager guide.
4.
Select the library vendor and type and click on OK.
5.
The New Library window appears:
Chapter 5
163
The name of the host you selected appears in the Host Name field. You cannot edit
it at this point.
6.
Fill in the library parameters as described in “New Library Window”, page 164.
7.
If you have already created drives, click on Add in the Associated Drives area and
select the drives to associate.
Note:
If the drives have not been created yet, you will have the opportunity
when you create your drives to associate them with the library.
8.
The Library Properties button gives you access to various parameters defining the
library behavior. Time Navigator assigns default values to all parameters
according to the library you select in step 2 above. Thus you do not have to modify
anything in that window. Should you decide to change any of the library properties,
be extremely careful as it could greatly disturb Time Navigator functioning. For
a detailed list of the library properties, see “Advanced Library Properties”,
page 165.
9.
Click on OK.
A library Reinitialization (barcode) is automatically performed when the library is first
created. This reinitialization provides information to the catalog concerning the slots and
drives empty/full status. See “Reinitializing a Library”, page 166, for details.
164
New Library Window
Type:
Indicates the library model you selected in the Library List Window.
Host Name: Indicates the host the library is attached to. This is the host you selected in
the Network area.You cannot edit it at this point.
Device Descriptor:
Warning:
Note:
The protocol used to access the library is always the Tina protocol, even
if the host accessing the library has been set to use the NDMP protocol. As
a result the device descriptor must always respect the Time Navigator
format, not the NDMP format.
The colon character ":" is not allowed for the library device descriptor
definition.
For example: qc0
Path of the file allowing access to the library. For example: /dev/qc
SCSI address of the library. The Device Descriptor must be entered in a
cxbytzla format, where:
■
x is the number of the SCSI controller
■
y is the number of the bus
■
z is the number of the SCSI target
■
a is the LUN number.
Tip:
Library Name:
The Device Descriptor information can be found in the Windows 2000/2003
Administrative Tools directory. See your operating system
documentation for details.
Name of the library. This name appears with the library icon in the
Network area.
Chapter 5
165
Serial Number: Concerns library installed in a SAN environment. The Serial Number is
automatically detected by Time Navigator and appears when editing the library if you
have set the tunable Use Serial Number to Determine Device Descriptor. See “Device
Descriptor Re-allocation”, page 423 for details.
If the library is software-managed, the library type appears in this field.
Reset: If the serial needs to be updated, click on the Reset button, Time Navigator
automatically detects the new number.
Associated Drives Area: Lists the drives already associated with the library and allows you to
add or remove drives from the list.
Note:
Only drives that are not already associated to a library appear in the Drive List
window when you click on Add.
Advanced Properties: Lets you access the Library Properties window. See “Advanced Library
Properties”, page 165.
Advanced Library Properties
For a complete list of Advanced Properties, see “Appendix 1: Advanced Library
Editing a Library
Once a library has been created, you always have the option to edit the following:
■
The library device descriptor.
■
The library serial number (can be reset and redetected by Time Navigator).
■
The drives associated with the library.
■
The library properties.
The library type and name, as well as the name of the host to which the library is
connected cannot be modified.
To edit a library
1.
Select the library to edit in the Network area.
2.
Choose Device-Library-Properties. The Library Properties window appears.
166
3.
Modify the Device Descriptor and Associated Drives as needed.
See “New Library Window”, page 164 for details.
4.
To edit the library properties, click on Advanced Library Properties.
See “Appendix 1: Library Properties”, page 703 for details.
5.
Time Navigator automatically updates the windows concerning the drives associated
with the library, according to the modifications performed in the Associated Drives area.
Reinitializing a Library
For details concerning library reinitialization, see “Reinitializing Libraries”, page 247
Deleting a Library
If you delete a library from the network, you must delete it from Time Navigator. When
you delete a library, you modify the loading mode of the drives associated with the
library. Drives are manually loaded again.
To delete a library
1.
Select the library to delete in the Network area.
2.
Choose Devices-Library-Delete. The Delete Library window appears. It contains all the
characteristics of the selected library.
3.
Click on Delete to delete the library.
The library is removed from the Network area and from Time Navigator
The deleted library is automatically removed from the Library area of the Drive
Properties window with which it was associated.
Chapter 5
167
Drives
About Drives
Drives are storage devices (backup and archiving). Many types of drives are supported by
Time Navigator: 8 mm magnetic tapes, DAT, DLT, 3480, magneto-optical disks,
DVD-RAM, etc. You can also create a VTL Disk Drive in lieu of a regular drive to
perform backups on disk rather than on cartridges.
A user can use every declared drive, as long as he has the necessary rights to access it.
A drive is available if it is enabled and not being used. When a drive is enabled, the
application assumes that it will use the drive exclusively.
Local Drives vs Shared Drives
A local drive is connected to the host which controls it (any Unix or Windows 2000/2003
machine that is client or server of Time Navigator). It is also possible to share a drive
between several Time Navigator catalogs via Time Navigator Library Sharing
Manager.
A shared drive is connected to a Storage Area Network (SAN). It can be controled by
several hosts via the SAN.
DVD-RAM Drives
Note :
■
■
■
■
■
DVD-RAM are supported on Windows platforms only.
DVD-RAM drives belong to the Magneto-optical Drive category. They are mostly
used for archiving purposes.
You must declare them manually as neither the Device Detection Wizard nor the
Device Configuration Manager support the detection of DVD-RAM drives (see
“Creating a Drive”, page 170 for details).
The device descriptor of a DVD-RAM drive is the drive letter assigned in the file
system, for instance: "D:"
You must use a media pool dedicated to the DVD-RAM drive.
Due to performance reasons,disabling the DVD-RAM drive cache is not
supported.
168
WORM Drives
■
■
WORM drives allow for non-rewritable, non-erasable data storage on WORM
media (WORM: Write Once Read Many). They are mainly used for legal archiving
purposes.
Only WORM media can be mounted in a drive declared as a WORM drive.
Warning:
■
Make sure you do not mix WORM and WMRM (Write Many Read
Many) drives in the same library. Such configurations are not
supported by Time Navigator.
Cache and performance
In order to improve reading and writing performances, some optical WORM drives
are equipped with a cache that can be enabled/disabled. By default, the cache is
disabled by Time Navigator. This prevents the catalog from being desynchronized
from the actual media content, should a power cut occur. If you want to enable the
cache at you own risk, set the "Enable optical cache on write"
(enable_optical_write_cache). For details on how to set tunables, see the
Time Navigator Tunables guide.
Drive Loading Mode
If the drive is manually operated, you will be asked to mount/unmount cartridges
required by Time Navigator (ex: to insert a labelled, non-labelled or cleaning cartridge
into the device). Optical drives cannot be manually operated.
If the drive is robotized, the cartridge operations needed by the application are
performed without the operator’s intervention. The operator is only required to bring
cartridges on and off-line.
In both cases, mounting requests appear in Time Navigator Media Request Console.
This window should always be opened and minimized on the console of the operator in
charge of cartridges.
To use Time Navigator Media Request Console, see “Time Navigator Media Request
Console”, page 573.
Drive Cleaning
Drives must be cleaned on a regular basis to maintain them in good working condition.
Time Navigator keeps track of the number of times a drive is being used, and uses
various settings to control the drive cleaning. A cleaning request is automatically
triggered when the Time of Use since the Last Cleaning is greater than the Time of use
Chapter 5
169
Before Cleaning parameter.
Note:
Drive cleaning only applies to physical drives. Virtual drives do not require
cleaning.
Drive cleaning operations have priority over any other operation requiring a drive
(backup, archiving, etc.) except if the other operation is already in progress, in which
case the cleaning will wait for the operation to end before proceeding.
If you cancel a cleaning request, the following requested operation will occur and
Time Navigator will request the drive cleaning again the next time it is used.
The cleaning operation status (manual or automatic) depends on:
■
The drive loading mode (manual or robotized).
■
The presence or not of a slot reserved for the cleaning cartridge.
Initiating the
cleaning request
Robotized drive
Manual drive
=
Manual cleaning
Slot
reserved
for the cleaning
cartridge
=
Automatic cleaning
No slot reserved
for the cleaning
cartridge
=
Manual cleaning
To automate the cleaning operation, reserve a slot in the library for the cleaning cartridge
and make sure a cleaning cartridge is in the cleaning slot. Time Navigator will also
handle the cleaning cartridge wear according to manufacturer specifications and require
you to change the cleaning cartridge when it is worn.
In the case of manual cleaning, a dialog box prompts you to insert a cleaning cartridge
in the device and to specify the end of the cleaning operation.
For information on drive representation in Time Navigator Administration Console,
see “Drive Representation”, page 22.
170
Creating a Drive
In most cases, drive creation is handled through the Device Detection Wizard and Device
Configuration Manager that we covered in the first part of this chapter.
However, if you need to create a drive manually, or wish to set up a disk drive that will
emulate drive operation from a hard disk, you may use the following procedure to create
it directly in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Likewise, if you are creating a DVD-RAM drive, you must use this procedure since
neither the Device Detection Wizard nor the Device Configuration Manager support
the detection of DVD-RAM drives.
Note:
Optical drives, other than DVD-RAM, do not support the manual mode. They
must be robotized.
Note:
To declare a shared drive, refer to the procedure “To create a shared drive”,
page 429.
To create a drive
1.
In the Network area, select the library to which the drive is connected.
Note:
2.
If the drive is directly attached to a host, select that host. The host must
be a storage node.
Choose Devices-Drive-New and select a drive from the Drive Type Selection window.
Chapter 5
3.
Select the drive manufacturer and type. Click on OK. The New Drive window
appears:
4.
Fill in parameters for the new host as described in:
5.
■
“Drive Window - General Tab”, page 172
■
“Drive Window - Connection Tab”, page 180 (for shared drives only)
■
“Drive Window - Cartridges Tab”, page 175
■
“Drive Window - Library Tab”, page 176
■
“Drive Window - Information Tab”, page 177
■
“Drive Window - Identity Tab”, page 178
■
“Drive Window - User Groups Tab”, page 179
171
The new drive is displayed in the Network area and is linked to the selected host. A vertical
bar is displayed at the right of the circle representing the host in the Icons area.
For more information on drive representation in Time Navigator Administration
Console, see “Network Area”, page 20.
172
If one or several media pools, libraries, and user groups are associated with the drive, they
will automatically be displayed by Time Navigator in the corresponding areas in the
Drive window: Media pools, Libraries and User Groups.
Note:
Time Navigator does not check for the presence of the device on the network
when it is created, but at each attempt to access it.
Drive Window - General Tab
Type: Type of the drive you selected.
Drive Name: Name of the drive. The drive name must be unique within the entire catalog.
Note:
The colon character ":" is not allowed in the name of the drive.
Cartridge Life Cycle (points): Cartridge wear parameter (ex: 1500 life points).
A default value is automatically entered by Time Navigator depending on your drive.
For more information on cartridge wear, see “Cartridge Wear”, page 203.
Serial Number: Serial number of the drive. It concerns SAN drives only. It is automatically
detected by Time Navigator and appears when editing the drive if you have activated the
tunable Use Serial Number to Determine Device Descriptor. For more information on
serial numbers, see “Device Descriptor Re-allocation”, page 423.
Chapter 5
173
Reset: Forces Time Navigator to re-detect the drive serial number. Useful if the drive has
been changed.
Local Drive (not shared): Indicates whether the drive is local or shared.
Host: Name of the host the drive is attached to.
Device Descriptor:
For example: tape0
Absolute path of the drive descriptor. It is recommended that you specify a
non Berkeley device.
For example:
■
IBM AIX: /dev/rmt0.1
■
SUN Solaris: /dev/rmt/0cn
■
COMPAQ Tru64: /dev/ntape/tape0_d0
■
HP-UX: /dev/rmt/0mn
■
Linux: /dev/nst0
■
SGI Irix: /dev/rmt/tps0nrvc
Drive SCSI address. The device descriptor must be entered in a cxbytzla
format.
■
x is the number of the SCSI controller,
■
y is the number of the bus,
■
z is the number of the SCSI target,
■
The device descriptor of a DVD-RAM drive is the drive letter assigned in the file
system, for instance: "D:"
174
Note:
The Device Descriptor information can be found in the Windows 2000/2003
Administrative Tools directory. See your operating system
documentation for details.
Warning:
Drives attached to the same host must imperatively have their own unique
device descriptor. Do not use the same descriptor for all drives.
The Device Descriptor used must be a no rewind device. Otherwise, the
cartridge label and data are systematically overwritten at each new backup.
To check that the Device Descriptor being used is correct, perform a drive
test as described in “Testing Drives”, page 183.
Warning:
The protocol used to access drives is always the Tina protocol, even if the
host accessing the drive has been set to use the NDMP protocol. As a result
the device descriptor must always respect the Time Navigator format, not
the NDMP format.
Note:
If the created drive is a Disk Drive, the device descriptor corresponds to the
absolute path of the directory into which the data will be backed up.
Chapter 5
175
Drive Window - Cartridges Tab
Add: Allows to add a media pool to associate with the drive.
Note:
If you have already created media pools, click on Add to select the media pool(s)
you want to associate with the drive. If not, you will be able to add a media
pool later.
Remove: Allows to remove a media pool.
Writing Mode Area
Non-Rewritable (WORM): Specifies that the drive uses non-rewritable cartridges.
Note:
The box is automatically checked if the drive uses non-rewritable media.
Note:
If the created drive can be used with both rewritable (WMRM) and
non-rewritable (WORM) media, you must declare it as either WMRM (default
behavior) or WORM. Mixing different types of media for the same drive is
not allowed in Time Navigator.
176
For more information, see “WORM Drives”, page 168.
Drive Window - Library Tab
If the library is robotized, click on Library to select the library containing the drive.
Note:
The fields in the Library tab can be accessed if at least one library has already
been declared in Time Navigator.
Library: Name of the library associated with the drive (if any).
Drive Position in Library: Indicates the drive location inside the library. See “Changing the
Mode of the Drive”, page 182 for details.
Chapter 5
177
Drive Window - Information Tab
Statistics Area
■
Hours of Use: Number of hours the drive was used for.
■
Volume Read: Amount of information that the drive has read.
■
Volume written: Amount of information that the drive has written.
■
Number of Mounts: Number of times a cartridge was mounted in the drive.
■
Number of Cleanings: Number of times the drive has been cleaned.
■
Use since Last Cleaning: Number of hours the drive has been used for since the last
cleaning.
■
Last Cleaning Date: Date when the drive was last cleaned.
Cleaning Management Area
■
■
Cleaning Managed by Time Navigator: Indicates whether you want the drive cleaning to
be managed by Time Navigator.
Max. Use between Cleanings (Hr): Maximum number of hours the drive can be used for
between two cleaning sessions.
Note:
If the value is 0, the drive cleaning will never be performed.
178
■
Use before Next Cleaning (Hr): Number of hours the drive can be used for, before
Note:
This field cannot be edited. It is automatically filled in by
Time Navigator.
Status: Indicates whether the drive needs to be cleaned.
Reset: Resets drive statistics values to 0 and the cleaning management values to the
original values.
Note:
Default values are entered for all parameters automatically according to the
drive type.
For more information on cleaning drives, see “Drive Cleaning”, page 168.
Drive Window - Identity Tab
Change Identity to Access Device: Indicates that you are providing a specific user identity to
access the drive.
User: Name of a user who has the necessary rights to access the drive.
Chapter 5
Password: Click on Password. Provide a password and confirm it.
Drive Window - User Groups Tab
Add: Allows to add a user group to associate with the drive.
Remove: Allows to remove a user group.
179
180
Drive Window - Connection Tab
This tab only appears if you are configuring a shared drive.
SAN: Name of the SAN onto which the drive is connected.
Add: Allows to associate hosts to the drive in a SAN environment.
Remove: Allows to disconnect hosts from the drive in a SAN environment.
Host: Indicates the name of the host associated with the drive.
Device Descriptor: Indicates the device descriptor for the drive associated to the host.
Device Descriptor: Allows to enter the device descriptor for the shared drive associated to
the host.
For example: tape0
Absolute path of the drive descriptor. For example:
■
IBM AIX : /dev/rmt0.1
Chapter 5
■
SUN Solaris : /dev/rmt/0cbn
■
COMPAQ Tru64 : /dev/ntape/tape0_d0
■
HP-UX : /dev/rmt/0mnb
■
Linux : /dev/nst0
■
SGI Irix : /dev/rmt/tps0nrvc
181
The Device Descriptor represents the drive SCSI address. It must be entered in a cxbytzla
format.
■
x is the number of the SCSI controller,
■
y is the number of the bus,
■
z is the number of the SCSI target,
■
Note:
Warning:
The Device Descriptor information can be found in the Windows NT/
2000 Administrative Tools directory.
Drives attached to the same host must imperatively have their own unique
device descriptor.
The Device Descriptor used must be a no rewind device. Otherwise, the
cartridge label and data are systematically overwritten at each new backup.
NDMP Area
NDMP: This box must be checked if you want the drive to support NDMP.
Network Name: Drive network name
User: NDMP user
Password: NDMP user password
Version: NDMP version
182
Changing the Mode of the Drive
When first created, a drive is in disabled mode. If you want to perform a backup, the
drive must be "Enabled". If you only want to allow the drive to perform restore
operation, the mode must be "Enable for Restore only".If you want to perform certain
maintenance operations on a drive and not allow backups to proceed, you should put the
drive in Maintenance mode.
The following table shows the different modes a drive can be in.
Drive Mode
Description
Enabled
All operations can be performed.
Enabled for Restore only
Only restore operations can be performed and non job related
operations such as: erasing, recycling, labelling, or identifying a
cartridge; cleaning or testing the drive, reinitializing the library.
Note: During a restore, drives in the mode Enabled for Restore only
are used in priority. If none is available, another drive is chosen. In
addition, if the cartridge required to perform the restore is already
mounted in a drive, that drive is used for the restore regardless of
the drive mode.
Disabled
No operation can be performed.
Maintenance
Only a drive test, a cartridge identification, or a cartridge move can
be performed.
To change the drive mode
1.
Select the drive in the Network area.
2.
Choose Devices-Drive-Use and select the mode you want.
The Mode is displayed underneath the drive icon in the Network area.
Supervising Drive
If you have installed Time Navigator Web Supervision, you have the option to monitor
your catalog and drive activities via a Web browser. The URL to access Time Navigator
Web Supervision depends on the parameters you specified during installation.
See the Time Navigator Web Interfaces guide for more information.
Chapter 5
183
Testing Drives
Although this step is optional, we strongly recommend performing this operation when
the drive is used for the first time or any time a hardware maintenance operation is
performed.
Testing the drive will verify that it is in working condition, that it has been properly
configured and that Time Navigator correctly handles that drive.
If a drive returns errors indicating that it has broken down, Time Navigator
automatically disables the drive and triggers an alarm. In that case you should perform a
drive test to try identifying the problem.
The reasons for a failed test can be one of the following:
■
There is a conflict between the driver version and the operating system.
■
The drive is not correctly configured.
■
■
The media is unavailable: it must be neither write protected, nor too “worn out”
in the case of magnetic tapes.
The driver for the drive is configured in fixed block size mode. Time Navigator
requires that the driver be put into variable block size mode.
For more information about the driver configuration, see the drive manufacturers
documentation and Time Navigator Drivers guide.
If you are working in a SAN environment and several hosts have access to a drive, you
can select the host to use to perform the test. You should test the drive with all hosts.
Note:
This test requires a spare cartridge. Any data contained on the cartridge will
be deleted by the test.
Warning:
Testing a WORM drive implies that the WORM media used will be
unusable once the operation is complete. It is recommended that you then
remove this media from the library.
To test a drive
1.
Right-click on the drive to test in the Network area and select Maintenance.
See “Changing the Mode of the Drive”, page 182 for details.
184
2.
Choose Devices-Drive-Operations-Test. The mount request of the non-labelled cartridge
is initiated.
3.
If several hosts have access to the drive (SAN environment), select the host you
want to perform the test with in the Select Access for Drive window and click on OK.
4.
The test begins and the Drive Test window appears showing you the test progress. If
the test is sucessful, the message: This Device works correctly is displayed. Otherwise,
Time Navigator returns one of the following errors:
■
Read error
■
Write error
■
Rewinding error
■
Status error
■
Configuration error
■
Positionning error
Note:
5.
If you want to stop the test, click on Cancel.
Click on Close when the test is over.
Automatically Cleaning Drives
Time Navigator uses two separate components to handle automatic drive cleaning. The
first component is the actual cleaning of the drive. This is the component described in
this section. The second component is the cleaning cartridge management, described in
“Setting the Cleaning Cartridge Parameters”, page 229.
Time Navigator automatically triggers a drive cleaning according to the following
parameters:
■
Max. Use between Cleaning (hours). The value of this parameter depends on the drive
type. It is set according to the specifications of the manufacturers and corresponds
to the maximum time of use between two cleaning sessions.
■
Use before Next Cleaning (hours). When the drive is created, this parameter is by
default the same as the first parameter since the drive is supposed to have never
been used. Afterward, Time Navigator keeps track of the time the drive is being
used, and automatically triggers a cleaning request whenever this value comes to
0.
Chapter 5
185
This parameter is reset to its original value whenever a cleaning is performed.
The Max Use between Cleaning parameters can be defined when you create a drive, or
modified later.
To edit the drive cleaning parameters
1.
Select the drive to edit in the Network area.
2.
Choose Devices-Drive-Properties. The Drive Properties window appears. Click on the
Information tab.
3.
In the Cleaning Management Area, check the Cleaning Managed by Time Navigator box.
4.
Modify the Max. Use between Cleaning setting (ex: 30 hours). The Use before Next
Cleaning setting is automatically updated.
Note:
5.
0 indicates that the drive cleaning is never performed.
For more information on drive cleaning, see “Drive Cleaning”, page 168.
Manually Cleaning Drives
Independently from the automatic triggering, you can manually initiate the cleaning of
any drive. This may be very useful when a drive whose cleaning is imminent is going to
be used for an automatic backup. In that case, you may clean the drive before the backup
takes place.
The cleaning operation is the same whatever its origin (manual or automatic).
To initiate drive cleaning
1.
Select the drive to clean in the Network area.
2.
Choose Devices-Drive-Operations-Cleaning,
Note:
You can also choose Device-Library-Operations. Then, in the Library
Operations window, choose Drive-Cleaning, or you can use the Drive List
window.
The cleaning operation begins if the selected drive is enabled and available.
186
The Use before Next Cleaning parameter is reset to its original value.
Warning:
To actually perform automatic robotized drive cleaning, you must
also set the appropriate cleaning cartridge parameters. See “Setting
the Cleaning Cartridge Parameters”, page 229 for details.
To reset the parameters when performing a manual cleaning
1.
After manually cleaning a drive (manually inserting a cleaning cartridge in a drive
without using Time Navigator), select the drive in the Network area.
2.
Choose Devices-Drive-Properties. The Drive Properties window appears.
3.
In the Information tab, reset the Use since Last Cleaning field value to 0. The Use before
Next Cleaning parameter is reset to its original value.
4.
Editing Drives
Editing a drive enables you to check or modify the following settings:
■
The maximum time of use between two cleaning sessions and the time of use before
cleaning to allow Time Navigator to automatically initiate the drive cleaning
request.
See “Automatically Cleaning Drives”, page 184 for details.
■
The life cycle of cartridges associated with a drive to allow Time Navigator to
automatically calculate the cartridge wear level.
See “Cartridge Wear”, page 203 for details.
■
The drive serial number (can be reset and detected again by Time Navigator).
■
The library the drive is associated with, if the drive is robotized.
■
The user groups and media pools the drive is associated with.
■
The identity for device access.
■
The hosts which can access the drive if it is a shared drive
The type and name of the drive cannot be modified.
To edit a drive
1.
Chapter 5
2.
Choose Devices-Drive-Properties. The Drive Properties window is displayed.
3.
Modify the drive settings as needed.
4.
Note:
187
Time Navigator automatically updates the media pools, libraries, and user
groups areas of the Drive Properties windows if you modify the drive
information through the Media Pools, Libraries or User Groups windows (i.e., if you
create a library and associate a previously created drive to it, the library name
will automatically appear in the Drive Properties Library field).
Deleting Drives
If you remove a drive from your network, you must also remove it from
Time Navigator. Deleting a drive removes it from the list of available drives defined for
the libraries, media pools and user groups.
The recorded cartridges are kept and can be read on any other compatible drive.
To delete a drive
1.
Select the drive to delete in the Network area.
2.
Choose Devices-Drive-Delete. The Delete Drive window is displayed. It contains all
the characteristics of the selected drive.
3.
Click on Delete to delete the drive.
The drive is removed from the Network area.
Note:
The deleted drive is automatically removed from the Associated Drives areas
of the Media Pool and Library Properties windows and from the Drives
area of the User Group Properties window it was associated with.
Identifying the Contents of a Drive
Use this operation to identify the cartridge located inside the drive.
To identify the contents of a drive
1.
In the Network area, select a drive.
2.
Choose Devices-Drive-Operations-Identify Content.
188
Tip:
You can also right click on a drive and choose Identify.
The Drive Contents Window appears. See “Drive Contents Window”, page 188 for
details.
Drive Contents Window
The Drive Contents window provide information about the cartridge mounted in the
drive.
Cartridge Name: Name of the cartridge that is currently in the drive.
Creation Date: Date the cartridge was created in the catalog.
Cartridge Description: Description entered when writing a cartridge label manually. The field
is empty if the cartridge was automatically labeled.
Label: Cartridge label.
Ejecting a Media from a Drive
Use this operation to eject a media from a drive. You do not have to specify the
destination slot, Time Navigator will choose it.
To eject a media:
1.
In the Network area, select the drive you want to empty.
2.
Choose Devices-Drive-Operations-Eject Media.
Tip:
You can also right click on a drive and choose Eject Media.
Displaying Drives
See “Displaying Drives”, page 24 to find out how you can show or hide a drive in
Chapter 5
189
List Administration of Drives
If you want to perform operations on several drives at once, you can use the Drive List
windows that allows you to perform a variety of tasks.
Drive List Window
Number of drives: Total number of drives appearing in the list.
Export: Allows to export the drive list to a file.
Drive Information
■
Status: Status of the drive, either Enabled, Restore Only, Maintenance or Disabled.
■
Name: Name of the drive as defined when it was created.
■
Type: Type of the drive.
■
■
Serial Number: Drive serial number. Automatically detected by Time Navigator after
the first access to the drive, if it is a shared drive.
Library: Name of the library associated with the drive.
190
■
Cartridge: Name of the cartridge located in the drive.
Note:
■
Test: Result of the drive test.
Note:
■
This column shows a question mark when you first open the window,
click on Identify Content to identify the cartridge.
This column shows a question mark when you first open the window,
click on Test to test the drive and display the result.
Connection: Shows the connection type of the drive, either local with the name of
the host, or SAN.
■
Sharing: Indicates the number of hosts than can access the drive.
Properties: Opens the Drive Properties window for the selected drive.
Tip:
You can also double click on a drive in the list to open the Drive Properties
window.
Modify Status: Opens the Drive Status window to modify the status of all the selected drives.
Modify Connection Status: Opens the Drive Connection Status window to modify that status.
Allows to switch between local and SAN connection.
Identify Content: Allows you to identify the cartridge contained in the selected drives.
Cartridge names appear in the Cartridge column.
Eject Media: Allows to unmount the cartridge located in the selected drives.
Test: Launches a test of the selected drives. See “Testing Drives”, page 183 for details.
Cleaning: Launches the cleaning of the selected drives. See “Manually Cleaning Drives”,
Delete: Deletes the selected drives.
Chapter 5
191
Viewing Drive Information
To view drive information
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Devices-Drive-Drive List. The Drive
2.
Exporting the Drive List
To export the drive list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Close in the Drive List window when you are done.
Editing a Drive
Note:
This feature can only be used to edit a single drive at a time.
To edit a drive
1.
2.
Select the drive you want to edit and click on Properties. The Drive Properties
window appears. Modify the parameters as needed and click on OK to apply the
modifications. See “Creating a Drive”, page 170 for details.
3.
To edit another drive, select it in the list and repeat step 2.
4.
Modifying the Drive Status
To modify the drive status
1.
192
2.
Select the drives for which you want to change the status and click on Modify Status.
The Drive Status window appears. See “Changing the Mode of the Drive”,
3.
4.
Modifying the Drive Connection Type
This feature allows you to quickly convert a local drive already configured in
Time Navigator Administration Console to a shared drive and vice versa. You can
convert several drives at a time.
To convert one or several local drives to the shared type
1.
From the menu bar, select Devices-Drive-Drive List.
The Drive List window appears.
2.
Select one or several drives. then click Modify Connection Status.
The Drive Connection Status window appears.
3.
Select the lower radio button, select the SAN’s name from the drop-down list and
click OK.
4.
Close the Drive List window.
To convert one or several shared drives to the local type
1.
From the menu bar, select Devices-Drive-Drive List..
The Drive List window appears.
2.
Select one or several drives. then click Modify Connection Status.
The Drive Connection Status window appears.
3.
Select "Local Drive (not shared)" and click OK.
4.
Close the Drive List window.
Identifying Drive content
To identify the drive content
1.
2.
Select the drives whose content you want to identify and click on Identify Content.
Chapter 5
193
3.
Click on Yes to confirm the operation or click on No to cancel it.
4.
A Progress window appears. Click on Hide if you do not want to see it.
5.
Once the operation is completed the name of the cartridges contained in the drives
appears in the Cartridge column.
6.
To eject a media
1.
2.
Select the drives you want to empty and click on Eject Media.
3.
4.
5.
Once the operation is completed the Cartridge column displays "None".
6.
Testing Drives
To test drives
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Devices-Drive-Drive List. The
Drive List window appears.
2.
Select the drives you want to test and click on Test. See “Testing Drives”,
3.
4.
5.
Cleaning Drives
To clean drives
1.
194
2.
Select the drives you want to clean and click on Cleaning. See “Manually Cleaning
Drives”, page 185 for details.
3.
4.
5.
Deleting Drives
To delete drives
1.
2.
Select the drives you want to delete and click on Delete. See “Deleting Drives”,
3.
4.
5.
Once the operation is completed the drives no longer appear in the list.
6.
Chapter 5
195
Media Pools
About Media Pools
Media pools are created to manage media in a catalog. A media pool is defined by a
name, a label, associated drive(s) and a management policy. Once created, the pool can
be associated with a backup strategy or an archiving folder to allow data to be written on
cartridges. Cartridges will be automatically added to a pool when needed.
It is recommended to keep automatic backup and archiving on separate pools since the
media used for automatic backup can be recycled and reused whereas those used for
archiving will most likely not be recycled.
A media pool can also be used to dedicate some drives to automatic backup and others
to archiving. Most frequently, though, pools will have access to all available drives and
Time Navigator will decide which drive will be used for a particular backup, archiving
or restore.
Storage vs. Recycling Policy
When creating or editing a media pool, you can choose between two media management
policies:
■
Infinite retention period (storage policy).
■
Limited retention period (recycling policy).
The storage policy consists in increasing the number of cartridges indefinitely. Once a
cartridge is full, Time Navigator asks for a spare cartridge, labels it and fills it. It keeps
on requesting spare cartridges each time the previous cartridge is full. The backup
volume continuously increases and there is no automatic recycling. The administrator can
manually delete cartridges when he thinks that the backed up information is no longer
needed.
The recycling policy keeps data on a cartridge for a limited time only. The retention
period policy consists in labeling a certain number of cartridges that are used in turn. The
Retention Period parameter of the media pool allows you to define the retention time that
data is kept.
196
If the retention priod is equal to zero, no data retention period is guaranteed. Only the
number of media available in the pool determines the retention period.You should
pre-label at least enough cartridges to complete your most voluminous backup since
Time Navigator will not request spare cartridges but will overwrite existing ones. If
there are no more empty cartridges, the one which contains the oldest data will be
recycled. Time Navigator thus keeps files for several days or months depending on the
number of cartridges, the backed up volume and the backup frequency.
If the retention period is not equal to zero, cartridges containing data older than the
retention period can be recycled. If no cartridge meets this requirement, a spare cartridge
is labelled under the name of the user in the media pool. Thus, the data retention period
is guaranteed.
Automatically Created Pools
Two pools are automatically created when a catalog is created:
■
■
The LOST+FOUND pool, that contains lost+found cartridges, i.e., cartridges
belonging to another Time Navigator catalog. Their label is followed by -LF<5
digit cartridge number in the pool>.
The SPARE pool, that contains spare cartridges. Time Navigator will automatically
label a spare cartridge when needed. The cartridge will thus no longer belong to
the spare pool, it will belong to the user pool. The spare cartridges appear in the
catalog as SPARE<5 digit cartridge number in the pool>.
These pools only appear in the media pool list if they contain cartridges. You cannot edit
or delete these pools.
Creating a Media Pool
A media pool is defined by a name, a label, an associated drive(s) and a management
policy. Once created, the pool will be associated with a backup strategy to allow data to
be written on cartridges. See “Creating a Backup Strategy”, page 301, for details.
To create a media pool
1.
Choose Storage-Media Pool-New. The New Media Pool window appears.
Chapter 5
197
2.
Fill in the parameters as described in “Media Pool Window”, page 197.
3.
Click on Add in the Associated Drives area to associate a drive with the media pool.
The list of available drives is displayed. Select a drive in the list and click on OK.
Repeat this step to associate other drives.
Note:
If you want to perform synthetic full backups, associate at least two
drives to the media pool.
Warning:
4.
It is highly recommended not to associate drives from different
libraries to the same media pool.
Click on OK to validate the operation and close the window.
The created media pool is automatically displayed in the Media Pools area of the
Drive Properties window with which it is associated.
Media Pool Window
Pool Name: Indicates the name of your choice for the pool.
Tip:
The pool name can be related to the pool use (ex: backup week for the weekly
full backups) or to the platforms backed up with the pool, ...etc.
198
Label: Is usually a short version of the pool name. The pool label appears in the name of
all the cartridges belonging to the pool.
Comment: Allows you to enter a comment of your choice to identify the media pool. The
comment is recorded in the Time Navigator catalog.
Note:
If you modify the comment, specify whether you want the new pool comment
to be applied on all existing cartridges in the pool or only on the new
cartridges.
Retention Period
■
■
Infinite: Select this option if you do not want to recycle cartridges. This option is
referred to as the “storage policy”. In that case, Time Navigator will not reuse a
cartridge once it is filled.
Data stored during: Select this option if you want to recycle cartridges after a set
period of time. This option is referred to as the recycling policy.
■
Retention Period: Represents the time period Time Navigator will wait once a
cartridge is filled, until it recycles it.
See “About Media Pools”, page 195 for details concerning the recycling policy.
Associated Drives
■
■
Add: Allows you to determine the drives Time Navigator may use when
performing a backup with this media pool.
Remove: Allows you to stop a drive from being used by Time Navigator for
backups using this media pool.
■
Logical Name:
Displays all the drives that may use this media pool.
Editing a Media Pool
Editing a media pool enables you to modify the following parameters:
■
The name of the media pool.
■
The contents of the Comment field.
■
The media pool management policy (infinite or limited retention period).
■
The drives associated with the media pool.
Chapter 5
199
The label of the media pool is written at the beginning of each media and thus cannot be
modified.
To edit a media pool:
1.
Choose Storage-Media Pool-Properties. The list of media pools appears.
2.
Select a media pool in the list, then click on OK. The Media Pool Properties
window appears.
3.
Modify the media pool parameters as needed (See “Media Pool Window”,
page 197) and click on OK.
Note:
If you have modified the comment, a dialog box asks you whether you want
the new pool comment to be applied on all existing media in the pool (click on
Yes) or only on the new media (click on No).
Deleting a Media Pool
To delete a media pool associated with a strategy or archive folder, you must first delete
it within the strategy or the archive folder.
Note:
A media pool cannot be deleted if it contains cartridges.
To delete a media pool:
1.
Choose Storage-Media Pool-Delete. The list of media pools appears.
2.
Select a media pool in the list, then click on OK. A message window prompts you
to confirm your choice.
3.
Click on OK to delete the pool.
200
Cartridges
About Cartridges
Backup Media
The backup media used by Time Navigator can be of the following kind:
■
Cartridges
A“cartridge” refers to either a magnetic tape, a digital optical disk, or even files
on a disk. With “VTL Disk Drives” for instance, a cartridge is simulated by a file
created on disk.
■
Snapshot
A snapshot represents the contents of a volume backed up using one of the
currently available snapshot technologies. It is kept on disk. The Time Navigator
applications that integrate a snapshot mechanism are:
■
■
Oracle
■
NDMP
■
List
■
Filesystem
Replica
A replica represents a copy of data performed with the Time Navigator replication
features. A replica is kept on disk.
Cartridge Identification
Cartridges are always associated with an owner. The cartridge owner is the pool label
the cartridge belongs to.
Time Navigator offers two ways to identify a cartridge:
■
with the label
■
with the barcode
The label is an actual file written on the cartridge enabling its identification. It contains
the following information:
■
The cartridge name, composed of an optional prefix (common to all cartridges in
the catalog), the cartridge owner (identifying the pool or the user the cartridge
belongs to) and a number.
■
The cartridge creation date.
■
An optional description.
Chapter 5
201
To identify a cartridge, Time Navigator reads its label, and thus requires that the
cartridge be mounted in a drive.
The administrator can label cartridges for any user. In Time Navigator Restore &
Archive Manager, the current user can only label cartridges for his own use. To do so,
he must belong to a user group containing drives.
Prior to any operation, the cartridge label is read: there is no possible identification error.
Barcodes, if supported by your library, also let Time Navigator identify a cartridge, but
without mounting it in a drive and reading its label. The library picker quickly scans all
the cartridges in the library and reads their barcodes. Reading barcodes is much faster
than reading labels.
Warning:
Note:
Two cartridges cannot have the same bar code because identification
problems will occur.
Labeled and recyclable cartridges belong to a specific catalog whereas spare
cartridges do not belong to any particular catalog until they are labeled.
Cartridge Status
When a brand-new cartridge is inserted in a library or a cartridge has just been erased,
it appears as an unknown cartridge. Upon identification, a cartridge takes on one of the
following statuses:
Cartridge
Status
Description
Spare
No Time Navigator label present on tape. The cartridge is ready
to be labelled for a backup or an archiving. The cartridge is
either brand new or has just been erased. It belongs to the
“Spare” pool.
Lost + Found
A Time Navigator label is present on the cartridge. It is not
recognized as belonging to the current catalog. This cartridge
will not be used for a backup. It belongs to the “Lost+Found”
pool.
Known
A label is present. It is recognized as belonging to the current
catalog.
202
Cartridge Access
Access to cartridges is controlled. No user can write on the cartridges of another user.
A cartridge can only be deleted by its owner or a cartridge administrator (any user for
whom this right has been defined, or a privileged user such as: root, Time Navigator
privileged user, administrator... etc.).
Priorities for Cartridge Use during a Backup
When a backup starts, cartridges are selected in the following order:
1.
The most recently used, labeled, partially filled, non-closed cartridge.
2.
Any other partially filled, non-closed cartridge.
3.
Any labelled empty cartridge.
4.
Recyclable cartridges. The one with the oldest last backup will be used first, then
other recycling cartridges in the same order. See “Recycle”, page 205 for details.
5.
Spare cartridges.
If several cartridges have the same priority status, preference will go to the one located
inside the drive, if applicable.
If the cartridge that is next in line to be used is not present in the library, Time Navigator
automatically selects the one after it.
Job Priority
In Time Navigator, several jobs can be started at the same time. They are executed in
the following order:
■
■
If a cartridge is already mounted in the drive, all jobs using this cartridge have
priority. This avoids mounting and unmounting cartridges repetitively.
If no cartridge is mounted in the drive, restore/archiving jobs have priority over
backup jobs.
Writing Formats
Several writing formats are available on cartridges:
■
TiNa (the only format to allow data compression and encoding)
■
tar
■
cpio
■
sidf (backup without using the cache on server)
■
none (raw format)
■
unknown (used for NDMP backup)
Chapter 5
203
Different formats cannot be mixed on a single cartridge. A cartridge begun with the tar
format may only contain tar files. However, a cartridge with the TiNa format can contain
a compressed file, then a compressed and encoded file, then a file which is neither
compressed nor encoded, etc.
As the tar and cpio formats comply with POSIX standards, it is possible to restore data
with the tar and cpio commands from any Unix machine. In addition, it is possible to
restore on a Windows system, data backed up on a Unix system in the Time Navigator
tar format (see the documentation of the particular tar command you are using to find out
the options you need, i.e., you may need to: specify a no rewind option, specify the block
size, create a device (mount -b option)...etc.).
On a Windows 2000/2003 machine, if you use the tar or cpio formats, some information
is not backed up. For example, some data and attributes associated with files are not
backed up.
The tina_cart command allows you to read data written in the TiNa format without
having Time Navigator installed on the machine. See the Time Navigator Command
Line Interface guide.
Externalizing Cartridges
Cartridges can be put offline, externalized and stored in vaults or remote sites. This
operation can be useful:
■
If the library capacity is not sufficient compared with the cartridge retention period.
■
If you want to guard your cartridges in the event of natural or human accidents.
Time Navigator provides assistance for quickly detecting cartridges that are eligible to
be put offline (out of the library). By default, eligible cartridges are closed or full, and
not recyclable.
This feature also allows to draw up the list of offline cartridges that have passed their
retention period. Such cartridges should be put online so that they can be recycled.
Cartridge Wear
Cartridge wear is used to estimate the remaining life of a cartridge. It is a percentage
calculated from the useful life of a cartridge. The total cartridge life is expressed in life
points. It is common to all cartridges of a certain type, thus it is set at the drive level.
204
The first time a cartridge is labelled, it receives the maximum life point for its type. Each
time the cartridge label is read by Time Navigator (i.e., prior to rewinding, reading or
writing on the tape), a life point is substracted and the wear percentage updated
accordingly.
Warning:
As a cartridge gets closer to the end of its useful life, it is recommended to
duplicate it in order to avoid losing information. The number of life points
is indicated for information only. A cartridge can be faulty with a wear level
inferior to 100%.
Note:
To perform cartridge operations, your user profile must give you permission
to Edit the media pool of every user. See “Defining Personal Access Rights”,
Note:
For manual drives, make sure you insert the appropriate cartridge in the drive
before proceeding.
Available Cartridge Operations
Depending on their status, several operations can be performed on cartridges. The
following table summarizes the possible cartridge operations.
Operation
Spare
Lost + Found
Known
Recycle
no
no
yes
Close
no
no
yes
Reopen
no
no
yes
Delete
yes
yes
yes
-> Spare
no
yes
yes
Duplicate
no
no
yes
Writing Label
yes
no
no
Offline
yes
yes
yes
Chapter 5
205
Recycle
Recycling a cartridge consists in reusing a cartridge already containing backups within
the same media pool.
Multi-cartridges jobs
When you recycle a cartridge that contains only part of a job, i.e., when a single backup
used more than one cartridge, only that cartridge is recycled. Its status becomes Emptied.
Data can still be restored from the remaining non-recycled cartridges.
However if the job is an NDMP job, and is spread on several cartridges, the job is
recycled on all the cartridges if you recycle any one of the cartridges. A partially recycled
cartridge remains full until it is totally recycled. For instance:
If an NDMP backup job JOB1 stores data on:
■
Cart0001 (Full)
■
Cart0002 (Full)
■
Cart0003 (Partially filled)
And another NDMP job JOB2 stores data on:
■
Cart0003 (Full)
■
Cart0004 (Partially filled)
When you recycle Cart0001:
■
Cart0001 becomes Emptied
■
■
■
Cart0003 remains Full but JOB1 is no longer available in the cartridge information
interface.
Cart0004 remains Partialy filled.
If you then recycle Cart0003:
■
Cart0001 is Emptied
■
Cart0002 is Emptied
■
■
Cart0004 remains Partialy filled but JOB2 is no longer available in the cartridge
information interface.
206
Recycling steps
Recycling takes place in two steps:
1
In the catalog, all the file versions contained on the cartridge are marked as
"deleted".
2
The catalog is cleaned to actually remove all the file versions marked as
deleted. This step is performed via a maintenance job. The maintenance job
is automatically launched every day at noon by default.
The data on the recycled cartridge can no longer be restored via the catalog.
However, as long as the cartridge is not used again and that the data is still
physically present on the cartridge, it is possible to recover the data via the
tina_cart command.
For more information, see the Time Navigator Command Line Interface Guide.
Automatic vs. manual recycling
Recycling a cartridge is either an automatic or a manual operation.
All known cartridges belonging to a pool with a recycling policy will eventually
be automatically recycled if:
■
■
■
Their retention period has expired.
A cartridge is needed in the catalog and no other eligible (i.e., labelled
empty or partially filled) cartridge is available.
The cartridges do not contain the last full backup of a backup folder for a
given strategy, nor any incremental backup performed after it. This ensures
that the last backup version of a backup folder remains available at all times
to be restored.
When recycling is automatically performed, the cartridge with the oldest last
backup, i.e, which has been “recyclable” for the longest time, will be recycled
first.
When the recycling is manually initiated via Time Navigator Administration
Console, only Step 1 is performed immediately. Step 2 takes place on the next
scheduled catalog maintenance job, unless it is manually launched using the
tina_odbgc -purge command.
When the recycling is manually launched via the tina_cart_control
Chapter 5
207
-recycle command, both steps are performed in a row.
Note:
The recycling operation is not available for:
- Non-rewritable cartridges (WORM).
- Cartridges that have been closed by Time Navigator following an error
(cartridges closed by the user are recyclable).
Close
Closing a cartridge is either an automatic or a manual operation.
Only a Known cartridge can be closed. A cartridge is automatically closed if:
■
It is full
■
An error occurred during a writing session (e.g., an error such as “Media
Defect”).
A cartridge can also be manually closed by its owner or a cartridge administrator. Only
labelled, empty or partly filled cartridges can be manually closed.
If a cartridge is closed, Time Navigator will not request it again for data writing. It can
nevertheless be requested for restore or a new backup if its recycling date is reached.
Closing cartridges may be useful if you wish to take cartridges off site for security
reasons. Since these cartridges will no longer be physically available, closing them will
prevent Time Navigator from requesting them for a backup. Subsequent backups will be
performed on new cartridges.
Closing cartridges is also very useful in case of catalog restore.
208
If your catalog is damaged and restored, backups C and D performed between the catalog
backup and the catalog restore will not exist in the catalog once it is restored. If cartridges
are not closed upon restoring the catalog, backup E will overwrite the data written by
backups C and D. Although files backed up by backups C and D cannot be restored by
the catalog, it is possible to access them using the tina_cart command. To avoid
overwriting this data, you should close any partially filled cartridges when you restore
your catalog.
Reopen
Reopening a cartridge is a manual operation that consists of opening a previously closed
cartridge. Any full cartridge is automatically reopened when recycled by
Time Navigator.
Delete
Deleting a cartridge is never automatically performed by Time Navigator. When you
delete a cartridge, you delete the cartridge object and all its content from the catalog.
Warning:
Deleting cartridges should be used only for cartridges that have actually
been destroyed or lost, to make sure that Time Navigator will not request
them at any time in the future.
The actual information contained on the cartridge, including its label, remains. If you
reuse a deleted cartridge, it will appear as a Lost+Found, that is, Time Navigator will be
able to read its label but will not recognize it as belonging to the catalog you deleted it
from.
> Spare
Erasing a cartridge is never automatically performed by Time Navigator. When you
erase a cartridge, its label is physically erased. The cartridge becomes “spare”. The
cartridge content is removed from the catalog, but not the cartridge object. This allows
the catalog to continue to keep track of the wear and cleaning information after the
cartridge has been erased.
You should use this feature if the cartridge content is of no interest to you but you want
to keep using the cartridge.
Note :
The erasing operation is not available for non-rewritable cartridges (WORM).
Duplicate
Duplicating a cartridge is done manually. It consists in:
Chapter 5
■
■
209
Copying data from one cartridge to another.
Creating one version per duplicated object (directory or file) in the catalog. A
given object can have four versions in the catalog. The same cartridge can thus be
duplicated three times.
A cartridge can be duplicated by its owner or a cartridge administrator. When the
cartridge administrator duplicates a cartridge, he can copy it onto another pool of
cartridges. Any cartridge can be duplicated.
Duplicating a cartridge requires the presence of two drives:
■
A drive for reading data.
■
A drive for writing data.
A cartridge can be duplicated into another set of cartridges or associated with another
type of media. Several destination cartridges can correspond to a single source cartridge
if storage capacities are different.
If a file is spread on two cartridges, the duplication of one of these cartridges will entail
the duplication of the whole file, hence the mounting of the two source cartridges.
Label
Labelling only applies to Spare cartridges. Other cartridges already have a label. Once it
is labelled, a cartridge can be used to back up data. It can then be kept with no date
limitations, deleted, recycled or duplicated.
Labelled cartridges are either:
■
Empty.
■
Partly filled.
■
Full.
■
Closed.
Note:
For Time Navigator, a spare cartridge may contain information that has been
“manually” backed up, outside the application. Labelling a cartridge will delete
this information.
Offline
When you remove a cartridge from the library either manually or via a mailbox, this
functionality allows you to inform the catalog that the cartridge is offline.
210
Viewing Media Information
It is possible to display the characteristics of all the cartridges contained in a given media
pool. The list can be exported to a text or HTML file. See “Exporting Media
Information”, page 213.
To view media information
1.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. The Media pool list appears.
Empty pools will not appear in this window.
2.
Select a pool, then click on OK. The Media Information Window containing all the
cartridges of the pool you selected appears. See “Media Information Window”,
3.
Click on Column Choice to select the columns you want to view. The Column Choice
Window appears. See “Column Choice Window”, page 212 for details.
You may Sort the cartridges according to any column content. To do so, double
click in the column heading you want the cartridges to be sorted by. On the first
click sorting will be descending. Click a second time to sort in ascending order.
4.
Click on Pool Choice to view cartridges from a different pool.
5.
Click on Close to close the window.
Chapter 5
211
Media Information Window
The Pool Label and Pool Name fields correspond to the information you entered when you
created the media pool.
Number of Cartridges: Number of all the cartridges existing in the pool.
Total Volume: Volume of all the data currently written on all of the cartridges in the pool.
Column Choice: Lets you choose the Cartridge Columns to be displayed or hidden in the
window. See “Column Choice Window”, page 212.
Export: Lets you export cartridge information to a file in either plain text or html format.
Display In/Out Status: Allows you to decide whether or not you want that status displayed.
By default the box is unchecked when you open the window, to avoid delaying the
opening of the window if there is a great number of cartridges for which the status has
to be determined.
In/Out Period: Lets you modify the cartridge externalization time period criteria.
Pool Choice: Lets you select another media pool in order to display the related cartridge
information.
Cartridge List: Contains all the cartridges belonging to the selected pool.
Cartridge Operations
Recycle: Consists in reusing a cartridge already containing backups within the same media
pool.
Close: Prevents any writing operation on the cartridge.
Reopen: Opens a previously closed cartridge.
Delete: Removes the cartridge and all versions it contains from the catalog.
> Spare: Assigns the cartridge to the Spare media pool, erasing its contents, but keeping
the cartridge history in the catalog.
Duplicate: Copies data from one cartridge to another.
212
Off-line: Puts the cartridge off-line in the catalog and moves it to the mailbox slot (if any),
allowing you to physically remove the cartridge from the library.
Information: Provides a set of statistics concerning cartridge usage.
Column Choice Window
The Column Choice window allows you to modify the column selection in the Media
Information window.
All: Displays all columns in the Media Information window.
Invert: Makes all selected columns unselected and, inversely, all unselected columns
selected.
Hidden Columns: Lists the columns that are not displayed in the Media Information window.
Visible Columns: Lists the columns that are displayed in the Media Information window.
> Button: Once columns are selected in the Hidden Columns list, use the > Button to move
the selected columns to the Visible Columns list. You can also double click on columns
individually to move them to the Visible Columns list.
< Button: Once columns are selected in the Visible Columns list, use the < Button to move
the selected columns to the Hidden Columns list. You can also double click on columns
individually to move them to the Hidden Columns list.
Available Columns
■
Name: The cartridge name is automatically created by Time Navigator. It consists
at least of the pool label followed by a number corresponding to the creation
order of the cartridge in the pool.
■
Barcode: Barcode of the cartridge, if any.
■
Volume (MB): Volume of data written on the cartridge.
■
Status: Indicates whether a media is closed or not and why.
■
Filling Level: The possible values for the filling status are: Partly filled, Empty,
Chapter 5
213
Emptied, or full.
Note:
■
■
■
An "emptied" cartridge indicates that the cartridge has been recycled in
the catalog but its label is not physically erased, whereas the status
"empty" indicates that the cartridge label has been erased.
Last Recycling: Date of the last recycling. If the cartridge has never been recycled,
this date is the same as the creation date.
Location: Either the library name or "External" for a non robotized drive or if the
cartridge was brought offline.
Rule: Name of the security rule if the cartridge contains data secured by a rule. A
cartridge cannot contain data secured by different rules. See the Time Navigator
Security & Compliance Manager guide for details on secured backup.
■
Description: By default the catalog name if the cartridge has been labeled by the user.
■
Creation: Date of the cartridge creation in the catalog.
■
Last Backup: Date of the last backup performed on the cartridge. Equivalent to last
recycling date if the cartridge is empty.
■
■
■
Format: Writing format, either TiNa, tar, cpio, sidf, none or unknown.
Wear level: Percentage calculated from the Cartridge Life Cycle parameter found in the
Drive Properties window. See “Cartridge Wear”, page 203 for details.
Retention Period: Cartridge recycling status: Infinite, Expired since (days, hours),
Expires in (days, hours) or WORM (non-rewritable cartridge).
■
In/Out Status: Ready Offline (eligible to be put offline), Ready Online (eligible to be
put online), or - .
■
Type: Equivalent to the drive type.
■
Label: Label of the pool to which the cartridge belongs.
■
Tape File: Number of tape files present on the tape. A tape file contains all the
objects written during the same backup session.
Exporting Media Information
To export Media Information
1.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. The media pool list appears.
2.
Select a media pool in the list.
214
3.
In the Media Information Window, click on Export. The Export window appears:
4.
5.
Click on OK.
The exported file is created in the location you specified.
Export Window
File: Indicates the name of the text file the list is exported to. Enter an absolute path in
that field or click on the Browse Button.
Warning:
The file extension must match the selected file format (.txt or .html).
/Documents/list.txt
/tmp/list
C:\temp\list.txt
Browse Button: Lets you select a name and location for the export file.
Export only Selected Lines: Lets you only export information for the objects selected in the
list.
Chapter 5
215
File Format Tab
■
File Format: Lets you choose the format of the export file, either Text or HTML.
■
Encoding: Lets you choose the encoding for the export file, either Latin 1
(ISO8859-1), US ASCII or UTF8 (standard mechanism used by Unicode for
encoding wide character values into a byte stream).
Contents Tab
■
Export Visible Columns: Check this box to export all the information displayed in the
list.
Note:
When the Export Visible Columns box is checked, the selection in the
Export/Do not Export lists is not taken into account.
■
Export: List of the columns that will be exported.
■
Don't export: List of the columns that will not be exported.
Uncheck the Export Visible Columns box and doubleclick on the column heading to switch
them from the Export list to the Do not export list and inversely.
Recycling a Cartridge
Recycling cartridges is performed automatically if you select the Data stored during option
when creating or editing a pool. In that case, a cartridge is recycled, as needed, during
a backup if no other cartridge is available, and if at least one cartridge has reached the
end of its retention period. See “Recycle”, page 205 for details.
In order to minimize drive use, cartridge recycling takes place in two steps: in the first
step, a drive is allocated to modify the cartridge label to indicate that the cartridge
becomes available for a writing session. The second step does not require a drive and
concerns only the cleaning of the catalog.
The catalog cleaning is automatically performed every day at noon. You can modify the
time of cleaning with the Catalog Cleaning Time (date_run_catalog_gc) tunable.
You can also cancel the automatic catalog cleaning job using the Disable Daily Catalog
Cleaning (disable_catalog_gc) tunable. In that case, the catalog cleaning must be
manually performed using the tina_odbgc command.
For details concerning the tunables, see the Time Navigator Tunables guide.
216
For details concerning the Time Navigator commands, see the Time Navigator
You can also recycle a cartridge manually by following the procedure below.
Note:
The recycling operation is not available for:
- Non-rewritable cartridges (WORM).
- Cartridges that have been closed by Time Navigator following an error
(cartridges closed by the user are recyclable)
To recycle a cartridge manually
Note:
If the cartridge(s) you want to recycle contains the last full backup, or any of
the incremental backups performed after the last full backup, of a backup folder
for a given strategy, a warning appears to inform you that your operation may
corrupt data integrity. You will have the option either to proceed with the
recycling or recycle only the cartridges that do not contain critical data. This
ensures that the last backup version of a backup folder remains available to be
restored at all times.
1.
Choose Storage-Media-Management.
2.
Select a pool in the media pool list.
3.
Select the media to recycle in the list and click on Recycle.
The Cartridge Recycle window appears. It displays the available drives.
4.
Click on Start.
5.
When the progress bar is full, click on Close.
Note:
The recycling operation described here only takes care of step 1 in the recycling
process (see “Recycle”, page 205 for details). To actually complete the
removal of all recycled file versions from the catalog, either wait for the next
catalog maintenance job to occur (that job is automatically launched every day
at 12:00) or launch the tina_odbgc -purge command (see the
Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide for details).
Chapter 5
217
Closing a Cartridge
A cartridge is automatically closed if:
■
It is full.
■
An error occurs when writing data (ex: an error such as a media defect).
You can manually close a partially filled or empty cartridge at any time to avoid writing
on it. See “Close”, page 207 for details.
To close a cartridge
1.
2.
3.
Select the media to close in the list and click on Close.
The Cartridge Close window appears. It displays the available drives.
4.
Click on Start.
5.
Reopening a Cartridge
It is possible to reopen a cartridge that has been previously closed.
To reopen a cartridge
1.
2.
3.
Select the media to reopen in the list and click on Reopen.
The Cartridge Reopen window appears. It displays the available drives.
4.
Click on Start.
5.
218
Deleting a Cartridge
When you delete a cartridge, you delete the cartridge object and all its content from the
catalog. The actual information contained on the cartridge, including its label, remains.
If you reuse a deleted cartridge in the same catalog, it will appear as a Lost+Found, that
is, Time Navigator will be able to read its label but will not recognize it as belonging
to the catalog you deleted it from.
Note:
Cartridges that have been destroyed or lost should be deleted, to make sure that
Time Navigator does not request them at any time in the future.
To delete a cartridge
1.
2.
3.
Select the cartridge(s) to delete in the list and click on Delete.
The Cartridge Deletion window appears. It displays the available drives.
4.
Click on Start.
Note:
Deleting can be quite lengthy if the cartridge contains a high number of objects.
Warning:
5.
Removing versions from the catalog is a very delicate operation that must
not be interrupted. Do not quit the application during this operation or you
may corrupt your catalog.
Erasing a Cartridge
When you erase a cartridge, the cartridge label is physically erased. The cartridge is
labeled as “spare”. The cartridge content becomes inaccessible for the catalog, but the
cartridge object still exists. This allows the catalog to keep the wear and cleaning
information after the cartridge has been erased.
Chapter 5
219
You should use this feature if the cartridge content is of no interest to you and you want
to reuse the cartridge.
Note:
This operation is not available for non-rewritable (WORM) cartridges.
To erase a cartridge
1.
2.
3.
Select the cartridge(s) to erase in the list, then click on -> Spare.
The Cartridge Erase window appears. It displays the available drives.
4.
Click on Start.
5.
Duplicating a Cartridge
Duplicating a cartridge can be divided in two operations:
■
The copy of data from one cartridge to another.
■
The creation of one version by copied object (directory or file) in the catalog.
Note:
Duplicating a cartridge requires at least two drives.
To duplicate a cartridge
1.
2.
3.
Select the cartridge(s) to duplicate in the list, then click on Duplicate.
The Media Pool Selection window appears.
4.
Select the pool you want the duplicated cartridge to belong to then click on OK.
The Cartridge Duplicating window appears.
5.
Click on Start.
220
6.
Note:
Duplicating a cartridge can take a long time if the number of backed up files
is high. The operation can entail the mounting of several source cartridges if a
file belonging to the cartridge to be duplicated is spread out on several
cartridges.
Note:
Once the duplication is complete, the duplicated versions become the primary
versions, and the original versions become secondary. Thus if a restore is
required Time Navigator requests the duplicated cartridge. You may modify
this behavior with the tunable "Use Source Cartridge when Restoring
Duplicated Cartridge" (see the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details).
Putting a Cartridge Off-line
The off-line operation consists of removing a cartridge from the library and putting it in
the out mailbox.
Warning:
If the library is not equipped with at least one out mailbox, you have to
manually remove the cartridge from the slot, but the catalog is informed that
the cartridge is no longer inside the library.
To put a cartridge off-line
1.
2.
3.
Select the cartridge(s) to put offline.
4.
Click on Off-line.
The Set Cartridge Offline window appears.
Tip:
If you are putting offline more cartridges than there are mailbox slots in
the library, check the Retry if mailbox full box. When this option is checked,
once all mailbox slots are full, Time Navigator waits for the
administrator to empty the slots and places cartridges into the slots as
soon as they are emptied, until all selected cartridges are put offline.
Chapter 5
221
If you do not check the option, an operator request is issued each time
the mailbox is full, thus sending the administrator back and forth
between the library to empty the mailbox and Time Navigator
Administration Console to suspend and acknowledge the operator
requests.
5.
Click on Start.
6.
Viewing Cartridge Statistical Information
You can view statistical information for a single cartridge such as hours of use, last mode
used, and number of mounts.
To view a single cartridge information
1.
2.
3.
Select the cartridge that you want to view the information for and click on
Information. The Cartridge Information window appears. See “Cartridge Information
Window - Information Tab”, page 221 or the “Cartridge Information Window Jobs Tab”, page 223.
Cartridge Information Window - Information Tab
222
Hours of Use: The number of hours the cartridge was in use.
Last Use Date: The last date the cartridge was used.
Last Use Mode: The last use was for either writing or reading.
Number of Mounts: The number of times the cartridge was mounted in a drive.
Number of Tape Files: The number of tape files present on the tape. A tape file contains all
the objects written during a single backup session.
Number of Recyclings: The number of times the cartridge has been recycled.
Recyclable: Recycling status: Since (days, hours), In (days, hours), No (data integrity), No
(worn cartridge), No (data integrity), No (unknown reason), No (WORM), No, or - (if
the cartridge is empty or belongs to the Spare or Lost and Found pool).
Volume Read: The amount of information that has been read from the cartridge.
Volume Written: The amount of information that has been written on the cartridge since the
beginning of its life. This value is not reinitialized when the cartridge is recycled.
Filling: The amount of information currently on the cartridge. On a new cartridge that has
never been recycled, this value will be the same as that for Volume Written.
Comment: Allows you to enter any information about this cartridge that can be of use for
later reference. The comment is recorded in the Time Navigator catalog.
Note:
If you had already filled the Comment field when creating or editing the media
pool, the same comment appears in the cartridge Comment field. See “Creating
a Media Pool”, page 196 for details.
Chapter 5
223
Cartridge Information Window - Jobs Tab
ID: Unique identification number for each job.
Folder: Name of the backup or archiving folder involved with the job.
Description: Contains the job type, i.e., Backup (full or incremental), Synthetic,
Archiving, Restoration, Cartridge Duplication or Maintenance.
Recyclable: Data recycling status:
■
Yes if the data is recyclable
■
Data integrity if the job contains either the last full backup, or any of the incremental
backups performed after the last full backup, of a backup folder for a given
strategy. Such data is not recyclable. This ensures that the last backup version of
a backup folder remains available at all times to be restored.
■
Data in retention time period if the data has not yet reach the maximum retention period.
Such data is not recyclable.
Status: Indicates the job status.
Note:
If the job is cancelled on request or on error, the data is deemed unreliable to
perform a restore and it automatically appears as Recyclable data.
224
Submit Date: Date and time when the job is submitted.
End Date: Date and time when the job is finished or cancelled.
Externalizing a Cartridge
The cartridge externalization feature provides assistance for quickly detecting cartridges
that are eligible to be put offline and externalized in order to free space in the library.
It also allows you to view cartridges that should be brought online again in order to be
recycled.
For details concerning the cartridge externalization feature, see “Externalizing
Cartridges”, page 203.
Offline Criteria
By default, Time Navigator considers that a cartridge is eligible to be brought offline if
it meets the following criteria :
■
It is online. The name of the library appears in the Location column of the Media
Information window.
■
It belongs to a cyclical media pool.
■
It is either full or closed.
■
It does not contain critical data (last full backup and following incremental backups).
■
It will not be recyclable within 5 days.
Online Criteria
By default, Time Navigator considers that a cartridge is eligible to be brought online if
it meets the following criteria :
■
It is offline. The External status appears in the Location column of the Media Information
window.
■
It belongs to a cyclical media pool.
■
It will be recyclable in less than 1 day.
To view cartridges eligible to be brought off/online
1.
2.
The Media Information window appears.
3.
In the In/Out Status column, check the cartridge status:
Chapter 5
■
"Offline Ready": the cartridge is eligible to be brought offline.
■
"Online Ready": the cartridge is eligible to be brought online.
225
To modify the time period criteria
Note:
Since the calculation of these criteria can take a long time, you may disactivate
this function by unchecking the checkbox next to this button. When the
checkbox is disactivated, the In/Out Status button is greyed out and no
information appears in the In/Out Status column.
1.
2.
Select a pool in the media pool list. The Media Information window appears.
3.
Click on the In/Out Period button. The In/Out Period window appears.
4.
Modify the settings as decribed in “In/Out Period Window”, page 226.
5.
Click on OK.
Command Line
If you would rather view all the cartridges of the catalog instead of only the cartridges
belonging to one media pool, use the command line feature: the
tina_library_control command for cartridges eligible to be brought offline and the
tina_cart_control command for cartridges eligible to be brought online. The
command options allow to filter and sort the list according to your needs.
See the Time Navigator Command Line Interface Guide, for details.
226
In/Out Period Window
Displays cartridges ready to put offline within: if you choose 2 weeks, the cartridge is marked
as "Offline Ready" only if it is recyclable in more than 2 weeks.
Displays cartridges ready to put online within: if you choose 6 days, the cartridge is marked as
"Online Ready" only if it is recyclable in less than 6 days.
Replacing a Cartridge
Defective, worn-out or otherwise unsuitable cartridges must be replaced physically in the
Library, and logically in Time Navigator.
To replace a cartridge with a short retention period:
1.
2.
Close the cartridge and put it off-line in Time Navigator.
3.
As soon as the cartridge becomes Recyclable since, delete it in Time Navigator.
4.
In the time between these two actions, insert a new cartridge into the library.
To replace a cartridge with a long retention period:
1.
2.
If the cartridge is still readable and working, duplicate it.
3.
After duplication, delete the original cartridge in the catalog, and remove it from
the library.
4.
If the cartridge is only partially readable, close it and put it offline.
5.
As soon as the cartridge becomes Recyclable since, delete it in Time Navigator.
6.
In the time between these two actions, insert a new cartridge into the library.
Writing a Cartridge Label
During a writing session, if a spare cartridge (not labelled) is needed, Time Navigator
will label it before writing on it. This procedure is therefore optional. However it is
possible to label cartridges ahead of time.
Chapter 5
227
For more information on cartridge labels, see “Cartridge Identification”, page 200.
Note:
For Time Navigator, a spare cartridge can contain information that has been
“manually” backed up. Labeling a cartridge deletes this information.
Note:
Time Navigator media administrator’s rights are required to perform this
operation.
To write a cartridge label
1.
Choose Storage-Media-Write Label. The Media Pool list appears.
2.
Select the media pool for which you want to label cartridges, then click on OK. An
error message is displayed if no drive is associated with the media pool, otherwise,
the Label Cartridge window appears.
3.
Enter the number of cartridges you want to label. They will be labelled in a row.
The description field contains, by default, the catalog name. You may change the
field content. Whatever description you enter will be included on each cartridge.
Click on OK.
4.
If the drive needs to be manually loaded, insert the cartridge to label in the drive.
The In Progress window appears. It keeps you informed of the labeling process.
5.
While labeling is in progress, click on Cancel to stop labeling. Once labeling is
over, click on Close.
Labeling occurs in the drive associated with the pool.
Note:
An error message is displayed if the cartridge is not spare (cartridge already
labeled), is write protected or if the manual drive is empty.
228
Reading a Cartridge Label
Reading the label of a cartridge can only be performed with Time Navigator Library
Manager. See “Label vs. Bar Code Viewing”, page 243.
Adding a Prefix to a Cartridge Label
In addition to labeling cartridges, you can add a prefix to all the cartridges belonging to
a given catalog in order to identify them easily if you are working with several catalogs.
Adding a prefix can only apply to future cartridge creation. It does not affect current
cartridges.
For more information on labels, see “Cartridge Identification”, page 200.
To add a prefix to a cartridge label
1.
Choose Storage-Media-Prefix. The Edit Prefix of Cartridge Labels window appears.
2.
Enter alphanumerical characters in the Prefix of Cartridge Labels area to add a prefix to
the cartridge labels of the working catalog.
3.
Click on OK. Click on Yes to confirm the prefix.
Editing the Cartridge Life Cycle
The Cartridge Life Cycle parameter indicates the maximum number of times a cartridge label
can be read by a drive before being worn out. It is set at the drive level, i.e., it will be
the same for all the cartridges used by a particular drive. This parameter is set by default
according to the drive type you are creating.
Note:
The Cartridge Life Cycle parameter is used by Time Navigator to calculate the
Cartridge Wear level.
See “Creating a Drive”, page 170 and “Cartridge Wear”, page 203 for details.
You may edit the Cartridge Life Cycle parameter at any point.
To edit the cartridge life cycle
1.
2.
Choose Drive-Properties. The Drive Properties window is displayed.
Chapter 5
3.
Select the General tab.
4.
Modify the Cartridge Life Cycle settings as needed.
5.
229
Displaying the Cartridge Wear Level
The Cartridge Wear level is calculated with the Cartridge Life Cycle parameter found in the
Drive Properties window.
See “Creating a Drive”, page 170 and “Cartridge Wear”, page 203 for details.
To display the cartridge wear level
1.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. The media pool list is displayed.
2.
Select a Pool. The Media Information window appears.
3.
Click on Column Choice. Select the Wear Level column. Close the Column Selection
window.
4.
The Wear Level percentage is displayed.
Warning:
When a cartridge is worn, it is recommended to duplicate it in order to avoid
losing information (see “Duplicating a Cartridge”, page 219).
Setting the Cleaning Cartridge Parameters
If you are using robotized drives and you want Time Navigator to manage drive cleaning
automatically, you must set the following:
■
■
The Time of Use since last cleaning and Time of Use before cleaning parameters in the Drive
Properties window. This operation is described in “Automatically Cleaning
Drives”, page 184.
The cleaning cartridge parameters in the Library Properties window.
To set the cleaning cartridge parameters
1.
Select a library and choose Library-Properties and click on Library Properties.
2.
Click on the Standard tab.
230
3.
Make sure the Cleaning Slot option is checked.
4.
Define or modify the cleaning cartridge settings:
■
■
■
5.
The Reserved Slot in the library for the cleaning cartridge. In most cases, when
you create a library, the reserved slot for cleaning is 0. Enter the slot number
you want to use for the cleaning cartridge.
The number of Cleanings already performed with the cleaning cartridge. By
default, when you create a library, the number of cleaning is 0.
The cleaning cartridge Life Cycle. It is the maximum number of cleanings
authorized with the cartridge. This is defined by the cleaning cartridge
manufacturer.
Warning:
Setting the cleaning cartridge information properly is very important since
you may damage your drive if you use a worn cleaning cartridge.
The counter representing the number of cleanings already performed with the cartridge
is automatically incremented each time you use the cleaning cartridge.
Chapter 5
231
If you have not reserved a slot for the cleaning cartridge, you must manually manage its
wear by specifying every cleaning performed with the cartridge.
Time Navigator automatically asks you to change the cleaning cartridge when the
number of performed cleanings is greater than the cartridge life cycle. You must then
manually put the cleaning cartridge in the reserved slot.
The cleaning cartridge settings can be defined when creating a library or modified when
editing it.
232
233
C H A P T E R
6
Time Navigator Library
Manager
6
In this chapter, both terms "media" and "cartridge" are used to refer to either a magnetic
tape, a digital optical disk, or files on a disk.
Managing Libraries
Libraries can be controlled and managed with Time Navigator Library Manager. This
application lets you:
Note:
■
View the library content
■
Perform library operations
■
Perform drive operations
■
Perform media operations
■
Perform slot operations
In order to use Time Navigator Library Manager, a user must have been
assigned the “Library Use” rights in his profile. See “Defining Personal
Access Rights”, page 123 for details.
To view the library contents
■
■
Choose Library-Operations. If the current catalog uses a single library, it will be
displayed in Time Navigator Library Manager. If several libraries are present
you will be asked to select the library to display.
You have the option to use the command line to start the Time Navigator Library
Manager. If you use the command line, you will have to specify the catalog and
the library to be displayed unless you are working in a single catalog, single library
234
environment. Use the following parameters:
tina_library -catalog <catalog_name> -library <library_name>.
Or you can simply enter tina_library and select items in
the windows as they appear on the screen.
Or use Windows Start menu to launch Time Navigator Library
Manager.
Time Navigator Library Manager appears:
Viewing a Different Catalog or Library
You may at any time change the catalog or the library you are viewing.
To change catalog
1.
Choose Catalog-Connect.
2.
Select a catalog in the Catalog Selection Window and click on OK.
Chapter 6
235
To change library
1.
Choose Library-Change.
2.
Select a library in the Library Selection Window and click on OK.
Label vs. Bar Code Viewing
You have the option at any time to switch between viewing Label, Full Label or Bar Code
information for the cartridges, provided that the library you are using does support Bar
Codes.
To choose a viewing option
Choose View-View and one of the following:
■
Label: to view the cartridge label as defined in the media pool properties.
■
Bar Code: to view the cartridge bar code, if your library supports them.
■
Full label: to view the cartridge full label, if the label is longer than the default slot
size. The slot size is then modified to suit the label size.
Modifying Slots Arrangement
You can modify the library properties to have slots arranged either horizontally or
vertically, modify the location of the first slot and set the number of slots per line/
column.
To modify slots arrangement
1.
Choose Library-Properties.
2.
Select the Geometry Tab.
3.
Modify the geometry options according to your needs.
See “Editing Library Properties”, page 235 for details.
Library Operations
Editing Library Properties
You may verify or modify your library properties at any time. The library properties are
set by default upon library creation. Time Navigator assigns properties to a library
according to manufacturers’ specifications.
236
The library properties contain information such as whether or not a Cleaning Cartridge is
being used, whether the library manages Bar Code or not, whether the slots in the window
are displayed horizontally or vertically, ...etc.
Not all properties can be edited.
Even though Time Navigator recognizes libraries and sets their properties, you can edit
them in order to specify your library behaviour.
Warning:
If mishandled, editing library properties can prevent the library from
working properly.
To edit library properties
1.
Choose Library-Properties.
2.
Select the tab containing the properties you want to edit: Standard, Generic, Specific
or Geometry. See “Library Properties”, page 237 for details.
3.
Edit the properties as needed.
4.
Click on OK.
Tip:
If you have made an undesired modification, click on Default configuration to get
all library properties back to the Time Navigator original settings.
Chapter 6
237
Library Properties
For a complete list of Library Properties, see “Appendix 1: Advanced Library
Reinitializing Libraries
Reinitializing a library allows Time Navigator to match the library logical status with
the library actual physical status. The logical status is the image of the library
Time Navigator builds in the catalog.
Note:
A Bar code reinitialization is automatically performed when the library is first
created.
238
Bar code, Read Label or Full Inventory Reinitialization
Bar code
The Bar Code reinitialization can be used even if the library does not support barcode. In that case, the library simply checks the full/empty and
available/not available status of the slots and drives. This type of reinitialization does not involve any reading or moving of the cartridges and is
therefore much faster than the other reinitialization types.
Read Label
A Read Label reinitialization involves moving and reading every single
cartridge selected for the reinitialization, but it may be unable to solve inconsistencies, if a cartridge has been moved manually, for example. When
you perform a Read Label reinitialization, any unknown cartridge whose
label is displayed as ?????, will be identified by Time Navigator.
Full Inventory
A Full inventory consists in checking the full/empty and available/not
available status of the slots and drives and in identifying the cartridges
through their bar code, when this is possible. Then, the cartridges which
remain unknown (????) are identified through the reading of their label.
This is the slowest type of reinitialization, but it gives the surest reading
of library status.
Warning:
A Read Label reinitialization or a Full Inventory can be quite lengthy
depending on your configuration. It may vary from a few minutes to a few
hours.
Full vs. Partial Reinitialization
A reinitialization can be either partial: only selected locations are synchronized, or full:
all locations in the libraries, including drives and mailbox slots, are synchronized.
Tip:
A partial reinitialization can be used to identify a single cartridge.
During the reinitialization, the library is busy and Time Navigator Library Manager is
not active.
You can also manually trigger the library reinitialization.
Launching a Library Reinitialization
To launch a full reinitialization:
1.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, choose Library-Reinitialization-Full
or
Chapter 6
239
In Time Navigator Administration Console, select a library, choose LibraryReinitialization
or
Right Click in Time Navigator Library Manager background, select
Reinitialization
and one of the following:
2.
■
Bar Code: to launch a bar code reinitialization.
■
Read Label: to launch a label reinitialization.
■
Full Inventory: to launch a library full inventory.
In the Question window, click on Yes to start the reinitialization.
To launch a partial reinitialization:
1.
Select the locations you want to synchronized (slots, drives, mailboxes) in
Time Navigator Library Manager.
2.
Choose Library-Reinitialization-Selection only and one of the following:
3.
■
Bar Code: to launch a bar code reinitialization.
■
Read Label: to launch a label reinitialization.
■
Full Inventory: to launch a library full inventory.
To identify a single cartridge, right click on the cartridge, select Identify.
During the reinitialization, a picker (mechanical arm) is displayed on the bottom right of
the library icon in the Network area to indicate that the library is being reinitialized.
Note:
Reinitializing a library can also be performed using tina_library_control,
a functionality available in the command line. For more information on the
tina_library_control command, see the "tina_library_control" section in
the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide.
240
Drives
Drive Information
Time Navigator Library Manager indicates whether the drive is full or empty, whether
the drive is active or not. It also shows the alarms and locks applied to a drive and the
drive activity, if any.
There are three kinds of information.
Drive Status
Visual Clue
Enabled
No specific sign on drive icon
Maintenance
A yellow wrench on drive icon
Enabled for
Restore Only
A crossed out pencil on drive icon
Disabled (See
Note 1:)
Red cross on drive icon
Except status
(See Note 2:)
A yellow triangle on drive icon when the drive contains a cartridge
Drive Status
Visual Clue
Empty
Drive is of same color as background
Full
Drive is green, the cartridge name appears
Minor Alarm
Yellow dot on the right of the drive icon
Major Alarm
Orange dot on the right of the drive icon
Critical Alarm
Red dot on the right of the drive icon
Locked
Note 3:)
A lock appears on the drive
(See
Drive
Activity
Visual Clue
Reading
Green arrow under the drive icon
Writing
Red dot under the drive icon
Forwarding
Two right-pointing black arrows under the drive icon
Chapter 6
Rewinding
241
Two left-pointing black arrows under the drive icon
Note 1:
When a drive is disabled, it indicates that the drive is unavailable. This unavailability can
be of two types:
■
■
Logical unavailability: Time Navigator decides whether a drive is available or
not.
Physical unavailability: the decision resides with the library handler. The drive
may be damaged. In this case, the red cross on the drive is dimmed.
Note 2:
When a cartridge in the drive has an Except status, it indicates that the physical drive
contents does not match the catalog contents. Choose Library-Operations-Reinitialization-Full
Inventory to solve the inconsistency.
Note 3:
There are two types of locks:
■
■
A lock on the cartridge object located inside the drive (the lock appears in the drive
upper left corner). It indicates that the cartridge itself is reserved by a
Time Navigator process.
A lock on the drive (the lock appears in the drive lower left corner). It indicates
that the drive is reserved by a Time Navigator process.
Modifying a Drive Mode
You may need to modify a drive's mode (Drive Information) in order to perform
maintenance operations or to repair it if it is broken.
242
The following table shows the different modes a drive can be in:
Drive Mode
Description
Enabled
All operations can be performed.
Enabled for restore only
Only restore operations can be performed and non job related operations
such as: erasing, recycling, labelling, or identifying a cartridge; cleaning
or testing the drive, reinitializing the library.
Note: During a restore, drives in the mode Enabled for Restore only are
used in priority. If none is available, another drive is chosen. In addition,
if the cartridge required to perform the restore is already mounted in a
drive, that drive is used for the restore regardless of the drive mode.
Disabled
No operation can be performed.
Maintenance
Only a drive test, a cartridge identification, or a cartridge move can be
performed.
To change the drive mode:
1.
Select the drive you want to operate on..
2.
Choose Drive and one of the following: Enable, Enable for restore only, Maintenance or
Disable, depending on the mode you want to apply to the drives.
Enabling/Disabling
By default, when you create a drive, it is disabled. You must enable it in order to perform
any job (backup, archiving, restore...).
The disabled status indicates that the drive is not used for performing backups or
archiving.
If a drive is actually disconnected from the host, for maintenance reasons or for any other
reason, you must temporarily disable it to prevent Time Navigator from attempting to
use it.
See also “Changing the Mode of the Drive”, page 182 and “Testing Drives”, page 183.
To enable/disable a drive
In Time Navigator Library Manager, select the drive you want to enable/disable.
Choose Drive-Enable or Drive-Disable.
or
Chapter 6
243
Right click on a drive and choose Enable or Disable.
Testing a Drive
Testing a drive allows you to check if it works correctly.
Note:
A Spare cartridge must be present in the library to be able to perform a drive
test.
To test a drive:
1.
In the Library Operation window, select the drive you want to test, choose Drive-Test.
Time Navigator performs a series of tests on the drive.
Tip:
2.
You can also right click on a drive and choose Test. Time Navigator
performs a series of tests on the drive.
Click on Close when all the tests are finished.
Cleaning a Drive
Drives must be cleaned on a regular basis to maintain them in good working conditions.
To clean a drive with a dedicated Cleaning slot:
1.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, select the drive you want to clean.
2.
Choose Drive-Cleaning.
or
Right click on a drive and choose Cleaning.
To clean a drive without a dedicated Cleaning slot:
1.
Put a cleaning cartridge in the drive to be cleaned.
2.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, select the drive to be cleaned.
3.
Choose Drive-Cleaning.
244
Use this operation to eject a media from a drive. You do not have to specify the
destination slot, Time Navigator will choose it.
To eject a media
In Time Navigator Library Manager, select the drive you want to empty and
choose Drive-Eject Media.
or
Right click on a drive and choose Eject Media.
Chapter 6
Cartridges
Slot/Cartridge Information
The following table sums up the visual information attached to a slot:
Slot
Description
Visual Clue
S0
Cleaning slot, full. In most cases, Slot 0 is
reserved for cleaning.
Slot is green, name of cartridge “Cleaning”
appears with blue cross on tape icon
S1
Slot disabled (catalog level)
No-entry sign appear on slot
Full slot with unknown cartridge
Slot is green, ???? appears on cartridge
Full slot with spare cartridge
Slot is green, name of cartridge appears
Cartridge in slot is locked (reserved by a
process) (See Note 1:)
A lock appears in the slot upper left corner
S2
245
246
Slot
Description
Visual Clue
S3, S4
Empty available slot
Slot is of same color as background, a dash
appears on slot
S5
Full slot with Lost+Found cartridge
LF appears in the cartridge label
Cartridge in slot is locked (reserved by a
process)
A lock appears in the slot upper left corner
Slot is locked (reserved by a process) (See
Note 1:)
A lock appears in the slot lower left corner
A major alarm has been issued on
cartridge in slot
Slot is orange
(a red slot would indicate a fatal alarm, a
yellow slot, a minor alarm)
S6
Empty slots, available and locked
(reserved by a process) (See Note 1:)
No cartridge name appears, lock in the lower
left corner, dash
S7
Except status slot, the physical library
contents does not match the catalog
contents. Perform a Full Inventory
reinitialization (Library-OperationsReinitialization-Full Inventory menu).
????? appears on the cartridge and a yellow
triangle appears on the left of the cartridge.
S8
Empty slot disabled (library handler level)
(See Note 2:)
No cartridge name appears, broken in Unix,
dimmed in Windows, dash on slot
S9
Empty slot disabled (catalog and library
handler level) (See Note 2:)
No cartridge name, dimmed no-entry sign,
broken in Unix, dimmed in Windows, dash
S10
Empty slot, disabled (catalog level) (See
Note 2:)
No cartridge name, no-entry sign
Note 1:
There are two types of locks:
■
■
A lock on the cartridge object (upper lock). It indicates that the cartridge itself is
reserved by a Time Navigator process.
A lock on the slot (lower lock). It indicates that the slot is reserved by a
Time Navigator process.
Note 2:
When a slot is disabled, it indicates that the slot is unavailable. This unavailability can
be of two types:
■
Logical unavailability: Time Navigator decides whether a slot is available or not.
For instance if the library is shared between several catalogs, some slots may be
unavailable for a particular catalog.
Chapter 6
247
Physical unavailability: the decision resides with the library handler. The slot may
be damaged.
■
Media Operations
Some of the media operations available from Time Navigator Library Manager are the
same as the ones available through the main menu Storage-Media-Management in
To Recycle, Close, Reopen, Erase or Delete media
In the Library Operation window, select the cartridges you need, choose MediaOperations, select All Cartridges or Selection Only and select the operation you want to
perform.
or
Right click on a cartridge, select the operation you want to perform.
In addition, with Time Navigator Library Manager, you may identify a cartridge, bring
a cartridge On or Off line and move a cartridge from one slot to another.
Cartridge Status
If a cartridge is unknown to the catalog, it will appear in the library with questions marks.
You must identify it before attempting any operation on that cartridge. This operation is
equivalent to performing a library reinitialization for a single cartridge. Upon
identification, a cartridge will take on one of the following statuses:
Cartridge Status
Description
Spare
No Time Navigator label present on tape. The cartridge is ready to be labelled
for a backup or an archiving. The cartridge is either brand new or has just been
erased. It belongs to the “Spare” pool.
Lost + Found
A Time Navigator label is present on the cartridge. It is not recognized as
belonging to the current catalog. This cartridge will not be used for a backup.
It belongs to the “Lost+Found” pool.
Known
A Time Navigator label is present. It is recognized as belonging to the current
catalog.
See “Cartridge Status”, page 201 for details.
248
Identifying a Cartridge
To identify a cartridge:
In the Library Operations window, right click on the cartridge to identify and select
Identify.
or
Choose Reinitialization-Selection Only- Read Label. See “Reinitializing Libraries”,
Bringing Cartridges On/Off line
The offline operation consists of removing a cartridge from the library. The online
operation consists of putting a cartridge in the library.
Selecting cartridges to be put on/off line
Time Navigator provides assistance for quickly detecting cartridges that are eligible to
be put offline and externalized.
This feature also allows you to draw up the list of offline cartridges that should be put
online because they have passed their retention period.
See “Externalizing Cartridges”, page 203 for details.
The lists are displayed via two commands: tina_library_control for cartridges to
be put offline and tina_cart_control for cartridges to be put online. Some options
allows you to sort and filter the cartridge lists according to your needs.
See the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide for details.
Bringing Cartridges On/Off line
Before bringing cartridge(s) online, make sure you have enough empty available slot(s)
in your library.
Note:
To bring a cleaning cartridge online or offline, see “Cleaning Slot”, page 253.
Chapter 6
249
Putting Cartridges On-line
Note:
Only off-line cartridges can be put on-line.
To bring cartridges online with a mailbox
1.
Put the cartridge(s) in the "in" or "in/out" mailbox slot(s) and proceed.
2.
Select all the mailbox slot(s).
3.
Perform a Bar Code reinitialization, to inform the catalog of the empty/full status of
the mailbox slot(s).
4.
Select the mailbox slot(s) containing cartridges to be brought on line and choose
Media-On-Line.
or
Right click on the mailbox slot(s) one after the other and select On-Line (this menu
is only available if the slot is full).
The cartridge(s) will be put in available slots and identified. If no drive is available at
the time, the cartridges will appear as unknown (????).
To bring cartridges online without a mailbox
1.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, choose Media-On-Line. The following screen
appears:
Note:
When you select the Media-On-Line command, all the slots available to
receive a cartridge become locked to avoid being used by another
procedure. Thus the “non locked available slots” in the screen above
refer to slots that were not locked and available before the operation
started.
250
2.
Click on View List to get a list of the slots available to receive a cartridge.
3.
Insert the cartridge(s), close the library door and click on OK.
4.
Time Navigator performs a partial barcode (read label if barcode is not an option)
reinitialization of all the slots available to receive a cartridge.
Putting Cartridges Off-line
Note:
Only on-line cartridges can be put off-line.
To put cartridges off-line with a mailbox:
1.
Select the cartridges to put off-line.
2.
Choose Media-Off-line. The Off-line Confirm Window appears.
Tip:
If you are putting off-line more cartridges than there are mailbox slots
in the library, check the Retry if mailbox full box. Once all mailbox slots are
full, Time Navigator waits for the administrator to empty the slots and
places cartridges into the slots as soon as they are emptied, until all
selected cartridges are put off-line.
If you do not check the option, an operator request is issued each time
the mailbox is full, thus sending the administrator back and forth
between the library to empty the mailbox and Administration Console to
suspend and acknowledge the operator requests.
3.
Check that the selected cartridges are the ones that you want to put off-line and
click on Confirm.
4.
Empty the mailboxes manually.
5.
Perform a Bar Code Reinitialization in order to indicate the mailbox full/empty
status to the catalog.
To put cartridges off-line without a mailbox:
1.
Select the cartridges to put off-line.
2.
Choose Media-Off-line.The following screen appears:
Chapter 6
251
3.
Click on View List to get a list of the slots to be emptied, i.e., the slots you selected
in step1.
4.
Empty the slot and click on OK to validate.
5.
Time Navigator performs a barcode reinitialization on the emptied slots, to verify
that the slots are empty.
Moving Cartridges
Time Navigator Library Manager allows you to move cartridges, from a location to
another.
Note:
Users cannot move the cleaning cartridge from one slot to another. Users are
only allowed to put the cleaning cartridge on or offline.
Note:
The destination must be empty.
To move a cartridge:
1.
Select the cartridge you want to move.
2.
Choose Media-Moving.
3.
Select the destination location in the Destination Choice Window and click on OK.
Tip:
You can also drag and drop the cartridge from its present location to its
destination. Except for the cleaning cartridge that cannot be dragged and
dropped.
To move several cartridges at once, use the Slots-Change Content menu. See “Changing
252
Slot Content”, page 253.
Replacing a Cartridge
Defective, worn-out or otherwise unsuitable cartridges must be replaced physically in the
Library, and logically in Time Navigator. See “Replacing a Cartridge”, page 226.
Slot Operations
Mailbox Slots
The mailbox slots are used to add or remove cartridges in the library.
A mailbox slot can be:
■
an in slot, for incoming cartridges,
■
an out slot, for outgoing cartridges,
■
an in/out slot for either incoming or outgoing cartridges.
Enabling/Disabling a Slot
You can disable a slot to prevent the current catalog from using that slot and the cartridge
it may contain. Enabling it allows the catalog to use the slot and associated cartridge.
This feature can be used to avoid mixing tapes inside the library if several catalogs are
using the same library.
When a slot is disabled, the catalog will view it as logically unavailable and will not
attempt to use it until it is enabled again.
To enable/disable a slot
1.
Select the slots to enable/disable.
2.
Choose Slots-Enable or Disable.
or
Right click on a single slot and select Enable or Disable.
Tip:
It is possible to display only the enabled slots in TTime Navigator
Library Manager if your library is used by several catalogs, for
example. To do so, choose Slots-View enabled only.
Chapter 6
253
Changing Slot Content
This feature is useful to bring cartridges on and off line in a single operation.
To change slot content
1.
Select the slots you want to modify.
2.
Choose Slots-Change Content. The following window appears:
3.
Click on View list to see the list of the slots to modify, i.e., the slots designated in
step 1.
4.
Change the slot content as needed and click on OK to validate.
5.
Time Navigator will initiate a partial reinitialization of the selected slots, in a Bar
Code mode if available, otherwise in a Read Label mode.
Cleaning Slot
The cleaning slot is specially designed to handle the cleaning cartridge. Once a slot is
chosen as the cleaning slot, Time Navigator will not attempt to read the cartridge located
inside that slot (during a full read label reinitialization for instance).
Most often, Slot 0 is designated as the cleaning slot. However this is not always the case,
some libraries do not have a preset cleaning slot. You will have to manually set it.
You can change the cleaning slot at any point, but a library cannot contain more than one
cleaning slot.
Some of the functions described below are also available through the Library Properties
window.
If no cleaning slot is defined, use the Add command to create one. If you want to re-assign
the cleaning slot to a different slot, use the Set command. Finally, to delete the cleaning
slot, use the Remove command.
254
To set the cleaning slot
1.
Remove the cartridge from the cleaning slot.
2.
Select the new slot you want to use for cleaning.
3.
Choose Slot-Cleaning Slot-Set.
To create the cleaning slot
1.
Select the slot you want to use for cleaning.
2.
Choose Slot-Cleaning Slot-Add.
To remove the cleaning slot
1.
Remove the cartridge from the cleaning slot.
2.
Choose Slot-Cleaning Slot-Remove.
Chapter 6
255
256
Chapter 6
257
258
Chapter 6
259
260
Chapter 6
261
262
Chapter 6
263
264
Chapter 6
265
266
Chapter 6
267
268
Chapter 6
269
270
Chapter 6
271
272
Chapter 6
273
274
Chapter 6
275
276
Chapter 6
277
278
Chapter 6
279
280
Chapter 6
281
282
Chapter 6
283
284
285
C H A P T E R
7
Automatic Backup
Configuration
7
In this section, you will find the description of the steps required to configure your
Time Navigator environment to perform automatic backups or your data as well as
administration information.
■
“Administration Assistant”, page 291
■
“Backup Wizard”, page 291
■
“Backup Strategies”, page 300
■
“List Administration of Strategies”, page 317
■
“Scheduler”, page 323
■
“Backup Selections”, page 339
■
“List Administration of Backup Selections”, page 357
■
“Macro-multiplexing”, page 364
■
“Backup Status by Platform”, page 368
286
About Time Navigator Backup
Backup Types
There are three types of backup:
■
Full
■
Synthetic full
■
Incremental
The full backup backs up the contents of all directories that have a backup selection
associated with the strategy.
The synthetic full backup is built from previous full and incremental backups and does
not generate any network traffic. Instead of copying objects (files and directories) from
the disk, Time Navigator finds the last backed up version of each object in the catalog
to build the synthetic full backup. For each object, the most recent version is taken into
account, whatever the strategy, i.e., if you are performing a synthetic backup with
strategy A, and the last version of a file was backed up by an incremental session with
strategy B, the synthetic backup will use the version from strategy B.
Warning:
You must have at least two drives available to perform Synthetic Full backups
since both a reading and a writing session are involved.
The incremental backup only backs up the objects that have been modified or created
since the last backup (either full or incremental of the same strategy). If your very first
backup is incremental, all files and directories will be backed up as they would have been
with a full backup.
Parallel Backups
Time Navigator Parallel Backup is a functionality that increases system performance
by splitting backup jobs into several processes that run simultaneously. Each process
backs up one backup selection.
When the parallel backup is in progress, each process is shown in Time Navigator Job
Manager as it takes place. When the parallel backup is complete, it appears as only one
job.
Chapter 7
287
Limitations
The following are not supported:
■
VMS, NetWare and AS400 operating systems
■
NDMP and SMS applications
■
Replication, archiving, snapshots and synthetic backups features
How to best use parallel backups
As a general rule, define as many backup selections as you have drives (virtual or
physical).
Define backup selections of roughly the same size to distribute the backup load evenly.
If you use a VLS and if the backup selections and the VLS are located on the same
filesystem, parallel backups will be slower.
Defining a parallel backup
To define a parallel backup:
1.
Create several backup selections and check the Parallelization option for each of
them. See “Define Backup Selection Window - Properties Tab”, page 344.
2.
Create a strategy and associate all the backup selections involved in the parallel
backup to this strategy. See “Creating a Backup Selection”, page 339.
3.
Define the Parallelism Index of the strategy. This is the number of simultaneous
data streams. See “Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab”, page 306.
To determine the Parallelism index, add 1 to the number of simultaneous data
streams you want. For example, if you want 4 simultaneous data streams, the
Parallelism index is 5.
Adjusting the Parallelism index
If some of your drives are already used for backup/ restore operations and as a result the
number of available drives is lower than the Parallelism index, some of the parallel
backup jobs will queue up and cause a CPU strain. To avoid this problem, adjust the
Parallelism index so that it equals the number of available drives.
To adjust the Parallelism index, see “Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab”,
page 306.
288
Backup without Using the Cache of the Server
A client platform (agent or storage node) can back up its data directly on a storage device
that is either local or connected to a storage node. This feature prevents data from
transiting via the Time Navigator Server, which reduces network traffic. Only the metadata is sent to the catalog located on the server.
When this function is enabled, the only writing formats available are sidf and tar.
When you perform a such backups, the following Time Navigator features are not
available:
■
Synthetic backup with tar format.
■
tina_export command when exporting to the same catalog
Scheduling issues
Incremental backups allow you to perform quick backups, minimizing the volume of
data transferred. Restore performance, however may not be optimal. If data is spread out
on several media, more media mounting/unmounting will be required to read data. This
may lengthen the overall restore time. Time Navigation will help optimize media
mounting and reduce the restore time of spread out data.
Full backups must be regularly performed for security reasons and to “regroup” data in
order to accelerate its restore. However, they will take more time because of the large
volume to back up. Performance will vary according to the networks and platforms types
being used.
Synthetic full backups do not initiate any activity on the client hosts nor on the network
since all operations are performed on the server where the catalog is located. They allow
you to save time and they avoid overwhelming a low bandwidth network and putting a
strain on client hosts.
They also let you back up migrated or compressed files rapidly. It is not necessary to
retrieve migrated files nor to decompress files compressed on disks by the operating
system (Windows 2000/2003, NetWare, etc.) before backing them up.
Note:
The synthetic full backup does not reflect the reality of the disk at the time it
is performed. For instance, files modified between the last backup taken into
account and the synthetic session are not backed up. It is thus recommended to
schedule a synthetic backup right after an incremental session.
Chapter 7
289
Backup Process
Each strategy is independent from the others. If the example file is backed up by Strategy
A, modified, then backed up by Strategy B, the next incremental session of Strategy A
will also back up the example file.
Backup strategies (defined by the administrator) are associated with backup selections
(defined for each client platform or platform groups by the administrator or users). For
each platform or platform group, backup selections determine the directories and files to
back up.
The server checks every 5 minutes which platforms are to be backed up. It then runs the
tina_backup program on the platforms to be backed up. The server must be able to connect
to the client: the Time Navigator service or daemon must be running on the client.
Note:
Service ends if the tina_daemon on the server is stopped. Clients will no longer
be able to connect. Error messages, such as “Connection error with the host x” or
“The host x does not accept the connection” are logged in the event file.
A backup session starts depending on the date and time defined in the strategy. For each
strategy, tina_backup checks the type of backup. If a full session is scheduled, all backup
selections associated with the strategy are considered. If an incremental session is
scheduled, the backup selections considered are those whose strategy and time settings
correspond to the current session.
When a backup selection is considered during a session, the files and the subdirectories
to back up are filtered by name and size (by default * for the name and infinite for the
maximum file size). A backup format must be defined for each strategy and eventually
compression and encoding can be selected.
For a given strategy and platform, only one session can take place at a time. If a session
is not complete, no new session can start. When a session starts, a “Start backup (full or
incremental)” message is logged in the event file. For each backup selection considered,
the beginning and the ending messages are added to the event file. When all backup
selections have been backed up, the “End backup (full or incremental)” message is added.
The session is complete, a new backup can start.
For more information concerning events, see “Time Navigator Event Viewer”,
page 445.
290
When using different strategies, you define different times, different recycling policies,
and different drives for any given platform. Each strategy is associated with at least a
main pool and eventually one or more multiple writing media pools for full and
incremental sessions.
Main pools allow you to specify the drives to be used for backups, the media to be used
and the recycling mode. Main pools for incremental and full sessions of a given strategy
can be identical or distinct.
Multiple writing pools allow you to perform duplicate copies of the files backed up by a
session. You can define up to three multiple writing pools.
A main pool may also be a multiple writing pool. Each file is then copied twice with the
same drives, on the same media pool.
Note:
If you are scheduling a backup with several pools, i.e., with duplicate writing
sessions, you must have at least one available drive per media pool, since
duplicate writing sessions take place simultaneously.
Manual Triggering
In addition to automatically scheduled backup, the administrator can manually trigger a
(full or incremental) backup for any strategy, on any platform.
An incremental session performed under those conditions includes all backup selections
associated with the selected strategy.
Chapter 7
291
Administration Assistant
The administration assistant automatically opens when you launch Time Navigator
Administration Console, if:
■
■
You do not have any devices configured in your catalog. In that case, the assistant
allows you to start the Device Configuration Wizard (see “Initial Configuration of
Devices in Time Navigator”, page 139 for details).
One or more platforms in the catalog have not been configured for backup yet. In
that case, the assistant allows you to start the Backup Wizard (see “Backup
Strategies”, page 300 for details).
To disable the automatic launching of the assistant, set the tunable Disable Administration
Assistant. See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details.
Backup Wizard
The Backup Wizard allows you to configure platforms for backup. A backup
configuration consists of the following elements:
■
A backup selection
■
A media pool
■
A scheduling
The wizard automatically assigns the backup configuration to the first available strategy
for the given platform. For instance, if you are configuring a backup on the platform
"myplatform" that has no strategy defined yet, the Wizard will use Strategy A. If
"myplatform" already has strategies A and B defined, then the wizard will create
Strategy C.
Configuring a Backup with the Backup Wizard
When you open Time Navigator Administration Console, the Backup Wizard is
automatically launched by the Administration Assistant if it detects one or more platforms
in the catalog without a backup configuration. In addition, you can manually launch the
wizard at any time.
To configure a backup
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Backup Wizard if the
292
Wizard does not automatically open.
Tip:
You can also right click on a platform and choose Backup Wizard.
The Welcome window appears.
Click on Next.
2.
In the Platform Selection window, select the platform that needs to be configured
for backup.
Note:
If you launched the wizard by right-clicking on a platform, you can only
configure a backup for that platform. The Platform Selection screen does
not appear.
Chapter 7
293
Click on Next.
Note:
If compatible platforms (same operating system for hosts, and same type
for applications) have already been configured for backup, the wizard
gives you the option to Configure a new backup or Back up with an existing
configuration. If you choose to use an existing configuration, the wizard
lets you select the platform whose configuration you want to use.
294
3.
In the Backup Selection window, click on Add.
4.
In the New Backup Selection window, enter the path of the folder containing the
data to back up, or click on Browse to select the path.
Click on OK then click on Next.
5.
In the Media Pool window, choose wether you want to use the same or separate
pools for full and incremental backups. If you use the same pool, both backup types
will have the same retention period (i.e., the amount of time backed up data is kept
before the media is recycled) and will be backed up using the same device.
Chapter 7
295
Click on Next.
Note:
6.
If you already have media pools in your catalog, the wizard asks whether
you want to use an existing pool or create a new one. If you choose to
use an existing pool, the wizard asks you to select a pool from the list
of available pools.
In the Media Pool Parameters window, indicate the retention period and device to
use for the new pool.
296
Retention Period
If you do not want to limit the amount of time during which data is stored, select
Do not reuse media. Otherwise, choose the number of days, months or years during
which data will be stored. Once that time period expires, the media will be reused
to store new data.
Device
Select the library you want to use to back up your data.
Click on Next.
7.
In the Media Pool Name window, enter a name for the new pool.
Chapter 7
297
Click on Next.
Note:
8.
If you chose to use separate pools for full and incremental backups, you
need to define both a full pool and an incremental pool.
In the Full Schedule window, select one of the default schedule.
298
Typically, full backups are performed weekly while incremental backups are
performed daily.
Click on Next.
9.
In the Incremental Schedule window, select one of the default schedule.
Chapter 7
299
Click on Next.
Note:
In your catalog, if you have some platforms compatible with the one you
are configuring (same operating system for hosts, and same type for
applications), and that are not yet configured for backup, the wizard
opens the Platform Group window, to let you apply the current backup
configuration to these platforms.
Note:
In the Summary window, verify that all information is according to your
needs.
Click on Finish.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, the platform(s) you configured now
show the letter of the Strategy you just defined.
300
Backup Strategies
About Backup Strategy
Strategies allow you to schedule dates and times for automatic backup, job priority and
parallelism, snapshot or replication sessions and to specify the media pool to be used to
write data.
Strategies must be defined for each platform or platform group to be backed up, snapshot
or replicated. If no strategy is defined for a platform or platform group, no file will be
backed up.
Strategies are referred to by the letters A, B, C and D and appear in the Network area of
Strategy Types
There are three types of strategy:
■
Backup strategy
■
Snapshot strategy (see the Time Navigator SnapBackup guide for details)
■
Replication strategy (see the Time Navigator Replication guide for details)
Note:
Once you have chosen the type of a strategy, you cannot modify it, i.e., you
cannot turn a snapshot strategy into a standard backup strategy. If a particular
strategy is no longer needed, delete it and recreate a new strategy of a different
type.
In additon, you cannot create both snapshot and replication strategies on a
single platform.
Simultaneous Backups
One of the issues you have to watch out for when scheduling backups, is the number of
simultaneous backups. When a session is about to be performed, a job is created on the
backup server which in turn launches a tina_daemon process and a tina_backup process. As
a result, if many backups are scheduled at the same time, the server could become
saturated with all the tina_daemon and tina_backup processes.
If you are particularly concerned with your backup server performances, you have the
option to limit the number of simultaneous jobs via two tunables: Limit Number of
Simultaneous Jobs (limit_nb_jobs) and Maximum Number of Simultaneous Jobs
(max_nb_jobs).
Chapter 7
301
The Maximum Number of Simultaneous Jobs (max_nb_jobs) applies to the total
number of jobs using all defined strategies with all platforms under the control of
Time Navigator. It must not be confused with the parallelism index.
Parallelism Index
The parallelism index defines the maximum number of jobs for each defined strategy. A
parallelism index is set as a practical upper limit according to your system resources. It
can also be set as an upper limit that you wish to attain but may not be able to all of the
time.
Creating a Backup Strategy
You can define up to four strategies for a given platform, Strategy A, B, C and D.
Note:
If more than 4 strategies are needed for a particular platform, you have the
option of creating a “clone” of the platform with the Filesystem application. You
will then have four more strategies available for each Filesystem application you
create on a given platform. See “Creating Applications”, page 81.
Note:
The Strategy Creation procedure only takes into account the creation of a
backup strategy. For snapshot or replication strategy, see the Time Navigator
SnapBackup guide or the Time Navigator Replication guide.
To create a backup strategy
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, select a host.
2.
Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Strategy A-New, or right click on one of the squares
representing strategies on the host icon and select New. The New Backup Strategy
A window for the selected host appears.
3.
Fill in the parameters for the new backup strategy as described in:
■
“Backup Strategy Window - Full Tab”, page 302
■
“Backup Strategy Window - Incremental Tab”, page 304
■
“Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab”, page 306
■
“Backup Strategy Window - Snapshot Tab”, page 314
302
■
4.
Note:
“Backup Strategy Window - Replication Tab”, page 315
To import information from another strategy, click on Import. In the Import a Strategy
window, select a platform, a strategy, the elements you want to import and click
on OK.
The Default Configuration button sets default for all tabs at once.
The new strategy appears under the host icon in the Network area of Time Navigator
Backup Strategy Window - Full Tab
Use the Full tab to configure full backups.
Chapter 7
303
Media Pools Area
This area indicates the media pools to be used during backups.
Warning:
■
Main: Lets you select a main media pool from the list of available pools.
Note:
■
Even if you do not want to schedule full backups for this strategy, you must
select a main media pool in the Full tab.
You must create at least one media pool to define a strategy.
Multiple Writing Pools: Lets you specify the pools to be used for multiple writing. You
can define up to three secondary media pools. The Add button lets you select pools
from the list of available pools. The Remove button deletes a pool from the
Multiple Writing Pools list.
Warning:
Using multiple writing requires having at least one drive per simultaneous
backup copies to be performed.
Full Scheduling Area
■
Schedule name: Indicates the name of the schedule that triggers automatic backups.
■
Choose: Opens the Schedule Management window to let you select a schedule from
the list of existing schedule.
■
New: Opens the Schedule window to let you define a new schedule.
■
Edit: Allows you to edit the schedule specified in the Schedule Name field.
■
Unlink: Allows you to unlink the schedule currently associated to the strategy.
■
Disable Temporarily: Allows you to pause the full backups that should take place with
the strategy until you uncheck the box.
See “Scheduler”, page 323 for details.
Synthetic: Enables the Synthetic backup mode, see “Backup Types”, page 286 for details.
304
A, B, C and D: Backup strategies involved in a synthetic backup. If you do not want the
synthetic backup to be constructed from previous backups of all strategies, uncheck the
unwanted strategies.
Note:
Note:
You must have at least 2 drives available to perform Synthetic backups since
both a reading and a writing session are involved.
Options set in the Advanced tab do not apply to Synthetic backups except for the
Format option.
Default Configuration: Sets default for all tabs at once.
Import: Allows you to use information from another strategy.
Calendar View: Allows you to view the scheduled backups at a glance in a monthly
calendar.
Backup Strategy Window - Incremental Tab
Use the Incremental tab to configure incremental backups.
Chapter 7
305
Media Pools Area
This area indicates the media pools to be used during backups.
Warning:
■
Note:
■
Even if you do not want to schedule incremental backups for this strategy,
you must select a main media pool in the Incremental tab.
Main: Lets you select a main media pool from the list of available pools.
You must create at least one media pool to define a strategy.
Multiple Writing Pools: Lets you specify the pools to be used for multiple writing. You
can define up to three secondary media pools. The Add button lets you select pools
from the list of available pools. The Remove button deletes a pool from the
306
Multiple Writing Pools list.
Warning:
Using multiple writing requires having at least one drive per simultaneous
backup copies to be performed.
Incremental Scheduling Area
■
Schedule name: Indicates the name of the schedule that triggers automatic backups.
■
Choose: Opens the Schedule Management window to let you select a schedule from
the list of existing schedule.
■
New: Opens the Schedule window to let you define a new schedule.
■
Edit: Allows you to edit the schedule specified in the Schedule Name field.
■
Unlink: Allows you to unlink the schedule currently associated to the strategy.
■
Disable Temporarily: Allows you to pause the incremental backups that should take
place with the strategy until you uncheck the box.
See “Scheduler”, page 323 for details.
Reset: Sets default for all tabs at once.
calendar.
Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab
Use the Advanced tab to configure special options, format, pre- and post-processing
commands, job priority and parallelism and retry on incident.
Chapter 7
Warning:
307
All the Advanced options you set apply to both incremental and full backups
defined for the strategy, except if you have selected the Synthetic backup
option in the Full tab. Only the Format option of the Advanced option, will
apply to a Synthetic backup.
Special Options Area
■
■
The Use Cache on Server option allows you choose whether to back up data using the
cache on the Time Navigator server. If you you choose not to use the cache, and
the platform is a storage node, the library and drives can be directly attached to it.
If the platform is a Time Navigator Agent, data is backed up via a storage node.
The Go through Network Filesystem option concerns Unix hosts only. It allows
Time Navigator to go through NFS mount points, in order to back up files located
on other disks.
Note:
The root user of the machine performing the backup must have the access
rights to the machine on which NFS points have been mounted.
308
Tip:
■
■
■
To back up mapped network drives on Windows hosts, see
“Net Disk Application”, page 627.
The Do not go through Local File System option prevents Time Navigator from backing
up file systems mounted on a local mount point. Only the file system designated
by the backup selection is backed up.
The Wait for End of Writing on Media option allows you to wait until data has safely
been written on media before performing a postprocessing. The backup strategy
will be displayed as being “in progress”, i.e., with a green background, in
Time Navigator Administration Console Network area, until data is written on
media rather than until it is written in the cache space, as is usually the case.
The Specific Attribute Backup option allows:
ACLs (Access Control List) backup into the catalog and files access rights
management. This option is available on specific platforms where ACLs are backed
up on tapes by default and can also be backed up into the catalog, if this option is
activated.
Note:
For Windows and Mac platforms, it is essential to check this option if
you need to restore only the Specific Attributes of an object without the
data.
On Mac OS X, this option allows to back up the FinderInfo in the catalog in
addition to the tape backup that is performed by default.
For additional OS specific information, see “Backup of Specific Attributes”,
page 311.
■
The Relaunch until Platform is Reachable option ensures that a strategy remains active
until the platform can be reached. Time Navigator checks every 5 minutes for a
list of platforms to be backed up according to the schedules defined in the various
strategies. If this option is checked, an unreachable platform remains on that list
until it is actually backed up, whatever the reason for the unreachability.
Tip:
■
This option is useful for mobile platforms.
The Continue Backup if one of the Multiple Writing Sessions Fails option ensures that a
backup job starts or continues even if one of the writing sessions composing the
job fails or cannot start. For instance, if one of the drives fails before or during a
Chapter 7
309
backup in multiple writing mode, one of the sessions stops but the other ones will
continue. The user can eventually perform a media duplication at a later date if
necessary.
■
■
The On Demand Backup option makes this strategy available to authorized users from
agent posts to run backups on demand, outside the schedule set by the administrator
(See “On Demand Backup”, page 405).
The Sessions can be Multiplexed option allows you to manage the macro-multiplexing
mechanism. When several backups are started simultaneously, this mechanism is
used to split a backup into blocks in order to optimize backup duration and medium
use.
Note:
Macro-Multiplexing is discussed at length in Chapter 4. See “Macromultiplexing”, page 364.
Format Area
Allows you to select the Writing Formats (see “Writing Formats”, page 202 for details)
that will be used for backup. Click on the radio button of the format you want. By default,
the TiNa format is selected.
Warning:
On a Windows 2000/2003 machine, if you use the tar or cpio formats, some
information will not be backed up. For example, some file attributes and
some data associated with files will not be backed up.
Note:
If you uncheck the Use Cache on Server option, the only formats available are
sidf or tar.
Note:
If you are creating a strategy for an NDMP application, you must use the
"unknown" format. This is the only case when this format is used.
310
Command Area
In the Commands area, you can indicate actions to be taken immediately before (Preprocessing) and immediately after (Post-Processing) a backup has taken place. You must
enter either the absolute path of the command you want to execute, or the absolute path
of a script file or executable file.
Tip:
■
You can use one of the Pre- and- Postprocessing Variables (see “Pre- and
Postprocessing Variables”, page 313) set by the backup process in the
processing scripts
Pre-processing example:
/Applications/database/stop_database.sh
/home/people/db/stop_database.sh
c:\database\stop_database.cmd
■
Post-processing example:
/Applications/database/start_database.sh
/home/people/db/start_database.sh
c:\database\start_database.cmd
Note:
The pathnames for Preprocessing and Postprocessing scripts support the
whitespace (spacebar) character, in addition to the alphanumeric characters
already supported in Time Navigator pathnames.
Note:
Currently, the Preprocessing and Postprocessing commands are available only on
Mac OS X, Unix and Windows systems. The commands are executed on the
backed up client.
For Windows platforms, only .cmd, .vbs or .bat scripts are allowed.
Jobs Area
Priority: Indicates the priority level of jobs associated with the strategy being defined.
Select the level from the drop down list.
Chapter 7
311
Parallelism Index: Allows you to define the number of jobs that can be performed
simultaneously. The maximum value depends on the number of drives available for
backup operations.
Note:
A value of 0 for the Parallelism Index turns off parallelism. The (default) value
1 does not allow parallel jobs. The minimum value to activate parallelism is 3.
Having set a paralellism index, you must associate it with a backup selection to fully
define a parallel backup. See “Define Backup Selection Window - Properties Tab”,
page 344 for more information.
Retry on Incident Area
Allows you to automatically restart, at regular intervals, a failed backup. Enter a number
in the Number textbox to specify how many times Time Navigator will restart the
automatic backup. Enter a time interval in minutes in the Interval textbox to specify the
time interval between restarting attempts.
By default, a backup will be restarted twice with a 10 minute interval.
Reset: Sets default for all tabs at once.
calendar.
Backup of Specific Attributes
Depending on the client operating system and on the writing format selected (i.e., tar,
Tina, ...etc.) Time Navigator handles Specific Attributes backup differently. Specific
Attributes will either be backed up on tape, in the catalog or both. Specific Attributes
backup will be either systematically performed by Time Navigator or be left up to the
user.
Extended Attributes and FinderInfo
The FinderInfo along with the ResourceFork constitute the Apple extended attributes. In
addition, there can be third party extended attributes. Extended attributes consist of a
name and data. They are currently used only on Mac OS. They are directly integrated in
file systems (HFS, XSAN and UFS). On UFS and XSAN, they are stored in ._ files.
ACLs are not stored as extended attributes on Mac OS.
312
All extended attributes are backed up on tape. However, currently only the FinderInfo
can also be backed up in the catalog.
Operating System
Catalog Backup of
Extended Attributes
(FinderInfo only)
Tape Backup of
Extended Attributes
Tina5
sidf
Writing Format
Tina5
sidf
tar
tar
Mac OS X 10.3 Panther
no
no
yes,
optional
yes,
optional
Mac OS X 10.4 Tiger
yes
no
yes,
optional
yes
Mac OS X 10.5 Leopard
yes
no
yes,
optional
yes
To back up the Finder info in the catalog, check the option Specific Attribute Backup when
defining the backup strategy for the client. See “Backup Strategy Window - Advanced
Tab”, page 306 for details.
ACLs
An ACL (Access Control List) is an operating system mechanism designed to manage
file security. ACLs offer the possibility of defining access rights for a specific user or
group to a given resource (e.g., stopping the host, installing or uninstalling a peripheral
driver, etc.).
The ACLs associate an object (such as a directory or file) with an identifier and a
permission: the identifier defines the user or the group which has been granted access
rights (permission) to the object.
Operating System
ACL Tape Backup
Tina5
sidf
Writing Format
ACL Catalog Backup
Tina5
sidf
tar
tar
Unix:
Solaris, HP-UX, Fujitsu,
Digital Unix, CRAY, AIX,
Linux
no
no
yes, optional
yes, optional
Other Unix
no
no
no
no
Chapter 7
Operating System
ACL Tape Backup
313
ACL Catalog Backup
Mac OS X:
10.3 (Panther)
10.4 (Tiger)
10.5 (Leopard)
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes, optional
yes, optional
no
yes, optional
yes, optional
Windows:
2000/2003
XP
yes
n/a
no
n/a
yes, optional
n/a
yes, optional
n/a
NetWare
no
no
yes
yes
VMS
no
no
yes, optional
yes, optional
NDMP (Network Appliance,
EMC² Celerra)
yes
no
no
no
In cases where ACLs backup is optional, the choice is made by checking the Specific
Attribute Backup option when the backup strategy for the client is defined. See “Backup
Strategy Window - Advanced Tab”, page 306, for details.
Note:
It is essential to check the Specific Attribute Backup option if you need to restore
only the Specific Attributes of an object without the data.
Note:
When deciding whether or not to back up Specific Attributes in the catalog for
Windows 2000/2003, keep in mind that they could make your catalog quite
voluminous and affect performance. Specific Attributes tape backup on the
other hand has no impact on performance.
Pre- and Postprocessing Variables
Following is a list of the environment variables set by the backup process that can be
used in a pre- or postprocessing script.
List of variables that can be used in a preprocessing script:
Variable Name
Value
TINA_BACKUP_COPY_MODE
incr or full according to the backup type
TINA_EVT_JOB_INFO
Job number
314
Variable Name
Value
TINA_CATALOG
Name of the catalog
TINA_HOME
Time Navigator installation directory
List of variables that can be used in a postprocessing script:
Variable Name
Value
TINA_BACKUP_COPY_MODE
incr or full according to the backup type
TINA_EVT_JOB_INFO
Job number
TINA_CATALOG
Name of the catalog
TINA_HOME
Time Navigator installation directory
TINA_RETCODE
0 if backup was successful, >0 if backup failed
Backup Strategy Window - Snapshot Tab
Use the Snapshot tab to configure snapshots for the selected strategy on a snapshot-ready
platform.
Enable Snapshot Backup Mode: Activates the snapshot mode. This option is only available if
the application support the snapshot feature.
Complementary Media Pool: Indicates where the non-snapshottable data is backed up. This
option concerns only the Oracle and List applications and is mandatory for these two
applications, since some of the data cannot be snapshotted (for instance the redo logs for
Oracle).
Remove Snapshot after Backup: Specifies that Time Navigator removes the snapshot contents
from disk once it has been backed up on tape. This option is only available if you perform
a tape copy of your snapshot.
Default Configuration:
Sets default for all tabs at once.
calendar.
See the Time Navigator SnapBackup guide for details.
Chapter 7
315
Backup Strategy Window - Replication Tab
Use the Replication tab to configure replication for the selected strategy on a replicationready platform.
Enable Replication Mode: Activates the replication mode. This option is only available if the
application support the replication feature.
Replication Destination Area
■
Name: Allows you to select a destination replication from a list, if destinations
already exists.
■
New Destination: Allows you to create a replication destination.
■
Edit Destination: Allows you to modify a replication destination.
Allow incremental Replication: Allows you to keep track of the replicas in the catalog. This
option is mandatory to perform incremental replication and to keep the replica up to date
if, for instance some files have been deleted since the last replica.
See the Time Navigator Replication guide for details.
Default Configuration:
Sets default for all tabs at once.
calendar.
Manual Triggering of a Backup
Independently from the automatic triggering, you can manually initiate an incremental or
full backup for any strategy, on any platform.
An incremental session initiated under these conditions takes into account all the backup
selections associated with the selected strategy.
To manually initiate a backup
1.
Select the platform or platform group to back up.
2.
Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Strategy A (B,C, or D)-Full (or incremental) Session Now.
or
316
Right click on the letter of the strategy you want to back up, below the host icon,
and select Full (or Incremental) Session Now.
3.
The backup starts if the selected platform or platform group is enabled and if no
other session of the strategy is in progress.
Editing Strategies
The Backup-Selected Platform- Strategy-Properties menu is used to edit a backup strategy.
To edit a backup strategy
1.
Select a platform.
2.
Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Strategy A (B,C, or D)-Properties. The Strategy
Properties window is displayed.
3.
Modify the strategy as needed.
See “Creating a Backup Strategy”, page 301 and follow the same procedures.
Deleting Strategies
You can delete a strategy. In this case, the backups scheduled with that strategy will not
be performed any longer.
To delete a backup strategy
1.
Select a platform.
2.
Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Strategy A (B,C, or D)-Delete. The Delete Strategy
window is displayed. It contains all the characteristics of the selected strategy.
3.
Click on Delete to delete the strategy. A dialog box prompts you to confirm your
decision.
The deleted strategy is removed from the Network area of Time Navigator
Chapter 7
List Administration of Strategies
If you want to perform operations on a great number of strategies at once, use the
Strategy List window that allows you to perform a variety of tasks.
Viewing the Strategy List
To view the strategy list
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Backup-Strategy List. The
Strategy List window appears.
2.
Click on Close when you are done.
Strategy List Window
Number of strategies: Total number of strategies appearing in the list.
Export: Allows to export the strategy list to a file.
Strategy Information
■
Platform: Name of the host or application for which the strategy is defined.
317
318
■
■
Name: Letter and name of the strategy.
Type: Platform type, operating system for a host, application type if the platform
is an application.
■
Main Pool (full): Name of the main full pool associated to the strategy.
■
Main Pool (incremental): Name of the main incremental pool associated to the strategy.
■
Secondary Pools (full): Name of the secondary full pools associated to the strategy.
■
Secondary Pools (incremental): Name of the secondary incremental pools associated to
the strategy.
■
Schedule (full): Name of the full schedule associated to the strategy.
■
Schedule (incremental): Name of the incremental schedule associated to the strategy.
■
Synthetic: Indicates the letter of the strategies involved in synthetic backups for the
platform.
■
Priority: Indicates the strategy priority as defined in the Advanced tab of the
strategy. Possible values are: High, Very high, Medium, Low Very low.
Properties: Opens the Strategy Properties window for the selected strategy.
Tip:
You can also double click on a strategy in the list to open the Strategy
Properties window.
Modify Media Pools: Opens the Strategy Pool window to modify the pools for the selected
strategies.
Modify Schedules: Opens the Strategy Schedules window to modify schedules for the
selected strategies.
Modify Priority: Allows to change the priority of the selected strategy. Choose the priority
from the list.
Reset Pending Strategies: Allows to reset pending strategies to their usual status.
Chapter 7
319
Delete: Allows to delete the selected strategies.
Note:
Whenever you select a strategy in the list, all the other strategies that could be
affected by a modification of that strategy (i.e., strategies bearing the same
letter and associated to platforms belonging to the same group) are highlighted
too.
Exporting the Strategy List
To export the strategy list
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, go to Backup-Strategy List. The
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Close in the Strategy List window when you are done.
Editing Strategies
Note:
When you modify a strategy, all the strategies bearing the same letter and
associated to platforms belonging to the same group are modified as well.
To edit a strategy
1.
2.
Select the strategy you want to edit and click on Properties. The Strategy Properties
window appears. Modify the parameters as needed and click on OK to apply the
modifications. See “Creating a Backup Strategy”, page 301 for details.
3.
To edit another strategy, select it in the list and repeat step 2.
4.
320
Modifying Strategy Media Pools
Note:
When you modify a strategy, all the strategies bearing the same letter and
associated to platforms belonging to the same group are modified as well.
To modify strategy media pools
1.
2.
Select the strategies for which you want to modify pools and click on Modify Media
Pools. The Strategy Pools window appears.
3.
Modify the pools as described in “Strategy Pools Window”, page 320 and click
on OK to apply the modifications. See “Creating a Backup Strategy”, page 301 for
details concerning strategy pools.
4.
Strategy Pools Window
Modify Main Full Pool: Check this box to modify the main full pool.
■
Name: Main full pool name
Modify Secondary Full Pools: Check this box to modify the secondary full pools
■
Add to existing secondary pools: Specifies that the secondary pools you define are in
addition to existing ones.
■
Replace existing secondary pools: Specifies that the secondary pools you define are
replacing existing ones.
■
Remove from existing secondary pools: Specifies that the secondary pools you define
are to be removed from the existing ones.
■
Select: Allows you to select pools from the list of available pools.
■
Unselect: Allows you to remove pools from your selection.
■
Name: Displays the name of the pols you have selected.
Modify Main Incremental Pool:
■
Name: Main incremental pool name
Modify Secondary Incremental Pool:
Chapter 7
■
321
Add to existing secondary pools: Specifies that the secondary pools you define are in
addition to existing ones.
■
Replace existing secondary pools: Specifies that the secondary pools you define are
replacing existing ones.
■
Remove from existing secondary pools: Specifies that the secondary pools you define
are to be removed from the existing ones.
■
Select: Allows you to select pools from the list of available pools.
■
Unselect: Allows you to remove pools from your selection.
■
Name: Displays the name of the pools you have selected.
Modifying Strategy Schedules
To modify strategy schedules
1.
2.
Select the strategies for which you want to modify schedules and click on Modify
Schedules. The Strategy Schedules window appears.
3.
Modify the schedules as described in “Strategy Schedules Window”, page 321 and
click on OK to apply the modifications. See “Creating a Schedule”, page 326 for
details concerning schedules.
4.
Strategy Schedules Window
Modify Full Schedule: Check this box to modify the full schedule.
■
Choose: Opens the Schedule Management window to allow you to choose a
full schedule for the strategy.
■
Unlink: Unlinks the current full schedule from the strategy.
Modify Full Schedule Status: Check this box to modify the full schedule status.
■
Disable Temporarily: Allows you to pause the full backups that should take
place with the strategy until you uncheck the box.
Modify Incremental Schedule: Check this box to modify the incremental schedule.
■
Choose: Opens the Schedule Management window to allow you to choose an
incremental schedule for the strategy.
322
■
Unlink: Unlinks the current incremental schedule from the strategy.
Modify Incremental Schedule Status: Check this box to modify the incremental schedule
status.
■
Disable Temporarily: Allows you to pause the incremental backups that should
take place with the strategy until you uncheck the box.
Resetting Pending Strategies
Strategies are pending when the job corresponding to the backup they were supposed to
launch is paused, for instance if a host is unreachable and the option Relaunch until Platform
is reachable is selected in the Strategy window.
To reset pending strategies
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Strategy List. The
2.
Select the strategies you want to reset and click on Reset Pending Strategies.
3.
Click on Yes to confirm the operation or click on Cancel.
4.
Deleting Strategies
Note:
When you delete a strategy, all the strategies bearing the same letter and
associated to platforms belonging to the same group are deleted as well.
To delete strategies
1.
2.
Select the strategies you want to delete and click on Delete. See “Deleting
Strategies”, page 316 for details.
3.
Click on Yes to confirm the operation or click on Cancel.
4.
Once the operation is completed the strategies no longer appear in the list.
5.
Chapter 7
323
Scheduler
Note:
If you are upgrading from a version prior to version 4.1.0, schedules are
automatically created based on the scheduling information contained in your
existing backup strategies.
About the scheduler
The Scheduler allows to define the days and times when automatic backups should take
place.
To use the Scheduler, you must associate a Schedule to the strategy for which you want
to trigger automatic backups. To define a schedule, you need one or several schedule
rule.
Schedule
A schedule consists of:
■
A name
■
A list of schedule rules
A schedule can be either created from scratch, copied from an existing schedule,
imported from a file or you can modify an existing schedule. You can also delete a
schedule if you no longer need it, however you will not be able to delete a schedule if it
is associated to an active job.
The same schedule can be used by several strategies.
By default, when you create a catalog, the following three schedules are created:
■
A daily backup from Monday to Friday at 20:00
■
A weekly backup on saturday at 20:00
■
A monthly backup the first sunday of the month at 20:00.
Schedule rule
There are three types of schedule rules:
■
■
Start rules that allow you to define the day(s) and times of the week/month when a
backup should take place
Activity Interval rules that allow you to define times during the day when backups can
324
take place
■
Exclusion rules that allow you to define specific days when backups cannot take
place.
Note:
You can use any combination of rules for a particular schedule, with at least
one Start rule defined in order to launch backups.
Similarly to a schedule, a schedule rule can be either created from scratch, copied from
an existing rule, or you can modify an existing rule. A rule can also be deleted if you no
longer need it.
Configuring the Scheduler
When you configure the scheduler, the configuration applies for the entire catalog.
To configure the Scheduler
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Scheduling-Scheduler.
The Scheduler Configuration window appears.
2.
Define the Scheduler configuration as described in “Scheduler Configuration
Window - Properties Tab”, page 324 and “Scheduler Configuration Window Non Working Days Tab”, page 326.
Scheduler Configuration Window - Properties Tab
Chapter 7
325
Scheduler Activity Accounting Event: Enables the generation of event logs for scheduler
activities.
Disable Scheduler Activity: If the Scheduler is disabled no scheduled backups can take place
in the catalog.
Send an Alarm if Scheduler is Disabled: Allows to choose whether or not an alarm is generated
when the scheduler is disabled.
Time Before Alarm is Sent: Allows to define when the alarm should be sent.
Activate Job Limitation: Enables the limitation of simultaneous jobs running at the same
time.
Note:
The control over the number of jobs running simultaneously only takes place
when a scheduled job is launched, not when a job is manually launched.
However all jobs are taken into account (whether launched automatically or
manually) when counting the number of jobs running.
Maximum Number of Simultaneous Jobs: Allows to define the maximum number of jobs that
could be running at the same time. The default value is 100.
Warn if Maximum Number of Jobs is exceeded: Check this box to trigger alarms, warnings and
logs when the number of jobs running is greater than the maximum you defined.
Cancellation Timeout for Scheduled jobs:
Specifies the timeout before scheduled backup
jobs are cancelled if they cannot start because the agent is not connected to the
server.
326
Scheduler Configuration Window - Non Working Days Tab
Recurrent: Allows you to choose the days of the week that are non working days.
Specific: The Add and Remove buttons allow you to define a list of non working days via
a calendar. The days chosen appear in the Date column.
Creating a Schedule
To create a schedule
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Scheduling-Schedule
Management. The Schedule Management window appears.
2.
Click on New. The Schedule window appears.
3.
Provide a name for the shedule.
Chapter 7
4.
327
You need to create at least one schedule rule. To do so, depending on the rule type
you want to create, click on:
■
New Backup Launching Rule
Start rules allows you to define the times when you want to launch backups.
See “Backup Launching Rule Window”, page 329 for a description of the
required parameters.
■
New Activity Interval Rule
Activity interval rules allow you to define a time period during the day when
backups are allowed to run. See “Activity Interval Rule Window”, page 331
for a description of the required parameters.
■
New Exclusion Rule
Exclusion rules allow you to define criteria upon which exclusions are based.
See “Exclusion Rule Window”, page 333 for a description of the required
parameters.
Warning:
In order to schedule automatic backups, you must create at least one
Backup Launching rule, i.e., at least one rule must contain Start
Hours.
Activity Interval or exclusion rules alone cannot launch a backup.
They must be used in conjunction with one (or more) Start rule to
allow backups to be launched.
The schedule takes into account all the rules you define.
5.
Click on OK.
Schedule Window
Name: Name of the current Schedule.
Rules tab
■
Schedule Rule: List of existing schedule rules associated to the schedule.
■
Validity: Indicates whether the schedule is valid or not.
■
New Start Rule: Allows to create a new Start rule.
■
New Interval Rule: Allows to create a new Activity Interval rule.
■
New Exclusion Rule: Allows to create a Exclusion new rule.
■
Properties: Allows to modify the selected rule.
328
■
Copy: Copies the selected rule
■
Delete: Deletes the selected rule.
■
Calendar Area
<< button: Moves the calendar displays back one year.
< button: Moves the calendar display back one month.
> button: Moves the calendar displays forward one month.
>> button: Moves the calendar display forward one year.
Note:
Once a backup has been scheduled for a day, a black dot appears next
to that day in the calendar area.
Actions Tab
The actions tabs provides the following information concerning the strategies that use this
particular schedule.
■
Action: Type of backup triggered by the schedule.
■
Strategy: Letter of the strategy using the schedule.
■
Platform: Name of the platform onto which the strategy is defined.
■
Type: Type of the platform.
■
Group: Names of all the platforms belonging to the same group.
■
Status: Status of the platform.
Advanced Tab
Schedule Activity Accounting Events: Check this box if you want scheduling events to be
logged in the Time Navigator events file.
Note:
Only events concerning this schedule are recorded if you activate the Schedule
Activity Accounting Events. To activate events logging for the entire Scheduler,
do so in the Sheduler Configuration window (see “Configuring the Scheduler”,
page 324).
Chapter 7
329
Backup Launching Rule Window
Name: Name of the schedule rule. The name must be unique. If no name is specified, the
scheduler automatically assigns a name to the rule according to the rule parameters.
Auto Update: Click on this button to automatically adjust the name of the schedule
according to the parameter modification you performed.
ID: ID of the rule, automatically assigned by the Scheduler.
Description: Description of the rule. If no description is specified, the scheduler
automatically assigns a name to the rule according to the rule parameters.
Auto Update: Click on this button to automatically adjust the description of the schedule
Days Tab
Frequency: Select whether you want a daily, weekly or monthly scheduling.
■
Daily: If you select daily backups, you must choose between every n days, every
working or non working day, or define a specific date when you want backups to
330
take place.
Note:
■
You can define the non working days in the Scheduler Configuration
window. See “Configuring the Scheduler”, page 324 for details.
Weekly: If you select weekly backups, specify if it is every week or n week and on
which day of the week you want to perfom the backup.
■
Monthly: If you select monthly backups, specify the day of the month when you
want backups to take place.
Offset: Allows you to offset the backup from one to seven days before or after the day
you chose in the Frequency area.
Start Hours Tab
Define Start Hour: Check this box if you want to define a backup launching rule.
Hours and Minutes: Use the scroll down lists to select the backup time.
Add: Allows you to add the selected hours and minutes in the Defined Times list in order
to schedule a backup.
Next Hour: Adds the hour following the one selected in the list as a backup time.
Chapter 7
331
Next 15 minutes: Adds 15 minutes to the time selected in the list and create a new backup
time.
Defined Times: Lists all the backup times.
Delete: Deletes the selected backup time.
Validity Tab
■
Start Date: Defines the date when the rule becomes valid. The rule is not taken into
account prior to the Start Date.
■
End Date: Defines the date when the rule is no longer valid. The rule is not taken
into account after the End Date. This parameter is not mandatory.
Activity Interval Rule Window
332
Days Tab
See “Days Tab”, page 329 for details.
Active Interval Tab
Define an Interval: Check this box if you want to define an Active Interval rule.
■
■
■
Start Hour: Defines the hour when the active interval begins, i.e., no backup can
take place before this time. The earliest beginnning Start Hour is 00:00.
End Hour: Defines the hour when the active interval ends, i.e., no backup can take
place after this time. The latest End Hour is 23:55. Defining an End Hour is not
mandatory, if you do not specify the end hour, backups will continue according to
the next day Start Hour parameter.
Cancel jobs if outside of the interval: Specifies that if a job is still in progress while the
interval end hour is reached, the job is cancelled.
■
Let jobs continue outside of the interval: Specifies that if a job is still in progress while
Chapter 7
333
the interval end hour is reached, the job is allowed to continue.
■
Let jobs continue outside of the interval and send an alarm: Specifies that if a job is still in
progress while the interval end hour is reached, the job is allowed to continue, but
an alarm warns that the job is running outside the active interval.
Validity Tab
See “Validity Tab”, page 331.
Exclusion Rule Window
Days Tab
See “Days Tab”, page 329 for details.
Exclusion Tab
Validity Tab
See “Validity Tab”, page 331.
Examples of Schedule Creation
Example 1
Backup requirements:
Schedule full backups every Sunday at 11 pm. The backup must imperatively stop on the
following day at 8 am if it is a working day.
334
Solution:
Create a schedule consisting of a Start rule and an Activity Interval rule:
■
■
Start Rule:
Define 23h00 as a start hour on Sunday.
Activity Interval Rule
Define an active interval from 00h00 to 08h00 for all working days and select
"Cancel jobs if outside interval".
Example 2
Schedule incremental backups every working day at 7 pm. Backups must imperatively
stop on the following day at 8 am if it is a working day.
Solution:
Create a schedule consisting of a Start rule and an two Activity Interval rules:
■
■
■
Start Rule:
In the first rule, define 19h00 as a start hour for every working day.
Activity Interval Rule:
Define an active interval from 00h00 to 08h00 for all working days and select
"Cancel jobs if outside interval".
Define an active interval with a beginning time of 19:00 and no ending time, for
all working days.
Example 3
Schedule incremental backups every working day at 10 pm. Backup must imperatively
stop on the following day at 8 am if it is a working day. If some backups are paused,
they must restart at 7 pm on working days.
Solution:
Create a schedule consisting of a Start rule and an two Activity Interval rules:
■
■
■
Start Rule:
In the first rule define 22:00 pm as a start hour for all working days.
In the second rule define an active interval from 00:00 to 08:00 for all working
days.
Chapter 7
335
In the third rule define an active interval with a beginning time of 19:00 and no
ending time, for all working days.
Example 4
Schedule a full backup the first monday of each month at 8 pm. The backup must
imperatively stop on the following day at 8 pm.
Solution:
Create a schedule consisting of a Start rule and an Activity Interval rule:
■
■
In the first rule define 20:00 as a start hour every first monday of the month.
In the second rule define an active interval from 00:00 to 20:00 every first monday
of the month, with an offset of one day.
Example 5
Schedule a full backup on pool A on the last sunday of the month.
Schedule full backups on pool B every sunday of the month except the last one.
Solution:
Create two schedules as follows:
■
■
For the first schedule, define a Start rule with a monthly frequency on the last
Sunday every month. Choose a Start Hour.
Associate that schedule to Strategy A that uses Pool A for full backups.
For the second schedule, define a Start rule with a monthly frequency on the 2nd,
3rd, 4th and last Sunday every month. Add an offset of -7 days. Choose a Start
Hour.
Associate that schedule to Strategy B that uses Pool B for full backups.
Scheduling a Backup
To schedule automatic backups for a platform, proceed as follows:
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, select a platform and choose BackupSelected Platform-Strategy A, B, C or D-New, or Properties if the strategy is already
created.
2.
To schedule full backups, click on Choose in the Scheduler area of the Full tab, to
select an existing Schedule, or click on New if you want to define a new schedule
(see “Creating a Schedule”, page 326).
336
3.
To schedule incremental backups, click on Choose in the Scheduler area of the
incremental tab, to select an existing Schedule, or click on New if you want to
define a new schedule (see “Creating a Schedule”, page 326).
4.
Provide all other strategy parameters as described in “Creating a Backup
Strategy”, page 301.
Editing a Schedule
Note:
When you edit a schedule, all the strategies that use that particular schedule
will be affected.
To edit a schedule
1.
2.
Select a schedule in the list and click on Properties. The Schedule window appears.
3.
Modify parameters as needed (see “Schedule Window”, page 327 and “Backup
Launching Rule Window”, page 329), and click on OK.
Copying a Schedule
To copy a schedule
1.
2.
Select the schedule you want to copy in the list and click on Copy. The Schedule
is copied and appears in the list as Copy of....
3.
Select the copied schedule and click on Properties to modify it.
Importing a Schedule
To import a schedule
1.
2.
Click on Import. The Import Schedule window appears.
3.
Enter the name and path of the file containing the schedule to import, or browse
your file system and select it.
Chapter 7
4.
337
Click on OK to import the schedule.
Exporting a Schedule
To export a schedule
1.
2.
Select a schedule in the list and click on Export.
3.
Enter the name and path of the file where you want to export the schedule, or
browse your file system and select it.
4.
Click on OK to export the schedule.
Deleting a Schedule
Note:
Prior to deleting a schedule, you must unlink it from every strategy that is using
that particular schedule. In addition, you will not be able to delete a schedule
if it is associated to an active job.
To delete a schedule
1.
2.
Select a schedule in the list and click on Delete.
3.
Confirm the operation.
Copying a Schedule Rule
To copy a schedule rule
1.
2.
Select the schedule you want to copy a rule from and click on Properties.
3.
In the Schedule window, select the rule to copy and click on Copy.
4.
Select the type of the copied rule, either Start, Activity Interval or Exclusion.
338
5.
In the Schedule Rule window, modify the rule parameters as described in “Backup
Launching Rule Window”, page 329, “Activity Interval Rule Window”,
page 331 ou “Exclusion Rule Window”, page 333.
6.
Click on Auto Update to modify the rule Name and Description.
7.
Click on OK in the Schedule Rule and Schedule windows to validate your choice.
Modifying a Schedule Rule
To modify a schedule rule
1.
2.
Select the schedule in which you want to modify a rule and click on Properties.
3.
In the Schedule window, select the rule to modify and click on Properties.
4.
Modify the rule parameters as described in “Backup Launching Rule Window”,
page 329, “Activity Interval Rule Window”, page 331 or “Exclusion Rule
Window”, page 333.
5.
Click on OK in both the Schedule Rule the Schedule windows.
Deleting a Schedule Rule
To delete a schedule rule
1.
2.
Select the schedule in which you want to delete a rule and click on Properties.
3.
In the Schedule window, select the rule to delete and click on Delete.
Chapter 7
339
Backup Selections
About Backup Selections
Backup Selections specify the directories to be backed up, as well as time phases and
conditions under which directories are backed up. If no backup selection is defined for a
platform, backup cannot take place with Time Navigator. Any user authorized by the
administrator can define, modify or delete a backup selection with Time Navigator
Restore & Archive Manager.
Defining a backup selection consists of defining the following settings:
■
The Time Phases allowed for incremental sessions.
■
The associated Strategies.
■
■
The Format options (compressing and/or encoding data, only available with the TiNa
format).
The Filters on the name and size of the backed up files.
All backup selections associated with a strategy are taken into consideration during
backups. Except in the case of an automatically initiated incremental backup, where only
backup selections whose time phases correspond to the current session strategy times are
considered.
Creating a Backup Selection
The backup selection indicates the files and directories to be backed up. If none is defined
on a host, no file can be backed up.
Note:
You may also use Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager to define
your backup selections. Select the host and choose Platform-Time Navigator
Restore & Archive Manager. In the file tree, select the directory on which
you want to set a backup selection and choose BackupSelection-New. In the
Define Backup Selection window, set the parameters as indicated in the
procedure below.
To create a backup selection
1.
Select a platform in the Network area.
340
2.
Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Backup Selection. The Viewing Backup Selections for
the selected host appears. This list is empty if no classes have been previously
defined.
3.
Click on New. The Path of the New Backup Selection window appears.
4.
Enter the path of the directory to back up in the Backup Selection textbox or click
on the Browse icon. The Browsing window appears. Select the directory you want
in the file tree and click on OK. The Define Backup Selection window is displayed.
The Directory represents the backup selection you are currently defining.
Warning:
5.
If you do not use the browsing feature, verify that you enter the
correct directory path in the POSIX form (for instance /c/data and not
c:\data) to make sure that your directory will actually be backed up.
Define the backup selection settings:
■
Note:
Strategies: Select the strategy you want your backup selection to be backed
up with. The star (*) next to a strategy indicates that the strategy has actually
been defined.
If a strategy appears grayed and cannot be selected, it indicates that the
current user does not have the permission to use that particular strategy.
See “User and Access Rights Operations”, page 123 for details.
By Default, all time phases and all strategies are selected, no filters or special
formats are set. For a description of the filters, time phases and format, see
■
“Define Backup Selection Window - Filters Tab”, page 341
Chapter 7
6.
■
“Define Backup Selection Window - Time PhasesTab”, page 343
■
“Define Backup Selection Window - Properties Tab”, page 344
■
“Define Backup Selection Window - Security Tab”, page 345
341
Click on OK to validate the operation. The list of backup selections is displayed
again. It contains the new directory to back up. Click on Close to close the window.
Define Backup Selection Window - Filters Tab
Use the Filters Tab to exclude some files and directories from the backup selection
according to certain criteria.
The following files are automatically excluded from backup, even though you do not
specify any filters for them:
■
Time Navigator catalog directories that are already backed up via the Catalog
application:
$TINA_HOME/Data.catalog_name
$TINA_HOME/Data.catalog_name
%TINA_HOME%\Data.catalog_name
■
The files filtered via the registry key
HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\BackupRestore\
FilesNotToBackup.
342
Names: Filters objects according to their names
■
Select: Selection filter list. See “Selection Filters Window”, page 342.
■
Exclude: Exclusion filter list. See “Exclusion Filters Window”, page 343.
For instance, the * character in the Selection textbox will back up all the objects.
The *.old string in the Exclusion textbox will exclude all the .old files.
Tip:
You can also directly enter a list of filters separated by spaces in the Selection
or Exclusion textboxes. If the file or directory names contain spaces, you must
insert a backslash before the space charaters to prevent Time Navigator from
interpreting them as string separators (for instance: hello\ world).
Size: Filters objects according to their size by setting a maximum file size. This filter
does not apply to directories.
Files Modified Since: Filters files according to their last modification date. This filter does
not apply to directories.
Default Configuration: Resets all the parameters to the default configuration.
Selection Filters Window
Add: Allows to add a selection filter by entering a string in the New Filter window. You
can use Time Navigator Filter Syntax and the special characters.
Import: Allows to import one or several selection filters by selecting them in the Import
Compatible Selection Filters window.
Note:
All the selection filters from compatible platforms in the catalog are available
for import.
Remove: Allows to remove a selection filter.
Name Filters: List of the existing selection filters.
Chapter 7
343
Exclusion Filters Window
Add: Allows to add an exclusion filter by entering a string in the New Exclusion Filter
window. You can use Time Navigator Filter Syntax and the special characters.
Import: Allows to import one or several exclusion filters by selecting them in the Import
Compatible Exclusion Filters window.
Note:
All the exclusion filters from compatible platforms in the catalog are available
for import.
Remove: Allows to remove an exclusion filter.
Name Filters: List of the existing exclusion filters.
Define Backup Selection Window - Time PhasesTab
Use the Time Phases Tab to specify the time phases when the backup selection is backed
up.
Activate: Activates the selected time phase.
344
Exclude: Excludes the selected time phase.
Hours: Lists all the one-hour time phases.
Strat: Indicates the backup strategies (incremental backups) for which backups are
scheduled during the time phase.
Define Backup Selection Window - Properties Tab
Use the Properties Tab to specify whether the data must be compressed and/or encoded.
You can also define if the backup selection must be parallelized.
Compressed: Gives you better time performances in low data flow network since it reduces
the amount of data traveling through the network. However, it requires more machine
resources. It also uses less space on storage media. Compression takes place on the client
machine.
Chapter 7
345
Encoded: Protects data against illicit reading. When the Encoded box is checked, data
traveling on the network is encoded and is writen on media encoded. Encoding takes
place on the client machine.
Tip:
In order to restore encoded data, you need the original catalog into which the
data was backed up, or you can use the tina_cart command. tina_cart allows
you to automatically decode data contained on a media.
Note:
The Compressed and Encoded options are only available if the strategies you
chose the TiNa format when you create the strategy.
Parallelized: Enables parallel backups for the backup selection being defined. This is used
with strategy definitions to enhance backup performance. With applications, only backup
selections that can be parallelized according to the application can be enabled.
Once you have enabled parallel backups, you will also have to set a Parallelism Index whose
maximum value equals the number of available drives.
Note:
Parallel restore does not depend on using this option. It is entirely possible to
use parallel restore on backup selections that were not backed up using the
parallelized option.
For parallel backup details on specific applications, consult their respective
Time Navigator documentation.
Define Backup Selection Window - Security Tab
Use the Security tab to associate a security rule to the backup selection, so that the backed
up or archived data is encrypted and secured. When a backup selection is secured, the
directory on which it is set appears in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager file
tree with a small green lock instead of a green ball.
346
Rule: Allows to apply a security rule to the backup selection.
Name: Displays the list of the rules present in the Time Navigator catalog. Select the rule
that you want to apply to the backup selection.
Note:
The selected rule must be signed by the certificate authentifying the host from
which the backup is initiated.
Backup: Applies the security rule to the backup selection during backup.
Archiving: Applies the security rule to the backup selection during archiving. Make sure
you choose this option if you want to secure the backup of applications using archive
folders such as Time Navigator for Oracle using Recovery Manager.
For more information on security rules and certificates, see the Time Navigator Security
& Compliance Manager guide.
Chapter 7
347
Filter Syntax
Note:
Filters use Posix syntax, i.e. forward slashes rather than backslashes,
regardless of Operating System.
Note:
Under MacOS and Unix, the spelling of filters is case sensitive.
To select the files tina, tina_adm and tina_restore from the directory
/application/tina/Bin
/usr/tina/Bin
c:\Program Files\Atempo\tina\Bin
You can:
■
Either define a backup selection at the root of the platform and enter the following
Selection filters :
/usr/tina/Bin/tina
/usr/tina/Bin/tina_adm
/c/Program Files/Atempo/tina/Bin/tina_restore
■
Or define a backup selection on
/usr/tina/Bin
/usr/tina/Bin
c:\Program Files\Atempo\tina\Bin
and enter the following Selection filters:
tina tina_adm tina_restore
The paths dir/file and /.../dir/file are equivalent since in both cases, the selection is
performed in the whole tree structure defined in the backup selection.
Conversely, the paths dir/file and dir/.../file are not equivalent.
If you specify dir/file, the selection is performed on the file file in the dir directory under
the backup selection.
If you specify dir/.../file, the selection is performed on all the files file from the directory
dir under the backup selection.
348
The default value of the directories that can be filtered is the sign * (it represents the full
directory contents).
Filters can be used in backup selections to narrow down the choice of files to be backed
up (selection and/or rejection lists) or in the file tree of Time Navigator Restore &
Archive Manager to view only the wanted files.
Advanced Inclusion Filters
The explanations and examples that follow will be based on the sample directory tree
defined below. Directory names are in normal type, file names are in italic.
1.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3 Level 4
DirRoot
Dir01
Dir001
2.
3.
Dir02
Dir002
Dir0002
file.log
file1.txt
file2.log
file3.log
Log
Dir0002
6.
7.
Level 6
file2.txt
4.
5.
Level 5
file.log
file.txt
Dir03
8.
Dir003
Dir002
file.txt
9.
file.txt
10
.
tmp
log1.log
11
data
log
log1.txt
General Principles of Inclusion
■
■
■
The asterisk, *, is used as a wildcard character to designate any text string.
If you begin your filter with a slash, and you want to back up files, you must enter
an absolute path. If you begin the filter with a slash and it is not an absolute path,
you will back up only the tree structure. Omitting the slash allows you to define
relative paths.
The recursive notion of "one or more directory levels under the current level" is
designated by three dots between two slashes: /.../.
Chapter 7
349
Inclusion Filter Examples
■
/DirRoot/Dir01/Dir001/file2.txt
To back up just one file in a tree structure, specify the whole path and name. This
line backs up the file in line 2, as well as the entire directory structure.
■
/DirRoot/Dir02/Dir002/*.log
To back up all files with the extension .log, in the directory /DirRoot/Dir02/Dir002/
(the files in lines 3 and 4). Also backs up the entire directory structure.
■
/Dir02/Dir002/*.log
This will just back up the directory structure. No files with the extension *.log will
be detected.
■
Dir02/Dir002/*.log
Same as above, but this time using a relative path (no slash at the beginning of the
expression). This will back up lines 3 and 4.
■
Dir002/*.log
Backs up lines 3 and 4. This filter starts with a relative directory Dir002, which it
finds on lines 3 and 7, and backs up all files with the extension .log, immediately
under it. Since the directory in line 7 has no files with extension .log immediately
under it, but just other directories, the file in line 7 is not backed up.
■
Dir002/.../*.log
By contrast, this will back up lines 3 and 4, but also the file in line 7. This filter
starts with a relative directory Dir002, which it finds on lines 3 and 7, and backs
up all files with the extension .log, recursively through the sub-directories.
■
Dir*/.../Log/.../*
To back up all files in subdirectories called Log of directories whose name begins
with Dir (i.e. lines 5, 6 and 11).
■
da*/.../Log/.../*
Line 11 only. Files and directory.
■
da*/.../Log/.../
Same as above. Files and directory.
■
Dir03/
To back up directory structure under Dir03, but no files.
■
Dir03/*
Backs up files directly under Dir03 and directory structure under it, but does not
back up files in sub-directories of Dir03 (i.e. will back up line 8, but not 9 or the
file in line 7).
■
Dir03/.../*
Files and directories under Dir03, recursively.
350
■
Dir03*
All directories only.
Exclusion Filters
The Exclusion textbox specifies the list of the objects not to be backed up. If the list
includes directories, the files they contain are not backed up. By default, no object is
excluded (empty list). Both relative and absolute paths can be used.
Warning:
Backup selections cannot be set on subdirectories of an excluded directory
within the same strategy.
Having exclusion and inclusion filters in backup selections on the same
directory and in the same strategy can result in permanent loss of files.
If, in a given strategy, a directory has an exclusion filter on it, none of its subdirectories
can be backed up by that strategy. Subdirectories of an excluded backup selection inherit
the exclusion, no matter what other backup selections or inclusion filters are placed on
them. They can only be backed up by a different strategy.
This is because Time Navigator reads a directory tree from its root to its smallest
branches, detecting backup selections and applying filters as it descends. As soon as it
reaches a branch with an exclusion filter on it, it stops descending and skips the branch.
Thus details on the branch's subdirectories are never read.
Example 1: Bad Practice:
Strategy A contains:
■
a backup selection defined on "/" with a filter excluding the sub-directory "/
Volumes"
■
another backup selection set on "/Volumes".
Consequence:
"/Volumes" will not be backed up. The filter excluding it has priority on the backup
selection including it, and the whole branch will be ignored.
Example 2: Bad Practice:
■
Chapter 7
351
Volumes"
■
another backup selection set on "/Volumes".
Strategy B contains:
■
a backup selection set on "/Volumes".
Consequence:
As soon as Strategy A is run, it will no longer be possible to restore the files in "/
Volumes". Running Strategy B will not recover the files.
Example 3: Correct Practice:
■
Volumes"
Strategy B contains:
■
a backup selection set on "/Volumes".
This is the correct way to ensure that the files in "/Volumes", are backed up.
Time Navigator Special Characters
Time Navigator uses its own special characters to filter files.The rules are the following:
■
Absolute and relative paths are allowed.
■
Slashes (/) and double-slashes (//) located at the end of a path are ignored.
■
* : specifies any characters from 0 to n.
■
? : specifies any single character.
■
■
/.../: specifies any number of directory levels.
■
Example
\ : specifies that the following character is ignored. It enables special characters
to be used in filters, such as [, ], ?, * and \.
Syntax Used in Filters
■
*.tmp : all files with the extension .tmp are filtered.
■
????.o : all files with four characters followed by the extension .o are filtered.
352
■
■
■
■
tina_st[ao][pt] : all files beginning with tina_st with all possible combinations after
st (a or o in 3rd position and p or t in 4th position) are filtered, such as tina_stop and
tina_stat.
/c/users/.../temp : all files or directories named temp are filtered from /c/users, such
as /c/users/temp or /c/users/fred/temp, etc. On the other hand, /temp is not filtered.
tina_st[ao][pt] : all files beginning with tina_st with all possible combinations after
st (a or o in 3rd position and p or t in 4th position) are filtered, such as tina_stop and
tina_stat.
/c/users/.../temp : all files or directories named temp are filtered from /c/users, such
as /c/users/temp or /c/users/fred/temp, etc. On the other hand, /temp is not filtered.
Filtering Nested Selections
If you have defined backup selections for two directories that are in a parent-child
relationship, and that are using the same strategy, the child backup selection inherits
filters from the parent backup selection, i.e., the child backup selection default filters will
be those of the parent, unless you specifically activate the child backup selection filters.
For example, if you set a maximum size of 10MB for the parent backup selection but
you want no size restrictions for the child backup selection, select Infinite for the size filter
of the child directory backup selection.
Exemple:
Nested backup selections Filtering
/usr/people: filter name select “*”, exclude “core”
/usr/people/spr: filter name not checked
/usr/people/spr/project/all: filter name select “*”, exclude “”
The files/directories named “core” will not be backed up in /usr/people
nor in /usr/people/spr, but they will be backed up in the directory
Chapter 7
353
/usr/people/spr/project/all (and its children).
Warning:
If a parent backup selection filters out the path of a child backup selection
associated to the same strategy, the child backup selection is never backed
up. For instance:
- If you set a backup selection on /dir/dir1 with an exclusion filter
eliminating *dir3* from the backup, associated to StrategyA,
- If you set a backup selection on /dir/dir1/dir2/dir3 (with or without filters)
associated to Strategy A,
The backup selection /dir/dir1/dir2/dir3 will never be backed up since it is
excluded from the parent backup selection.
Backup Selection Representation
Once a backup selection has been defined, a small green ball is displayed to the left of
the directory icon in the file tree of Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager,
indicating that a backup selection is set on this directory. If the backup selection is
secured by Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager, the green ball is
replaced by a small green lock.
A green arrow pointing downwards is displayed on the left of all the parent directories
of a backup selection.
Viewing Backup Selections
You can view the list of backup selections created on a platform. The following
information is provided:
■
The time phases selected for the incremental sessions.
■
The associated strategies.
354
■
■
The format (compression and/or encoding of data).
The filtering information: excluded/selected files, maximum file size, and modified
since date.
To view backup selection information for a platform
1.
In the Network area, select a platform.
2.
Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Backup Selection. The Viewing Backup Selections
appears.
3.
Click on Column Choice to change the Column Selection:
For more details about backup selection filters, time phases and format, see
“Creating a Backup Selection”, page 339.
4.
Click on Close.
Column Selection
Strategy: Strategies that back up the backup selection.
Exclusion: Exclusion filter criteria.
Format: Either compressed or Encoded depending on the format defined for the backup
selection.
Maximum Size: Contents of the Size filter.
Modified Since: Contents of the Modified since filter.
Selected: Selection filter criteria.
Chapter 7
355
Time Phases: Time phases selected for the backup selection.
Editing a Backup Selection
You can modify the backup selections of a platform.
To edit a backup selection:
1.
2.
Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Backup Selection. The list of backup selections of the
selected platform is displayed.
3.
Select the backup selection to modify in the list and click on Properties.
The Define Backup Selection window is displayed. See “Creating a Backup
Selection”, page 339, and follow the same procedure.
4.
Click on OK to validate the operation. The list of backup selections is displayed
again.
5.
Click on Close.
Note:
It is also possible to edit a backup selection with Time Navigator Restore &
Archive Manager. Select the backup selection in the file tree and choose
Backup Selection-Properties.
Deleting a Backup Selection
You can delete a backup selection if you no longer need it. When the backup selection
of a directory is deleted, the contents of the directory are no longer backed up (unless
the directory is included in another backup selection).
To delete a backup selection:
1.
2.
Choose Backup-Backuo Selection List. The list of backup selections of the selected
platform is displayed.
3.
Select the backup selection to delete in the list and click on Delete.
The Delete Backup Class window is displayed. It contains all the characteristics of
the selected class.
356
4.
Note:
Click on Delete to validate the operation. A dialog box prompts you to confirm your
decision.
It is also possible to delete a backup selection in Time Navigator Restore &
Archive Manager. Select the backup selection in the file tree and choose
Backup Selection-Delete.
Chapter 7
357
List Administration of Backup Selections
If you want to perform operations on a great number of backup selections at once, use
the List of all Backup Selections window that allows you to perform a variety of tasks.
List of all Backup Selections
Number of Backup Selections: Total number of backup selections appearing in the list.
Export: Allows to export the backup selection list to a file.
Backup Selection Information
■
Platform: Name of the platform onto which the backup selection is defined.
■
Path: Path of the backup selection directory.
■
■
■
Type: Platform type, operating system for a host, application type if the platform
is an application.
Strategy: Letter of the strategies with which the backup selection is associated.
Protected Volume: Volume of data contained in the backup selection. This
information appears only if at least one backup has been performed.
358
■
Format: Format chosen for the backup selection.
■
Filters: Indicates whether filters have been defined on the backup selection or not.
■
Security Rules: Name of the security rule associated to the backup selection.
■
Parallelized : Indicates whether the backup selection is parallelized or not.
Properties: Opens the Define Backup Selection window for the selected backup selection.
Tip:
You can also double click on a backup selection in the list to open the Define
Backup Selection window.
Modify Format: Opens the Backup Selection Format window to modify the format of the
selected backup selections.
Modify Filters: Opens the Backup Selection Filter window to modify filters for the selected
backup selections.
Modify Security Rule: Opens the Backup Selection Security Rule window to modify the
security rule associated to the selected backup selections.
Delete: Allows to delete the selected backup selections.
Note:
Whenever you select a backup selection in the list, all the other backup
selections that could be affected by a modification of that selection (i.e., backup
selections with the same path and associated to platforms belonging to the same
group) are highlighted too.
Viewing Backup Selection Information
To view backup selection information:
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Backup-Backup Selection List. The
List of all Backup Selections window appears.
2.
Chapter 7
359
Exporting the Backup Selection List
To export the Backup selection list:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Close in the List of all Backup Selections window when you are done.
Editing Backup Selections
Note:
When you modify a backup selection, all the backup selections consisting of
the same path and associated to platforms belonging to the same group are
modified as well.
To edit a backup selection:
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Backup-Backup SelectionList. The
2.
Select the backup selection you want to edit and click on Properties. The Define
Backup Selection window appears. Modify the parameters as needed and click on OK
to apply the modifications. See “Creating a Backup Selection”, page 339 for
details.
3.
To edit another backup selection, select it in the list and repeat step 2.
4.
Click on Close in the List of all Backup Selections when you are done.
Modifying Backup Selection Parameters
Note:
modified as well.
360
To modify backup selection parameters:
1.
2.
Select the backup selections for which you want to modify the parameters and click
on Modify Parameters.
3.
Modify the parameters and click on OK to apply the modifications. See “Creating
a Backup Selection”, page 339 for details concerning backup selection format.
4.
Modifying Backup Selection Filters
Note:
modified as well.
To modify backup selection filters:
1.
2.
Select the backup selections for which you want to modify the filters and click on
Modify Filters. The Backup Selection Filters window appears.
3.
Modify filters as described in “Backup Selection Filters Window”, page 360 and
click on OK to apply the modifications. See “Creating a Backup Selection”,
page 339 for details concerning backup selection filters.
4.
Backup Selection Filters Window
Modify Name Filters: Check this box to modify name filters.
Activate Name Filters: Check or uncheck this box to activate or disable name filters.
■
Add to existing filters: Specifies that the filter you define are in addition to existing
ones.
■
Replace existing filters: Specifies that the filter you define are replacing existing ones.
Chapter 7
■
361
Remove from existing filters: Specifies that the filter you select are to be removed from
the existing ones.
Selection: Specifies selection filters, see “Selection Filters Window”, page 342 for
details.
Exclusion: Specifies exclusion filters, see “Exclusion Filters Window”, page 343.
Modify Size: Check this box to modify the size filter.
Activate Size Filter: Check or uncheck this box to activate or disable the size filter.
Maximum Size: Specifies the maximum file size.
Modify Days: Check this box to modify the days filter
Activate Day Filter: Check or uncheck this box to activate or disable the days filter
Days: Specifies the maximum number of days since the last file modification.
See “Define Backup Selection Window - Filters Tab”, page 341 for details concerning
backup selection filters.
Modifying Backup Selection Security Rule
Note:
modified as well.
To modify backup selection security rule:l
1.
2.
Select the backup selections for which you want to modify the rule and click on
Modify Security Rule. The Backup Selection Security Rule window appears.
362
3.
Modify the rule parameters as described in “Backup Selection Security Rule
Window”, page 362 and click on OK to apply the modifications.
4.
Note:
details.
Backup Selection Security Rule Window
Modify Security Rule: Check this box to modify the security rule.
Activate Security Rule: Check or uncheck this box to activate or disable the security rule.
Name: Select the name of the security rule you want to use.
■
Backup: Specifies that the rule is used for backup.
■
Archiving: Specifies that the rule is used for archiving.
Note:
details.
Deleting Backup Selections
Note:
When you delete a backup selection, all the backup selections consisting of the
same path and associated to platforms belonging to the same group are deleted
as well.
To delete backup selections:
1.
2.
Select the backup selections you want to delete and click on Delete.
3.
A message box appears asking you if you want to create archive folders to archive
the hosts backup files. Click on Yes if you want to archive the contents of the
deleted hosts backup folders. Otherwise, click on No.
Chapter 7
363
364
Macro-multiplexing
This section presents the basic concepts of macro-multiplexing, and how they apply to
Time Navigator features. A good understanding of cache mechanisms is helpful to
handle macro-multiplexing.
Cache Space Management
Time Navigator uses a cache space to regulate data flow during backup and restore
operations. Cache space is defined upon creating the catalog. It can be modified later on.
See “Connected Mode”, page 13 and “Editing a Catalog”, page 45 for details.
Each catalog uses its own cache space, no sharing is possible between catalogs.
Using cache space provides the following advantages:
■
It acts as a flow regulator.
■
It optimizes performance with parallel backups.
■
The most recently processed data remains in the cache and can be accessed very
quickly should it be restored. This is referred to as the “cache effect”.
There are two types of cache:
■
■
Memory cache: it varies in size between 32 MB and 256 MB. It offers very good
performances. Atempo recommends using at least 64 MB of memory cache.
Disk cache: provides capacity from 32 MB to dozens of GB, but offers lower
performances than memory cache.
Traditionally, memory cache is used for a backup strategy with no macro-multiplexing
since it does not require a big size cache.
On the other hand, in a macro-multiplexing backup environment, more disk cache is
required. In that case, it is advisable to use a “memory cache + disk cache”
configuration. To optimize performance, the disk cache must be composed of several
physical disks, called cache axes.
Chapter 7
365
Simple Backup without Macro-multiplexing
Regardless of the backup type, data always transits through the cache space before being
written on tape.
In the non-macro-multiplexed mode, a tape and a drive remain allocated to a backup until
it ends, whatever the rate of data throughput.
In case of a slow data throughput backup, due to a slow network, or an incremental
backup with many files to read but few files to back up, the drive use is not optimized.
When several backups are scheduled at the same time, they are processed in a linear
fashion, one after the other. The total backup duration will be the sum of each individual
backup duration.
DRIVE
DATA
FLOW
CACHE
Backup B1
SPACE
TAPE
Backup B2
Backup B3
B1
B2
B3
memory
disks
Backup with Macro-multiplexing
Macro-multiplexing breaks away from linear backup to allow several backups to be
processed at the same time on the same drive.
When backups starts in macro-multiplexed mode, data is written on disk blocks, called
containers. Each backup is assigned a different container area of the cache. Each
container can hold up to 256 MB of data.
When the first container is full, it is copied on tape. The drive may or may not remain
allocated to that backup. Depending on a variety of factors such as the speed at which
data is copied into the containers, Time Navigator will decide to which backup the drive
366
should be allocated. Thus backups are not processed one after the other. This system
optimizes writing throughput and takes full advantage of fast drives.
The total backup duration will be shorter than the sum of each individual backup
duration.
DRIVE
Backup B1
CACHE
SPACE
Backup B2
Backup B3
C1 C2 C3 C1 C3 C2
C1
C2
C3
TAPE
C1, C2 and C3 =
256 MB containers
Cache
Axes
Note:
Depending on your environment, you may reach a threshold where additional
backup jobs lead to decreased performances, due to increased sollicitation of
resources (io/cpu/memory). If this is the case, you should modify your backup
schedule or you backup selections to lower the number of concurrent jobs.
Configuring Macro-multiplexing
Cache requirement
The size of all disks cache combined must be at least 2 GB, otherwise, the macromultiplexed mode is disabled. The size of any individual disk cache however, must not
exceed 2047 MB. For performance reasons, it is strongly recommended to have more
cache disk cache than drives (2 x n drives) with a maximum of 16 cache spaces (memory
cache + disk cache).
Chapter 7
367
To modify the cache space configuration
Modifying the cache space requires editing the catalog. See “Editing a Catalog”, page 45
for details or “Creating a Catalog”, page 39, if you decide to work with a brand new
catalog.
To activate macro-multiplexing
1.
Select a host.
2.
Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Strategy A (B, C, or D)-Properties. The Strategy Properties
window appears.
3.
Click on the Advanced tab. See “Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab”,
4.
Check the Sessions can be Multiplexed option to activate macro-multiplexing on full
and incremental sessions of strategy A.
5.
Click the Incremental Backups Only option to activate macro-multiplexing on
incremental backups only. This option is most interesting with fast clients machines
for which macro-multiplexing on a full backup would not bring much performance
improvement.
6.
In the Format area, check TiNa, since the is the only format allowed when
macromultiplexing is enabled.
7.
8.
Repeat this procedure for every strategy to be macro-multiplexed.
Note:
It is advisable to enable macro-multiplexing for incremental backups and for
full backups on slow machines or networks. It is also recommended not to mix
macro-multiplexed backups and standard ones in the same media pool, or to
avoid starting them during the same time phase to prevent slower performance
due to cartridge mounting/unmounting operations.
368
Backup Status by Platform
You can view at a glance the backup status of all your platforms or of a certain type of
platforms matching your criteria.
Viewing the Backup Status by Platform
To view the protection status by platform:
1.
Choose Backup-Backup Status List. The Backup Status by Platform window appears.
2.
Choose the viewing parameters. The list of platforms matching your criteria
appears.
Backup Status by Platform Parameters
Platforms with: Platforms that you want to view according to their backup status. You can
view:
■
The list of platforms having any backup status (all platforms)
■
The list of platforms with failed backups only
■
The list of platforms with the n most recent backups that failed
■
The list of platforms with the n most recent full backups that failed
■
The list of platforms with the n most recent incremental backups that failed
Period: Period that you want to analyze.
Chapter 7
369
Enabled Platforms Only: Displays only the platforms that are enabled.
Platform List
■
Platform: Name of the plaform.
■
A, B, C or D: Backup strategies used to back up the platform within the specified
period.
■
Last backup status: The backup status is identified with different colors:
■
Green: Finished ans successful
■
Orange: Paused or cancelled on request
■
Red: Cancelled on error
■
Last backup: Date of the last backup.
■
Last completed backup: Date of the last backup that was completed.
■
Last completed full backup: Date of the last full backup that was completed.
■
Last completed incremental backup: Date of the last incremental backup that was
completed.
■
Retention Alert: An orange retention period alert appears for a strategy if the
retention period margin between the last full backup and the end of the retention
period represents less than 20% of the total retention period. If the end of the
retention period is reached, a red alert is triggered.
Note :
If a retention alert appears, it means that you should quickly perform a
full backup on the plaform, because its protection is not properly
ensured.
Details: Displays detailed information about the backups performed on the selected
platform.
Run Strategy Now: Allows to re-run a backup session that failed.
Viewing Backup Details
To view backup details:
1.
In the Backup Status by Platform window, select the platform for which you want
to display the backup details.
2.
Click on the Details button. The Backup Details window appears.
370
3.
Click on the different tabs, Strategy A, B, C to view the backup details for each
strategy.
4.
Click on Close to close the window.
Backup Details Window
Completed Jobs: Status of the last backup for each strategy.
Strategy tabs
Last Backup: Description (Backup type, platform name and strategy), date and status of
the last backup.
Last Successful Backup: Description ((Backup type, platform name and strategy), and
date of the last successful backup.
Full Backup: Date of the last successful full backup, and retention period margin. The
retention period margin is the time period between the last full backup and the end of the
retention period of the media pool associated to the strategy. If the retention period
margin represents less than 20% of the total retention period, an orange retention alert
is triggered. If the end of the retention period is reached, a red alert is triggered.
Re-running a Strategy
If one of the backups failed and the issue causing the failure is solved, you can re-run
the backup session.
To re-run a strategy:
1.
In the Backup Status by Platform window, select the platform for which you want
to re-run the strategy. The Run Strategy window appears.
2.
Enter the Strategy Parameters:
3.
■
Type: Choose whether you want to run a full or an incremental backup.
■
Strategy: Choose the strategy to re-run.
Click on OK to relaunch the backup job.
371
C H A P T E R
Agents
8
8
This chapter covers the use of the application on all supported agents. The agents can be
under any of the following types of operating system:
■
Windows
■
Unix
■
Linux
■
Mac OS X
■
VMS
■
NetWare
■
NDMP
For NetWare agents, the Time Navigator graphical interface is not available.
For details concerning Specific Attributes and ACLs backup for each OS, see “Backup
of Specific Attributes”, page 311.
372
Windows
Using the Time Navigator Agent
The tina_daemon.exe binary allows the Time Navigator server to manage the file
system of the Windows client, and thus to back up the client’s data by running the
tina_backup.exe binary.
The Time Navigator agent is automatically started as a service whenever the
Windows machine starts.
Backing up Files
All file attributes (read-only, system, hidden, archive) are backed up.
It is recommended not to back up the following files:
■
*.bak
■
*.tmp
■
Possibly the temporary directory temp or tmp.
Restoring Files
All file attributes and dates are recovered.
Registry
The registry is made up of two files: System.dat and Users.dat located in the
Windows directory. They can be backed up and restored.
Windows 2000/2003/XP/Vista
For information concerning Windows 2000/2003/XP/Vista clients and the System State
application, see the Time Navigator Agent for Windows guide.
Chapter 8
Agents
373
Unix
Unix agents can perform all operations with Time Navigator as long as Motif is available
on the machine.
Linux
Linux agents can perform all operations with Time Navigator as long as X11 is available
on the machine.
In order to backup ACLs, make sure that the libacl.so library is declared in the PATH
environment variable of the system.
Time Navigator handles file systems controlled by Data Migration Facility (DMF) from
SGI through the use of the bapi_fs tunable.
For information concerning the bapi_fs tunable, see the Time Navigator Tunables guide.
374
Mac OS X
Mac OS X agents can perform all the operations with Time Navigator as long as X11 is
available on the machine.
See the Time Navigator Installation Guide for details concerning the Mac OS X agent
and X11 installation.
Time Navigator Daemon
Starting or Stopping the Time Navigator Daemon
To start or stop the Time Navigator daemon on a Mac OS X client, proceed as follows:
1.
Click on the Finder, choose Applications-Utilities and double click on the Terminal icon
to open it.
2.
Move to the Time Navigator installation directory:
cd /Applications/Atempo/tina_environment
where tina_environment is the name of the Time Navigator environment you
defined during the setup.
3.
Run the the following command to set the Time Navigator environment:
. ./.tina.sh
4.
To start the daemon, run the tina_daemon command.
To stop the daemon, run the tina_stop command.
Time Navigator Interfaces
Using the Time Navigator Interfaces
1.
Make sure that the Time Navigator daemon is running as previously explained
(see “Time Navigator Daemon”, page 374).
2.
Click on the Finder and choose Applications-Atempo.
3.
In the Atempo folder, open the folder of the Time Navigator environment you
want to use.
Chapter 8
4.
Agents
375
Double-click on the icon of the interface you want to use. See the Time Navigator
Administration Guide (tina_adm, tina_job, tina_library) and
Time Navigator Restore Guide (tina) for details concerning each interface.
Note:
The tina_adm command is only available if you installed the Admin Tools
component during setup.
Specifics of the Mac OS X agent
File System
Time Navigator Agent for Mac OS X allows to back up HFS+ and UFS file systems.
Resource Fork
Files on Mac systems are traditionally made of two parts: the data fork that contains the
actual data and the resource fork that contains such information as attributes, program
segments, icon bitmaps and other parameters.
The resource forks are associated with HFS+ volumes. In newer versions of the
MAC OS X, they are being used less and less. However, for compatibility reasons,
Time Navigator Agent for Mac OS X allows to back up and restore the resource forks.
Note:
In addition, the resource fork backup is used by Time Navigator to handle the
processing of alias.
Backup
The version size provided by Time Navigator includes the Data fork, the Resource fork
and additional information.
376
Restore
Resource forks are restored only on an HFS+ file system. If you perform a cross restore
from an HFS+ to a UFS file system, resource forks are lost and the restored file only
contains the data fork.
Note:
If you copy fileA.txt from an HFS+ to an UFS volume, the Finder keeps
the resource fork in ._fileA.txt on the UFS volume.
Alias
Time Navigator Agent for Mac OS X allows to back up and restore aliases.
HFS+
On an HFS+ system, an alias is a file that contains only a resource fork and no data
fork. A field in the Finder Info indicates that the file is an alias.
All alias information is contained in the resource fork and in the Finder Info and can
therefore be backed up and restored with Time Navigator.
UFS
An alias consists of two files: an empty file fileB.txt alias and
._fileB.txt alias.
The Time Navigator user only sees both file and must back up and restore both files.
Note:
The restore of aliases for UFS file systems does not require the restore of the
Finder Info.
Cross restoring from HFS+ to UFS
Since resource forks are not restored on a UFS file system, a cross restore from HFS+
to UFS does not allow to restore the alias. Only the empty file fileA.txt alias is
restored.
Cross restoring from UFS to HFS+
Cross restore between UFS and HFS+ is not supported by Time Navigator.
Chapter 8
Agents
377
FinderInfo
Time Navigator Agent for Mac OS X allows to back up and restore the Finder Info. The
Finder Info is backed up as a block using APIs, the detailed contents of the Finder Info
is not known. The backed up Finder elements include the following:
■
The color of a file or folder
■
The Stationery Pad information of a file
■
The alias of a file (for HFS+ file systems)
For details concerning the backup of the FinderInfo, see “Backup of Specific Attributes”,
page 311.
PAM
Using Pluggable Authentication Modules (PAM) requires the following configuration:
Mac OS X configuration
In the folder /etc/pam.d create a file atempo containing the following:
■
auth required pam_nologin.so
■
auth sufficient pam_securityserver.so
■
auth sufficient pam_unix.so
■
auth required pam_deny.so
■
account required pam_permit.so
■
password required pam_deny.so
■
session required pam_permit.so
Time Navigator configuration
Set the tunable enable_pam_authentication to "yes".
Known Issues
Accented Character
Files containing accented characters in their name are correctly backed up and restored.
However, non ASCII characters are not displayed in the Time Navigator interfaces and
are replaced by #.
378
Case Sensitivity
Time Navigator for Mac OS X automatically handles case sensitivity depending on the
file system type. On UFS, Time Navigator is case sensitive, fileA is different from
FileA. Both files can be located in the same directory. On HFS+, Time Navigator is
not case sensitive, fileA is the same as FileA. If you rename fileA into FileA, it will not
be backed up during the next incremental. During the next full backup, FileA will be
back up and its version will be linked to fileA versions.
Case Sensitivity in Command line
While most Time Navigator commands work with a Time Navigator Mac OS X
platform as they do with any other operating system, you must be careful with the
following commands that use a path or a file name as a parameters:
■
tina_cart
The option -files is case sensitive. You must use the exact case of the file names
to list or extract when using this option.
■
tina_restore
The option -path_folder is case sensitive. To list the contents of a directory,
you must provide the exact case of the directory path even if the directory is located
in a non-case sensitive file system.
■
tina_find
The option -path_folder (unlike the tina_restore -path_folder option),
is not case sensitive.
■
tina_alpha
The file names specified in the command instance are case sensitive.
The object names specified in the commands add and sub are not case sensitive.
For details concerning the command line, see the Time Navigator Command Line
Interface guide.
Finder’s comments
The Finder’s comments are located in the file .DS_Store. This file is currently updated
only when the machine is restarted. Thus a backup of that file may not contain the latest
modifications. A solution to that issue is currently being sought with the manufacturer of
Mac OS X.
Atempo proposes the following procedure to bypass that issue:
■
■
Create a file update_finder_comments containing the following script:
osascript -e 'tell application "Finder" to quit'
osascript -e 'tell application "Finder" to run'
Make sure that the user performing the backup and restore operations has the
permission to execute update_finder_comments.
Chapter 8
■
■
Agents
379
Backup: in the Strategy Window, enter update_finder_comments in the
preprocessing field. The script will be executed prior to any backup on the Mac
OS X agent.
Restore: perform the restore on the Mac OS X agent and manually execute
update_finder_comments once the restore is completed.
Context Sensitive menu
The shortcut key to activate the context sensitive menus is the apple key rather than the
Ctrl key.
Cross restoring aliases on a different file system
It is not possible to cross restore aliases from HFS+ to UFS,nor from UFS to HFS+.
380
VMS
General information
■
■
■
■
VMS agents can use all the Time Navigator graphical interface functionalities as
long as DEC Windows Motif is installed on the machine.
Time Navigator tree structure is not limited to eight levels.
The SYS$STARTUP:TINA_SHUTDOWN.COM procedure is used to stop the
application.
The Time Navigator start-up procedure defines the following:
TINA$ROOT on the Time Navigator installation directory
TINA$COM = TINA$ROOT:[COM]
TINA$EXE = TINA$ROOT:[EXE], directories where the Time Navigator
binaries are located.
Note:
■
■
Atempo recommends that you use logical names such as these instead of absolute
paths to access binaries. This maintains consistency with any scripts that you
might use.
The directories names beginning with the hyphen character (-) are properly
processed by Time Navigator.
With VMS you must define a symbol before using parameters with a
Time Navigator binary.
For instance, if you want to use the tina_restore command help parameter,
you must execute the following:
$ tina_rst = "$ TINA$EXE:TINA_RESTORE.EXE"
$ tina_rst -help
Parameters are converted to lower case. If a parameter must remain in upper case,
it must appear between quotes. Example:
$ tina_archive = "$ TINA$EXE:TINA_ARCHIVE.EXE"
$ tina_archive -backup -full -strat "A"
The TINA_STATUS symbol represents the command return code. Its values are:
■
65 535 in case of success
Chapter 8
■
Agents
381
Another value in case of failure.
Operations to perform before starting the VMS agent
If you have just installed Time Navigator Agent for VMS, do not enter the following
commands unless the installation was correctly performed.
■
Definitions at the VMS agent system level
1.
Run the DCL command file:
@SYS$STARTUP:TINA_STARTUP.COM
2.
Enter the following command to cancel the above command or to stop
Time Navigator.
@SYS$STARTUP:TINA_SHUTDOWN.COM
3.
Start the SYS$STARTUP:TINA_STARTUP.COM procedure in the
SYS$STARTUP:STARTUP_VMS.COM file or in the LPMAIN phase of the SYSMAN
STARTUP area to start Time Navigator Agent for VMS automatically with the
system.
4.
Define or remove the following logical names to adapt Time Navigator to your
environment specifics:
TINA_SET_BACKUP_DATE:
Set to any value, this logical name indicates that the backup date of any file backed
up with Time Navigator will be updated.
TINA_ALL_VERSIONS:
Set to any value, this logical name indicates that Time Navigator is working in a
multi-version mode. When performing a backup or an archiving, all versions of a
file are displayed in the selection window (otherwise, only the last version will be
displayed). This option uses up a lot of space in the catalog since Time Navigator
creates a backup selection per file version.
During a restore, if Time Navigator detects an existing file with the same version
number as the file you are restoring, you will have the option either to replace or
rename the file. The old file will be renamed as
filename.type_saven;p (where n = a number).
Note:
■
If you choose to use the TINA_ALL_VERSIONS logical name, you must add the *
character after each file name in the exclusion filter. For instance to exclude all
LOG file versions, enter *.LOG;* in the exclusion filter.
To exclude only version 2 files, enter *.LOG;2 in the exclusion filter.
Definition at the VMS user level
382
Start Time Navigator Agent for VMS with the following commands:
RUN TINA$EXE:TINA to start Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager.
RUN TINA$EXE:TINA_ADM to start Time Navigator Administration Console.
Backup Selection
Due to a viewing problem in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager,
Time Navigator does not support the use of logical names in the path of the backup
selection.
If you have already performed a backup on a backup selection containing a logical name
and you want to restore some data from that backup, open Time Navigator Restore &
Archive Manager and set the date to a date in the past, with or without showing deleted
files depending on your need. You will be able to see the backed up versions and perform
the restore.
Chapter 8
OES NetWare
See the Time Navigator Agent for NetWare guide.
Agents
383
384
OES Linux
See the Time Navigator Agent for NetWare guide.
Chapter 8
NDMP
See the Time Navigator for NDMP guide.
Agents
385
386
Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer
Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer application is installed by default on a
Time Navigator agent. The application is supported on Unix, Windows, Mac OS X,
VMS, and NetWare operating systems. On Unix, Windows and Mac OS X, it is divided
into two tabs. The first tab provides information about the backups and restores
performed on agents, while the second tab, which appears only if the User has rights,
gives access to On Demand Backup functionality. On VMS and NetWare, only the first
tab is available.
This section will discuss the default functions of Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer on
all operating systems. For a detailed discussion of the optional On Demand Backup
functions on Unix, Mac OS X and Windows, see Chapter 9, “On Demand Backup”,
page 405.
Starting Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer
To start Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer on a Unix client
Run the following executable on the command line:
$TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_user_info
The application main window appears.
To start Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer on a Windows client
Choose Start-Programs-Time Navigator- Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer.
Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer appears.
When minimized, Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer appears as a compass icon in the
Windows System Tray.
The icon appearance varies according to the service or daemon status, the catalog
connection(s) and the backup and/or restore jobs in progress.
Icon appearance
Status
Red
Service or daemon stopped
Blue
Service or daemon running
Flashing green dots on the horizontal axis
of the compass
Backup in progress
Chapter 8
Icon appearance
Status
Flashing green dots on the vertical axis of
the compass
Restore in progress
Flashing green dots on both horizontal and
vertical axes of the compass
Backup and Restore in progress
Agents
387
To start Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer on a VMS client
Run the tina_user_info binary located in the Bin directory of the tina user
acccount.
Enter run tina$exe:tina_user_info on the command line.
Main Window
Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer main window is divided into three areas: the menu
bar, the information area and the status bar.
Menu
Bar
Information
Area
Status
Bar
Menu bar
The menu bar contains all the commands:
■
Application-Job Details
Displays the Job Details windows.
For more information about the Job Details window, see “Job Details”, page 389.
■
Application-Quit
388
Closes Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer.
■
View-Refresh
Refreshes the displayed information manually.
Information area
The Information area provides the following information:
■
Host name of the local machine.
■
Date of the last successful full or incremental backup preceded by a green diamond.
■
Note:
■
Date of the last full or incremental backup which ended on error. The date is
preceded by a red or orange diamond which indicates the error severity.
Color
Error Description
Orange
Backup paused or cancelled on request
Red
Backup cancelled on error
The last backup date is displayed only if the backup came after the last
successful backup.
The date of the failed backup is not displayed if the latest backup was
successful.
Date of the next scheduled full or incremental backup.
The displayed dates do not concern application backups, only filesystem backups.
Status bar
The icons on the status bar provides the following information:
Chapter 8
Numbered
Area
1
Icon
Agents
389
Description
Catalog connection status
The Catalog is the Time Navigator database. It contains the information
required to run Time Navigator (platform configuration, drives, libraries,
users, media, etc.), as well as the description and location of all backed up
and archived files.
If the Catalog cannot be accessed, backups and restores cannot be performed.
You can have several Catalogs defined for the same client platform.
The number of catalogs that remain connected is indicated on the right of the
catalog icon.
If the connection to one of the catalogs fails, a red exclamation mark appears
on the catalog icon on the left of the status bar.
2
Time Navigator service status
The service is the process which allows Time Navigator Server and
Time Navigator Agent to run. It corresponds to the Time Navigator service
on Windows and the daemon (tina_daemon) on Unix.
A green chekmark indicates that the Time Navigator service is running.
A red cross indicates that the Time Navigator service is stopped.
3
Backup or restore in progress
If a backup or a restore job is in progress, a cartridge icon is displayed on the
right of the status bar.
Refreshing
The information area and the status bar are refreshed every two minutes if no backup or
restore job is in progress on your machine. If a job is running, the refreshing period is
30 seconds. You can manually refresh the window choosing View-Refresh.
Job Details
The Job Details window displays additional information about complete and cancelled
backups, and about backup and restore jobs in progress.
To view the Job Details window
1.
Choose Application-Job Details.
390
The following window appears:
2.
Click on the Complete, Cancelled and In Progress tabs to view successful and
cancelled backups as well as current jobs.
3.
Click on Close to return to the main window.
Complete
The Complete tab is used to display the following information after a successful
backup:
Catalog
Name of the catalog into which the backup is performed
Description
Job type, name of the platform, name of the strategy and backup type
(incremental or full)
Status
Job status (Complete)
Date
Job submission date
Processed Volume
Processed object Volume (bytes) or Progression if the job is in
progress
Processed Objects
Number of backed up/restored Objects
Note:
The Complete and Cancelled tabs allow you to view the details of backup
jobs. The In Progress tab also allows you to view restores.
Cancelled
The Cancelled tab is used to display the following information after a cancelled
Chapter 8
Agents
391
backup:
Catalog
Description
Job type, name of the platform, name of the strategy and backup type
(incremental or full)
Status
Job status (Cancelled)
Date
Job submission date
Processed Volume
Processed object Volume (bytes)
Processed Objects
In Progress
The In Progress tab is used to display the following information about running
backup and restore jobs:
Catalog
Description
Job type, job description (name of baked up/restored platform, name
of strategy and type of backup)
Status
Job status (Running)
Date
Job submission date
Processed Volume
Processed object Volume (bytes) or Progression if the job is in
progress
Processed Objects
Refreshing the Displayed Information
The information area and the status bar are refreshed every two minutes if no backup or
restore job is in progress on your machine. If a job is running, the refreshing period is
30 seconds. You can also refresh the window manually.
To refresh the Displayed Information
1.
Choose View-Refresh.
2.
Click on Close to go back to the main interface.
392
Mac OS X
Opening Time Navigator Backup Activity Widget
On Mac OS X Tiger platforms Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer is in the form of a
Dashboard Widget.
To start Time Navigator Backup Activity Widget on a Mac OS X client
Choose Finder-Application and click on the Dashboard icon.
In the Dashboard click on the Backup Activity icon. The widget appears.
The following information is provided:
■
Operation in progress (if any): backup or restore.
■
Time Navigator Service Status: Up, Down or Unknown
■
Last Status: Status of the last backup: completed, paused or cancelled.
■
Last completed: Date of the last completed backup, Unknown or N/A.
■
Next scheduled: Date of the next scheduled backup, Unknown or N/A.
■
Status bar: Refreshing if a refreshing is in progress, the name of the
Time Navigator environment if several environments are present, the icon to
switch the Backup Activity over.
To switch the Backup Activity widget
Click on the i in the lower right corner of the widget.
Chapter 8
Agents
393
The following information is provided:
■
Refreshing frequency: allows the user to set the value and unit of the refreshing
period.
■
Environment Choice: allows the user to choose the Time Navigator environment, if
several environment are present. Othewise the button does not appear.
Viewing Jobs
Time Navigator Job Manager displays complete information about backup and restore
jobs as well as all the job types found in Time Navigator either finished or in progress.
To view Jobs
1.
Click on the Last Backup Status icon. The Catalog Login window appears.
2.
Provide a user name and password to connect to the catalog. The Time Navigator
Job Manager appears.
See “Time Navigator Job Manager”, page 331 for details.
394
NetWare
Opening Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer
To start Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer on a NetWare client
Run the binary with the following command:
load tina_ui.nlm
Main Window
Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer main window is divided in two areas: a Status area
and a Command bar.
Status area
The following information is displayed in the Status area:
■
Name of the Time Navigator Server
■
Service status (started or stopped)
■
Backup in progress (Running/None)
■
Restore in progress (Running/None)
The status area is refreshed every two minutes if no backup or restore job is in progress
on your machine. If a job is running, the refreshing period is 30 seconds.
Chapter 8
Agents
395
Command Bar
The following commands are available:
■
Esc to Quit
■
F5 to do a refresh
■
Enter to display the Job Details window.
For more information about the Job Details window, see the section below.
Job Details
This window displays additional information about backup and restore jobs in progress.
To view the Job Details window
1.
Press the Enter key. The information is displayed on two separate windows.
2.
Press the Tab key to switch from one Details window to the other.
The following information appears in the first window;
■
Name of the Catalog into which the backup or restore was performed.
■
Description of the backup or restore jobs (Job type, name of the backed up or
restored platform, name of the strategy and type of backup).
■
Status of the backup or restore jobs (Complete, Cancelled ...).
The following information appears in the second window:
396
■
■
■
3.
Backup or restore submission Date.
Processed objects Volume (bytes) or Progression if the backup or restore is in
progress.
Number of backed up or restored Objects.
Press the Esc key to go back to the main window.
Chapter 8
Agents
397
398
Chapter 8
Agents
399
400
Chapter 8
Agents
401
402
Chapter 8
Agents
403
404
405
C H A P T E R
9
On Demand Backup
9
On Demand Backup is a feature in Time Navigator that empowers an end user to start
the backup job.
It allows users to initiate backups at their convenience, outside the schedule set by the
administrator. They do not have to apply to the administrator in person every time they
need an unscheduled backup. Administrators are able to retain control of backup access
and load.
Imagine a busy executive who is often on the road with a laptop. Before leaving on a
business trip, he or she needs to ensure that all his or her work is well-protected. He
needs a backup then and there - with a plane to catch, there can be no waiting around for
the next automatic backup to run. On Demand Backup is the solution.
The principle of on-demand backup is straightforward:
■
■
The Time Navigator Administrator defines:
■
Which Users have the right to run an On Demand Backup
■
Which Strategies on which platforms can be run On Demand
■
How many On Demand Backups can be run per strategy in a 24-hour period.
The User authorized to run On Demand Backup can run it:
■
With the Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer graphic interface
■
From the command line, with the command tina_user_info_cmd
■
In a MacIntosh environment, from a Dashboard Widget.
Limitations
■
■
The On Demand Backup feature only works on hosts and on FileSystem
Applications.
All On Demand Backups are incremental.
406
Configuring On Demand Backup
For Users to be able to use On Demand Backup, the administrator must configure some
settings in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Defining Users
A User having On Demand Backup rights must already exist. Create it if necessary. For
information on how to create a User, see Chapter 9, “Users and Access Rights”,
page 119.
To give On Demand Backup rights to a user
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Security-User Access RightsPersonal.
2.
The list of Users appears. Select the User and click OK. The Access Control window
appears:
3.
In the top part of the window, select Define Personal Access Rights.
Chapter 9
On Demand Backup
4.
Under the Backup tab, check the box On Demand Backup (start and stop).
5.
Click on the OK button.
Note:
407
If you wish to give all the Users in your Network the right to use On Demand
Backup, select Security-User Access Rights-Default. This assumes they do not
already have a personal profile created.
Defining Strategies
Create a Backup selection and Strategy for which it will be possible to run On Demand
Backups, or edit an existing one. For more information on creating or editing a strategy,
see Chapter 7, “Automatic Backup Configuration”, page 285.
To set On Demand Backup on a strategy
1.
In the New Strategy or Strategy Properties Window, under the Advanced tab, check the
box Available for On Demand Backup as shown in the illustration below.
2.
Click on OK.
408
Managing Load
The Administrator must set a global parameter for the entire Time Navigator network of
how many On Demand Backups can be run per host and per day. The default value is 5.
To set the limit
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Catalogs-Parameters. The
Catalog Parameters interface appears.
Chapter 9
On Demand Backup
409
2.
In the On Demand Backup area in the lower half of the window, modify the parameter
Maximum of On Demand Backup per day and per host.
3.
Click on OK.
410
411
Using On Demand Backup
Windows and Unix: Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer
Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer has already been described in Chapter 8, “Agents”,
page 371. In that chapter, we mentioned that Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer was
structured over two tabs and covered in detail the contents and operation of the first tab,
Information.
The second tab, On Demand Backup, appears only if On Demand Backup functionality is
available:
■
The user must have the rights
■
At least one strategy has the On Demand Backup option activated
■
At least one On Demand Backup still can be run as defined in the Maximum per
day on that host
If one of these conditions ceases to be present after the program has been launched, the
second tab remains, but the Start and Cancel buttons are greyed and the label beside them
reads "No available platforms for On Demand Backup".
Description of the On Demand Backup Tab
412
The On Demand Backup tab contains:
■
■
Two buttons, Start and Cancel to start and cancel the On Demand Backup
A scrollable Details of my On Demand Backup area displaying status and information
for the On Demand Backup jobs:
■
The List of running On Demand Backup Jobs
■
The List of terminated On Demand Backup Jobs
The tree shown in this Details area has up to four levels:
■
■
■
■
The first level is the catalogs, but it appears only in a multi-catalog environment.
If there is only one Time Navigator catalog, the jobs become the first level.
Jobs are displayed with an icon representing their status:
■
For completed jobs, a green gear.
■
For running jobs, a blue arrow.
■
For error jobs, a orange triangle.
Under each job, the backup selections (with a yellow folder icon) and the
Information icon (white i on blue circle) are found.
If Information is opened, the job id and the folder name appear.
The tree keeps only one job per catalog, platform, and strategy. When a more recent job
is created, it replaces the old one of the same catalog, platform and strategy.
Tree Update
The tree is updated at three different rates:
■
2 minutes when there is no activity.
■
30 seconds when a normal backup is running.
■
5 seconds when an On Demand Backup is running.
An update can be forced with the View - Refresh menu item, or by pressing the F5 key.
To Operate On Demand Backup on Windows and Unix
1.
Log in as an authorized User on the platform.
2.
Run Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer.
3.
Go in the On Demand Backup tab.
413
4.
Click on the Start button to launch the backup, or on the Cancel button to cancel a
backup in progress.
On Demand Backup in the Windows Taskbar
When On Demand Backup is minimized in Windows, it can still be accessed from the
taskbar at the lower right of the screen.
If the necessary conditions are present, right-clicking on the taskbar icon gives access to
two items in a Windows popup menu: Start on demand backup or Cancel on demand backup.
414
On Demand Backup Unavailable
■
The Start On Demand Backup can be unavailable (i.e. the Start button disabled, or
the On Demand Backup tab does not appear on Time Navigator Agent Job
Viewer) if:
■
■
■
■
■
A backup job is still active on this platform. Check in the Job Details or in
Time Navigator Job Manager whether there are any jobs stopped on error.
They need to be cancelled for On Demand Backup to be available.
The number of On Demand Backups launched within the last 24 hours is
greater than the limit set by the administrator.
The backup server is busy (i.e. the number of running jobs is greater than
the fixed limit).
The user does not have sufficient rights.
The Cancel On Demand Backup can be unavailable (Cancel button disabled, or the
On Demand Backup tab does not appear on Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer)
if:
■
An On Demand Backup is not running on this platform.
■
The user does not have sufficient rights.
Monitoring On Demand Backup in Time Navigator Job
Manager
In Time Navigator Job Manager, the backup jobs derived from On Demand requests
are tagged as End User jobs.
It is possible for several On Demand Backup jobs to be running at once. For example,
the Start of On Demand Backup starts two backup jobs:
■
■
If the Administrator defines two separate On Demand Backup strategies on a
platform.
If the Administrator defines one On Demand Backup strategy on a platform. and
defines another On Demand Backup strategy on a FileSystem Application related
415
to the platform.
■
In a multi catalog environment, if a platform is present in two catalogs and if each
version of it has an On Demand Backup strategy.
416
417
418
419
C H A P T E R
10
Time Navigator in SAN
Environments
10
This section describes how to configure Time Navigator in order to implement a backup
and restore solution on a dedicated data storage network, the Storage Area Network
(SAN).
About Time Navigator in SAN Environments
Storage Area Networks (SAN) are designed to simplify and optimize data management
through resource sharing. As such, they also optimize the data backup processes, making
it possible to share libraries and drives with multiple servers over a storage-dedicated
network.
Time Navigator allows you to implement two different types of architectures to share
storage resources over a SAN:
■
About Multiple Server Architecture
■
About Storage Node Architecture
See “Multiple Servers or Storage Nodes”, page 422 to help you choose between the two
types of architectures according to your needs and constraints.
420
About Multiple Server Architecture
As shown in the diagram below, storage resources can be shared between several
Time Navigator servers connected to a SAN. The main server managing the library
allows you physically to split the library between each server.
The data located on the servers is backed up directly on the storage device through the
SAN. The meta-data is sent to the associated catalog and do not go through the IP or
the SAN network.
For more information about the representation of this configuration in Time Navigator
Administration Console, see "SAN Supervision", page 424.
Chapter 10
Time Navigator in SAN Environments
421
About Storage Node Architecture
A storage node is a client platform that can be connected to a storage device and can
back up data directly, bypassing the Time Navigator Server. The meta-data is farted
to the server catalog through the IP Network.
As shown on the diagram below, several storage nodes can share the drives and library.
The library is managed by the Time Navigator Server.
For more information about the representation of this configuration in Time Navigator
Administration Console, see "Storage Node Architecture Implementation", page 428.
422
About Mixed Architecture
Both types of architecture can be combined on the same network to fit your needs:
■
■
If the catalog is full on storage node architecture, you can either add a catalog on
the same server or add a second server with the Time Navigator Shared Drive
Option.
You can also add NDMP file servers with dedicated catalogs to a storage node
architecture.
Multiple Servers or Storage Nodes
The table below will help you choose between the two types of architecture according
to your needs and constraints:
Features
Multiple Servers
Storage Node
Multiple writing
YES
YES
Media duplication
YES
YES
Synthetic backup
YES
NO
cpio, and TiNa formats support
YES
NO
tar format support
YES
YES
sidf format support
NO
YES (dedicated media pool
required)
Requires splitting of the library
YES
NO
Dedicated catalog
YES
NO
Macro-multiplexing
YES
NO
tina_export command
YES
YES except for the export to
the same catalog
Chapter 10
423
Device Descriptor Re-allocation
In a SAN configuration, SCSI devices (drives and libraries) may be dynamically reallocated during zoning operations. The operating system device configuration is then
modified on the platforms connected to the SAN.
Time Navigator can get the serial numbers of the devices in order to identify drives and
library exactly and modify the device descriptors dynamically.
Time Navigator supports this feature on the following operating systems:
■
Windows
■
SUN Solaris
■
Linux
The drive serial number is automatically detected if the drive is created on a SAN in
Time Navigator Administration Console (see "To create a SAN", page 429).
On the other hand, the detection of the library serial number and the re-allocation of the
device descriptors require the Use Serial Number to Determine Device Descriptor
(check_device_descriptor_from_serial_number) tunable to be declared
through the Configurator on the Time Navigator Server.
To implement device descriptor re-allocation
1.
Before performing an operation likely to modify the devices connected to the SAN
(zoning), declare the Use Serial Number to Determine Device Descriptor
(check_device_descriptor_from_serial_number) tunable via
Time Navigator Configurator on the server.
For more information on tunables, see the Time Navigator Tunables Guide.
2.
Once the zoning operation is completed, restart the Time Navigator server and
storage nodes connected to the drives or libraries through the SAN to update the
device configuration. If you do not want to restart the machines, you must
manually update the device configuration on the operating systems.
For more information on device configuration, see the operating system
administration documentation and the Time Navigator Drivers Guide.
3.
Perform an operation which requires access to the drives and libraries. For
instance, reinitialize the library and read a cartridge label with the drives.
This operation allows update of the device descriptor in Time Navigator. The new
descriptor appears in the Drive and Library Properties windows.
424
4.
Remove the Use Serial Number to Determine Device Descriptor
(check_device_descriptor_from_serial_number) tunable via
Time Navigator Configurator. If the tunable is not removed, requests are
regularly sent to check the device descriptors and it generates unnecessary network
traffic.
SAN Supervision
Time Navigator Web Supervision is designed to facilitate remote supervision and
administration in large SAN environments with many catalogs.
For more information about Time Navigator Web Supervision, refer to the
Time Navigator Web Interfaces guide.
Chapter 10
425
Multiple Server Architecture Implementation
Prerequisites
Several Time Navigator components must be installed:
■
Time Navigator Server must be installed on each secondary server connected to
the SAN. The setup must be run and the Time Navigator Server option checked.
For more information on Time Navigator installation, see the Time Navigator
Installation Guide.
■
Time Navigator Server must be installed on the main server managing the library.
The setup must be used to split the library so that each server is allocated a split
in the library.
For more information about the library split, see the Time Navigator Library
Sharing Manager Guide.
■
When you create catalogs on the various servers, they must all be accessible by all
servers. To do so, you must manually modify the catalogs files on each server
to add an entry for each catalog. See Time Navigator Installation Guide for
details.
Configuration
Each secondary server must be similarly configured, except for the main server
managing the library.
To configure the main server
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console on the main server, create the
library.
The split number corresponding to the library server must be added at the end of
the Device Descriptor. For example:
qc0,0
/dev/qc0,0
c0b2t4l0s0
See "Creating a Library", page 161 and the Time Navigator Library Sharing
Manager Guide.
2.
Choose Platform-New-Network to create a SAN network.
426
3.
Select the SAN icon and choose Devices-Drive-New. The Drive Type Selection
window appears.
4.
Choose the drive type and click on OK. The New Drive window appears.
5.
Set the parameters in the various tabs as described in "Changing the Mode of the
Drive", page 182.
Note:
In the Identity tab, make sure you enter the name of a user who has the
necessary rights to access the drive.
6.
In the Connection tab, click on Add to specify the host you want to be backed up
onto the drive. The Host List window appears.
7.
Select your main server in the list and click on OK.
8.
In the Device Descriptor field, enter the drive device descriptor.
9.
The drive icon appears attached to the SAN in the lower part of the Network area.
The screen below represents the Network Area of the main server Time Navigator
Administration Console: the main server name is takata; it is attached to the DocLib
library containing the DocDrive and DocDrive2 drives:
Chapter 10
427
To configure the secondary servers
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console on the secondary server, create the
main server. See "Creating a Platform", page 74.
2.
Create the library attached to the main server.
The split number corresponding to the secondary server you are configuring must
be added at the end of the Device Descriptor. For example:
qc0,1
/dev/qc0,1
c0b2t4l0s1
See "Creating a Library", page 161 and the Time Navigator Library Sharing
Manager Guide.
3.
Choose Platform-New-Network to create a SAN network. Then select it to create the
drive(s) used by the server you are configuring. See steps 2. to 9. of the To
configure the main server procedure page 425.
The screen below represents the Network Area of a secondary server’s
Time Navigator Administration Console: the server name is aria and the library
server name is takata; data located on aria is backed up on the DocDrive2
drive:
428
Storage Node Architecture Implementation
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be met before configuring Time Navigator:
■
■
Time Navigator Server must be installed on the backup server. The setup must
have been runned and the Time Navigator Server option checked.
Time NavigatorStorage Node must be installed on each storage node. The setup
must have been run and the Time Navigator Storage Node option checked.
For more information concerning Time Navigator installation, see the Time Navigator
Installation Guide.
Configuration
Attention:
Prior to configuring Time Navigator Storage Node on Windows platforms,
make sure that the Removable Storage Windows service (NtmsSvc) is stopped.
If this service is started, some conflicts may occur for media access.
To Configure Time Navigator:
1.
Create the library attached to the Time Navigator Server. See "Creating a
Library", page 161.
2.
Declare each storage node as a host. Check the Storage Node option in the
Advanced tab of the New Host window. See "Creating a Host", page 74.
3.
Create the SAN Network. See "SAN Creation", page 429.
4.
Create the shared drives. See "Shared Drive Creation", page 429.
5.
Create a backup strategy on each storage node. Uncheck the Use Cache on Server
option in the Advanced tab. See "Creating a Backup Strategy", page 301.
Note:
When performing a backup without using the cache on the server, the
backup format used is SIDF (System Independent Data Format - ISO/
IEC 14863).
Chapter 10
429
SAN Creation
To create a SAN
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Platform-New-Network. The
New Network window appears.
2.
Enter any name for the network in the Network Name field and click on OK. The SAN
icon appears in the lower part of the Network area.
Shared Drive Creation
To create a shared drive
1.
Select the SAN in the Network area.
2.
Choose Devices-Drive-New. The Drive Type Selection window appears.
3.
Choose the drive type and click on OK. The New Drive window appears.
4.
Set the parameters in the various tabs as described in "Changing the Mode of the
Drive", page 182.
Note:
In the Identity tab, make sure you enter the name of a user who has the
necessary rights to access the drive.
5.
In the Connection tab, click on Add to specify the storage node hosts you want to be
backed up onto the drive. The Host List window appears.
6.
Select one or several host(s) in the list and click on OK.
7.
In the Host column, select a host and enter its device descriptor in the Device
Descriptor field.
8.
The drive icon appears attached to the SAN in the lower part of the Network area.
Note:
Adding hosts in the Drive window automatically fills in the SAN Connection tab
in the Host window.
The screen below represents the backup server Time Navigator Administration
Console: the backup server name is takata, the storage node names are aria and
frida. DocDrive and DocDrive2 drives are the shared drives connected to a SAN.
430
Data located on the storage nodes is backed up directly on the drives:
Modifying the Drive Connection type
This feature allows you to quickly convert a local drive (or a shared drive) already
configured in Time Navigator Administration Console to a shared drive (or to a local
drive). See "Automatically Cleaning Drives", page 184, for details.
Disabling/Enabling Drive-Host Connections
This feature allows you to temporarily disconnect a host from a drive without affecting
other drive-host connections. Practical applications are:
■
■
disconnecting a malfunctioning storage node for maintenance and repair purposes
while still using the other storage nodes
reading a 128 KB block size tape by disconnecting hosts that are not compatible
with this tape format and retaining compatible ones
To disconnect a host from a drive/ To connect back a host to a drive:
1.
Right-click a host in the Network area then select Properties.
The Host Properties window appears.
2.
Select the SAN Connection tab.
Chapter 10
3.
Select a drive then click on Disable connection/ Enable connection.
To disconnect a drive from a host/ To connect back a drive to a host:
1.
Right-click a drive in the Network area then select Properties.
The Drive Properties window appears.
2.
Select the Connection tab.
3.
Select a host then click on Disable connection/ Enable connection.
431
432
433
C H A P T E R
11
Alarms
11
Time Navigator contains an internal alarm system management which simplifies the
application management.
This system displays alarms in Time Navigator Administration Console. The
administrator is thus informed, in real time, of possible problems and can react
accordingly.
Most alarms are associated with an object (host, application, drive, library, user or
media). When it does not apply to a specific object (i.e., catalog backup failure), the
alarm is associated with the server.
Note:
An alarm is created when an object belonging to a backup selection is not
backed up. It is possible to forbid the creation of such an alarm through the
file located in the Time Navigator Conf directory, if you
know that an object will not be backed up (opened and locked file, for
example). See the Time Navigator Installation Guide, "Time Navigator
Configuration Files" chapter for more details.
alarms_filter
A guide provides the list of all the alarm messages that are likely to appear in the
Time Navigator Graphical User Interfaces.
See the Time Navigator Alarms guide.
434
Alarm Description
Alarm IDs and categories
All the alarms are referenced in Time Navigator by a unique identification number
(ID: TN_ALARM_ID030020) and sorted by category:
■
Server: refers to catalog and site security. Alarm IDs range from 10000 to 19999.
■
Agent: refers to hosts and applications. Alarm IDs range from 20000 to 29999.
Data Management: refers to all operations about data management (backup,
restore, duplication, etc.). Alarm IDs range from 30000 to 39999.
■
Storage: refers to library management and storage management (queries for
media, space management, etc). Alarm IDs range from 40000 to 49999.
■
Devices and Media: refers to device configuration, media errors, hardware errors.
Alarm IDs range from 50000 to 59999.
■
Security: refers to user accesses and Security & Compliance Manager (SCM).
Alarm IDs range from 60000 to 69999.
■
Administration: refers to licenses and other administration alarms. Alarm IDs
range from 70000 to 79999.
■
Others: refers to alarms which do not belong to the categories defined above.
Alarm IDs range from 200000 on.
■
Alarm Severity
An alarm can be of three different levels; each level has a color associated to it:
Alarm
Severity
Alarm Color
Description
Minor
Yellow
Warning with no immediate consequences on the backup process
(ex: Previous session not complete, full backup,
strategy A ignored).
Major
Orange
Warning with important consequences on the process of one or
several backups (ex: Strategy A backup failed).
Critical
Red
Warning with serious consequences on the process of all backups
(ex: Error backing up the catalog).
Chapter 11
Alarms
435
Alarm Type
The alarms appear in Time Navigator Administration Console in three areas: the
Network area, the Alarm area and the Icon area.
Each area displays alarms in a different way. The following table summarizes the alarm
properties according to their location.
See “Time Navigator Administration Console Main Window”, page 18 for details
concerning the Administration window areas.
Alarm
Location
Description
Visual clue
Network Area
Alarms by object:
- Host
- Drive
- Library
Alarms are represented by a colored bar under the
object icons. If several alarms are present for a single
object, the color is that of the most severe alarm. The
colored bar blinks until the alarm is acknowledged.
Alarm Area
Alarms by severity level:
- Minor
- Major
- Critical
Buttons gather all alarms corresponding to the button
color, i.e., the yellow button gathers all minor alarms.
When no alarm is present, the buttons are green. The
alarm buttons blinks until the alarm is acknowledged.
Icon Area
Alarms by host
The host icon appears in one of the alarm colors. If
several alarms are present for a single host, the color
is that of the most severe alarm. The host icon returns
to its regular color once the alarm is acknowledged.
An alarm can be recurring, i.e., the same alarm appears several times. Same alarm implies
an alarm for the same object, with the same severity level and the same message.
Alarm Messages
Alarm messages are presented with their identification number (ID), their title and their
help message.
The alarm help message is associated with all the events of alarm severity (critical, major
and minor). This message is divided into two parts:
■
Cause: The cause of the problem.
■
Action: The action to perform to solve this problem.
436
Viewing Alarms
When the application is working normally, the three buttons of the Alarms area are green
and do not blink.
When alarms are initiated by Time Navigator, the buttons of the Alarms area start
blinking. If it is an alarm concerning an object of host, drive or library type, the bar
located under the object in the Network area starts blinking.
If it is an alarm concerning an object of host type, the host icon is also displayed with a
colored background in the Icons area.
The alarm buttons will keep on blinking until the administrator acknowledges the alarm
one way or the other.
To view an alarm list
There are several ways to view an alarm list:
■
■
■
If you want to view the alarms by severity level, click in the Alarms area on the
colored button corresponding to the severity you want to see.
If you want to view alarms by object, click on the bar located under the
corresponding object icon in the Network area.
If you want to view the list of all alarms, whatever the severity level or the object,
use the Monitoring-Alarms menu.
The Alarm List window appears.
Chapter 11
Alarms
437
Alarm List Window
Column Choice: Allows to choose the type of alarm information you want to be displayed
in the window. See “Alarm Column Choice Window”, page 438 for details.
Alarm List: Contains all the alarms about the current catalog.
Cause: Specifies the cause of the problem described in the alarm message.
Action: Specifies the action to perform to solve the problem described in the alarm
message.
Note:
The Cause and Action fields display the help message of the selected alarm in
the Alarm List OR the help message of all the alarms in the list if the latter
have the same identification number (ID).
Properties: Allows to acknowledge an alarm permanently or temporarily.
Activate: Allows to acknowledge an alarm that has been previously acknowledged either
temporarily or permanently. The alarm will be returned to a not-acknowledged status.
Acknowledge Permanently: Allows to acknowledge an alarm permanently.
Acknowledge Temporarily: Allows to acknowledge an alarm temporarily.
438
Delete: Allows to delete an alarm.
See “Processing Alarms”, page 440 for more details on how to acknowledge alarms.
Alarm Column Choice Window
All: Displays all columns in the Alarm List window.
selected.
Hidden Columns: Lists the columns that are not displayed in the Alarm List window.
Visible Columns: Lists the columns that are displayed in the Alarm List window.
> Button: Once columns are selected in the Hidden Columns list, use the > Button to move
the selected columns to the Visible Columns list. You can also double click on columns
individually to move them to the Visible Columns list.
< Button: Once columns are selected in the Visible Columns list, use the < Button to move
the selected columns to the Hidden Columns list. You can also double click on columns
individually to move them to the Hidden Columns list.
Available Alarm columns:
Severity: Alarm severity: Minor, Major or Critical.
First Date: Date of the first occurrence of the alarm.
Last Date: Date of the last occurrence of the alarm.
Count: Number of times the alarm occurred.
Object Type: Type of the object for which the alarm occurs. The object type can be
Host, Library or Drive.
Object: Name of the object for which the alarm occurs.
Acknowledgement: Acknowledgement status: Permanent, Temporary or Not
Acknowledged.
■
Permanent
The alarm and any subsequent same version of it are acknowledged. The
alarm stops blinking.
■
Temporary
Only the current occurrence of the alarm is acknowledged. The alarm stops
Chapter 11
Alarms
439
blinking.
■
Not Acknowledged
The alarm has not been acknowledged by the administrator.
Message: Description of the alarm.
Note:
Severity, Acknowledgement and Message columns are always displayed.
Sorting Alarms
You may sort alarms by the content of any column. To do so, double click on the heading
of the column by which you want to sort. On the first click, sorting will be ascending.
Click a second time to sort in descending order.
440
Processing Alarms
Once created, an alarm can either be acknowledged, activated or deleted.
1.
Acknowledging an alarm permanently
The alarm is acknowledged once for all the times it is issued subsequently. This
implies that you will not receive any visual clue when this alarm is issued next.
The only way to find out if the alarm has occurred again is to check if the count
has been incremented or to look in Time Navigator Event Viewer.
2.
Acknowledging an alarm temporarily
Only the current occurrence of the alarm is acknowledged. If this alarm is issued
again, you will see the buttons blinking.
3.
Activating an alarm
An alarm that has been previously acknowledged either temporarily or permanently
will be returned to a not-acknowledged status.
4.
Deleting an alarm
The alarm is permanently removed from the alarm list.
To process an alarm
■
In the Alarm list, right click on the alarm you wish to process. A popup menu will
appear. Choose one of the processing options. Unavailable options are greyed. You
may use multiple selection with the Ctrl key to process several alarms at once.
-OR■
In the Alarm list, select the alarm you want to process, then click on one of the
available buttons (Properties, Activate, Acknowledge Permanently, Acknowledge
Temporarily or Delete). Once the alarm is processed, the processing information is
displayed in the Acknowledgement column in the Alarm list.
-OR■
Double click on the alarm in the list, on the blinking button in the Alarm area or on
the blinking bar in the Network area, or select the alarm in the list and click on Properties.
The Alarm Properties window appears.
Chapter 11
Alarms
441
Use the Acknowledgement radio buttons to either acknowledge or activate the alarm.
Once all alarms have been acknowledged, buttons and/or bars in the Network area stop
blinking and host icons appear with their original background color (grey or ocher) in
the Icon area.
Alarm Properties Window
Object: Name of the object for which the alarm occurs.
Object Type: Type of the object for which the alarm occurs. The object type can be Host,
Library or Drive.
Severity: Alarm severity: Minor, Major or Critical.
First Date: Date of the first occurrence of the alarm.
Last Date: Date of the last occurrence of the alarm.
Count: Number of times the alarm occurred.
442
ID: Identification number of the alarm.
Action: Specifies the action to perform to solve the problem described in the alarm
message.
Acknowledgement
■
■
Permanent (no alert on next alarm): Specifies that the alarm and any subsequent
same version of it are acknowledged.
Temporary (alert on next alarm): Specifies that only the current occurrence of the
alarm is acknowledged.
Chapter 11
Alarms
443
Notifying Alarms
The Preferences tool allows you to redirect alarms to external elements (ex: snmp, a file,
a command line, the console, etc.) in the wanted format.
See “Setting Platform Preferences”, page 86 for details concerning the notification of
alarms.
444
445
C H A P T E R
12
Time Navigator Event Viewer
12
This section describes how to perform the following operations on the Time Navigator
Event Viewer:
■
“Viewing Events”, page 446
■
“General Operations on Events”, page 448
■
“Event Display”, page 451
■
“Event Search”, page 458
■
“Event Export”, page 459
■
“Event Purging”, page 462
■
“Notifying Events”, page 465
446
About Events
Time Navigator Event Viewer provides insight into Time Navigator processes. It is a
very useful tool to troubleshoot incidents that occur with any Time Navigator function
or process.
The information displayed in Time Navigator Event Viewer is kept in the event file
on the server. An event file also exists on every client machine. See “event File”,
Time Navigator Event Viewer allows the administrator to display events graphically, to
apply filters and to sort them. For example, the administrator may view all events
regarding all backups for all machines, or just the restore operations on a specific
machine. Each event type, information, warning, minor alarm, major alarm, etc. is
displayed with a dedicated color in order to facilitate reading.
Viewing Events
Time Navigator events can be viewed using the following modes:
■
■
■
In Connected mode, you are connecting to a catalog to access the events related
to that catalog.
In File mode, you are directly opening the event file located on the server,
without being connected to a particular catalog. Events relating to all the catalogs
created on the server are displayed.
In Command mode, see the "tina_event" section in the Time Navigator Command
Line Interface guide for details.
Chapter 12
447
Viewing Events in Connected Mode
In Connected mode, you are connecting to a catalog to access the events related to that catalog.
To view events in Connected mode:
Choose Monitoring-Time Navigator Event Viewer.
Time Navigator Event Viewer appears.
Viewing Events in File Mode
In File mode, Time Navigator Event Viewer displays the contents of the event.txt
file. Events for all catalogs located on the server are included.
To view events in File mode:
1.
Choose Catalog-Open file. The Event File Name Input Window appears.
2.
Enter the name and path of the events file you want, or click on Browse to select a
file.
3.
Click on OK.
448
General Operations on Events
Connecting to a Catalog
By default, Time Navigator Event Viewer displays all the events of the server on which
the current catalog is running as well as all client machines attached to that server. You
also have the option to view events from another catalog.
Note:
If no catalog is connected, Time Navigator Event Viewer opens by default in
file mode, and displays events from all the catalogs located on the server.
To connect to another catalog:
1.
Choose Catalog-Connect. The List of Catalogs Window appears.
2.
Select the catalog that you want to view.
3.
Click on OK.
An Event window appears displaying the events for the selected catalog.
To disconnect from a catalog:
Choose Catalog-Disconnect to clear the Event Manager.
Updating the Event Manager
To update Time Navigator Event Viewer manually:
To update the information displayed on screen, choose View-Refresh.
The number of events retrieved during a refresh operation is the value of the Maximum
number of events retrieved by request parameter set in the Preferences Window.
Tip:
You can also press the F5 key.
To update Time Navigator Event Viewer with all events in memory:
To display all the events in memory, choose Events-Load all.
Chapter 12
449
This procedure overrides the value of the Maximum number of events retrieved by request
parameter set in the Preferences Window.
To enable the automatic updating of Time Navigator Event Viewer:
To enable automatic updating, choose Events-Automatic Refresh.
A check mark appears left of the menu.
To disable automatic updating, choose choose Events-Automatic Refresh again.
The check mark disappears, meaning that the events will no longer be automatically
updated.
The refresh frequency and the number of events retrieved during an automatic refresh
can be modified in the Preferences Window. By default, the frequency is 10 seconds and
the number of events retrieved is 2000
450
Setting User Preferences
To set user preferences:
1.
Choose Catalog-Preferences.
2.
In the Preferences Window, enter your preferences.
3.
Click on OK to validate your choice and close the window.
Preferences Window
This window lets you edit and configure user preferences.
General
■
Apply Filters on Server: Allows to filter events on the server prior to downloading
them on a remote machine.
Tip:
Use this option if you are viewing the events on a machine other than
the server and you are concerned with network performances. Checking
this option reduces the number of events traveling on your network.
On the other hand, if you are modifying filters frequently during a
remote session, do not check this option, otherwise events are
downloaded from the server again after each modification. When the
option is not checked, all events are kept in memory on the remote
machine and can be manipulated easily without having to be retrieved
from the server again.
On the other hand, if you are modifying filters frequently during a remote session,
do not check this option, otherwise events are downloaded from the server again
after each modification. When the option is not checked, all events are kept in
memory on the remote machine and can be manipulated easily without having to
be retrieved from the server again.
■
Refresh Period (s): Specifies the time, in seconds, between two auto-refresh.
■
Maximum number of events retrieved by request: Specifies the maximum number of
events loaded in memory when starting or refreshing Time Navigator Event
Viewer. The initial default value is 2000 events.
Chapter 12
451
Limit number of displayed events
Allows to divide the events into pages to improve performance. When this option is
selected, only a portion of all loaded events are displayed at a time in Time Navigator
Event Viewer.
Note:
This limitation applies to the number of events displayed in the event list on
screen, not to the number of events loaded in memory as is the case with the
Maximum number of events retrieved per request parameter.
Events per page: specifies the maximum number of events appearing in one page. The
value you enter is recorded in the user preferences file. The initial default value is 1000
events.
Event Display
You can choose what information is displayed in the Time Navigator Event Viewer and
how it is displayed.
Selecting the Events to Display
By default, when you open Time Navigator Event Viewer, only the end-user events are
displayed. You can also display the list of advanced events.
■
■
End-user events are easily understandable and designed to help the user in case of
error during Time Navigator execution
Advanced events are more detailed events which help the Atempo Technical Support
to analyze more sophisticated problems. Advanced events are only available in
English.
To display the list of advanced events:
Choose View-Advanced Events. The list of events is updated in real time.
Note:
In order to improve performance when launching Time Navigator Event
Viewer, the Advanced Events view is not saved with the user preferences.
452
Selecting the Columns to Display
By default, when you open Time Navigator Event Viewer, the following properties are
displayed: Severity, Job ID, Program, Date (emission), Logical Host and Message.
Note:
The Severity and Message columns are always displayed, even if you do not
select them.
To select the columns to display :
1.
Choose View-Column Choice. The Column Choice Window appears.
2.
Modify the column selection according to your needs.
3.
Event Properties
■
Alarm Help: Alarm help message, which is divided into twp parts, the cause of the
problem and the action to perform to solve this problem.
■
Alarm ID: Identification number of the alarm.
■
Date (emission): The date when the event occurred.
■
Date (logging): The date the event is recorded in the server event file.
■
Development: Debug information.
■
Host: Logical host that triggers the action.
■
Job ID: The job ID is a single identification number for each job.
■
PID: Process Identifier.
■
Program: A program, such as tina_adm or tina_daemon.
■
Real Host: Host that performs the action.
■
Real User: User that performs the action.
■
User: Logical user that triggers the action.
Adjusting Columns
To adjust the column width:
Click and drag the edge of the column heading to either widen or narrow it.
To return all columns to their default size, choose View-Adjust Columns.
Chapter 12
453
Adding a Line Break
You have the option to add a line break in the event list to facilitate event viewing. Three
lines are added after the most recent event.
Note:
Use this feature only if the event list is sorted chronologically.
To add a line break:
Choose View-Add Line Break.
Filtering Events
In order to customize the type of events displayed in Time Navigator Event Viewer,
you can use different filters.
To filter events:
1.
Choose Events-Filters. The Event Filters window appears.
2.
Enter the Event Filter Parameters.
3.
Click on OK.
Note:
Make sure the filters are enabled: go to the Events menu and check that the
Disable Filter option is not activated.
To disable filters:
If you want to disable the filters that you set in the Event Filters window, choose EventsDisable Filters.
A check mark appears left of the menu and all the events are displayed.
To re-enable the filters, choose choose Events-Disable Filters again.
The check mark disapperas, meaning that the filters are enabled.
454
Event Filter Parameters
To activate any of the filters check the box in front of it and specify the value to use to
filter. Filters are as follows:
Severity
Select the box next to Severity to activate it.
With the severity check list, you can select which events will be displayed. The events
include nine severity levels, among which three alarm levels that also appear in the real
time management report of Time Navigator Administration Console. The following
severity levels Fatal, Error, Information, Accounting, as well as the three alarm levels
(Minor, Major, and Critical) are displayed by default in the events window.
Chapter 12
Severity
level
Abbreviated as
Description
Fatal
Fatal (F)
Fatal error causing the program exit
(ex: Impossible to connect to server X).
Error
Error (E)
Serious error that might cause the program to exit
(ex: Error during backup,retcode=6).
Warning
Warn (W)
Warning with no important consequences
(ex: Silo inconsistency detected).
Information
Info (I)
Message of general interest
(ex: Starting tina_init).
Debug
Debug (D)
Diagnosis Help
(ex: Network error).
Accounting
Acct (A)
Accounting concerning backups and archiving
(ex: Start incremental backup, strategy A).
Minor Alarm
Min A (m)
Warning with no immediate consequences on the backup
process
(ex: Unable to connect to host "olive").
Major Alarm
Maj A (M)
Warning with important consequences on the process of one
or several backups
(ex: Error starting backup strategy A).
Critical
Alarm
Crit A (C)
Warning with serious consequences on the process of all
backups
(ex: The library requires a manual operation).
455
To facilitate their identification, severity levels are displayed with different colors in
Time Navigator Event Viewer (ex: the “Information” severity level is displayed with
an ocher background and the “Critical Alarm” alarm level with a red background).
Class
Select the box next to Class to activate it.
With the class check list, you can select which classes of events will be displayed. By
default, the class filter is disabled and all classes are displayed.
456
The different classes are as follows:
Class
Description
Standard
Standard events.
Non Restored Object
Events related to an object restore error.
I/O Error
Events related to an input/output error on a drive or on a
backup media.
Non Uncompressed Object
Events related to objects that are restored but not
uncompressed.
Fuzzy Object
Events related to a fuzzy object, for instance an object
modified while backup was in progress or an incompletely
backed up object.
Secure Event
Events related to security and compliance operations. See the
Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager for
information on security and compliance.
Note:
The number of logs concerning fuzzy object encountered when a job is being
performed has been limited by default to 20, to avoid slowing down
performances. You can use the accounting_max_fuzzy_objects tunable
to specify how many fuzzy object logs should be kept in the event file (see
the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details.)
For instance, if you select Fuzzy Object and Non Restored Object, only events related to fuzzy
or non restored objects will be displayed.
Emission Date
Use the sliding cursors in the Emission date area to set the beginning and ending dates of
the time period you want events to be displayed for.
Basic Tab
■
Message: To only display events containing the specified message. Use special
characters to indicate the text to filter. For instance, enter *media com00004* to
display all messages including the media com00004 string . See “Time Navigator
Special Characters”, page 351 for details.
■
Host: To only display events concerning a particular host attached to the server with
or without events concerning the server itself.
Chapter 12
■
■
457
Users: To display events for a particular user with or without the “root” user.
Program: To display events concerning a particular program, such as,
tina_library, tina_backup.
■
PID: To display events associated to a particular Process Identifier.
■
Job Id: To display events associated with a particular job identification.
Advanced Tab
■
■
■
Logging Date: To display events logged during a particular time period.
Function: To display events concerning a particular function such as
tina_library.
Package: To display events concerning a particular package attached to the server
with or without events concerning the server itself.
■
Catalog: To display events concerning a particular catalog.
■
Server: To display events concerning a particular server.
Clearing Events
You can clear all the current events from Time Navigator Event Viewer. Cleared events
are still present on the disk, but no longer appear in Time Navigator Event Viewer.
To clear events :
Choose Events-Clear.
All events disappear from Time Navigator Event Viewer.
To display them again, choose Events-Load all.
458
Event Search
In order to find a specific event and display it in Time Navigator Event Viewer, you
can:
■
Navigate through all the events page per page.
■
Use search criteria.
To navigate through the events:
Choose Events-Navigate and select the action to perform:
Tip:
■
First event page
■
Previous event page
■
Previous event
■
Next event
■
Next event page
■
Last event page
You can also use the navigation buttons located on the right of Time Navigator
Event Viewer.
To look for events:
1.
Choose Events-Find. The Find Events window appears.
2.
Specify your search criteria by entering the Event Filter Parameters. See “Filtering
Events”, page 453 for details concerning this window.
3.
Click on OK.
The first event matching the criteria is highlighted.
4.
Choose Events-Find Next (F3) to highlight the following event matching the criteria.
Chapter 12
459
Event Export
Events can be exported to a file whenever the need arises. You can choose the type of
information to be exported and the file format.
Note:
If you want redirect events to external destinations (ex: snmp, a file, a command
line, the console, etc.) in the format you want, use the Preferences tool.
See “Event Notification”, page 90 for more information on the Preferences
tool and event notification.
Export Events
To export events:
1.
Choose Events-Export.
2.
In the Export Events Window, enter the export parameters.
3.
Export Events Window
File: Exports events to a text file. Click on the button to the right of the path field to
browse your machine, or enter the absolute path where you want the text file to be
located. For instance:
460
C:\temp\events.txt
/tmp/events.txt
/tmp/events.txt
Export Only Selected Lines: This option is not available, all events pertaining to the selected
job are exported.
File Format Tab
File Format: Allows you to choose the format of the export file, either Event file
format, HTML or Text.
■
Encoding: The proposed encoding depends on the file format you select:
■
File Format
Encoding
Event File Format
None
HTML
UTF8 (standard mechanism used by Unicode for encoding wide character
values into a byte stream)
Text
UTF8, US-ASCII or Latin 1 (ISO8859-1)
Chapter 12
461
Content Tab
The Content tab only appears if you have selected HTML or Text in the File Format tab.
■
Events list.
Note:
■
Export/Do not Export lists are not taken into account.
If there are different items from the Event tab that you want to export, double click
the items in the Export and Do not Export list.
Note:
Export Visible Columns must be deselected.
462
Event Purging
Events are automatically purged every hour. The event retention is defined independently
for each severity level, via a series of tunables. The following table summarizes the
tunable names and default values. To modify the tunables, see the Time Navigator
Tunables guide.
Tunable Name
Default Value (days)
Critical Alarm Retention Time
14
Major Alarm Retention Time
14
Minor Alarm Retention Time
14
Accounting Event Retention Time
7
Debugging Event Retention Time
7
Error Event Retention Time
14
Fatal Event Retention Time
14
Information Event Retention Time
7
Warning Event Retention Time
7
Retention Time for Fuzzy Object Events
7
Chapter 12
463
event File
All events appearing in the Event window are kept in the event log file, located in the
Adm directory. If this file does not exist, Time Navigator automatically creates it.
The file provides detailed information on any incident. For each event, the tina_daemon
program writes the event in an unreadable private format:
■
The file event under Unix, Mac OS X and VMS.
■
The file event.txt under Windows and NetWare.
Note:
The event file must not be a symbolic link. However, the Adm directory can
be a symbolic link to another directory.
Only privileged users of the various operating systems are allowed to write in the event
file (ex: root for Unix, administrator for Windows 2000/2003, user with
administration rights for MAC OS X). Thus, there is no access rights problem.
All client events are gathered in the server event file so that you can consult the events
of all client machines from the server and have an overall view of the network. However,
an event file is also present on every agent declared in Time Navigator.
The client event file is used when the server event file is unavailable, namely when
the server service is not running. Events will be kept in the client event file until they
can be moved to the server.
log or log_debug File
Another log file is present on every host declared in Time Navigator. The name of this
file depends on the operating system:
■
log.catalog_name or log_debug.catalog_name (with or without the extension
catalog_name) under Unix, Mac OS X and VMS.
■
log.txt or log_debug.txt under Windows.
■
sys:/system/tina$log.err under NetWare.
Events are written in this particular log file if the list of catalogs cannot be retrieved or
if the event file cannot be to written in.
464
If the file log_debug.catalog_name exists in the Adm directory, Time Navigator uses
it to record all events. If the file does not exist, Time Navigator uses the
log.catalog_name file (which is created if necessary) to record all events except
Debug events.
Fields contained in the log or log_debug file:
Id: specifies the process identification number. Lines are usually grouped by family
■
number. The first line is the lowest level one and next lines appear in stacking
order until the program ends.
■
Date: specifies the event date.
■
Severity: specifies the event severity level.
■
Package, Function and Position: identify the part of the code involved in the event.
Message: specifies the type of event with sometimes a Time Navigator internal
return code (retcode) or the system error type errno.
■
Using these files, it is possible to clearly diagnose a problem without performing any
particular operation. You may rename the file log.catalog_name into
log_debug.catalog_name to record more information.
Example of file log_debug.catalog_name:
Id
21773
21773
21773
21773
21773
21773
21773
21773
21778
21778
21983
21983
21983
22281
22281
22281
22281
22281
22281
22281
22281
22281
22281
22281
22281
22281
Date
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
09:00:37
09:00:38
09:00:38
09:00:39
09:00:39
09:00:42
09:01:03
09:01:03
09:02:16
09:02:16
09:41:36
09:41:36
09:42:25
10:00:05
10:00:14
10:00:46
10:00:49
10:01:00
10:01:01
10:01:05
10:01:05
10:01:06
10:01:06
10:01:23
10:02:03
10:02:07
Severity
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
I
I
W
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Package, Function
and Position
Message
"Clt:desc_dir"[2]
Start backup selection "/usr..."
"Clt:desc_dir"[14]
End backup selection "/usr..."
"Clt:desc_dir"[2]
"Clt:desc_dir"[14]
"Clt:desc_dir"[2]
"Clt:create_sessions"[5] Create session, session_id =...
"Clt:desc_dir"[14]
"Clt:archiver"[16]
End incremental backup ...
"Dri:manage_sess_w"[23] End writing on media BCK00021...
"Vvm:log_volume_ecrit"[6]Stat folder "daisy" writing,...
"Clt:restore"[1]
Start restoring backup:
"Clt:restore"[4]
Destination = "/tmp", Folder ...
"Vos:unix_chown"[2]
Error chown "nmpolling", ...
"Clt:archiver"[4]
Start incremental backup...
"Clt:desc_dir"[2]
"Clt:desc_dir"[14]
"Clt:desc_dir"[2]
"Clt:desc_dir"[14]
"Clt:desc_dir"[2]
"Clt:desc_dir"[14]
"Clt:desc_dir"[2]
"Clt:desc_dir"[14]
"Clt:desc_dir"[2]
"Clt:create_sessions"[5] Create session, session_id =...
"Clt:desc_dir"[14]
"Clt:archiver"[16]
End incremental backup,...
Chapter 12
22359
21983
21983
22359
22359
22359
23162
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Tue
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
10:05:22
10:05:50
10:06:07
10:09:30
10:10:07
10:10:07
10:48:03
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
I
D
I
I
A
A
A
465
"Rcy:do_recycle_cart"[10]Start recycling cartridge ...
"Vvm:xfer_file"[10]
Error closing stream out
"Clt:restore"[7]
Cancel restoring backup
"Rcy:do_recycle_cart"[13]End recycling cartridge "BCK00019"
"Dri:manage_sess_w"[23] End writing cartridge BCK00019,...
"Vvm:log_volume_ecrit"[6]Stat folder "daisy" writing, ...
"Sdb:tina_odbsave"[4]
Start backup catalog
Notifying Events
Time Navigator allows you to redirect events to external elements (ex: snmp, a file, a
command line, the console, etc.) in the wanted format via the Preferences tool.
See “Setting Platform Preferences”, page 86 for details concerning the notification of
events.
466
467
C H A P T E R
13
Time Navigator Job Manager
13
Jobs executed by Time Navigator are managed through a graphical window refreshed in
real time. The job concept applies to several types of sessions. The main job types are:
■
Backup (incremental, full, synthetic, snapshot or replication)
■
Archiving
■
Restore
■
Media duplication
■
Catalog maintenance
468
Viewing Jobs
To view the list of jobs
Choose Monitoring-Time Navigator Job Manager in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Time Navigator Job Manager appears.
Note:
It is also possible to view jobs using the tina_job command. See the
"tina_job" section in the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide for
details.
Chapter 13
469
Selecting Catalogs
By default, Time Navigator Job Manager only shows jobs for the catalog currently
displayed in Time Navigator Administration Console. If you are managing more than
one catalog, you may want to view jobs belonging to several catalogs at once.
Selecting a Catalog
To select catalogs:
1.
Choose Catalog-Select. The Catalog List window appears.
2.
Click in the catalog checkbox you wish to connect to and click on Apply to know
its status.
3.
Click on Close to return to Time Navigator Job Manager.
Catalog Selection Window
List: Lets you select the catalogs to connect to.
The icon between the checkbox and the catalog name indicates the status of the catalog:
■
Green icon: Indicates that the catalog is connected.
■
Green icon with a small white cross on a red background: Indicates that you do not have
the required permissions to access that catalog.
■
■
Tip:
Gray icon with a red cross: Indicates that the catalog is unavailable (the catalog could
be stopped, suspended,...).
Question mark: Indicates that the catalog status is unknown.
Check the box in front of a catalog and click on Apply to identify its status.
470
Job Information
When you open Time Navigator Job Manager, by default, only Active jobs are
displayed. You have the option to display job History as well.
Displaying Job History
To display job history:
1.
Choose View-History. The job history list appears below the Active job list. The
View-History menu is now checked.
Tip:
Use the same menu command to remove the History list.
To modify the column display:
1.
Choose View-Column Choice-Active... or View-Column Choice-History... depending on the
job list you want to modify.
2.
Double click on the column headings or use the < and > buttons to move columns
between the Visible Columns list and the Hidden Columns list.
You can also click on All to select all columns and on Invert to make all selected
columns unselected and, inversely, all unselected columns selected.
Note:
The History list default display includes the End Date column in addition
to all the Active jobs default columns.
Note:
Among the default columns, only the Media and Submit Date columns
(and End Date for historical jobs) can be hidden. The other columns are
always displayed.
Column Choice Job Window
All: Selects all columns.
Chapter 13
471
Invert: Displays hidden columns and hides visible columns.
Tip:
To move a column name from a section (Hidden Columns or Visible Columns) to
another, use the arrows or double-click the name of the column.
Available Columns:
Default columns
Catalog: In a multi-catalog environment, indicates the catalog name.
Status: The most frequently used statuses are: Complete, Cancelled on error,
Cancelled on request, Running...etc. Jobs with a running status may be either
active or inactive. An inactive session indicates that one of the resources (media,
drives) required to execute the job is unavailable.
The status Scheduled concerns active backup jobs only and indicates that the server
created a job corresponding to a scheduled backup on an agent, and is waiting for
the agent to respond. If the agent does not respond within the one hour default
timeout, the status becomes Cancelled without starting. If the server cannot reach the
client, the status becomes Cancelled (unreachable agent). The timeout can be modified
using the tunable timeout_on_scheduled_jobs.
Job Statuses
The color of a job indicates its status of a job is identified with different
colors:
■
Blue:
In progress
■
Green:
Finished
■
Orange: Paused or cancelled on request
■
Red:
Cancelled on error
Id: Unique identification number for each job.
Parent ID: Some jobs are spawned by another job. In that case the ID of the parent
job appears in that column.
Description: Contains the job type, i.e. Backup (full or incremental), Synthetic,
Archiving, Restoration, Media Duplication or Maintenance.
Progress (active jobs only):
472
■
■
For backups, where the total volume of data to be processed is unknown,
the progress bar displays the current job volume in GB. To change the unit
see “Preferences Window”, page 475.
For archiving, restoration and duplication, where the total amount of data to
be processed is known, the progress bar indicates the percentage completed.
Note:
For restores, the percentage indicated by the progress bar corresponds to
the percentage of data written in the cache, not on disk. Thus although
the progress bar indicates 100%, the job can still be running for a while
until all data has been written.
Volume (historical jobs only): Total amount of data processed by the job. By default
the volume unit is gigabyte. To change the unit see “Preferences Window”,
page 475.
Note:
This information is only available for jobs that actually wrote data on
tape. For snapshot jobs for instance, the volume is provided only for the
job handling the snapshot data backed up on tape (if any), or if you
selected a multiple writing pool to copy the entire snapshot on tape.
Alarms: If a problem occurs while a job is running, a critical, major, or minor alarm
appears. The alarm is displayed with the color associated to its severity.
Media: Depending on the media type, this column indicates either the name of the
media pool being used to perform the job, or snapshot, or replication.
Priority: Indicates the job priority as defined during the Backup Strategy Creation
phase.
Rank (Active jobs only): Job execution number indicating job priority.
Instant Rate (GB/H) (Active jobs only): Current rate of data processed by the job.
Average Rate (GB/H): Average rate of data processed by the job since the beginning
of the job. For historical jobs, the average rate is based on the total amount of data
processed and the whole duration of the job.
Chapter 13
473
Duration: Duration of a job. For active jobs, the Duration column displays the time
elapsed between the beginning of the job and the present moment.
Additional columns
End Date: Date and time when the job is finished or cancelled.
Execution Date: Date and time when the job actually begins to be performed.
Note:
The Execution date may differ from the Start Date if for instance, the job
is waiting for physical resources to become available.
Folder: Name of the backup or archive folder involved with the job.
Host: Name of the host involved with the job.
Start Date: Date and time when the job is ready to be performed, i.e., all jobs with
higher priority have been cleared.
User: Name of the user involved with the job.
474
Sorting Jobs
You may sort jobs by the content of any column.
Sorting Jobs
To sorts jobs:
1.
Double click on the heading of the column by which you want to sort. On the first
click, sorting will be ascending.
2.
Click a second time to sort in descending order.
Chapter 13
475
Job Manager Preferences
Refreshing Time Navigator Job Manager
The refresh period depends on the job list:
■
Active Job List: by default, the screen is refreshed every 3 seconds.
■
Historical Job List: the screen is refreshed every hour.
To refresh manually the active job list:
Choose View-Refresh (or press F5 on your keyboard).
To set the active job list refresh period:
1.
Choose View-Preferences. The Preferences Window appears.
2.
Use the sliding button to set the refresh period and click on OK.
Preferences Window
Active Job Refresh Period
■
Minimum Value (default value): 3 seconds.
■
Maximum Value: 60 seconds.
Volume Unit in Job Lists
The possible units are:
■
Kilobytes
■
Megabytes
■
Gigabytes
■
Terabytes
■
Most Appropriate Unit: use this option to let Time Navigator choose the best unit
according to the total volume of data.
If you change the job unit, it is changed throughout the entire Job Manager: In the main
job lists and in the General and Avanced tabs of the Job Details window.
476
Job Details
In addition to the information displayed in the list, you may access detailed information
for each job.
Viewing Job Details
To view job details
■
Select a job in the list and choose Jobs-Details.
Tip:
You can also select a job in the list, right click and select Detail, or double
click on a job in the list.
The Job Details Window appears with the General tab preselected.
Viewing Alarm Details
When a job is associated with an alarm, the alarm message appears in the lower part of
Time Navigator Job Manager if you select the job in the Job list.
Several alarms are generally associated with a given job. A tool tip provides the number
of alarms for the selected job. The color of the icon located on the left of the alarm
message indicates the highest severity level of the last alarm associated with the job (red
for a critical alarm, orange for a major alarm and yellow for a minor alarm).
You can view all the alarms associated with the job and have more information on the
alarms, especially with the help messages which explain how to solve the problem.
To view alarm details
1.
Double click on a job associated with an alarm in the Job list. The job message
appears in the lower part of Time Navigator Job Manager.
2.
Click on Alarm Detail in the right lower part of Time Navigator Job Manager.
The Job Details Window appears with the Alarms tab preselected.
Chapter 13
477
Job Details Window - General Tab
The General tab gives you access to information common to all job types. Most of the
information found in the General tab is identical to the information found in the job list
window. In addition, the Progress area provides the following information:
Information Area
■
Catalog: In a multi-catalog environment, indicates the catalog name.
■
Id: Unique identification number for each job.
■
Description: Contains the job type, i.e., Backup (full or incremental), Synthetic,
Archiving, Restoration, Media Duplication or Maintenance.
■
Status: The most frequently used statuses are: Complete, Cancelled on error,
Cancelled on request, Running...etc. Jobs with a running status may be either
active or inactive. An inactive session indicates that one of the resources (media,
drives) required to execute the job is unavailable.
The status Scheduled concerns active backup jobs only and indicates that the server
created a job corresponding to a scheduled backup on an agent, and is waiting for
the agent to respond. If the agent does not respond within the one hour default
timeout, the status becomes Cancelled without starting. If the server cannot reach the
client, the status becomes Cancelled (unreachable agent). The timeout can be modified
using the tunable timeout_on_scheduled_jobs.
478
■
Priority: Job priority as defined during the Backup Strategy creation.
■
Host: Name of the host involved with the job.
■
User: Name of the user involved with the job.
■
■
Media: Either the name of the media pool being used to perform the job, or
Snapshot, or Replication.
Folder: Name of the backup folder involved with the job.
Progress Area
■
Expected Volume: Indicates the volume of data to be processed in bytes. This field
remains dimmed when the volume is unknown (ex: for backups).
■
Processed Volume: Indicates the volume of processed data in bytes.
Note:
By default, the volume unit is gigabyte. To change the unit, see
“Preferences Window”, page 475.
■
Processed Objects: Indicates the number of objects involved (files or directories).
■
Progress: If the expected volume is known, this field indicates the progression of a job
in percentage when it is being executed. If the expected volume is unknown, this field
displays a result in megabytes. Once the job is ended, the result is a volume given in
megabytes.
■
Instant Rate (GB/H): (Active jobs only) Current rate of data processed by the job.
■
Average Rate (GB/H): Average rate of data processed by the job since the beginning
of the job. For historical jobs, the average rate is based on the total amount of data
processed and the whole duration of the job.
Chapter 13
479
Dates Area
■
■
Execution Date: Date and time when the job actually begins to be performed.
Note:
■
■
The Execution date may differ from the Start Date if for instance, the
job is waiting for physical resources to become available.
Start Date: Date and time when the job is ready to be performed, i.e., all jobs with
higher priority have been cleared.
End Date: Date and time when the job is completed or cancelled.
Job Details Window - Advanced Tab
In the Advanced tab, you will find the following information:
Running Area
■
Current: Indicates the number of times the job has been initiated and allows you to
know the number of retries on incident already performed.
480
■
Maximum: Indicates the maximum number of retries on incident as defined by the
administrator.
■
Interval (min): Indicates the time interval, in minutes, separating the retries on
incident, as defined by the administrator.
Cache Use Rate Area
This area indicates the cache use rate for each job at a given time.
■
■
Blocks Used: Indicates the number of blocks used in the cache space for the job. In
the case of a full synthetic backup, this number corresponds to the total amount of
reading and writing sessions in cache.
Total Blocks: Indicates the total number of blocks contained in the cache space. Each
block size is 32 KB.
■
Use Rate: Indicates the percentage of the cache space used by the job being
processed.
Current Object Area
It indicates the object (file or directory) being processed by the on tape writing session.
Sessions Area
■
Type: Is either Read or Write.
■
Volume: Indicates the amount of data processed by the session.
Note:
By default the volume unit is gigabyte. To change the unit see
“Preferences Window”, page 475.
■
Date: Indicates the date the session started.
■
Media: Indicates the media name used by the session.
■
Drive: Indicates the drive name used by the session.
■
Mode: Can have the following value:
Real if the session goes through the server cache.
Virtual if the session does not go though the server cache.
Resourceless if the session does not require any drive or media.
Chapter 13
481
Job Details Window - Specific Tab
Note:
The information displayed in the Specific tab area varies according to the job
type. The above screen is for a backup.
Backed up Platform Area
This area is only present if the job involves backup, i.e., backup, snapshot, replication
or synthetic backup job type.
■
■
■
Name: Indicates the name of the platform on which the job has been or is running.
Format: Indicates the data writing format used for the backup in question (TiNa, tar
or cpio).
Folder: Indicates the host (or the application) backup folder name.
482
Folder Area
This area is only present if the job type is archiving or restore.
The Information found in this area is as follows:
Job Type
Name
Format
Archiving
Name of the archive folder into which data is archived.
Tina, Tar, Cpio or
none
Restore
Name of the backup or archive folder from which data is
extracted.
N/A
Replication Area
This area is only present if the job is a replication.
■
Destination: Indicates the name of the replication destination.
■
Host: Indicates the name of the host where the replication destination is located.
Backup Selections Processed
This area is only present if the job involves backup, i.e., backup, snapshot, replication
or synthetic backup job type.
■
Directory: Indicates the path and name of the directory backed up.
■
Rule: Indicates the name of the security rule associated with the backup selection
and whether or not the rule is inherited from a parent backup.
For information on security rules and compliance, see the Time Navigator
Security & Compliance Manager guide.
Chapter 13
483
Job Details Window - Events Tab
All the events attached to the job are displayed with the following columns:
■
Sev: Indicates the degree of severity of the event.
■
PID: Identifier of the Time Navigator process concerned by the event. That process
is identified in the Program column.
■
Date (emission): Date when the event occurred.
■
Host: Indicates the name of the Logical Host, i.e., the host that triggered the action.
■
User: Indicates the name of the Logical User, i.e., the user that triggered the action.
■
Message: Describes the event.
Column Choice: Allows you to customize the information displayed.
Export: Allows you to export the job events to the destination of your choice. For details
concerning the export of events, see “Export Events Window”, page 485.
Note:
The Export only selected lines option is not available in this context. All the events
pertaining to the selected job are exported.
484
Update: Refreshes the window display.
The three following check boxes are only used when hierarchical relations exist between
jobs, i.e., a job is issued from another job:
■
Parent: Allows display of the events concerning the parent job of the current job (if
any).
■
■
Brothers: Allows display of the events concerning brother jobs of the current job
(if any).
Children: Allows display of the events concerning children jobs of the current job
(if any).
Advanced Events: Allows display of the list of detailed events. By default, only the enduser events are displayed.
Column Choice Window - Events
All: Select all columns.
Invert: Make all selected columns unselected and, inversely, all unselected columns
selected.
You can choose among the following columns:
■
Alarm Help: Alarm help message, which is divided into twp parts, the cause of the
problem and the action to perform to solve this problem.
■
Alarm ID: Identification number of the alarm.
■
Date (Emission): The date when the event occurred.
■
Date (Logging): The date the event is recorded in the server event file.
■
Development: Debug information.
■
Host: Logical host that triggers the action.
■
PID: Process Identifier.
■
Program: A program, such as tina_adm or tina_daemon.
■
Real Host: Host that performs the action.
■
Real User: User that performs the action.
■
User: Logical user that triggers the action.
Chapter 13
485
Export Events Window
File: Exports events to a text file. Click on the button to the right of the path field to
browse your machine, or enter the absolute path where you want the text file to be
located. For instance:
C:\temp\events.txt
/tmp/events.txt
/tmp/events.txt
Export Only Selected Lines: This option is not available, all events pertaining to the selected
job are exported.
File Format Tab
■
■
File Format: Allows you to choose the format of the export file, either Event file
format, HTML or Text.
Encoding: The proposed encoding depends on the file format you select:
File Format
Encoding
Event File Format
None
486
File Format
Encoding
HTML
UTF8 (standard mechanism used by Unicode for encoding wide character
values into a byte stream)
Text
UTF8, US-ASCII or Latin 1 (ISO8859-1)
Content Tab
The Content tab only appears if you have selected HTML or Text in the File Format tab.
■
Events list.
Note:
■
If there are different items from the Event tab that you want to export, double click
the items in the Export and Do not Export list.
Note:
Export Visible Columns must be deselected.
Chapter 13
487
Event Severity List
Event
Abbreviation
Color
Description
Fatal
Fatal (F)
Red
Causes program exit.
Error
Error (E)
Orange
Might cause program exit.
Warning
Warn (W)
Yellow
An error of no important consequences.
Information
Info (I)
Blue
General interest.
Debug
Debug (D)
Green
Diagnosis.
Accounting
Acct (A)
Violet
Concerning backups and archives.
Minor Alarm
Min A (m)
Yellow
No immediate consequences on the backup process.
Major Alarm
Maj A (M)
Orange
Important consequences on the process of one or
several backups.
Critical Alarm
Crit A (C)
Red
Serious consequences on the process of all backups.
Job Details Window - Alarms Tab
488
The Alarms tab displays the following information:
Alarms, if any, attached to the job. This includes the streams or sessions,
messages, dates, and severities of each incident associated with this alarm.
■
The help message associated with the alarm. This message is divided into two
parts, Cause and Action.
■
■
Severity: Alarms severity can be of three types:
Severity
Color
Description
Minor
Yellow
Warning with no immediate consequences on the backup process.
Major
Orange
Warning with important consequences on the process
of one or several backups.
Critical
Red
Warning with serious consequences on the process of
all backups.
■
Date: Indicates the date of the alarm.
■
■
■
Action: Specifies the action to perform to solve the problem described in the
alarm message.
Note:
The Cause and Action fields display the help message of the selected alarm in
the Alarm List OR the help message of all the alarms in the list if the latter
have the same identification number (ID).
■
Update: Refreshes the window display.
Chapter 13
489
Filtering Jobs
Several filters are available to let you customize the jobs to be displayed. Some filters
apply to all jobs, active or historical; they appear in the Overall Filtering area. Other filters
apply only to historical jobs; they appear in the Job History Filtering area. By default, no
filters are selected.
Note:
Filter preferences are automaticaly saved when you close Time Navigator Job
Manager.
Filtering Jobs
To filter jobs
1.
Choose Jobs-Filters.The Job Filtering window appears.
2.
Configure Job Filtering Window and click on OK.
490
Job Filtering Window
Overall Filtering Area
■
Media: Keeps only the jobs using a particular media pool.
■
User: Keeps only the jobs for a particular user.
■
Host: Keeps only the jobs concerning a particular host.
■
Folder: Keeps only the jobs concerning a particular backup folder.
■
Note:
The Folder filter is useful if the platform you want to filter by is an
application. If the platform is a host, the Folder filter is the same as the
Host filter.
Note:
To perform a wildcard search on one criterion, edit its field as follows:
- use the question mark ("?") to replace one character
- use the asterisk to replace ("*") zero or more characters
Hide Job Type: Excludes jobs based on the job type (backup, archiving, restore...).
The Catalog Collection job type is applicable if you have Time Navigator Reporter
installed as well.
Job History Filtering Area
■
Dates:
■
■
Time interval definition: Using the two slide cursors, select the beginning and
end dates to display jobs.
Definition of time navigation period: Choose from how far back in time you want
jobs displayed.
Chapter 13
491
By default, the viewing period is set to 60 hours and the maximum time period to
3 months.
Note:
These parameters can be modified via the following tunables:
Job Manager Displayed Period (displayed_job_hours) for the default
viewing period.
Job Manager Maximum Period (max_days_for_job_filter) for the
maximum viewing period.
■
Maximum number of jobs displayed: Allows you to set a limit on the number of jobs
appearing in Time Navigator Job Manager. The limit applies to both active and
historical jobs.The default value is 200.
■
Hide Job Status: You have the option to exclude historical jobs based on their status:
■
Complete: Succesful job.
■
Cancelled on error: The job was cancelled due to an internal error.
■
■
Cancelled without starting: The backup server initiated a backup job, but that
job was cancelled because the agent failed to respond within the default one
hour timeout. See the tunable timeout_on_scheduled_jobs in the
Time Navigator Tunables guide to modify the value of the timeout.
Cancelled on catalog stop: Time Navigator was shut down while the job was in
progress.
■
Cancelled on request: A user requested to cancel the job.
■
Cancelled (unreachable agent): The backup server was unable to reach the agent
for which the backup job was initiated.
■
Reset: Removes any filters you might have selected.
492
Purging Jobs
This feature allows you to purge jobs on demand from the catalog. Jobs that have reached
the retention period are removed from the catalog if all their objects have been destroyed.
As a result, this feature can help you save some catalog space as well as improve
Time Navigator Job Manager performances. Keep in mind however, that purged jobs
are no longer included in statistical analysis, nor will they appear in any future Job
Accounting report.
In order to purge jobs, you must have the permission to administer the catalog (General
Tasks permission in the Administration tab of the Access Control windows). If this is not the
case, the menu is grayed out.
If Time Navigator Job Manager is connected to several catalogs, all catalogs for which
you are administrator are purged.
Tip:
To reduce the number of historical jobs displayed in Time Navigator Job
Manager without removing them from the catalog, use the Maximum number of
jobs displayed filter.
Purging Jobs
To purge jobs
1.
Choose Jobs-Purge. The Job Purge window will appear. Use the sliding button to
set the retention period between 0 and 30 days. The default value is 30 days.
Job Purge Window
Use the sliding button to set the retention period.
Minimum Value: 1 day.
Chapter 13
493
Maximum Value (default value): 30 days.
Note:
The maximum and default value can be modified using the Job Retention in the
Catalog (job_retention_days) tunable.
Note:
Jobs are purged on the hour.
494
Processing Jobs
You may directly intervene, at any time on the jobs in the Active jobs list to:
■
■
Modify the execution order of a job in the list. The job priority can be either moved
up by one, moved down by one, or moved all the way to the top or the bottom of
the list.
Cancel, pause or restart a job.
Note:
When a job is stopped on error, it remains in the Active job list after all
automatic retries are exhausted, until you manually cancel or restart it. If you
cancel it, the job moves to the History list and its status becomes "Cancelled on
error."
Note:
The Pause operation is not available for backups jobs that do not use the cache
on the server.
Processing Jobs
To modify job priority
1.
Select the job you want to process (you may only process one job at a time).
2.
Choose Jobs-Priority and select the operation you want to perform. The job priority
can be either moved Up by one, moved Down by one, or moved all the way to the
Top or the Bottom of the list.
or
1.
Select the job you want to process (you may only process one job at a time).
2.
Choose Jobs- and either Cancel, Pause or Restart.
Note:
To process jobs, you may also select a job and use the buttons on the window
outer left side to indicate the operation you wish to perform.
Chapter 13
495
Exporting Jobs
The job Export function allows you to export the job information of your choice to a file.
Exporting Jobs
To export the job list
1.
In Time Navigator Job Manager, make sure that only the jobs you want to export
are displayed.
2.
Choose Jobs-Export. The Export window appears.
3.
Configure Export Job Window to export jobs.
4.
Click on OK to create the export file.
Export Job Window
File: Exports jobs to a file. Click on the button to the right of the path field to browse
your machine, or enter the absolute path where you want the file to be located. For
instance:
C:\temp\jobs.txt
496
/tmp/jobs.txt
/tmp/jobs.txt
Export only Selected Lines: Allows you to only export the jobs you have selected in the
Active job list.
List to Export: Allows you to select the jobs to export according to the list they belong to,
either Active, Historical or both.
File Format Tab
■
File Format: Allows you to choose the format of the export file, either Text or
HTML.
■
Encoding: Allows you to choose the encoding for the export file, either Latin 1
(ISO8859-1), US ASCII or UTF8 (standard mechanism used by Unicode for
encoding wide character values into a byte stream). The proposed encoding
depends on the file format you select:
File Format
Encoding
HTML
UTF8 (standard mechanism used by Unicode for encoding wide
character values into a byte stream)
Text
UTF-8
US-ASCII
Latin 1 (ISO8859-1)
Contents
■
Export Visible Columns: Allows to export all the information displayed in the Jobs list.
Note:
Otherwise, uncheck that box and doubleclick on the column heading to switch them
from the Export list to the Do not export list.
Chapter 13
497
Duplicating Jobs
You can duplicate data backed up by a backup or archiving job. Job duplication allows
you to duplicate one or several jobs on one or several media, as opposed to media
duplication which only permits duplication of a complete media.
Prerequisites
■
The status of the jobs to duplicate must be Complete.
■
Several jobs can be duplicated simultaneously if they belong to the same catalog.
■
Job types eligible for duplication are: backup, synthetic backup, archiving, media
duplication.
Duplicating Jobs
To duplicate jobs
1.
From Time Navigator Job Manager, select one or several jobs to duplicate in the
History list.
2.
Choose Jobs-Duplicate. The Job Duplication Parameters window appears.
3.
Set the Job Duplication Window and click on OK.
Job Duplication Window
Media Pool
■
Original Pool: The media pool containing the data to duplicate will also be the one
498
containing the duplicated data.
■
Other Pool: Specify another media pool if you do not want the original pool to
contain the duplicated data.
Options
■
Start on Empty Cartridge: Only allows use of empty cartridges for job duplication.
■
Close Duplicated Cartridges: Allows you to close the cartridges that contain duplicated
data.
Tip:
■
If you check the Start on Empty Cartridge and Close Duplicated Cartridges
options, you will obtain a consistent media pool including only data of
the current duplication.
Continue on Error: Allows to continue duplication even if errors due to data occur.
You can also duplicate jobs using the tina_job_control command. Refer to the
Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide for more details.
Simultaneous Job Duplications
By default, even if several jobs are selected in Time Navigator Job Manager to be
duplicated, duplications are performed sequentially, one after the other. This behavior is
designed to prevent duplication operations from reserving all the available drives.
To modify the default behavior, you can:
■
Set the tunable "Maximum Number of Simultaneous Job Duplications"
(max_para_job_dup).
■
Select the jobs to duplicate one by one instead of all at once and choose JobDuplicate. In that case all duplications are launched in a row, provided that there
are enough available drives to perform the duplications.
For instance to duplicate ten jobs two by two (four drives required), select a first
group of five jobs, choose Job-Duplicate. Then select the five remaining jobs.
Chapter 13
499
Job Reports
The job reports allow you to view various information concerning the jobs performed by
Time Navigator.
Note:
The job accounting reports are available in command line only. For detailed
documentation and instructions on how to generate reports, see the
Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide. The commands used to
generate reports are: tina_acct and tina_report.
The reports available are as follows:
1.
Job accounting report (tina_acct)
This report generates a standard accounting report that lists all the jobs, sorted by
type, that took place within the last 24 hours. By default, the report lists the
following information:
■
The platform name
■
The job type
■
The job status
■
The user name
■
A job description (backup type, archiving folder name...etc)
■
The date and time the job was submitted, began, ended
■
The job ID
■
The job volume (amount of processed data) in bytes
■
The job objects (number of processed objects)
■
The media and drives involved as well as the backup format (Tina, Tar, Cpio)
and the tape file number.
If you want a customized job accounting report, you may use parameters to
determine what information is displayed in the report and in what order.
2.
Data Volume report (tina_report)
This report produces reports concerning the data backed up, either globally for all
the catalogs involved, or in a more detailled fashion. This report is invoice oriented,
allowing users to be billed according to the volume processed.
500
Modifying Job Behavior using Parameters
A series of parameters (also refered to as "tunables") is available to let you modify the job
behavior. Keep in mind that a parameter will modify all jobs within a given
Time Navigator environment.
For example, to limit the number of simultaneous jobs, use the Limit Number of
Simultaneous Jobs (limit_nb_jobs) and Maximum Number of Simultaneous
Jobs (max_nb_jobs) tunables.
See the Job Configuration section in the Time Navigator Tunables Guide for details.
501
C H A P T E R
14
Time Navigator Task Viewer
14
Time Navigator Task Viewer can be used to optimize backup, network traffic and drive
workload.
It gives a global view of the workload for all past and future backups. By graphically
displaying each job load, along with the resulting data flow, Time Navigator Task
Viewer helps the administrator spread the jobs over time, balancing the overhead.
Moreover, Time Navigator Task Viewer proves an efficient forecasting tool. By
providing the administrator a comprehensive view of the ultimate result of programming
new backups, adding new data sets, or modifying backup frequency, etc. It helps plan
for new resources.
Time Navigator Task Viewer allows you to view at a glance all the backups completed
or planned for any given platform. This chapter describes Time Navigator Task Viewer
and presents the functionalities offered by Time Navigator Task Viewer.
To open Time Navigator Task Viewer
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Monitoring-Time Navigator Task
Viewer. Time Navigator Task Viewer appears.
Note:
To use Time Navigator Task Viewer in command line, see the "tina_sched"
section in the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide.
502
Chapter 14
503
Time Navigator Task Viewer Interface
Time Navigator Task Viewer is composed of three main areas:
■
The “Platform List Area”, page 503
■
The “Backup Area”, page 504
■
The “Time Scale Area”, page 505.
Platform List Area
The first column in the window is the list of platforms (hosts and applications) from all
the Time Navigator server catalogs.
For each platform, the following information is displayed:
■
Name
■
Name of the catalog it belongs to.
■
Type: Host or application
■
Status: Enabled or disabled.
■
Associated backup strategies: A, B, C, and D.
The following table summarizes the color code used in Time Navigator Task Viewer.
Information
Color
Meaning
Platform
(colors are the same as those
used in Time Navigator
Administration Console)
Dark blue background
Enabled host
Light blue background
Enabled application
Brown background
Disabled platform
Strategy
Green background
Defined strategy
Brown background
Undefined strategy
The list of platforms can be sorted by platform, catalog, or type (host or application)
either in ascending or descending order.
By default, the list is sorted by name, then by catalog, and finally by type.
To sort the list of platforms
1.
In Time Navigator Task Viewer, choose View-Sort and select:
504
■
By platform to sort platform names in alphabetical order.
■
By catalog to sort catalog names in alphabetical order.
■
By type to sort platforms by type: host or application.
2.
In Time Navigator Task Viewer, choose the sorting order with the
View-Descending Order menu:
Tip:
If the option is not checked, sorting will be done in ascending order.
Inversely, if the option is checked, sorting will be done in descending
order.
Backup Area
The second main area in Time Navigator Task Viewer shows all backups that are
completed and planned. The red vertical line dividing this area symbolizes the present.
History corresponds to backups performed in the past by Time Navigator, whether
■
completed or cancelled on error.
Schedule corresponds to backups planned in Time Navigator Administration
Console.
■
The bars in the time scale represent backups. The thickness of the bars depends on the
backup duration (see “Filters”, page 508 for details on backup duration).
The bar color code is as follows:
Bar Color
Meaning
Light blue
Incremental backup
Dark blue
Full backup
Sky blue
Backup in progress
Red
Backup cancelled on error
Chapter 14
505
Time Scale Area
The dates located on the bottom left and right of the Backup Schedule represent
respectively the minimum and maximum displayed dates. The actual time interval shown
depends on the period of time you select with the slider located below the platform list.
The maximum duration is 30 days. You can also change the period of time by using the
Zoom feature (see below).
The time scale unit can vary from a second to a week depending on the duration and the
window size you are using.
For more information on how to modify the time period, see “Filters”, page 508.
Using the Zoom Mode
The zoom mode allows you to modify the time interval viewed in the Backup area. It
performs the same function as the slider.
To use the zoom mode
1.
Choose View-Zoom Mode or use the right mouse button and select Zoom Mode in the
pop-up menu.
2.
The cursor changes, the menus become unavailable. Position the cursor at the point
where you want the displayed interval to begin. Right-click, a menu appears:
The first item in the menu is the date and time where the zoom interval will begin.
Click on Zoom Beginning to apply.
3.
A vertical line appears in the backup area at the Zoom beginning point. Position
the cursor at the point where you want the displayed interval to end. Right-click,
a menu appears:
506
4.
The first item in the menu is the date and time where the zoom interval will end.
Click on Zoom end to apply. The backup area will be resized according to the dates
you just defined.
Note:
At any time during this process, click on Cancel to exit the zoom mode.
Pop-up Menus
Several pop-up menus are available in Time Navigator Task Viewer. The information
displayed varies according to the area selected with the cursor.
Platform List Area:
If you right-click in the Platform List area, the following menu appears:
■
■
■
The first item indicates the platform name and the catalog name.
The second item gives you access to the backup evolution window after you select
a strategy. See “Viewing Backup Evolution of Performed Backups”, page 514,
for details.
The third item gives you access to the zoom mode, see “Using the Zoom Mode”,
page 505, for details.
Backup Area:
If you right-click in the Backup area, the following menu appears:
■
The first item indicates the strategy you selected.
■
The second item displays the Backup Evolution window for the strategy. See
Chapter 14
507
“Viewing Backup Evolution of Performed Backups”, page 514, for details.
■
The third item gives you access to the zoom mode. See “Using the Zoom Mode”,
page 505, for details.
508
Filters
Filtering the Display of the Platforms
Use filters to better define the information you wish to view in Time Navigator Task
Viewer.
To filter the display of the platforms:
1.
Choose Scheduler-Filters.
2.
You can perform the following operations:
■
■
■
Filter the display of the platform list according to their name and the catalog they
belong to. See “Filtering the Display of the Platforms”, page 508.
View the backup schedule according to the type of backup (full or incremental), the
type of platform (application or host), and the strategy (A, B, C, or D). See “View
tab”, page 510 .
Define the time period to view the backup schedule and set the parameter to
estimate backup duration. See “Dates Tab”, page 511 .
Platforms Tab
Chapter 14
509
Use the Platforms Tab to filter the display of the platform list according to their name and
their type (host or application).
Tip: Use the Ctrl and Shift keys to select multiple platforms and double-click on the
highlighted ones to move them from one column to the other.
Available: All the platforms available. Double-click a platform to move it to the Selected
column.
Selected: The platforms to be displayed in Time Navigator Task Viewer.
All: Moves all the Available platforms in the Selected column.
Invert: Inverts the contents of the Selected and Available columns.
Host: Displays only hosts.
Application: Displays only applications.
Default Configuration: Sets the default values for all three tabs.
Note:
In the default configuration, only Enabled platforms are displayed. Thus,
although all platforms are selected, the disabled ones do not appear in the main
window.
510
View tab
Use the View Tab to view the backup schedule according to the type of backup (full or
incremental) and the strategy (A, B, C, or D).
Full: Displays platforms for which full backups have been scheduled.
Incremental: Displays platforms for which incremental backups have been scheduled.
Strategies A, B, C and D: Displays platforms for which the checked strategies have been
defined.
Enabled: When checked, displays only enabled platforms. Disabled platforms do not
appear.
Active Strategies: When checked, displays only the strategies that have been defined for
the platform.
Chapter 14
511
Default Configuration: Sets the default values for all three tabs. By default all filters in the
View tab are selected.
Note:
At least one backup type and one strategy must be checked.
Dates Tab
Use the Dates Tab to define the time period to view the backup schedule and set the
parameter to estimate backup duration. Move the slider in the past (history) and in the
future (schedule area) to set the beginning and end dates.
Absolute Date: Lets you toggle between an absolute date format (e.g., Tues Apr 11 2000
16:52:30) and a relative date format (e.g., 3day(s) 06h12:17).
Note:
This date format only applies inside this filter window. It does not apply to the
main window date format.
512
History Cursor: Sets the beginning date.
Schedule Cursor: Sets the end date.
History Button: Defines the time period in the Past. The schedule date is automatically set
to 0, the history is set to 2 days.
Schedule Button: Defines the time period in the Future. The historical date is automatically
set to 0, the schedule date is set to 4 days.
The following table indicates various preset values for the history and schedule dates.
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Value
History
Button
Schedule
Button
History
Date
0
60 days
2 days from
present
2 days from
present
0
Schedule
Date
0
30 days
1 day after
present
0
4 days after
present
Duration Estimation: Sets the number of backups that will be used to calculate the thickness
of the lines representing backups. Time Navigator averages the duration of past backups
to estimate the duration of future backups. The maximum number of backups used to
estimate is 100. The default value is 1.
Note:
If you use the default value, no calculation is actually performed, all scheduled
backups are assigned the same duration as the last one performed.
Note:
If you specify a number of backups higher than the actual number of backups
present in the catalog, the latter number is used to estimate backup duration. For
example, if five backups have been saved in the catalog and an average of 10
backups have been performed, the backup duration is calculated from the last
five backups available.
Default Configuration: Sets the default values for all three tabs.
Chapter 14
513
Updating Time Navigator Task Viewer Contents
If Time Navigator Task Viewer remains open for any length of time, use Update to
refresh the screen. The following items will be updated:
■
The present date and time.
■
Catalog information such as:
■
Platform declaration or deletion on the network
■
Modification in a platform enabled/disabled status
■
Creation/edit of a backup strategy, etc.
To update Time Navigator Task Viewer
Choose View-Refresh or press the F5 key.
Exporting Data to a Text File
To export data to a text file
The Export menu exports data to a text file.
1.
Choose Scheduler-Export.
2.
Enter the absolute path where you want the text file to be located. For example:
C:\temp\evt.txt
/tmp/evt
3.
Click on OK.
Viewing Simultaneous Backups
The Simultaneous Backups feature allows you to view backups performed or planned
simultaneously at any given point in time.
This option is very useful if you are working with a large number of platforms. It will
point out the low and high usage point. You can then modify your strategies accordingly
to optimize Time Navigator usage and spread out network traffic over time.
514
To view simultaneous backups
Choose View-Simultaneous Backups. Simultaneous backups appear in the lower part of the
window, below the platforms.
■
■
The X axis is the time scale indicating backup duration.
The Y axis is the number of simultaneous backups. The Y axis scale is automatically
set according to the maximum number of simultaneous backups found in any given
time period. For example, if the maximum number of simultaneous backups is six,
the histogram will be divided into six equal parts separated by horizontal lines.
Tip:
Use the filters if you want to display the Simultaneous Backups according
to a platform, a catalog, a strategy, a backup type, etc. See “Filters”,
Viewing Backup Evolution of Performed Backups
You can view the evolution in time and volume of performed backups (History area of the
main window) for a given platform, strategy, and backup type.
To view the backup evolution:
1.
Choose Scheduler-Evolution and select a platform and an associated backup strategy.
Tip:
Right-click either in the Platform or Backup Area, and choose Evolution-
Chapter 14
515
Strategy X.
Note:
If you right-click in the Backup Area, you can only access the Backup
Evolution for the strategy you clicked on. Whereas, if you right-click in
the Platform Area, you can access the Backup Evolution for any strategy
available for the platform you clicked on. See “Pop-up Menus”,
The Backup Evolution Window appears.
Displays the evolution in time and volume of performed backups (History area of the
main window) for a given platform, strategy, and backup type.
For each backup, from the most recent to the oldest, the following information is
displayed:
In the upper area:
Identification: Displays the platform name, catalog name, and backup strategy.
Backup Type: Displays the backup evolution for full or incremental backups.
516
Number of Backups: Select the number of backups to view.
In the main area:
Backup List: Lists each backup, from the most recent to the oldest:
■
■
The backup starting date and time.
The backup duration in hours, minutes and seconds. It appears in the form of a
horizontal histogram bar in the corresponding column of the table. The bar's scale
depends upon the longest duration and the biggest backup volume displayed in the
window.
■
The backed up volume with the number of processed objects in parenthesis.
■
The backup rate in megabytes per hour (MB/H).
■
The Job identification number (ID) corresponding to the one displayed in
TTime Navigator Job Manager.
Selecting a Catalog
At any time during your session, if several catalogs are present on your machine, you can
change the catalog selection.
To select a catalog:
1.
Choose Catalog-Select. The list of available catalogs is displayed.
2.
Select one of the catalogs.
3.
Click on Apply.
4.
Click on Close.
Catalogs Selection Window
By default, Time Navigator Task Viewer displays the backups completed or planned for
the current catalog. If you are managing more than one catalog, you may want to view
backups for several catalogs at once.
List: Lets you select a catalog to which to connect.
The icon between the checkbox and the catalog name indicates the status of the catalog:
■
Green icon: Indicates that the catalog is connected.
■
Green icon with a small white cross on a red background: Indicates that you do not have
Chapter 14
517
the required permissions to access that catalog.
■
■
Tip:
Gray icon with a red cross: Indicates that the catalog is unavailable (the catalog could
be stopped, suspended,...).
Question mark: Indicates that the catalog status is unknown.
Check the box in front of a catalog and click on Apply to identify its status.
518
519
C H A P T E R
15
Time Navigator Media Request
Console
15
All the requests concerning media are handled through Time Navigator Media Request
Console. This application centralizes requests from all catalogs into a single interface.
When a media operation (mounting, dismounting, moving cartridges, ...) is required to
perform a backup, a restore or any other function, a request is logged into the catalog
and appears in all Time Navigator Media Request Console applications that are running
and connected to that catalog.
The process that requested the cartridge operation is then paused until either an operator
performs the action or the time-out expires. Depending on the request result, the process
can either resume, resend a similar request, or cancel on error.
Note:
Time Navigator Media Request Console should be opened and minimized on
the operator’s console at all times. It is automatically maximized whenever a
new request is detected.
To open Time Navigator Media Request Console
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Monitoring-Time Navigator Media
Request Console.
Time Navigator Media Request Console appears.
520
Time Navigator Media Request Console is composed of two areas: a pending
requests area and a processed requests area.
Note:
To use Time Navigator Media Request Console on a command line, see the
tina_operator section in the Time Navigator Command Line Interface
guide.
Viewing Requests
To view Time Navigator media requests
1.
Choose View to show or hide the processed requests area. Also use that menu to
modify the column selection in either the pending or processed requests area of the
window.
The Column Selection feature is also available by right-clicking.
In the Column Selection window, various options are available.
2.
Click on All to view all columns
3.
Click on Invert to make all selected columns unselected and, inversely, all
unselected columns selected
4.
Double-click on columns individually to move them back and forth between the
Visible Columns and Hidden Columns list.
Time Navigator Media Request Console 521
5.
Note:
Select columns individually or in multiple selections and use the < and > button
to move columns from one list to the other.
In case of multiple selections, the last selected column appears with a yellow
border to indicate that it is the active one. You may double-click on it to move
the whole selection at once).
Selecting Catalogs
By default, Time Navigator Media Request Console only shows requests from the
catalog currently used by Time Navigator Administration Console. If you are
managing more than one catalog, choose Catalog-Select to open the Catalog Selection
window and select all the catalogs you need.
522
Managing Requests
Whenever a new request is created, it appears in the upper part of Time Navigator
Media Request Console in the Pending Requests area. The request life cycle is divided
in two parts, the handling phase and the acknowledgment phase. Each phase has its own
time-out. Requests will go through several statuses during their life cycle (see “Request
Status and Evolution”, page 527 for details).
Handling a Request
During the Handling phase, when the request first appears in the upper window, the
operator is expected to take the request into account. However the operator must do so
before the time-out expires. The time-out is represented in Time Navigator Media
Request Console by the red progression bar. The remaining time appears in the red bar.
If the operator does not handle the request before it is timed out, the request will be
moved to the Processed Request list (in the lower part of the main window) with a “Timed
Out Handling” status.
To handle a request
1.
Select the request and choose Request-Handling.
Note:
You can also double-click on the request, or select the request and rightclick to access Handling in the pop-up menu.
The Handling Request window appears.
Once this window appears, the request is considered to be “handled” and enters
the acknowledging phase. A new time-out starts. It is represented by the red
progress bar in the Acknowledgment area of the Request Information window.
The cartridge name, barcode and comment lets you identify the requested
cartridge.
2.
Now, you can acknowledge, discard or suspend this request.
Responding to a Request
During the Acknowledging phase, the operator is expected to either perform the required
action, discard the request if the action cannot be fulfilled, or suspend the request if the
action requires more time than the acknowledgable timeout will allow. If the request is
suspended, a third longer “security” timeout starts.
If the operator does not acknowledge the request before it is timed out, the request will
be moved to the Processed Request list (in the lower part of the main window) with a
“Timed Out Acknowledging” Status or “Timed Out Security” if the request was suspended and
never acknowledged.
To respond to a request
Click on either Acknowledge or Discard and close the Handling Request window.
524
■
Acknowledge is that the operator fulfilled the request having performed the action
required.
■
Discard is that the operator cannot perform the required action.
■
Suspend only postpones acknowledgement. The operator will have to acknowledge
the request.
Note:
If a request has been suspended, the operator cannot close the Handling Request
window until the request is either acknowledged or discarded.
Once a request has been acknowledged, it appears in the Processed Requests list, in the
lower part of Time Navigator Media Request Console.
Processed Requests
The processed request list is a useful way to check for requests that happened in the
absence of the operator. Also consult Time Navigator Job Manager to verify the
consequences of timed out requests by the processes requesting them.
To view processed request detailed information
Select the request in the list, choose Request-Detail.
Note:
Right-click on a request and choose Detail from the pop-up menu.
The Request Information window appears for the selected request.
Viewing Handled Requests
Only pending requests are displayed in Time Navigator Media Request Console.
To view handled requests
Choose View-Handled Requests. The handled requests appear in the lower part of
Time Navigator Media Request Console.
Note:
If you want to hide the handled requests, choose View-Handled Requests again.
Viewing Information in the Handled Requests Area
To modify contents of the handled requests area
1.
Choose View-Column Choice-Handled Requests.
The Column Choice window appears.
2.
Choose the information you want to view in the handled requests area.
Column Choice - Handled Requests Information
Use the Column Choice window to modify the column selection in the Handled Requests
area.
■
■
■
All: Displays all columns in the Handled Requests area.
selected.
Hidden Columns: Lists the columns that are not displayed in the Handled Requests
area.
■
Visible Columns: Lists the columns that are displayed in the Handled Requests area.
■
> Button: Once columns are selected in the Visible Columns list, use the > Button
to move the selected columns to the Hidden Columns list. You can also doubleclick on a column name to move it to the Hidden Columns list.
■
< Button: Once columns are selected in the Hidden Columns list, use the < Button
to move the selected columns to the Visible Columns list. You can also doubleclick on a column name to move it to the Visible Columns list.
526
Viewing Information in the Pending Requests Area
To modify contents of the pending requests area
1.
Choose View-Column Choice-Pending Requests.
The Column Choice window appears.
2.
Choose the information you want to view in the pending requests area.
Column Choice - Pending Requests Information
Use the Column Choice window to modify the column selection in the Pending Requests
area.
■
All: Displays all columns in the Pending Requests area.
■
selected.
■
Hidden Columns: Lists the columns that are not displayed in the Pending Requests
area.
■
■
■
Visible Columns: Lists the columns that are displayed in the Pending Requests area.
> Button: Once columns are selected in the Hidden Columns list, use the > Button to
move the selected columns to the Visible Columns list. You can also double-click on
a column name to move it to the Visible Columns list.
< Button: Once columns are selected in the Visible Columns list, use the < Button to
move the selected columns to the Hidden Columns list. You can also double-click on
a column name to move it to the Hidden Columns list.
Request Status and Evolution
A particular request can display several types of statuses. Taking corrective action with
respect to the declared status allows request resolution and job continuation.
Status Definition
■
Submitted
This is the request initial status.
■
Handled
The operator has taken the request into account before the handling time-out
expired. A new time-out starts, further action is required.
■
Acknowledged
The operator fulfilled the request before the acknowledgeable time-out expired.
This is a final stage, no further action is required.
■
Unacknowledged
The operator cannot fulfill the request and indicated it to the application before the
acknowledgeable time-out expired. This is a final stage, no further action is
required.
■
Suspended
The operator needs additional time and suspended the acknowledgeable time-out. A
new security time-out starts, further action is required.
■
Timed Out Handling
The request was not taken into account within the handling time-out. This is a final
stage, no further action is required.
■
Timed Out Acknowledging
The request was not acknowledged nor suspended before the acknowledgeable timeout expired. This is a final stage, no further action is required.
■
Timed Out Security
The operator did not acknowledge the request within the security time frame after
having suspended it. This is a final stage, no further action is required.
■
Terminated
Time Navigator shut down before the request could be handled or acknowledged.
528
This is a final stage, no further action is required.
Note:
Minimize Time Navigator Media Request Console after use to allow it to be
maximized automatically for the next use.
Status Evolution
The following table shows all the different statuses a request may go through during its
life cycle.
Request Status Evolution
Submitted
Handled
Acknowledged
Final stage
Unacknowledged
Final stage
Timed Out Acknowledging
Final stage
Terminated
Final stage
Suspended
Acknowledged
Final stage
Unacknowledged
Final stage
Timed Out Security
Final stage
Terminated
Final stage
Timed Out Handling
Final stage
Terminated
Final stage
Redirecting Operator Requests
The operator requests asking for a VTL Disk Drive cartridge to be put online can be
redirected by means of a script prior to their being issued. The result of the script
determines whether the request is processed or issued. Time Navigator communicates
with the script through the following variables:
TINA_CATALOG:
Name of the current catalog.
TINA_TMR_TYPE: Operator request type (possible value: ONLINE).
TINA_TMR_HOST_NAME: Name of the host where the restore is performed.
TINA_TMR_CART_LOC_FILE: Absolute path of the Disk Drive cartridge file.
TINA_TMR_CART_NAME: Cartridge name.
TINA_TMR_CART_TYPE: Cartridge type (possible value: "Disk Drive").
TINA_TMR_CART_LABEL_PREFIX: Prefix of the media pool label.
The return codes of the script must be the following:
OK (0)= The request is processed and no operator request is issued.
TN_ERR_MOUNT_ABORT (55)= The request is ignored and no operator request is issued
(the equivalent of discarding a request in Time Navigator Media Request Console).
TN_ERR_REQ (Other)= The request is not processed and the operator request is issued.
The script is activated via the Redirect Operator’s Requests (op_req_handler)
tunable which defines the its absolute path.
For further information on the script, contact Atempo Professional Services.
530
531
C H A P T E R
16
Backup to Disk with
Virtual Library System
16
About the Virtual Library System
In addition to backup to tape, Atempo also offers a disk-based backup functionality,
Time Navigator Virtual Library System, that uses external disks rather than
cartridges as the backup target. It allows for faster backup and restore.
Time Navigator Virtual Library System emulates traditional tape library behavior by
providing an interface that lets you configure and manage virtual drives and cartridges.
Atempo also provides a solution to export data from disk to tape:
Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application allows to migrate data backed up
on disk to a tape library.
Note:
Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application interfaces with various
types of backup to disk solutions, including Atempo’s Virtual Library System.
See “Exporting Data Backed up to Disk to a Tape Library”, page 549 for details.
532
Configuring a Virtual Library System
A Virtual Library System is represented by a virtual library to which one or several
virtual VTL Disk Drives are associated. The library contains some virtual slots and a
virtual mailbox.
The Virtual Library System configuration consists of:
■
Creating a library associated with a host.
■
Specifying the number of VTL Disk Drives that you want to use.
■
Specifying the directory where the data is backed up.
■
Specifying the number and size of cartridge files.
Virtual Library System Configuration Files
The Virtual Library System configuration is stored in configuration files located in the
Vtl directory of the Time Navigator installation directory.
A backup of this directory is automatically triggered each time the Time Navigator
catalog is backed up. If the configuration files disappear, Time Navigator automatically
restores the backed up version of the Vtl directory. Once the restore performed, it is
recommended that you run a barcode reinitialization of the virtual library via the LibraryOperation-Reinitialization-Barcode menu.
If the Vtl directory is corrupted but that it still exists, you must delete it, so that it can
be automatically restored.
Note:
Only one backup version of the Vtl directory is kept. Only the last version
backed up can thus be restored.
Using the Atempo VLS Wizard
If you do not have any devices configured in your catalog when you open
Time Navigator Administration Console, the Administration Assistant allows you to
declare an Atempo VLS.
The Atempo VLS Wizard is only available if you do not have any libraries defined in
your catalog.
Chapter 16
Backup to Disk with Virtual Library System
533
The wizard allows you to:
■
Create a two drives VLS
■
Specify the directory where the data is backed up.
■
Specify the number and size of the cartridge files.
To configure an Atempo VLS using the Wizard
1.
Open Time Navigator Administration Console. The Administration Assistant
window appears. Click on Declare a virtual device for backup to disk (Atempo
VLS).
2.
The Welcome window appears. Click on Next.
3.
In the Directory Selection window, click on Next to accept the default installation
directory or enter a different directory. You can also click on Browse to select a
directory.
534
4.
In the Size Selection Windows, click on Next to accept the default size and number
of cartridges or modify the values.
5.
In the Name window, click on Next to accept the default name or enter a name for
the VLS.
Chapter 16
535
6.
Verify the information in the Summary Window and click on Finish.
7.
If you have to configure a backup for any of your platforms, the Administrative
Assistant allows you to do so. See “”, page 291 for details.
Creating a Virtual Library System
To create a Virtual Library System
1.
Open Time Navigator Administration Console.
2.
In the Network area, click on the icon of the host where you want to create the VLS.
3.
Choose Device-Library-New. You are asked to choose a library type.
536
4.
Select Virtual Libraries-Atempo-Virtual Library System and click on OK. The Create
Atempo VLS window appears.
5.
Provide all required information as described in:
■
“Create Atempo VLS Window - General Tab”, page 537.
■
“Create Atempo VLS Window - Advanced Tab”, page 538.
6.
To set advanced parameters, click on the VLS Environment Variables button. See
“VLS Configuration Window”, page 539 for details.
7.
Validate your choice by clicking on OK.
The virtual library and the virtual disk drives appear in the Network area.
A library Reinitialization (barcode) is automatically performed when the library is
created. This reinitialization provides information to the catalog concerning the
slots and drives status. See “Reinitializing Libraries”, page 237, for details.
8.
Choose Storage-Media Pool-Properties to associate the VTL Disk Drives to media
pools.
For details concerning media pools, see “Creating a Media Pool”, page 196.
Chapter 16
537
Create Atempo VLS Window - General Tab
Host Name: The name of the host you selected appears in the Host Name field. You
cannot edit it at this point.
Library Name: The name of the library appears with the library icon in the
Network area.
Number of Drives: Number of Virtual Disk Drives that you want to use. The
default value is 2.
Media Directory: Directory where the cartridges are going to be created. Click
on the Browse button to select a directory on your disk.
Warning:
On Windows platforms, if the cartridge directory is located on a
network drive, enter the path with the UNC format:
\\server_name\share_name\directory_name.
Cartridge Size (MB): Size of one cartridge. The size must be between 256 MB
and 200 GB.
Number of Cartridges: Number of spare cartridges available in the library. It
must be between 4 and 6000.
538
Create Atempo VLS Window - Advanced Tab
Disk Space Allocation: Specifies whether the space allocated to the cartridges is
reserved on the disk when the label reinitialization is performed.
■
■
The Cartridges in slots value reserves the cartridge space.
The None value does not reserve the cartridge space but allocates space as
cartridges are filled.
Note:
If the backed up data is to be write protected, use the None option.
Note:
If you choose the Cartridges in Slots option, make sure you perform a Label
Reinitialization of the library via the Devices-Library-OperationsReinitialization-Label menu. As space allocation may take a long time, we
recommend that this operation be performed at a time when
Time Navigator Administration Console is not being used.
Chapter 16
539
Additional Media Directories:
You can add up to 10 media directories to store cartridges. The size of the cartridge
files in the additional directories is the size you specified via the Cartridge Size
parameter when you created the Virtual Library System.
Note:
■
This feature is not compatible with the SAN feature. If you add media
directories, you cannot use the VLS in a SAN environment.
Add: Allows you to enter the Absolute path of an additional directory in
which cartridge files are stored, and a number of cartridges to add in that
directory.
For Windows platforms, if the cartridge directory is located on a network
drive, enter the path with the UNC format:
\\server_name\share_name\directory_name
■
Remove: Allows you to remove a cartridge directory.
Connection Identity:
■
Note:
■
User Name: Name of the user required to access the cartridge directory.
This information may be required for instance if the cartridge directory is
located on a network drive on a Windows platforms. For Windows
platforms, the user name format must be: domain_name\user_name.
The user allowed to access the cartridge directory must also have access
to the Vtl directory located in the Time Navigator installation
directory.
Password: Password of the user required to access the cartridge directory.
Advanced Properties: Opens the library Advanced Properties windows. See
“Advanced Library Properties”, page 165.
VLS Environment Variables: Allows you to edit environment variables. See
“VLS Configuration Window”, page 539 for details.
VLS Configuration Window
Use the VTL Configuration window to edit, add or remove VTL parameters.
540
Add: Lets you add a parameter.
Edit: Lets you modify the value of an existing parameter.
Remove: Lets you remove a parameter.
Name: Name of the Time Navigator Virtual Library parameters. See Virtual Library
System Parameters for a list of available variables.
Value: Value of the variables that are already defined.
Chapter 16
541
Virtual Library System Parameters
Parameter
Description
ALLOCATE_SPACE
Specifies whether the space allocated to the cartridges is reserved
on the disk.
CART_DIR
Directory in which the cartridges are going to be created. The
cartridges of the Virtual Library System are located in the following
directory:
CART_DIR/DiskDrives/catalog_name/device_descriptor
Where:
CART_DIR is the cartridge directory you specified at library
creation; catalog_name is the name of the catalog where the Virtual
Library System has been
created; device_descriptor is the device descriptor of the Virtual
Library System.
CART_DIR_EXTRAN
(where N stands for 0, 1, 2 ...
depending on the number of
additional directories)
Absolute path of an additional directory in which cartridge files are
stored. For Windows platforms, if the cartridge directory is located
on a network drive, enter the path with the UNC format:
Note: This feature is not compatible with the SAN feature.
CART_DIR_HOSTN
depending on the associated hosts)
Path of the mounting point corresponding to the cartridge directory
on HOSTN.
The path must be entered with the UNC format:
CART_SIZE
Size of one cartridge. It must be between 256 MB and 200 GB.
Note: If you edit the CART_SIZE parameter, only new cartridges
will take the new size. The size of existing cartridges remains the
same.
DRIVEN (where N stands for 0, 1,
2 ... depending on the number of
drives)
Names of the drives
HOSTN (where N stands for 0, 1, 2
... depending on the number of
associated hosts)
Name of the host connected on the SAN. Only hosts declared as
storage nodes can be connected to a SAN.
Warning: the host where the VLS is located is declared by default:
do not declare it using the HOSTN variable.
MAILBOX_DIR
Directory in which the cartridges will be put online or offline
MAX_NB_CARTRIDGES
Number of spare cartridges available in the library. It must be
between 4 and 6000
MAX_NB_CARTRIDGES_MBX
Number of slots contained in the mailbox
NB_CART_TO_ADD
Number of spare cartridges that you want to add in the Virtual
Library System
542
Parameter
Description
NB_CART_TO_ADD_EXTRAN
depending on the number of
additional directories)
Number of cartridges that you want to store in the additional
directories
NET_PASSWORD
Password of the user required to access the cartridge directory.
NET_USER
Name of the user required to access the cartridge directory. On
Windows platforms, the user name format must be:
domain_name\user_name.
SAN
Name of the network to which you want to associate the Virtual
Library System.
Note: This feature is not compatible with the additional cartridge
feature.
Cartridge File Location
The cartridges of the Virtual Library System are located in the following directory:
CART_DIR\DiskDrives\catalog_name\device_descriptor
Where:
■
CART_DIR is the cartridge directory you specified when you created the library.
■
catalog_name is the name of the catalog where the Virtual Library System has
been created.
■
device_descriptor is the device descriptor of the Virtual Library System.
Disk Space Allocation
If you specified at library creation that you wanted to allocate the cartridge space on disk,
you must choose the Library-Operations-Reinitialization-Label menu to perform a Label
Chapter 16
543
Reinitialization of the library. This operation actually allocates space.
Warning:
As space allocation may take a long time, we recommend that this operation
be performed at a time when Time Navigator Administration Console is
not being used.
If you want to stop space allocation in progress, edit the library and set the
ALLOCATE_SPACE parameter to NONE.
See “Editing a Virtual Library System”, page 545 for details about VLS Parameters.
SAN Configuration
You can configure a Virtual Library System on a SAN architecture (Storage Area
Network), except if you are performing backups using the NDMP protocol. In this case,
the use of a VLS is not supported.
Warning:
The SAN features cannot be used if you have defined additional cartridge
directories. See “Create Atempo VLS Window - Advanced Tab”,
page 538.
See “Time Navigator in SAN Environments”, page 419 for details about the SAN.
To create a Virtual Library System on a SAN
Note:
A platform of network type must have been created previously via the PlatformNew-Network menu.
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, select the Virtual Library system in
the Network area.
2.
Choose Devices-Library-Properties-Advanced tab and click on VLS Environment
Variable.The VLS Configuration window appears.
3.
Click on Add. The Select VTL Parameter window appears.
4.
Edit the following parameters:
■
SAN
544
■
HOSTN
■
CART_DIR_HOSTN
See “Virtual Library System Parameters”, page 541 for details.
5.
Click on OK.
The drives are now displayed near the SAN in the lower part of the Network area.
A small SAN network appears on the icon of the hosts associated with the VTL Disk
Drives.
Chapter 16
545
Editing a Virtual Library System
Once a virtual library has been created, you have the option to modify its parameters.
To edit a Virtual Library System
1.
Select the library to edit in the Network area.
2.
Choose Devices-Library-Properties and modify the parameters as described in:
3.
■
Create Atempo VLS Window - General Tab
■
Create Atempo VLS Window - Advanced Tab
To modify environment variables, click on VLS Environment Variables in the Advanced
tab. The list of the Virtual Library System Parameters that you specified when
creating the library appears. See “Virtual Library System Parameters”, page 541
for a complete list of available variables.
Note:
4.
If you edit the CART_SIZE parameter, only new cartridges will take the
new size. The size of existing cartridges remains the same.
According to your needs, you can:
■
■
Modify the value of a parameter: select the parameter in the list and click on
Edit.
Add a new parameter: click on Add, select the parameter in the list and click
on OK.
Modify the parameters as described in “VLS Configuration Window”, page 539.
5.
In the Edit VLS Parameter window, enter a value or modify the current value in the
Value field and click on OK.
6.
In the Library Properties window, click on OK.
546
Managing the Virtual Library System
As the Virtual Library System emulates a standard library, the virtual drives and
cartridges can be managed through Time Navigator Library Manager.
Description
Time Navigator Library Manager is accessed via the Devices-Library-OperationsManagement menu. It provides information about the VTL Disk Drives, the mailbox slots
and the cartridges:
■
■
■
The Drive area contains all the VTL Disk Drives and indicates if they are full or
empty.
The Mailbox area contains all the virtual mailbox slots.
The Slots area represents all the slots containing the cartridges present in the Virtual
Library System.
See “Time Navigator Library Manager”, page 233 for details.
Virtual Library System Operations
All the cartridge operations that can be performed with standard cartridges are also
available for virtual cartridges. This section only describes operations that are specific to
a Virtual Library System:
■
Adding Spare Cartridges in the virtual library.
■
Bringing Cartridges Offline
■
Bringing Cartridges Online
See “Libraries”, page 159 for details about standard library management.
Adding Spare Cartridges
If the number of cartridges defined at library creation is not sufficient, you may need to
add spare cartridges to the library.
To add spare cartridges in the Virtual Library System
1.
Select the library in the Network area.
2.
Choose Devices-Library-Properties.
3.
In the General tab, increase the number of cartridges as needed.
Chapter 16
4.
547
Click on OK. The library is automatically reinitialized in order to take the new
cartridges into account.
Bringing Cartridges Offline
If you need to remove some virtual cartridges from the library to store them in another
location, you must inform the catalog that the cartridge is offline.
To perform these operations, a mailbox directory is needed that you must define through
the MAILBOX_DIR parameter. You must also specify the number of slots that you want
the mailbox to contain through the MAX_NB_CARTRIDGES_MBX parameter.
To bring a cartridge offline
1.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, select the cartridge(s) to be brought offline
and choose Media-Off line.
The Confirm window appears.
2.
Check that the selected cartridges are the one that you want to put offline.
Tip:
If you have selected more cartridges than there are mailboxes in the
library, check the Retry if mailbox full box.
3.
Click on Start. The cartridge is moved from its slot to a mailbox slot.
4.
Run the following command to empty the mailbox:
tina_vls -l device_descriptor -j
where device_descriptor corresponds to the library device descriptor.
5.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, select the mailbox slot and choose LibraryOperations-Reinitialization-Bar Code to inform the catalog that the mailbox slot is empty.
Bringing Cartridges Online
A cartridge that was removed from the virtual library may be brought online again.
To perform these operations, a mailbox directory is needed that you must define through
the MAILBOX_DIR parameter. You must also specify the number of slots that you want
the mailbox to contain through the MAX_NB_CARTRIDGES_MBX parameter.
548
To bring a cartridge online
1.
Run the following command to add a cartridge in the mailbox:
tina_vls -l device_descriptor -g -v barcode
where device_descriptor corresponds to the library device descriptor.
2.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, choose Library-Operations-Reinitialization-Bar
Code to inform the catalog of the full status of the mailbox slot.
The mailbox slot now contains the cartridge.
3.
Select the mailbox slot(s) containing cartridges to be brought online and choose
Media-On-Line.
549
C H A P T E R
17
Exporting Data Backed up to
Disk to a Tape Library
17
In order to export data backed up to disk to a tape library on a scheduled basis, Atempo
designed a specific application: Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application.
Note:
While Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application is particularly
suited to export data backed up with the Time Navigator Virtual Library
System (see “Backup to Disk with Virtual Library System”, page 531) it can
also interface with a variety of backup to disk solutions.
Duplication Mode
The Virtual Library System Application offers two duplication modes:
■
A cartridge duplication mode
■
A job duplication mode
Changing the duplication mode
The Cartridge Duplication mode is the default mode when you install Time Navigator.
To use the job duplication, proceed as follows:
■
■
Move or rename the current Vls folder located in the $TINA_HOME/Tools/Tina
directory.
In the same directory, you will find the folder VlsJobDup that contains the job
duplication version of Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application.
Rename VlsJobDup to Vls.
550
Windows only:
■
Uninstall and reinstall the schedule service. See “Installing the Schedule Service”,
Then, check the following to make sure that the Virtual Library System Application
operates properly:
■
■
Open the Virtual Library System Application and choose Virtual Library-Edit
Configuration, to check the configuration. The parallelism index is now available on
Windows, and can be set to any value regardless of the number of meta-pools.
Make sure that there is data to duplicate, and choose Virtual Library-MonitoringDuplicate and Remove Data now to start the duplication and removal process manually.
You should see all the duplications running in parallel. Once duplications have
been completed, the background color for some of the meta-pools can be yellow.
This is not relevant with the job duplication mode of the
Virtual Library System Application.
Warning:
If you are using the Virtual Library System Application with the job
duplication mode, updating Time Navigator will reinstall the cartridge
duplication mode (default mode). You must then follow the above procedure
to go back to the job duplication mode.
Chapter 17
Exporting Data Backed up to Disk to a Tape Library
Exporting Data Using Cartridge Duplication
Principles
Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application associates a Virtual Library
System to a tape library in order to export data automatically.
551
552
Exporting data consists of the following operations:
■
Data on disk is first duplicated on cartridges in a tape library for longer storage.
You can either duplicate full and incremental backups or only full backups.
Duplication takes place everyday at a given time.
Note:
■
Only full and closed cartridges are duplicated.
Then, data is removed from the disk. The data that has been duplicated on the tape
library is then removed from the disk until a specified threshold is reached. Data
removal occurs when a given filling rate is reached for the Virtual Library System,
starting with the cartridge files that are recyclable.
It is also possible to perform an emergency data removal whenever there is a critical need
for free space on the Virtual Library System.
Prerequisites
Architecture
The Virtual Library System Application must be run on a Time Navigator Server or
Storage Node on the machine where the Virtual Library System is located.
Device Configuration
The tape library and the drives to which data is going to be exported must have been
declared in Time Navigator Administration Console.
■
Create the Virtual Library System as described in “To create a Virtual Library
System”, page 535.
■
Create the library as described in “To create a library”, page 161.
■
Create the drives as described in “To create a drive”, page 170.
User Access Rights
The user with administration rights on the machine onto which the Virtual
Library System Application is installed must be declared as a Time Navigator user. He
must be granted at least the cartridge and drive permissions. It is recommended that he
be granted the same permissions as the Time Navigator privileged user.
Chapter 17
553
The tina_vlsa binary must be run with the root user, who must be declared
as a Time Navigator user. He must be granted at least the cartridge and drive
permissions. It is recommended that he be granted the same permissions as the
Time Navigator privileged user.
The system administrator of the machine onto which the Virtual Library
System Application is installed must be declared as a Time Navigator user. He must be
granted at least the cartridge and drive permissions. It is recommended that he be granted
the same permissions as the Time Navigator privileged user.
The system administrator of the machine onto which the Virtual Library System
Application is installed must be declared as a Time Navigator user. He must be granted
the cartridge and drive permissions. It is recommended that he be granted the same
permissions as the Time Navigator privileged user.
See “Users and Access Rights”, page 119 for details on how to declare users in
Time Navigator.
Configuration File Backup
The Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application configuration is stored in
files that are located in the directory:
$TINA_HOME/Conf/Vlsa/catalog_name/virtual_library_name
%TINA_HOME%\Conf\Vlsa\catalog_name\virtual_library_name
This directory is backed up along with the Time Navigator catalog. Make sure your
catalog is backed up on a regular basis.
See “Backing up the Catalog”, page 52 for details on how to back up the
Time Navigator catalog.
Restore Configuration
The "Use Source Cartridge when Restoring Duplicated Cartridge" tunable
(keep_primary_on_duplication) must be set to yes on the Time Navigator Server.
It must be set prior to using the Virtual Library System Application.
The tunable allows you to restore from the original cartridge on disk rather than from
the cartridge on the tape library. This is particularly useful when the data is present both
on the disk and on the tape library.
See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details on how to set a tunable.
554
Configuring the Virtual Library System Application consists of the following
operations:
■
Opening the Virtual Library System Application
■
Installing the Schedule Service (Windows only)
■
Setting data duplication and data removal options
■
Defining Virtual Library System cartridge pools (Metapools)
■
Defining Virtual Library System Application backup strategies
Note:
Backup selections must be defined in Time Navigator Administration
Console.
To open the Virtual Library System Application
Open the virtual Library System Application.app in your Time Navigator
installation folder (for instance /applications/Atempo/tina41) and provide your password.
Run the tina_vlsa binary located in the $TINA_HOME/Bin directory.
Choose Start-Programs-Time Navigator-Virtual Library System Application.
The Virtual Library System Application window appears.
Chapter 17
555
556
Installing the Schedule Service
Note:
This procedure is only for Windows operating systems only.
You must imperatively install the Windows Schedule Service, so that data duplication and
removal can be launched at the specified time.
To install the Schedule Service
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Schedule ServiceInstall.
2.
In the Account Name field, enter the name of the system administrator
(.\Administrator) and in the Password field, enter the administrator password.
3.
Click on OK.
The Schedule Service (tina_vls_sched_tina4) is now installed. Make sure it
is started.
Setting Data Duplication and Removal Options
You must specify the conditions for data duplication and removal.
To set Duplication and Removal Options
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual LibraryConfiguration. The Virtual Library Parameters window appears.
Chapter 17
2.
557
Enter the following parameters:
Virtual Library
Catalog Name: Name of the Time Navigator catalog where the libraries are
declared.
Note:
You will be asked to enter the Privileged User Name and the Password to
retrieve information from the catalog.
Virtual Library Name: Name of the virtual library allowing to back up data to disk.
Duplication/Removal Schedule
Checking the Duplication/Removal Schedule box enables the automatic scheduling for
duplication and removal operations.
Start Time: Time when the data duplication and removal will start every day. Use
the hh:mm format.
558
Duplication Parameters
Time Limit: Checking this box allows you to define a deadline after which no
duplication operation will be launched. This option is useful to prevent duplications
to overlap with any other scheduled operations, such as backups.
Do not Start Duplications after: Time after which you do not want duplications to be
started. Use the hh:mm format.
Example
If the backups take place during the night, you can program the duplication jobs
to start at 10:00 and you can set the time limit to 19:00. If the duplication jobs for
some of the cartridges has not started at 19:00, they are blocked until the following
day, and the duplicated data is deleted from disk at once. Thus, duplication and
deletion operations do not interfere with backup operations.
Note:
If the time limit is before the start time (for instance, 7:00 and 22:00),
duplication jobs will start at the specified time and go on until the time
limit on the following day.
Parallelization Index (Unix only): Number of metapools that you want to duplicate
simultaneously. This index must not be greater than the number of drives available
in the physical library.
Warning:
If only one metapool is defined, no parallelization is possible:
cartridges belonging to the same pool cannot be duplicated
simultaneously on several drives.
Removal Parameters
Start Threshold: Maximum percentage of fullness that you want your Virtual Library
System to contain.
For example, if you set the threshold to 90%, information will be removed when
the Virtual Library System is more than 90% full, starting with the cartridge files
that are recyclable.
Chapter 17
559
Stop Threshold: Percentage of when data removal will stop.
For example, if you set the threshold to 80%, data will be removed until the Virtual
Library System is 80% full.
Note:
3.
If necessary, data will be removed that is still in the retention period.
However, data will not be removed that has not been duplicated.
Click on OK.
560
Managing Metapools
Managing metapools consists of:
■
Defining at least one metapool. A meta-pool is a cartridge pool for the Virtual
Library System (source pool) which is associated to one or two cartridge pools on
the tape library (target pools). It defines the global retention period policy and the
type of backup and duplication. Some parameters can also be set to automatically
close cartridges according to specific criteria, so that they can be duplicated.
Warning:
Meta-pools must imperatively be created in the Virtual Library
System Application in order to be duplicated. Any media pool created
via the Storage-Media Pool-New menu of Time Navigator
Administration Console cannot be used by the Virtual Library
System Application
■
Editing metapools to modify the associated pools and the closing parameters.
■
Deleting metapools.
To define metapools:
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Create.
The Create Metapool window appears.
Chapter 17
2.
561
Enter the following parameters to create cartridge pools for the Virtual Library
System (backup to disk):
declared.
Note:
You may be asked to enter the Privileged User Name and the Password to
Metapool Name: Name of the metapool that you want to create for the Virtual Library
System.
Scenario : Duplication scenario that you want to implement. A scenario indicates
how the data is backed up (standard or synthetic backup), and the type of backup
to duplicate (full or incremental).
562
Synthetic backup is the preferred method because the backup is performed from
the Time Navigator server and not from the agent. This method is faster and puts
no load on the agent machine.
See “Backup Types”, page 286 for details on synthetic backup.
The scenarios available are the following:
■
Duplicate Full and Incremental Backups
All information is duplicated.
One cartridge pool is automatically created for the Virtual Library System
from which all data from full and incremental backups will be duplicated.
■
Duplicate Full and Incremental Backups, Full Backups use Synthetic
All information is duplicated. All full backup are synthetic backups.
One cartridge pool is automatically created for the Virtual Library System
from which all data from full and incremental backups will be duplicated.
■
Duplicate Only Full Backups
Only full backups are duplicated.
Two pools are automatically created for the Virtual Library System to
separate full backups from incremental backups. The full backup pool bears
the name of the metapool and the pool dedicated to incremental backups uses
the same name followed by an _i.
■
Duplicate Only Full Backups Using Synthetic Full Backups
Only full backups are duplicated. All full backup are synthetic backups and
the duplication is performed simultaneously: only one job is started that
writes both on the Virtual Library System and on the tape library.
Two pools are automatically created for the Virtual Library System to
separate full backups from incremental backups. The full backup pool bears
the name of the metapool and the pool dedicated to incremental backups uses
the same name followed by an _i.
Label: Label for the cartridge files on disk.
Retention Period: Number of days the data on the Virtual Library System will be
retained before reusing the cartridge.
3.
In the Target Cartridge Pool area, enter the following parameters to create or choose
a cartridge pool for the duplication from disk to tape:
Target Library: Name of the tape library where you want data to be duplicated.
Chapter 17
563
Cartridge Pool: Specifies whether you want to use an Existing Pool or Create a New Pool.
Note:
Target cartridge pools can be created either at the meta-pool level in the
Virtual Library Sytem Application, or directly via the Storage-Media PoolNew menu of Time Navigator Administration Console.
Existing Pool: Specifies the name of the cartridge pool if you chose to use an existing
pool.
New Pool Name: Name of the new cartridge pool if you chose not to use an existing
pool.
New Pool Label: Label for the new cartridge pool.
Retention Period: Number of days the data on the tape library will be retained before
reusing the cartridge.
Note:
4.
The Secondary Cartridge Pool area allows to specify a second pool, so that
to the data from disk is duplicated to two different tapes. This may be
useful if you want to externalize one of the copies and keep the second
one in the tape library.
Check the Automatic Catridge Closing box if you want to define automatic closing
criteria and enter the following parameters to specify what category of cartridges
should be automaticaly closed in order to be duplicated.
■
Filling Rate: Maximum percentage of fullness that you want your cartridge to
reach before being automatically closed. If you set this option to 80%, the
cartridge will be closed as soon as it is 80% full.
■
5.
First Backup: Time Period following the first backup and after which the
cartridge will be automatically closed. If you set this option to 5 days, the
cartridge will be closed 5 days after the first backup. This option ensures
that no data is kept for too long on disk without being duplicated.
Click on OK.
To edit a metapool:
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Edit. The
Edit Metapool window appears.
564
2.
In the Catalog Name and Virtual Library Name drop-down lists, choose the catalog and
the virtual library associated with the metapool to edit.
3.
In the Meta Pool drop-down list, choose the metapool to edit.
4.
Modify the parameters as needed.
Note:
5.
Only the target cartridge pools and the closing parameters can be
modified.
Click on OK.
To delete a metapool:
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Delete.
The Delete Metapool window appears.
2.
the virtual library associated with the metapool to delete.
3.
In the Meta Pool drop-down list, choose the metapool to delete.
4.
Click on Delete.
Defining a Backup Strategy
The backup strategies for backing up data to disk must not be created in Time Navigator
Administration Console. They must be defined in the Virtual Library System
Application. However, it is possible to edit strategies at a later stage in Time Navigator
Administration Console in order to set more advanced parameters.
Creating a backup strategy allows you to define the platform to be backed up, the media
pool where the data is backed up and the time when the backup is performed.
To create a strategy:
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Strategy-Create.
The Create Strategy window appears.
Chapter 17
2.
565
declared.
Note:
Platform to Back up: Platform that you want to back up.
Strategy Name: Name of the strategy that you want to create: A, B, C or D. Only
the strategies that have not been defined yet are available.
Metapool: Name of the metapool you want to use. If you selected a stream based
application, only Regular full backup metapools are available.
Full Backup Day: Day on which the weekly full backup will be performed.
Full Backup Time: Time at which the weekly full backup will be performed.
566
Incremental Backup Time: Time the daily incremental backup will be performed.
3.
Click on OK.
4.
If you want to have a different strategy scheduling policy and set more advanced
parameters, you can then edit the strategy in Time Navigator Administration
Console (Backup-Selected Platform-Strategy-Properties menu).
Defining the Metapool Priority
If there are not enough drives in the library to perform parallel duplications of all your
metapools, you can sort the metapools in order of priority. For instance, the metapool
containing the most critical data can be given top priority and be duplicated first.
To define metapool priority
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Priority.
The Metapool Priority window appears.
2.
Select a metapool in the list and use the Up and Down button to define the priority
level for each metapool.
3.
Repeat this operation for all the metapools.
4.
Click on OK.
Chapter 17
567
Virtual Library System Testing
After the export options, the metapools and the backup strategies have been configured,
you must perform a test that will validate the consistency between the Virtual Library
System and Time Navigator.
To perform a test of the Virtual Library System
■
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual Library-Test.
The Virtual Library Test window appears.
The Test window displays a line for each component that was tested. Inconsistencies are
displayed in bold red type, explaining what the problem or inconsistency is.
Monitoring
Monitoring libraries consists of the following operations:
■
Displaying information about the Virtual Library System and the metapools.
■
Exporting the monitoring report.
■
Duplicating and removing data manually
■
Performing emergency data removal
Note:
In both cases of data removal, normal and emergency, data continues to be
removed until the threshold is reached. Data that is still in the retention period.
may be removed. However, data will never be removed that has not been
duplicated. This is the only case where the threshold may not be reached.
568
Viewing Virtual Library System Information
To display information on the Virtual Library System
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual LibraryMonitoring. The Virtual Library Monitoring Report window appears.
Note:
2.
In the Catalog drop down list, select the catalog where the libraries are declared.
Note:
3.
Click on Compact Columns to display columns with abbreviated titles. This
allows you to see more information at once.
In the Virtual Library drop down list, select the virtual library that you want to
monitor.
The report is displayed in the text area below. You can refresh it by clicking on
Refresh.
Chapter 17
569
Available Information
The information displayed in the monitoring window are of two types:
■
■
Virtual Library System information: summary description displayed above the
columns. It provides global information on the Virtual Library System.
Metapool information: description of the metapool status. It is displayed in
columns.
Virtual Library System Information
■
Space Used: Percentage of the Virtual Library System that is already used. The
background color can be the following:
■
Color
Description
No color
Space used is below the start threshold
Green
Space used is between the removal start and
stop thresholds
Yellow
Space used is between the stop threshold and
the maximum capacity
Red
The Virtual Library System is full
Duplication Progress: Percentage of the duplicable cartridges that have already been
duplicated.
■
Duplications Running: Number of duplication jobs that are running.
■
Duplicated Cartridges: Number of duplicated cartridges.
■
Duplicable Cartridges: Number of cartridges that are eligible for duplication (Full and
Closed cartridges).
■
Last Duplication: Last time when a duplication job was run.
■
Full Cartridges: Number of full cartridges.
■
Part. Filled Volume: Volume occupied by partly filled cartridges.
■
Allocated Cartridges: Total number of cartridges belonging to the metapool.
Metapool Information
The above information is available for metapools, as well as the following information:
■
Part. Filled Cart: Number of partly filled cartridges.
■
Empty Cart: Number of empty cartridges.
■
Free Space: Cartridge space that is still available in the metapool.
570
The background colors for each metapool can be the following:
Color
Description
Green
All the cartridges are duplicated
(there is no partly filled cartridge)
Yellow
All the cartridges are duplicated except
partly filled cartridges
Orange
Some cartridges have not been duplicated
even though they were duplicable
Red
No cartridge has been duplicated
Exporting the Monitoring Report
The monitoring report can be exported to a file on your disk.
To export the monitoring report
1.
Click on the Export Report button. The Export Monitoring Report window appears.
2.
Modify the export file path if needed.
3.
Click on OK.
Duplicating and Removing Data Manually
You can duplicate and remove cartridges manually at any time, even if you have
scheduled automatic duplication jobs.
To duplicate and remove data
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual LibraryMonitoring. The Virtual Library Monitoring window appears.
2.
Note:
3.
monitor.
Chapter 17
4.
571
Click on Duplicate and Remove Data Now.
Data duplication and removal first duplicates data that has not yet been duplicated.
Then it removes the oldest duplicated data, according to the retention period until
the threshold retention period is reached.
The threshold level used is the one that was set in the Configuration window in
“Setting Data Duplication and Removal Options”, page 556.
Emergency Data Removal
Warning:
An emergency data removal should only be performed in emergency cases
when there is a critical need for free space on the Virtual Library System.
If you are performing emergency data removal on a regular basis, you should
reevaluate your strategy.
Performing this procedure overrides the settings made in “Setting Data
Duplication and Removal Options”, page 556.
To perform an emergency data removal
1.
2.
Note:
3.
monitor.
4.
In the Stop Threshold field, enter the percentage of when data removal will stop.
5.
Click on Emergency Duplication and Removal.
Data is removed from disk until the specified threshold is reached.
If the threshold is not reached by removing data that is older than the retention
period, then it will continue duplicating and removing data that is within the
retention period until the threshold is reached.
572
Exporting Data Using Job Duplication
Job duplication brings the following improvements over cartridge duplication:
■
■
■
■
Improved data protection: All backed up data can be duplicated daily without
waiting for cartridges to be full or closed.
Handling of large files spanning on several cartridges.
Improved parallel duplication: Parallel duplication is available on Windows
systems.
Parallelism is not limited to one duplication per meta-pool and all jobs that are
backed up on different cartridges can be duplicated in parallel, provided there are
enough available drives.
Backup strategies are no longer configured in the
Virtual Library System Application, but directly in Time Navigator
Administration Console, which allows for a finer and more advanced scheduling.
Chapter 17
573
Principles
Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application associates a Virtual Library
System to a tape library in order to export data automatically.
Exporting data consists of the following operations:
■
■
Data backed up on disk is first duplicated on cartridges in a tape library for longer
storage on a per job basis. You can either duplicate full and incremental backups
or only full backups.
Duplication takes place everyday at a given time.
Then, data is removed from the disk. The data that has been duplicated on the tape
library is then removed from the disk until a specified threshold is reached. Data
removal occurs when a given filling rate is reached for the Virtual Library System,
starting with the cartridge files that are recyclable.
It is also possible to perform an emergency data removal whenever there is a critical need
for free space on the Virtual Library System.
574
Prerequisites
Architecture
The Virtual Library System Application must be run on a Time Navigator Server or
Storage Node on the machine where the Virtual Library System is located.
Device Configuration
The tape library and the drives to which data is going to be exported must have been
declared in Time Navigator Administration Console.
■
Create the Virtual Library System as described in “To create a Virtual Library
System”, page 535.
■
Create the library as described in “To create a library”, page 161.
■
Create the drives as described in “To create a drive”, page 170.
Configuration File Backup
The Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application configuration is stored in
files that are located in the directory:
%TINA_HOME%\Conf\Vlsa\catalog_name\virtual_library_name
This directory is backed up along with the Time Navigator catalog. Make sure your
catalog is backed up on a regular basis.
See “Backing up the Catalog”, page 52 for details on how to back up the
Time Navigator catalog.
Configuring the Virtual Library System Application consists of the following
operations:
■
■
Installing the Schedule Service (Windows only)
■
Setting data duplication and data removal options
■
Defining Virtual Library System cartridge pools (Metapools)
Chapter 17
■
575
Defining backup strategies and selections in Time Navigator Administration
Console.
To open the Virtual Library System Application
Open the Virtual Library System Application in your Time Navigator
installation folder (for instance /applications/Atempo/tina41) and provide your
password.
Run the tina_vlsa binary located in the $TINA_HOME/Bin directory.
Choose Start-Programs-Time Navigator-Virtual Library System Application.
The Virtual Library System Application window appears.
Installing the Schedule Service
Note:
This procedure is only for Windows operating systems only.
You must imperatively install the Windows Schedule Service, so that data duplication and
removal can be launched at the specified time.
576
To install the Schedule Service
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Schedule ServiceInstall.
The Schedule Service (named tina_vls_sched_xxx) is now installed. Make sure
it is started.
To uninstall the Schedule Service
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Schedule ServiceUninstall.
The Schedule Service (named tina_vls_sched_xxx) is now uninstalled.
Setting Data Duplication and Removal Options
You must specify the conditions for data duplication and removal.
To set Duplication and Removal Options
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual Library-Edit
Configuration. The Duplication/Removal Parameters window appears.
Chapter 17
2.
577
Virtual Library
Catalog Name: Name of the Time Navigator catalog where the libraries are declared.
Note:
You will be asked to enter the Privileged User Name and the Password to
578
Library Size
Note:
The libray size parameters must only be set if the source library is a
physical library and not a virtual library.
Cartridge Size (MB): Size of the cartridges in the source physical library.
Number of Cartridges: Number of cartridges present in the source physical library.
Duplication/Removal Schedule
Checking the Duplication/Removal Schedule box enables the automatic scheduling for
duplication and removal operations.
Start Time: Time when the data duplication and removal will start every day. Use the
hh:mm format.
Duplication Parameters
Time Limit: Checking this box allows you to define a deadline after which no
duplication operation will be launched. This option is useful to prevent duplications
to overlap with any other scheduled operations, such as backups.
Do not Start Duplications after: Time after which you do not want duplications to be
started. Use the hh:mm format.
Example
If the backups take place during the night, you can program the duplications to start
at 10:00 and you can set the time limit to 19:00. If the duplications for some of the
jobs have not started at 19:00, they are blocked until the following day, and the
duplicated data is deleted from disk at once. Thus, duplication and deletion
operations do not interfere with backup operations.
Note:
If the time limit is before the start time (for instance, 7:00 and 22:00),
duplication jobs will start at the specified time and go on until the time
limit on the following day.
Parallelization Index: Number of jobs that you want to duplicate simultaneously. This
index must not be greater than the number of drives available in the physical library.
Note:
If two jobs are backed up on the same cartridge, they cannot be duplicated
in parallel. The second job will be queued while the first job is duplicated.
Removal Parameters
Chapter 17
579
Start Threshold: Maximum percentage of fullness that you want your Virtual Library
System to contain.
For example, if you set the threshold to 90%, information will be removed when
the Virtual Library System is more than 90% full, starting with the cartridge files
that are recyclable.
Stop Threshold: Percentage of when data removal will stop.
3.
Note:
If necessary, data will be removed that is still in the retention period.
However, data will not be removed that has not been duplicated.
Tip:
Most of the time, the Start and Stop Thresholds are set to the same value.
Click on OK.
Managing Metapools
Managing metapools consists of:
■
Defining at least one metapool. A meta-pool is a cartridge pool for the Virtual
Library System (source pool) which is associated to one or two cartridge pools on
the tape library (target pools). It defines the global retention period policy and the
type of backup and duplication.
Warning:
Meta-pools must imperatively be created in the Virtual Library System
Application in order to be duplicated. Any media pool created via the
Storage-Media Pool-New menu of Time Navigator Administration
Console can not be used by the Virtual Library System Application
■
Editing metapools to modify the associated pools.
■
Deleting metapools.
To define metapools:
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Create.
The Create Metapool window appears.
580
2.
Enter the following parameters to create cartridge pools for the Virtual Library
System (backup to disk):
Catalog Name: Name of the Time Navigator catalog where the libraries are declared.
Note:
Metapool Name: Name of the metapool that you want to create for the Virtual Library
System.
Scenario : Duplication scenario that you want to implement. A scenario indicates the
type of backup to duplicate (full or incremental).
The scenarii available are the following:
■
Duplicate Full and Incremental Backups
All jobs are duplicated, regardless of the backup type.
■
Duplicate Only Full Backups
Only full backups are duplicated.
Label: Label for the cartridge files on disk.
Chapter 17
581
Retention Period: Number of days the data on the Virtual Library System will be
retained before reusing the cartridge.
3.
In the Target Cartridge Pool area, enter the following parameters to create or choose a
cartridge pool for the duplication from disk to tape:
Target Library: Name of the tape library where you want data to be duplicated.
Cartridge Pool: Specifies whether you want to use an Existing Pool or Create a New Pool.
Note:
Target cartridge pools can be created either at the meta-pool level in the
Virtual Library Sytem Application, or directly via the Storage-Cartridge
Pool-New menu of Time Navigator Administration Console.
Existing Pool: Specifies the name of the cartridge pool if you chose to use an existing
pool.
New Pool Name: Name of the new cartridge pool if you chose not to use an existing
pool.
New Pool Label: Label for the new cartridge pool.
Retention Period: Number of days the data on the tape library will be retained before
reusing the cartridge.
Note:
4.
The Secondary Cartridge Pool area allows to specify a second pool, so that
to the data from disk is duplicated to two different tapes. This may be
useful if you want to externalize one of the copies and keep the second
one in the tape library.
Click on OK.
To edit a metapool:
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Edit. The
Edit Metapool window appears.
2.
the virtual library associated with the metapool to edit.
3.
In the Meta Pool drop-down list, choose the metapool to edit.
582
4.
Modify the parameters as needed.
Note:
5.
Only the target cartridge pools can be modified.
Click on OK.
To delete a metapool:
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Delete.
The Delete Metapool window appears.
2.
the virtual library associated with the metapool to delete.
3.
In the Meta Pool drop-down list, choose the metapool to delete.
4.
Click on Delete.
Defining Backup Strategies and Backup Selections
The backup strategies and selections for backing up data to disk are created in
Time Navigator Administration Console. The strategies must be associated to the
relevant meta-pools.
For more information on backup strategies and backup selections, see “Creating a Backup
Strategy”, page 301, and “Creating a Backup Selection”, page 339.
Defining the Metapool Priority
If there are not enough drives in the library to perform parallel duplications of all your
metapools, you can sort the metapools in order of priority. For instance, the metapool
containing the most critical data can be given top priority and be duplicated first.
To define metapool priority
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Priority.
The Metapool Priority window appears.
Chapter 17
583
2.
Select a metapool in the list and use the Up and Down button to define the priority
level for each metapool.
3.
Repeat this operation for all the metapools.
4.
Click on OK.
Virtual Library System Testing
After the export options, the metapools and the backup strategies have been configured,
you must perform a test that will validate the consistency between the Virtual Library
System and Time Navigator.
To perform a test of the Virtual Library System
■
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual Library-Test.
The Virtual Library Test window appears.
The Test window displays a line for each component that was tested. Inconsistencies are
displayed in bold red type, explaining what the problem or inconsistency is.
Monitoring
Monitoring libraries consists of the following operations:
■
Displaying information about the Virtual Library System and the metapools.
■
Exporting the monitoring report.
■
Duplicating and removing data manually
584
■
Note:
Performing emergency data removal
In both cases of data removal, normal and emergency, data continues to be
removed until the threshold is reached. Data that is still in the retention period.
may be removed. However, data will never be removed that has not been
duplicated. This is the only case where the threshold may not be reached.
Viewing Virtual Library System Information
To display information on the Virtual Library System
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual LibraryMonitoring. The Virtual Library Monitoring Report window appears.
Note:
2.
Click on Compact Columns to display columns with abbreviated titles. This
allows you to see more information at once.
Note:
Chapter 17
3.
585
monitor.
The report is displayed in the text area below. You can refresh it by clicking on
Refresh.
Available Information
The information displayed in the monitoring window are of two types:
■
■
Virtual Library System information: summary description displayed above the
columns. It provides global information on the Virtual Library System.
Metapool information: description of the metapool status. It is displayed in
columns.
Virtual Library System Information
■
Space Used: Percentage of the Virtual Library System that is already used. The
background color can be the following:
■
Color
Description
No color
Space used is below the start threshold
Green
Space used is between the removal start and
stop thresholds
Yellow
Space used is between the stop threshold
and the maximum capacity
Red
The Virtual Library System is full
Duplication Progress: Percentage of the duplicable cartridges that have already been
duplicated.
■
Duplications Running: Number of duplication jobs that are running.
■
Duplicated Cartridges: Number of duplicated cartridges.
■
Duplicable Cartridges: Number of cartridges containing jobs eligible for duplication.
■
Last Duplication: Last time when a duplication job was run.
■
Full Cartridges: Number of full cartridges.
■
Part. Filled Volume: Volume occupied by partly filled cartridges.
■
Allocated Cartridges: Total number of cartridges belonging to the metapool.
586
Metapool Information
The above information is available for metapools, as well as the following information:
■
Part. Filled Cart: Number of partly filled cartridges.
■
Empty Cart: Number of empty cartridges.
■
Free Space: Cartridge space that is still available in the metapool.
The background colors for each metapool can be the following:
Color
Description
Green
All the cartridges are duplicated
(there is no partly filled cartridge)
Yellow
All cartridges are duplicated (there are
some partly filled cartridges)
Orange
Some cartridges have not been duplicated
even though they were duplicable
Red
No cartridge has been duplicated
Exporting the Monitoring Report
The monitoring report can be exported to a file on your disk.
To export the monitoring report
1.
Click on the Export Report button. The Export Monitoring Report window appears.
2.
Modify the export file path if needed.
3.
Click on OK.
Duplicating and Removing Data Manually
You can start the data duplication and removal at any time, even if you have scheduled
automatic duplications.
To duplicate and remove data
1.
Chapter 17
2.
587
Note:
3.
monitor.
4.
Click on Duplicate and Remove Data Now.
Data duplication and removal first duplicates data that has not yet been duplicated.
Then it removes the oldest duplicated data, according to the retention period until
the threshold retention is reached.
The threshold level used is the one that was set in the Configuration window in
“Setting Data Duplication and Removal Options”, page 556.
Emergency Data Removal
Warning:
An emergency data removal should only be performed in emergency cases
when there is a critical need for free space on the Virtual Library System.
If you are performing emergency data removal on a regular basis, you should
reevaluate your strategy.
Performing this procedure overrides the settings made in “Setting Data
Duplication and Removal Options”, page 556.
To perform an emergency data removal
1.
2.
Note:
3.
monitor.
4.
In the Stop Threshold field, enter the percentage of when data removal will stop.
588
5.
Click on Emergency Duplication and Removal.
Data is removed from disk until the specified threshold is reached.
If the threshold is not reached by removing data that is older than the retention
period, then it will continue duplicating and removing data that is within the
retention period until the threshold is reached.
589
C H A P T E R
18
List Application
18
Application Overview
Definition
A “List” application allows you to create and organize objects at a logical level. These
objects can be located on different locations on a same machine (ex: objects located on
different partitions under Windows 2000/2003 or on different file systems under Unix).
The application makes it possible to back up a list of objects of the following type:
■
Regular file
■
Directory
■
Raw device
■
Symbolic links
■
Special Unix objects, such as: character or block device access, named pipe.
The List application can be used to perform cold backups of an Oracle database, to back
up the critical files of an operating system (ex: passwd under Unix, win.ini under
Windows 2000/2003).
The List application is able to back up any database product equipped with a backup
utility using named pipe.
The List application does not support ACLs (Access Control Lists).
List File
The list of the objects to back up associated with a "List" application is defined in a file
called List file.
The List file can be specified in the following manners:
■
■
Enter the file name in the List File textbox of the New Application window in
Click on Browse next to the List File textbox of the New Application window to select
the file on disk.
590
■
Use the TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE environment variable.
The variable can be defined either in the New Application window in
Time Navigator Administration Console, or directly in the Information directory
of the file tree in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager.
If you decide to specify the List file via the List File textbox and if the
TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE environment variable is also set, Time Navigator will take
into account the List file specified in the List File textbox.
For more information on environment variables, see “Environment Variables”,
page 607.
Parallel Backup
When you perform parallel backups with the List application, the backup job is divided
into several jobs, according to the degree of parallelism defined when you create the
backup strategy and backup selections. You can define a synchronization point using the
WAIT keyword, if necessary.
Chapter 18
List Application
591
List File Syntax
Using the keyword defines below, you must define the list of all the objects to be backed
up by the List Application. The List file describes the objects in a simple and easy-to-use
language.
Basic Rules
The basic syntax rules are the following:
■
■
Keywords are not case-sensitive.
Object paths must be specified between single or double quotes (ex: "/usr/
local" or ’/usr/local’) and follow the syntax used by the operating system:
(ex: "/path1/path2/file" under Unix
"c:\path1\path2\file" under Windows 2000/2003
"device:/path1/path2/file" under NetWare, etc.).
■
■
■
The name associated with each keyword FILE or DIR must appear between quotes
if it contains a space, ex: "my name" or my_name or "my_name" are accepted,
but my name is not.
The name associated with each keyword FILE or DIR must not contain the slash
character. For instance, DIR "/vol/vol1" is not allowed.
If the name of one of your files or directories happens to be a declared List
application keyword, it must appear between quotes (single or double), to prevent
it from being interpreted as a keyword.
For instance:
DIR size ("/vol/vol0/DT/PROD/TESTDATA/treendmp/size") should be
written:
DIR "size" ("/vol/vol0/DT/PROD/TESTDATA/treendmp/size" )
■
If some object paths contain non-system environment variables
(ex : %TINA_HOME%/Conf), you will have to perform all Time Navigator
operations with the identity of the current Windows session user. Failing to do this
will prevent the variables from being interpreted correctly.
592
Keywords
For simplicity reasons, the syntax used includes a limited number of keywords. They are
presented below in alphabetical order.
DIR
DIR name ( path | DIR | FILE )
or
DIR name ( path | DIR | FILE | MOUNT | TREE | EXEC | LINK | PIPE |
INFO )
The keyword DIR is used to define a meta-directory (like an ordinary directory) which
can be composed of other meta-directories (DIR) or meta-files (FILE). It allows for a
logical organization of files to be backed up or replicated.
■
name is the meta-directory name.
■
path is the path to a directory to be backed up.
■
DIR is a sub-meta-directory.
■
FILE is a meta-file.
Examples DIR Keyword
DIR mydir (
FILE myfile ("/Users/Demo/Weather.html")
FILE myfile ("/Users/Demo/Movies/mymovie.avi")
)
=> Backs up the file /Users/Demo/Weather.html and /Users/Demo/Movies/
mymovie.avi
DIR mydir2 (
DIR mydir3 (
FILE myfile ("/Users/Demo/Pictures/image.jpeg")
)
)
=> Backs up the file image.jpeg
Another use of DIR consists in directly specifying a path, which makes it possible to back
up all regular files present in the directory.
DIR mypath ( "/Users/Demo/Movies" )
➜Backs up only the contents of the directory /Users/Demo/Movies.
Chapter 18
List Application
593
DIR mydir (
FILE hosts ( "/etc/hosts" )
FILE config ( "/usr/people/lch/.cshrc" )
)
➜Backs up the files /etc/hosts and /usr/people/lch/.cshrc.
DIR mydir2 (
DIR mydir3 (
FILE dummy ( "/usr/people2/file" )
)
)
➜Backs up the file file.
DIR mypath ( "/usr/local/bin" )
➜Backs up only the contents of the directory /usr/local/bin.
DIR mydir (
FILE hosts ( "c:\hosts\hosts.txt" )
FILE config ( "c:\config\config.txt" )
)
➜Backs up the files hosts.txt and config.txt.
DIR mydir2 (
DIR mydir3 (
FILE dummy ( "c:\winnt\win.ini" )
)
)
➜Backs up the file win.ini.
DIR mypath ( "c:\Program Files\Atempo" )
➜Backs up only the contents of the directory c:\Program Files\Atempo.
EXEC
DIR name ( path EXEC exec_path | DIR | FILE )
594
The EXEC keyword associates an executable program or script with a meta-directory.
Whenever the meta-directory is backed up, the executable is spawned twice: once for
pre-processing when arriving in the meta-directory and a second time for post-processing
when leaving the meta-directory after the backup of its contents.
You need to provide the file name and path of the program to be executed by the EXEC
keyword. For instance:
EXEC "/home02/rks/testsave/test_exec.sh" (Unix), or
EXEC "c:\rks\applist\test_exec.bat (Windows).
Example
EXEC Keyword
DIR "First Directory" (
DIR "Rake Files" (
"/home02/rks/testdir"
EXEC "/home02/rks/testsave/test_exec.sh"
)
DIR "Recursive files" (
TREE "/home02/rks/testdir"
EXEC "/home02/rks/testsave/test_exec.sh"
)
DIR "Specific Files" (
EXEC "/home02/rks/testsave/test_exec.sh",
FILE ".script" ( "/home02/rks/testdir/.cshrc" ),
FILE ".doc" (
"/home02/rks/testdir/testdir2/testdir3/testdir4/lindberg.doc" ),
LINK ".link" ( "/home02/rks/testdir/.cshrc" ),
)
)
Example
Executable script that can be called by the EXEC keyword
#!/bin/sh
case "$1" in
'-pre')
# Stabilize the data
$TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -severity acct -text "Preparing Data
in $3 meta-directory"
sleep 10
;;
'-post')
# Release the data
$TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -severity acct -text "Postparing Data
in $3 meta-directory"
sleep 10
;;
*)
echo "Usage: $0 { -pre | -post } -dir path"
exit 100
;;
esac
case "$2" in
'-dir')
;;
*)
exit 101
Chapter 18
List Application
595
;;
esac
exit 0
Example
Executable script called by the EXEC keyword, using the TINA_CATALOG and
TINA_AML_FOLDER variables
See “Environment Variables”, page 607 for a complete description of the
TINA_CATALOG and TINA_AML_FOLDER variables.
::::::::::::::
test_exec.sh
::::::::::::::
#!/bin/sh
case "$1" in
'-pre')
# Stabilize the data
$TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -catalog $TINA_CATALOG -severity acct -text
"Preparing Data in $TINA_AML_FOLDER:$3 meta-directory"
sleep 10
;;
'-post')
# Release the data
"Postparing Data in $TINA_AML_FOLDER:$3 meta-directory"
sleep 10
;;
*)
exit 100
;;
esac
case "$2" in
'-dir')
;;
*)
exit 101
;;
esac
exit 0
FILE
FILE name ( { path, ... } OFFSET m | SIZE n | MYSELF )
The FILE keyword is mostly used to back up files and raw devices. The absolute file
path is specified by path. It can also be used with mirror files. The term applies to files
which are theoretically identical to one another. The concept is mainly used for databases.
■
name is the meta-file name.
■
path is the path (or a list of paths) to a file (or mirror files) to be backed up.
596
■
OFFSET is the partition address of the data to be backed up. The unit is K for KB,
M for MB and G for GB. The default value is: 0 if the OFFSET parameter is not
specified.
■
■
SIZE represents the amount of data to be backed up from the OFFSET location. If
SIZE=0, the amount of data is unlimited, the entire file will be backed up. The
default value is 0 if the SIZE parameter is not specified.
MYSELF is a keyword used to automatically back up the List file. If the MYSELF
parameter is being used, OFFSET and SIZE are useless.
Warning:
Example
Using the OFFSET and SIZE parameters allows you to back up part of your
data if the application you are using shares raw devices or if you are
performing operations between raw devices of different sizes.
Do not use these parameters if the data volume is subject to change during
backup.
FILE Keyword
FILE myfile ( "c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\services" )
➜Backs up the file services.
FILE mypartition ( "/dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s0" OFFSET 4K SIZE 23550K)
➜Backs up the raw device c0t0d0s0 from the 4 KB address for a size of 23550 KB.
FILE mymirror (
"/mirror/file1" ,
"/mirror/file2" ,
"/mirror/file3" ,
)
➜Backs up just once the three identical files file1, file2 and file3.
If the size of one of the files is different, an error message is sent to the event file
(Meta-file file1 size 4012 <> mirror file3 size 2015).
FILE auto ( MYSELF )
➜Backs up the current List file. If the List file name is c:\temp\test_list.txt, then
FILE auto ( MYSELF ) corresponds to FILE auto ("c:\temp\test_list.txt").
Note:
The MYSELF keyword is replaced by the physical name of the List file. If this
file contains the INCLUDE keyword, it is not expanded in the backed up file.
To back up the included file contents, you must add a MYSELF keyword into
the included file.
Chapter 18
List Application
597
INCLUDE
INCLUDE ( file_path )
The keyword INCLUDE is used to include the contents of another List file into the list of
objects to be backed up and specified in the current List file.
file_path represents the name and path of the List file to include.
Note:
It is recommended not to use the keyword INCLUDE recursively (file1 including
file2 that includes file1 itself). To avoid infinite loops, the nesting level is
limited to 16.
INCLUDE ( file_path GENBY exec_path)
The GENBY option specifies the script name and path to be used to generate the List file
that will be included into the current List file.
Examples INCLUDE Keyword
INCLUDE ( "c:\temp\file_list.txt" )
➜Loads the file c:\temp\file_list.txt and includes it into the current list at the
place occupied by the keyword.
INCLUDE ( "/DT/DEV/people/nko/file_list.txt" GENBY "/DT/DEV/people/
nko/gen.sh")
➜Generates the /DT/DEV/people/nko/file_list.txt file using the
/DT/DEV/people/nko/gen.sh script.
INFO
INFO "info_name" ("comment")
The INFO keyword allows you to display and back up comments in the file tree of a List
application in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager.
The INFO keyword must be included into a DIR clause (its parent must be a directory).
Example
INFO Keyword
INFO "info1" ("This is a comment")
)
DIR "Second Directory" (
INFO "info2" ("This is another comment")
)
598
Tip:
If you want the INFO link to be sorted to the top of its directory, start its name
with a space character.
LINK
LINK "link_name" ("target_name")
The LINK keyword allows you to create a meta-link to a file. The file data will not be
backed up.
MOUNT
DIR "mydir" (MOUNT path)
The MOUNT keyword allows to backup and restore file systems with the list application
in a similar fashion as the Time Navigator Filesystem application. Symbolic links are
not followed, they are backed up as a link.
Note:
Example
The MOUNT keyword cannot be used with the TREE keyword, but is
compatible with EXEC and INFO.
MOUNT keyword
DIR "Mounted files" (
EXEC "/DT/DEV/dev/rks/testlist/test_exec.sh",
MOUNT "/DT/DEV/dev/rks/testdir"
)
NOSNAP
This keyword is used only when performing snapshot of the List application. When the
List application is set to snapshot a volume, the NOSNAP keyword can be used to prevent
the snapshot of a level 1 directory within that volume. A level 1 directory is a directory
located just below the root of the List application, as defined in the List file.
Example
NOSNAP keyword
DIR "My Dir" (TREE "/usr/localuser" NOSNAP)
DIR "My second Dir" (MOUNT "/usr/tmp")
In this example, the "My Dir" directory is going to be backed up on tape while the "My
second Dir" directory is going to be snapshotted.
Chapter 18
List Application
599
PIPE
PIPE "pipe_name" (GENBY|USEDBY exec_path)
The PIPE keyword allows to back up a dump via a named pipe.
The GENBY option specifies that the pipe is created by the script or the program specified
by exec_path.
The USEDBY option specifies that the pipe is created by the List application.
The path of the script or program (exec_path) corresponds to the path of the script or
program that is run to dump data into the pipe.
The script must take into account the following parameters generated by the List
application: the named pipe path, the operation type (backup or restore) and the phase
type (incremental or full).
Note:
If the GENBY option is used, the TINA_AML_IO_TIMEOUT environment
variable can be set to specify a timeout allowing an external program to create
the pipe.
page 607.
Example
PIPE Keyword
PIPE "Pipe_A" ( USEDBY "/aml/unix/pipe_script.sh" )
PIPE "Pipe_B" ( GENBY "/aml/unix/pipe_script.sh" )
)
Example
Executable script called by the PIPE keyword
#!/bin/sh
# This script does not create a pipe,
# so it must be used with the keyword USEDBY.
case "$2" in
'-backup')
# Create the data
$TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -severity acct -text "Backup data to $1"
sleep 5
echo "Silly Data" > $1
;;
'-restore')
# Restore the data
$TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -severity acct -text "Restore data from $1 to /tmp/test_pipe_$$"
sleep 5
cat $1 > /tmp/test_pipe_$$
;;
*)
$TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -severity error "Usage: $0 abs_pipe [ -backup [ -full | -incr ] | restore ]"
exit 100
;;
esac
600
exit 0
Example
Executable script called by the PIPE keyword, using the TINA_CATALOG and
TINA_AML_FOLDER variables
See “Environment Variables”, page 607 for a complete description of the
TINA_CATALOG and TINA_AML_FOLDER variables.
::::::::::::::
test_pipe.sh
::::::::::::::
#!/bin/sh
# This script does not create a pipe,
# so it must be used with the keyword USEDBY.
case "$2" in
'-backup')
# Create the data
"Backup data to $1 in $TINA_AML_FOLDER"
sleep 5
echo "Silly Data" > $1
;;
'-restore')
# Restore the data
"Restore data from $1 in $TINA_AML_FOLDER to /tmp/test_pipe_$$"
sleep 5
cat $1 > /tmp/test_pipe_$$
;;
*)
$TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -catalog $TINA_CATALOG -severity error
"Usage: $0 abs_pipe [ -backup [ -full | -incr ] | -restore ]"
exit 100
;;
esac
exit 0
TREE
DIR name (TREE path)
The TREE keyword causes a gutter type meta-directory to be recursively extended
downwards if it contains sub-directories thus enabling the backup of a tree of files and
directories, specifying only one gutter physical path.
Note:
Only regular files are backed up with the TREE keyword. Symbolink links are
followed to their final destination and backed up as files. If you want to back
up symbolic links as links and perform a file system like backup, use the
MOUNT keyword instead of the TREE keyword.
Chapter 18
Example
List Application
601
TREE Keyword
DIR "Rake Files" (
INFO " info" ( "Rake means one level only" ),
"/home02/rks/testdir"
)
DIR "Recursive files" (
INFO " info" ( "Recursive means all levels" ),
TREE "/home02/rks/testdir"
)
DIR "Specific Files" (
INFO " info" ( "Specific means named objects only" ),
FILE ".script" ( "/home02/rks/testdir/.cshrc" ),
FILE ".doc" ( "/home02/rks/testdir/testdir2/testdir3/testdir4
/lindberg.doc" ),
LINK ".link" ( "/home02/rks/testdir/.cshrc" ),
)
)
Options
The TREE keyword can also be used with the following options:
■
LEVEL n
This option specifies the number of subdirectory levels to display. If n is equal to
0, all subdirectories are displayed. If n is equal to 1, only one level of
subdirectories is displayed, ...etc.
■
INCL special_characters
Only the files matching the special_characters criteria are going to be
displayed. The syntax of the special characters is the same as the syntax used to
filter backup selections. See “Filter Syntax”, page 347 for details.
■
EXCL special_characters
All files matching the special_characters criteria are excluded from the
display. The syntax of the special characters is the same as the syntax used to filter
backup selections. See “Filter Syntax”, page 347 for details.
Example
TREE Keyword with options
DIR
DIR
DIR
DIR
DIR
DIR
"dddd" (
"L0" (TREE "/DT/DEV/people/nko/a1" LEVEL 0)
"Inc1" (TREE "/DT/DEV/people/nko/a1" INCL "*.c")
"Inc2" (TREE "/DT/DEV/people/nko/a1" INCL "*.c*" EXCL "*.cat")
VERSION (optional)
VERSION number
The VERSION keyword is used to specify a version number for the List file. In case of
a conflict with the syntactic analyzer (most recent analyzer), a message is displayed in
602
the Time Navigator event file (Monitoring-Time Navigator Event Viewer menu in
Time Navigator Administration Console to view events).
Example
VERSION Keyword
VERSION 1
➜If the List file is automatically created, it indicates that it is compliant with version 1
of the syntactic analyzer.
Note:
It is advised not to specify a version number in the List file, since the version
number only makes sense when the List file is automatically created by an
application.
# (optional)
# comment
The # keyword is used to specify a comment in the List file.
The comment must be entered after this keyword and ends at the end of the line (i.e., if
the comment is entered on several lines, you must insert the # keyword on each line).
Example
# Keyword
# Backs up a system file
FILE system ("c:\winnt\system32\ntio.sys")
FILE automatically ( MYSELF )
FILE system ("c:\winnt\system.ini" )
FILE win ("c:\winnt\win.ini" )
DIR special (# backs up confidential data
DIR confidential ("d:\private\secret")
FILE key ("d:\private\key.txt")
)
INCLUDE ("e:\list\add_list.txt")
➜Backs up the following objects:
■
The system.ini file.
■
The win.ini file.
■
The key.txt file.
■
The List file specified by the MYSELF keyword.
■
The contents of the directory d:\private\secret.
■
The contents of the List file e:\list\add_list.txt specified by the INCLUDE
keyword.
Chapter 18
List Application
603
For an example of how a “List” application is represented in Time Navigator Restore
& Archive Manager file tree, see “Using Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager”,
page 614.
WAIT
The WAIT keyword implements a synchronization point. The synchronization point can
be useful when you perform parallel backups of the List Application. It is an option of
the DIR keyword.
When Time Navigator encounters a meta-directory with a WAIT keyword, it waits until
all the meta-directory's children and brothers have finished their backup, and then
continue the navigation in the tree for other backups.
Example
WAIT keyword
FILE "Sample" ("/etc/services")
DIR "Dir2" ( TREE "/DT/DEV/people/nko/FF/Src")
DIR "Dir3" ( TREE "/DT/DEV/people/nko/AA/Src")
WAIT
)
FILE "Me" (MYSELF)
FILE "Host" ("/etc/hosts")
LINK "Link" ("/DT/DEV/people/nko/.kshrc")
Creating a dynamic List file
Using the INCLUDE keyword presented above, you can define a dynamic List file. In
that case, the process you specify with the keyword is run prior to each backup performed
by the List application. This feature is very useful if the structure of the backed up data
changes frequently or if you need to perform a specific action prior to the backup.
See “Using the List Application to back up a MYSQL database”, page 624 for an
example of using a dynamic List file.
604
Backup
The “List” Application is managed by Time Navigator in the same way as other
applications and hosts. You must create at least one backup strategy and one backup
selection to back up a “List” application automatically. You can perform full and/or
incremental backups of the application.
This section deals with the “List” application configuration and details the steps to follow
to set up an automatic backup.
Configuring Backups
The procedure below is performed using Time Navigator Administration Console menus:
1.
Create a “List” type application.
2.
Enable the application.
3.
Create or edit a media pool.
4.
Create a standard backup strategy.
Note:
5.
Create a backup selection if the default backup selection is not suitable.
Note:
Note:
If you want to perform parallel backups set the parallelism to at least 2,
in the Advanced tab of the New Strategy window.
If you want to perform parallel backups, create at least two backup
selections and check the Parallelized option in the Properties tab of the
Define Backup Selection window.
All these procedures are discussed at length in previous chapters. Step 1 is
detailed below and additional information concerning the backup selection is
provided as well.
Creating a List Application
You must define a “List” type application using Time Navigator Administration
Console.
Chapter 18
List Application
605
To create a “List” type application
1.
Select a host in the Network area. An application is always associated with a host.
2.
Choose Platform-New-Application. The list of the applications supported by
Time Navigator appears.
3.
Select the “List” application in the list, then click on OK. The New Application
window appears.
4.
Edit the fields of this window as described in the following section, “List
5.
Define the source List file associated with the application:
■
■
Note:
Either by entering the absolute path of the file in the List File textbox, or by
clicking on Browse to select it .
Or by defining the TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE environment variable in the
Environment Variables area.
If a List file is defined at both locations, Time Navigator will take into
account the List file specified in the List File textbox.
To add an environment variable, click on Add in the Environment Variables area. The
Edit Environment Variable window appears. Enter the environment variable name
606
in the Name textbox and the environment variable value in the Value textbox then
click on OK.
You can edit or delete an environment variable using the Edit and Remove buttons.
Note:
Environment variables can also be set in Time Navigator Restore &
Archive Manager. You do not need to enter the variable name. See
“Environment Variables”, page 607 for a list of all available
environment variables.
6.
7.
Right click on the List application icon you have just created and select Enable to
enable the application.
Tip:
If you have a lot of applications to enable, use the Platform-Use-EnableApplication menu that allows for multiple application selection.
Once the “List” application has been declared in Time Navigator Administration
Console, you must proceed as follows:
■
■
■
Logically arrange the objects to be backed up in the application folder.
Define the List file(s) associated with the application by specifying the paths of the
objects to be backed up.
Configure the application backup (see “Backup Selection”, page 611).
For more information on the List file syntax, see “List File Syntax”, page 591.
List Application Creation Parameters
Host Name: Name of the host to which the application is linked. It appears dimmed and
cannot be modified.
Application Name: Name of the application you want to create. The application name can
be edited at a later date if needed without losing backups.
Warning:
Chapter 18
List Application
607
List File: Absolute path of the List file associated with the application.
Note:
The List file can be defined using either the List File textbox, or the
TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE environment variable. If a List file is defined at
both locations, Time Navigator will take into account the List file specified in
the List File textbox.
Password: Allows to provide a password and confirm it.
Snapshot Type: Name of the available snapshot technologies.
Configuration: Click on this button to configure the selected snapshot technology.
Environment Variables
Possible
Values
[default]
Description
TINA_AML_DEST_FILE
Absolute path of an App metaAccess Path
language text file defining the
destination tree with the absolute
paths to be used for a restore
operation. If this variable is not set,
objects are restored according to
the value of the
TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE
variable. If the source text file is
not found, objects are restored to
their original address.
Optional
TINA_AML_IO_TIMEOUT
Timeout allowing an external
program to create the pipe.
Optional
TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE
Absolute path of an App metaAccess Path
language text file defining the
source tree with the absolute paths
to be used for its backup.
Integer in seconds
[120]
The maximum
value is one day.
Status
Optional
608
Possible
Values
[default]
Description
Status
TINA_CATALOG
Specifies the name of the catalog String
the List application will be backed
up to or restored from. This
variable can be used in a script (see
“EXEC”, page 593 and “PIPE”,
page 599 for sample scripts).
Automatically
set by Time
Navigator
TINA_AML_FOLDER
Specifies the full name of the List String
application as defined in
Console. This variable can be used
in a script (see “EXEC”, page 593
and “PIPE”, page 599 for sample
scripts).
Note: TINA_AML_FOLDER
contains the "fully qualified" name
of the APPL object, starting with
appl., as required by the -folder
or -folder_dest parameters of
the tina_restore command.
Automatically
set by Time
Navigator
Editing Environment Variables
You can edit environment variables from the Platform-Properties menu in Time Navigator
Administration Console. The environment is updated when re-opening
Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager.
Environment variables can also be edited via Time Navigator Restore & Archive
Manager.
Open the Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager corresponding to the application that you
need to edit variables for. Open the meta-tree and the Information directory. A list of
Information icons appears displaying all the variables that are available for the application.
The variables are represented in the following format:
VARIABLE_NAME = “value”
The color bar on the left identifies the variable status:
Color
Status
Chapter 18
List Application
Gray
Variable not defined by the user:
- Variable not set in the environment
-or- Variable set by default, without the user defining it
Green
Variable set in the environment
Orange
- Optional variable whose value is incorrect
-or- Variable defined by the user while not supported by Time Navigator
Red
Mandatory variable whose value is incorrect
Note
609
For some applications, it is mandatory to edit the TINA_APP_LIB_PATH environment variable. The environment variable must be edited via the
Time Navigator Administration Console when creating the application in
Time Navigator. This variable is needed for Time Navigator to connect to the
application.
Editing an environment variable in the Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager
1.
Make sure that the user connected to the Time Navigator Restore & Archive
Manager is granted the General Tasks and Platforms rights (Administration tab in the
Access Control window).
☞
For more information on user’s access rights, see the Time Navigator Administration Guide.
2.
Select the variable and choose Tree-Selection-Properties.
The Properties window appears.
3.
Add or modify the value of the variable.
4.
Click on OK to immediately update the environment.
The new value is displayed in the tree.
If you assign an incorrect value to a variable, a red or orange icon (depending on the
severity) appears in the tree, followed by an error message. You can still access the list
of variables and modify the incorrect value with the procedure above.
Information on environment variables
Select the variable and choose Tree-Selection-Help to display information about the variable.
The Help window contains the variable description, the possible values and the default
value, if any.
610
Note
It is possible to copy and paste text from the Help window to the Properties
window.
Chapter 18
List Application
611
Backup Selection
By default, a backup selection is automatically set on the root meta-directory of the file
tree. This allows you to gather objects from different locations in order to back them up
easily with the “List” application.
This default backup selection has the following settings:
■
It is associated with all the backup strategies
■
No filter is set
■
No time phase is excluded
■
The data format is compressed but not encoded
In Time Navigator file tree, the backup selection is represented by a small green ball
located on the left of the icon of an application “List” directory.
The “List” application allows for a more flexible backup administration. Depending on
backup requirements, you can also define backup selections on different locations in the
application folder, as in a file system.
612
Restore
The List application allows you to:
■
■
Restore objects located in various locations on a same machine in a simple and quick
way.
Restore objects in a different location from the source location (standard restore) or on
another machine with a different disk configuration (cross-restore). This feature is
called "relocation".
Restore with Relocation
In order to relocate the List application objects, you must use the TINA_AML_DEST_FILE
environment variable. All the links representing the object restore addresses are relocated
to new values. Objects whose destination is not specified are restored into a temporary
directory.
If this variable is not defined, the object restore addresses will be those stored in the
catalog without using the List file.
The TINA_AML_DEST_FILE file must have:
■
The same syntax than the source list file
■
The same tree structure
The only difference between the source list file (TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE) and the
destination list file (TINA_AML_DEST_FILE) is the physical path location.
Example
TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE Source file:
DIR "Document" (
FILE "File" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/Documents/my_document.doc" )
)
DIR "Program Files" (
DIR "Atempo"
(
DIR "tina_server" (
DIR "File_lists" (
DIR "test" (
FILE "test.txt" ("c:\Program Files
Atempo\tina_server\File_lists\test\test.txt")
)
)
Chapter 18
List Application
613
)
)
)
Example
TINA_AML_DEST_FILE Destination file:
DIR "Document" (
FILE "File" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/Documents/Restore/my_document.doc" )
)
DIR "Program Files" (
DIR "Atempo" (
DIR "tina_server" (
DIR "File_lists" (
DIR "test"
(
FILE "test.txt" ("c:\Program Files
Atempo\tina_server\File_lists\test\restore\test.txt")
)
)
)
)
)
When you open Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, the following
information is displayed if you defined the TINA_AML_DEST_FILE:
"Alternate restore destination in force via %TINA_AML_DEST_FILE%"
614
Note:
Between Time Navigator versions 3.6 and 3.7.0.2, a relocation method was
available provided that all links were defined with environment variables
representing the mount points before the backup operation. This method is no
longer supported as of version 3.7.0.3. You must now use the
TINA_AML_DEST_FILE environment variable.
page 607.
For more information about restore procedures, see the Time Navigator Restore Guide.
Using Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager
File Tree
Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager for the “List” application includes a file
tree enabling you to view the platform status at any given time (present or past).
In the following example, a demo.txt List file is associated with the Demo list
application. It backs up different objects (directories and files), together with another
file_list2.txt (INCLUDE keyword) List file. It also backs up the List file itself
(MYSELF keyword).
Example
Syntax of the demo.txt List File
# Example of the List file syntax
$ cat demo.txt
Chapter 18
EXEC
INFO
FILE
PIPE
PIPE
List Application
"/Users/Demo/mac/exec_script.sh"
"Info 1" ("Objects example")
"Me" (MYSELF)
"Pipe A" ( USEDBY "/Users/Demo/mac/pipe_script.sh")
"Pipe B" ( GENBY "/Users/Demo/mac/pipe_script.sh")
)
# Include a list file
INCLUDE ( "/Users/Demo/mac/file_list2.txt")
$ cat demo.txt
EXEC "/aml/unix/exec_script.sh"
INFO "Info 1" ("Objects example")
FILE "File List" (MYSELF)
FILE "Services File" ("/etc/services")
PIPE "Pipe A" ( USEDBY "/aml/unix/pipe_script.sh" )
PIPE "Pipe B" ( GENBY "/aml/unix/pipe_script.sh" )
)
# Includes a List file
INCLUDE ("/tmp/file_list2.txt")
$ cat demo.txt
EXEC "g:\AppList\win32\exec_script.bat"
INFO "Info 1" ("Objects example")
FILE "File List" (MYSELF)
FILE "Services File"
("C:\WINNT\system32\drivers\etc\services")
PIPE "Pipe A" (USEDBY "g:\AppList\win32\pipe_script.bat")
PIPE "Pipe B" (GENBY "g:\AppList\win32\pipe_script.bat")
)
# Includes a List file
INCLUDE ( "c:\temp\file_list2.txt" )
Example
Syntax of the file_list2.txt List File
# List File
INFO "Info 2" ("Directories examples")
DIR "Library - 1" ( TREE "/Library")
DIR "Library - 2" ("/Users/Demo/Library")
)
# List File
INFO "Info 2" ("Directories example")
DIR "Librairies X11 - 1" ("/usr/X11R6/lib/X11")
DIR "Librairies X11 - 2" (TREE "/usr/X11R6/lib/X11")
)
615
616
# List File
INFO "Info 2" ("Directories example")
DIR "Perl site libs - 1" ("C:\Perl\site\lib")
DIR "Perl site libs - 2" ( TREE "C:\Perl\site\lib")
)
For more information on the List file syntax, see “List File Syntax”, page 591.
The Demo list application is represented in Time Navigator Restore & Archive
Manager by the following file tree:
The object representation of the Demo list application in the file tree is explained in
Chapter 18
List Application
617
the following table..
Icon
Represents the List
object
Closed directory
Open directory
Gutter
File
File physical link
Information
Pipe
"Exec"
The location of the object physical link in the file tree complies with the following rule:
the object’s physical link appears directly below the object.
Note:
The directory gutter is a destination meta-link for all the objects in the
directory.
Note:
Since objects in the file tree are classified in alphabetical order, a directory
gutter may not appear directly below the directory (ex: a file name beginning
with a space could be located before the directory gutter).
618
Object Information
Information on objects can be displayed by choosing Tree-Selection-Contents or TreeSelection-Versions.
In the Directory Contents window, the file physical link appears with the file name followed
by the extension: .00.
For more information about the Tree-Selection menu, see the Time Navigator Restore
Guide.
Restore Methods
Restoring objects belonging to the “List” application is performed in the same way as
Time Navigator “standard” objects.
The only difference occurs when you select the objects to be restored. The selection
depends on the object type:
■
If the file is created with the FILE keyword, you must select the file and its
physical link.
If the file is created with the DIR keyword, you must select the gutter of the
directory into which the file is located.
Two methods can be used to restore objects:
■
■
The time navigation period.
■
Synchronization.
Whatever the method chosen, a basic rule must be followed when selecting the objects
to be restored:
Select an object and a destination, i.e its physical link.
Chapter 18
List Application
619
Time Navigation Period
The time navigation period is used to show and restore a disappeared file in a given time
interval.
To restore objects with a time navigation period
1.
Select a time period for showing deleted files in the lower part of the Time Navigation
area.
2.
Activate the time navigation period by clicking on Show deleted files.
3.
Select the disappeared objects and their physical links in the file tree.
The icons of these objects and their links are striped.
4.
Choose Restore-Run to restore the selected objects.
For more information on how to restore objects with a time navigation period, see the
Time Navigator Restore Guide.
Synchronization
Synchronization is used to restore an object as it was at a given date.
To restore a file using synchronization
1.
Select the file to be restored in the file tree
(ex: Password for the FILE type file, parameters for the DIR type file).
2.
Choose Tree-Selection-Versions. The Versions in Time window appears. It contains
the list of backups of the selected file.
3.
Select one of the backed up file in the list.
4.
Click on Synchronize. The file tree is updated. The viewing date is the past: it is
the backup date of the selected version.
5.
For the FILE type file, select the file physical link in the file tree (ex: /etc/
passwd).
- or For the DIR type file, select the gutter of the directory into which the file is located
in the file tree (ex: /usr/tina/Conf).
6.
Choose Restore-Run to restore the selected file.
For more information on how to restore objects with synchronization, see the
Time Navigator Restore Guide.
620
Examples
This section presents an example of the “List” application. This application type can be
used to perform cold backups of an Oracle database, to back up the critical files of an
operating system (ex: passwd under Unix, win.ini under Windows 2000/2003), to
perform a raw device backup etc.
List File Examples
Example
Syntax of a List file to back up Raw devices on Windows 2000
DIR "dump_disk" (
DIR "disk_d" (
FILE "dump_d" ("\\.\d:")
)
DIR "disk_g" (
FILE "dump_g" ("\\.\g:")
)
)
Examples List File Syntax
# Generated by Time Navigator Enterprise Edition List 5.0.0.2., App 4.0.4, Dynamic "", Compil\'e
Jun 30 2005
VERSION 6
DIR "TIGER10G" (
DIR "TABLESPACES" (
DIR "SYSTEM" (
FILE "file0001.dbf" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/
TIGER10G/system01.dbf" )
),
DIR "UNDOTBS1" (
TIGER10G/undotbs01.dbf" )
),
DIR "SYSAUX" (
TIGER10G/sysaux01.dbf" )
),
DIR "USERS" (
TIGER10G/users01.dbf" )
),
DIR "TEMP" (
LINK "tempfile0001" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/
TIGER10G/temp01.dbf" SIZE 20488K )
)
),
DIR "_ARCHIVE_LOGS" (
"/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/TIGER10G/archives/"
),
DIR "_CONTROL_FILES" (
"/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/admin/TIGER10G/udump/" ,
FILE "control.ctl" (
"/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/TIGER10G/control01.ctl" ,
"/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/TIGER10G/control02.ctl" ,
Chapter 18
List Application
621
"/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/TIGER10G/control03.ctl"
),
FILE "control.sql" ( )
),
DIR "_REDO_LOGS" (
FILE "GROUP_01" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/TIGER10G/redo01.log"
),
),
)
)
)
The following example allows you to perform cold backups of an Oracle database.
The tina_cold_DB73.txt List file is associated with the charlie_o73_cold “List”
application and backs up the following objects:
■
Data files (tablespaces and datafiles).
■
Logs (archive_logs).
■
Control files (control files).
■
Log files (redo_log files).
# Generated by Time Navigator
VERSION 2
DIR "DB73" (
DIR "TABLESPACES" (
DIR "RBS" (
FILE "file0002.dbf" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/rbs01.dbf" )
),
DIR "SYSTEM" (
FILE "file0001.dbf" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/system01.dbf" )
),
DIR "TEMP" (
FILE "file0003.dbf" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/temp01.dbf" )
),
DIR "TOOLS" (
FILE "file0004.dbf" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/tools01.dbf" )
),
DIR "USERS" (
FILE "file0005.dbf" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/users01.dbf" ),
FILE "file0006.dbf" ( "/home04/oradata/DB73/users03.dbf" ),
FILE "file0007.dbf" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/users02.dbf" )
)
),
"/export/home/oracle/admin/DB73/arch/"
),
"/home01/oradata/DB73/control01.ctl" ,
"/home02/oradata/DB73/control02.ctl" ,
"/home03/oradata/DB73/control03.ctl"
),
),
DIR "_REDO_LOGS" (
FILE "GROUP 02" (
622
"/export/home/oradata/DB73/redoDB7302.log" ,
"/home04/oradata/DB73/redoDB7302.log"
),
FILE "GROUP 03" (
),
FILE "GROUP 01" (
)
)
)
The following example allows you to perform cold backups of an Oracle database.The
tina_cold_ora92.txt List file is associated with the morpheus.ora92.cold “List”
application and backs up the following objects:
■
Data files (tablespaces and datafiles).
■
Logs (archive_logs).
■
Control files (control files).
■
Log files (redo_log files).
# Generated by Time Navigator\-r List 4.0.0., App 3.2.3, Dynamic "i386_WinNTV500", Compiled Jan 15 2005
VERSION 4
DIR "ORA92" (
DIR "TABLESPACES" (
DIR "DRSYS" (
FILE "file0004.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\DRSYS01.DBF" )
),
DIR "EXAMPLE" (
FILE "file0005.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\EXAMPLE01.DBF" )
),
DIR "INDX" (
FILE "file0006.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\INDX01.DBF" )
),
DIR "SYSTEM" (
FILE "file0001.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\SYSTEM01.DBF" )
),
DIR "TEMP" (
LINK "tempfile0001" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\TEMP01.DBF" SIZE 40968K )
),
DIR "TOOLS" (
FILE "file0008.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\TOOLS01.DBF" )
),
DIR "UNDOTBS1" (
FILE "file0002.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\UNDOTBS01.DBF" )
),
DIR "USERS" (
FILE "file0009.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\USERS01.DBF" )
)
),
"F:\oracle\oradata\ora92\archive\"
),
"F:\oracle\oradata\ORA92\control01.ctl" ,
Chapter 18
List Application
623
"F:\oracle\oradata\ORA92\control02.ctl" ,
"F:\oracle\oradata\ORA92\control03.ctl"
),
),
DIR "_REDO_LOGS" (
FILE "GROUP 03" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\REDO03.LOG" ),
FILE "GROUP 01" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\REDO01.LOG" ),
FILE "GROUP 02" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\REDO02.LOG" )
)
)
Graphical Representation
The List application is represented graphically by the following file tree in
Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager:
■
The TABLESPACES directory contains Oracle data files.
■
The _ARCHIVE_LOGS directory contains Oracle logs.
■
The _CONTROL_FILES directory contains three versions of the same file.
■
The _REDO_LOGS directory contains two versions for each of the three files.
Note:
This list is automatically generated by Time Navigator for Oracle each time a
database hot backup or replication is performed.
624
Using the List Application to back up a MYSQL database
In the following example, the combined use of the keywords INCLUDE, GENBY, PIPE
and USEDBY allows to dynamically generate a list file to back up a MYSQL database.
Note:
■
For additional information concerning the backup and restore of MYSQL
databases with Time Navigator, contact Atempo’s Professional Services: write
to [email protected] or visit us at http://www.atempo.com/support/
pro_services.php.
The List file name and path defined via the TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE variable
are:
E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\AppGeneratorFullScript.txt
■
The List File contents is as follows:
INCLUDE ("E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\gentreeFullScript.lst" GENBY
"E:\MySqlDev\V1b\MySql1bFullScript.exe")
Chapter 18
■
List Application
625
The script MySql1bFullScript.exe generates the following file:
# Generated by : E:\MySqlDev\V1b\MySql1bFullScript.exe - version 1.35
# Last update : Wed Jul 20 14:35:17 2005
#
#
(c) PTH tools
VERSION 5.0
DIR "DataBase : golf "(
PIPE "#cards" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfcards.cmd" )
PIPE "#columns_priv" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRestgolfcolumns_priv.cmd" )
PIPE "#db" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfdb.cmd" )
PIPE "#func" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golffunc.cmd" )
PIPE "#golfs" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfgolfs.cmd" )
PIPE "#host" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfhost.cmd" )
PIPE "#parcours" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfparcours.cmd" )
PIPE "#photo01" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfphoto01.cmd" )
PIPE "#scores" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfscores.cmd" )
PIPE "#tables_priv" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golftables_priv.cmd"
)
PIPE "#user" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfuser.cmd" )
■
The script MySql1bFullScript.exe also generates a cmd file for each table
found in the database, as follows:
rem Windows version
rem SHELL et WIN32
rem
rem
if "%2"=="-backup" goto backup
if "%2"=="-restore" goto resto
:backup
C:\MySql4.1\bin\mysqldump.exe golf user >> %1
goto fin
:resto
type %1 > E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\resto\golf_user3536.sql
goto fin
:fin
exit 0
626
■
To view the contents of the List application, open the Time Navigator Restore &
Archive Manager:
627
C H A P T E R
19
Mapped Network Drives
19
Time Navigator allows you to back up, archive or restore Windows 2000/2003 mapped
network drives using the Net Disk Application (page 627), if the drives are located in
the same domain as the machine they are mapped onto. Otherwise, use the Backing up
and Restoring a Mapped Network Drive without the Net Disk Application procedure
(page 633).
A network drive is a directory or drive of a remote machine (often used as a file server)
that can be mapped onto any machine in the network. In order to access the drive on a
local machine, a user must have the necessary permissions on the remote machine.
Net Disk Application
Use the Net Disk application to back up, archive or restore Windows 2000/2003 mapped
network drives located in the same domain as the machine they are mapped onto.
Note:
Do not confuse network drives mapped by the Net Disk application with
network drives mapped by the Windows Explorer (with a letter) in the current
session. The basic notion may be the same, but the environments are distinct
from one another. As an illustration, it is perfectly possible to back up network
disks with the Net Disk application without being logged into them on the
Windows server.
Backup
Applications are managed by Time Navigator in the same way as hosts. You must create
at least one backup strategy and one backup selection to back up a Net Disk application
automatically. You can perform full and/or incremental backups of the application.
628
Configuring Backups
The list below details the steps for setting up an automatic backup. The procedures below
are performed using Time Navigator Administration Console menus.
1.
Create a Net Disk application.
2.
Enable the Net Disk application.
3.
4.
Create a backup strategy.
5.
Create a backup selection.
Note:
All these procedures are discussed at length in previous chapters. See “Ejecting
a Media from a Drive”, page 188, and “Automatic Backup Configuration”,
page 285. Steps 1 and 2 are detailed below and additional information
concerning the backup selection is provided as well.
Creating the Application
Net Disk applications are defined in Time Navigator Administration Console.
To create a Net Disk application
1.
In the Network area, select the host for which you want to back up network drives.
An application is always associated with a host.
2.
3.
Select the Net Disk application in the list, then click on OK. The New Application
window appears.
4.
Edit the fields of the window as described in the following section, “Net Disk
Chapter 19
629
5.
6.
Right click on the Net Disk application icon you have just created and select Enable
to enable the application.
Tip;
If you have a lot of applications to enable, it is recommended to use the
Platform-Use-Enable-Application menu because it allows for application
multiple selection.
Net Disk Application Creation Parameters
Host Name: Name of the host the application is connected to. Click on Host Name to select
another host.
630
Application Name: Name of the application you want to create. The application name can
be edited at a later date if needed without losing backups.
Warning:
Tip:
It could be convenient to have the application icon displayed next to its host.
As the objects in the Network area appear in alphabetical order, you should
start the application name with the name of the host and add a suffix. For
instance, if your Net Disk application is installed on the aria host, the name of
the application could be aria.netdisk.
Server: Name of the remote machine where the mapped drives are located.
User Name: Name of the local machine user who has access to the mapped network drives.
Note:
The user of the local machine must be known to the operating system of the
remote machine. To ensure full access when backing up mapped network
drives, it is recommended that the user be an administrator of the domain where
the mapped network drives are located.
Environment
Variable
TINA_APP_LIB_PATH
Description
Possible Values [default]
Path.
Automatically set to
Specifies the absolute or relative path of Mandatory
the Time Navigator Net Disk application
dynamic library:
libtina_ndk.dll
%TINA_HOME%\bin\libtina_ndk.dll
Status
Chapter 19
631
Backup Selection
In the Time Navigator file tree, the backup selection is represented by a small green ball
located on the left of the icon of a Net Disk application object.
The Net Disk application offers a flexible backup administration of mapped network
drives on Windows 2000/2003 systems. Depending on backup requirements, you can
also define backup selections at different locations within the application folder, at the
machine’s level, at the mapped network drives’ level and even within the mapped
network drives. The Net Disk application also supports synthetic backups.
Note
Hidden drives, such as C$, do not appear in the Net Disk application file tree
and cannot be backed up by the Net Disk application.
Parallel Backup
The Net Disk application supports parallel backup. Time Navigator Parallel Backup and
Restore is a functionality that increases system performance by allowing users to split
backup jobs into several processes that can run simultaneously.
The user must select parallelism points in Time Navigator and set the maximum
number of streams in the strategy (parallelism index). When Time Navigator
encounters such a point during backup, it spawns a process to back up the node and its
sons.
➤
To configure parallel backups:
632
1.
After creating a Net Disk Application, set parallel backup selections on directories
on the Net Disk tree in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager (the
Properties Tab of the Define Backup Selection window).
2.
Define a strategy with a parallelism index equal to the number of drives (Advanced
Tab of the Strategy Properties window). For the parallel backup mechanism to be
visible, it is recommended to set an index greater than 2.
Restore
The Net Disk application allows you to restore mapped network drives under
Windows 2000/2003. You can restore objects that have disappeared during mishandling
or a disk crash, but also restore objects as they were at a given date.
Note
The Net Disk application does not support parallel restore.
Note
To ensure full access when restoring mapped network drives, it is recommended
that the user be an administrator of the domain where the mapped drives are
located.
See the Time Navigator Restore Guide for more information about restore procedures.
Archiving
Mapped network drives can be archived through Time Navigator Archiving Server.
See the Time Navigator Archiving Server Guide for more information about archiving
procedures.
Chapter 19
633
Back up and Restore without the Net Disk Application
In order to back up, archive and restore network drives mapped on a Windows machine
located in a different domain, you need to proceed as follows:
1.
Tunables
Add the following five tunables in the parameters.txt file, located in the
%TINA_Home%\Conf directory:
■
force_fixed_bad_remote_disk=yes
■
archive_pre_processing
■
archive_post_processing
■
restore_pre_processing
■
restore_post_processing
Note:
For backups, the pre and post processings are specified in the Strategy
window, not via a tunable.
To mount and unmount the network drives before and after archiving or
restoration, the pre-processing tunables must contain the path to a mount script,
and the post-processing tunables the path to an unmount script.
Following is an example of definition for these tunables:
parameter:archive_pre_processing=c:\tina\conf\backup_pre.bat
parameter:archive_post_processing=c:\tina\conf\backup_post.bat
parameter:restore_pre_processing=c:\tina\conf\restore_pre.bat
parameter:restore_post_processing=c:\tina\conf\restore_post.bat
Warning:
2.
The script path must NOT contain any space.
Scripts
The letter you use in the scripts to define the destination drive for the mapping
must be different from the letter defining the source drive, and must not be already
in use for anything else.
For instance, if the drive you wish to back up is mapped on F:\, map it to R:\ in
the scripts and make sure that R:\ is not used for anything else. Thus the
Time Navigator mounting/unmounting activities will not interfere with your
634
normal use of the mapped drive.
Following are two examples of the mount/unmount scripts called by the tunables.
Mount
-------net use s: \\tetram\dkf winnt /user:administrator
if %ErrorLevel% NEQ 0 goto ErrorS
goto End
:ErrorS
c:\tina\bin\tina_alarm -text "Mount error \\tetram\dkf on
s:" -severity major
goto End
:End
Unmount
--------net use s: /delete
if %ErrorLevel% NEQ 0 goto ErrorS
goto End
:ErrorS
c:\tina\bin\tina_alarm -text "Error cannot unmount
s:" -severity minor
goto End
:End
3.
Filesystem Application
Create a Filesystem application in Time Navigator Administration Console on
the host where the network drives are mapped. Use the Platform-New-Application
menu.
In the User field, enter the same user as the one declared in the mount/unmount
scripts ("administrator" in the example above).
4.
Backup Strategy
Create a strategy for the FileSystem application. In the Advanced tab, check the Go
through Network FileSystems option and enter the path to a mount script in the
Preprocessing field and the path to an unmount script in the Postprocessing field.
5.
Backup Selection
To create the backup selection(s), map the network drive on the letter used in the
scripts. Open Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager to view the drives in
the file tree structure and set your backup selection(s). Unmap the drive.
Chapter 19
Archiving
Network drives can be archived using Time Navigator Archiving Server.
See the Time Navigator Archiving Server guide for details.
635
636
637
C H A P T E R
20
20
Application Definition
The Filesystem application allows you to go beyond the maximum of four strategies that
can be created for a host. A Filesystem application acts as a clone for a host, thus for
each application created you can specify four additional strategies.
In addition, the root directory of the Filesystem application can optionally be defined as
an environment variable, and can be different from the root directory of the host with
which the application is associated. In this case, using the Filesystem application allows
you to dissociate data from its actual location on the network.
Benefits of defining the root directory of the Filesystem Application
■
■
If the directory composing the root of the Filesystem application backup selection
is moved to a different location, only the value of the environment variable needs
to be changed. No modification of the backup folder of the application is required.
Thus the backup history of the backup selection is maintained, and you do not need
to create a new backup selection.
If you create several Filesystem applications associated with the same host, to back
up directories located on separate disks, you are able to parallelize the backup of
your host, thus improving backup performance.
Backup
To perform backups with a Filesystem application, configure Time Navigator following
these steps:
1.
Create and enable a Filesystem application.
2.
3.
Create a backup strategy.
638
4.
Create a backup selection if the default backup selection at the root does not suit
you.
Creating and Enabling a Filesystem Application
To create and enable a Filesystem application
1.
In the Network area of Time Navigator Administration Console, select the host
for which you want to create a filesystem application.
Note:
If you intend to use the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR variable to specify the root
of the application, make sure that the host you select allows you to access
the entire file tree you intend to backup.
2.
3.
Select the Filesystem application in the list, then click on OK. The New Application
window appears.
4.
Edit the fields of this window as described in the following section, “Filesystem
Chapter 20
5.
6.
Right click on the Filesystem application icon you have just created and select
Enable to enable the application.
Tip:
639
If you have a lot of applications to enable, it is recommended to use the
Platform-Use-Enable-Application menu because it allows for application
multiple selection.
Filesystem Application Creation Parameters
The Filesystem application allows you create a “clone” of the host to which the
application is attached. This is very useful to create additional backup strategies for a host
and eventually to organize data in a thematic way (ex: according to applications,
departments, etc.).
Host Name: Name of the host to which the application is connected, with the .fs
extension. Click on Host Name to select another host.
Application Name: Name of the application you want to create. By default, the application
is named <Host_Name>.fs and can be modified. The application name can be edited at
a later date if needed without losing backups.
Warning:
Note:
On Unix platforms, if you intend to use the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR variable to
specify the root directory of the Filesystem application and if that path includes
a mount point to another host, make sure that you choose a user that has the
permission to access both hosts.
Snapshot Type: Name of the available snapshot technologies.
Configuration: Click on this button to configure the selected snapshot technology.
640
Enter variables as needed, for instance, enter TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR in the Name textbox,
and the path of the directory to be used as the root of the Filesystem application in the
Value textbox. For instance:
/usr/people/rde
/usr/people/rde
c:\usr\people\rde
Description
Status
TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR
Specifies the access path of the directory to be used
as the root of the Filesystem application.
The value of the variable must be an existing
directory. If the variable is not set, the root of the
Filesystem application is the root of the host.
Optional
Creating or Editing a Media Pool
You must have at least one media pool available to associate with your backup strategy.
Your data will be written on media contained in the media pool designated in the backup
strategy.
To create or edit a media pool, see “Ejecting a Media from a Drive”, page 188.
Chapter 20
641
Creating a Backup Strategy
At least one backup strategy must be defined. The strategy determines how and when
data should be backed up.
Warning:
Note:
On Unix platforms, if you are setting the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR environment
variable to specify the path of the root directory, the Go through Network
Filesystems option in the Advanced tab of the New Strategy window cannot
be used.
If you want to perform parallel backups set the parallelism to at least 2, in the
Advanced tab of the New Strategy window.
To create a backup strategy, see “Creating a Backup Strategy”, page 301.
Creating a Backup Selection
At least one backup selection must be defined. The backup selection determines what data
should be backed up.
Note:
If you want to perform parallel backups, create at least two backup selections
and check the Parallelized option in the Properties tab of the Define Backup
Selection window.
If you are using the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR environment variable to specify the path of the
root directory, you can also choose to set several backup selections on any sub-directories
within the root directory.
Warning:
Once the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR environment variable is set, only local
directories can be backed up. If your backup selection contains directories
that are mounted or mapped onto other file systems they will not be backed
up.
In the Time Navigator file tree, the backup selection is represented by a small green ball
located on the left of the directory designated as a backup selection.
642
For details on how to create a backup selection, see “Creating a Backup Selection”,
page 339.
Restore
Viewing the Application Contents
The Filesystem Application contains an Information meta-directory just below the root.
This directory contains useful system and parameter information. It is visible within
Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, and allows environment variables to be
edited or unset in that interface, in addition to Time Navigator Administration Console.
The information directory is backed up in the catalog so that settings at the moment of
any previous backup can be seen.
Time Navigator creates a gutter meta-directory when backing up the filesystem
application. The gutter allows the creation of the directories specified in the destination
path if they are missing when a restore is performed. The path of the gutter directory is
based on the value of the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR environment variable.
Chapter 20
643
Information
Gutter
Restoring data
To restore data with the Filesystem application, proceed as with any other
Time Navigator application.
If you have set the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR environment variable to perform backups, the
variable will also determine where the data should be restored.
A Filesystem application backed up on Unix or Mac OS X can be cross-restored to a
Windows platform. To do so, first edit the Filesystem application via Time Navigator
Administration Console (Patform-Properties menu) and remove any User and Password that
may have been defined there. Both fields must remain blank to perform inter-system
cross-restores.
See the Time Navigator Restore Guide for more information concerning restore
procedures.
Archiving
The Filsystem application can be archived through Time Navigator Archiving Server.
See the Time Navigator Archiving Server Guide for more information about archiving
procedures.
644
645
Appendix
Appendix 1: Advanced Library Properties
Standard Tab
Basic properties are available for all libraries. They concern Time Navigator
performance, but will not cause any major disruption if improperly set.
Property
Description
Use Barcodes
Indicates that the library is able to handle a barcode reader.
Does not mean that the library actually contains a barcode reader.
Dismount Media after Use
Usually Time Navigator leaves cartridges inside the drive after an
operation has been performed. If this property is selected, cartridges
will be systematically put back in their original slots once a job is
completed.
This property is required for libraries that unload drives upon
opening the library door.
Shared Library
Enables Time Navigator Library Sharing Manager use and the
shared drive allocation and release.
Activate Drives Allocation Log
Activates logs if the Shared Library property is enabled.
Cleaning Slot
Indicates that a slot has been reserved in the library for the cleaning
cartridge.
Reserved Slots
Number of the slot reserved for the cleaning cartridge (0 to n).
Performed Cleanings
Number of cleanings already performed.
Autorized Cleanings
Maximum number of cleanings a cleaning cartridge can perform.
Default Configuration Button
Retrieves the default parameters values.
Code Button
Gives you a code corresponding to your library configuration. This
code can be useful for the Technical Support to help you configure
the library parameters.
646
Generic Tab
Generic properties concern the library’s handling and behavioral logic.
Warning:
If misused, these properties can prevent the library from working properly.
Property
Description
Media is ejected when Power is
switched on
Enables the automatic remounting of a cartridge in a drive. To be
used for certain library types which eject cartridges when the power
is turned on. Example : MP Magstar.
Use Slot Access Status
When a move request is initiated, Time Navigator verifies both the
full/empty status and the accessible/non-accessible status of a slot.
For libraries not returning reliable information on accessible/nonaccessible status, the Access status slot is not verified, and this
property is unselected.
Use Drive Except Status
This property is only used for Exabyte full size drives.
Store Media in Initial Slot Source
When a drive is unloaded, this property allows you to put the
cartridge back in its original slot. This property is required for
autoloaders such as PowerStore L200. Otherwise, the request is
rejected and deemed illegal.
Reliable Mailbox Status
When a move request involving mailbox slots is initiated,
Time Navigator verifies the full/empty status and the accessible/
non-accessible status. Do not select this property if libraries do not
return reliable information on accessible/non-accessible status.The
mailbox slots access status will not be verified.
Unload Library Drives before
performing IES
This property is used when a library cannot perform the Init Element
Status (IES, library inventory) while a cartridge is mounted in a
drive. Checking this property will empty all drives before the IES
and replace the cartridges in the drives after the IES.
Use Drive Access Status before
Cleaning
Before mounting a cleaning cartridge in a drive, Time Navigator
verifies both the full/empty status and the accessible/non-accessible
status of a drive. For libraries not returning a reliable accessible/
non-accessible status information, the drive Access status in not
being verified, this property is unselected.
Check Drive Status after Cleaning
Once a cleaning has been performed, Time Navigator verifies both
the full/empty status and the accessible/non-accessible status of a
drive. For libraries not returning reliable information on accessible/
non-accessible status, the Access status slot is not verified, and this
property is unselected
Appendix
647
Property
Description
No Request to move Media after
Cleaning
After a cleaning, Time Navigator systematically removes the
cleaning cartridge and puts it back into the cleaning slot. However,
some libraries have this function built-in. This property is designed
to avoid errors due to trying to move the cleaning cartridge twice.
Picker Address is always 0
This property is required for a library without a picker. It applies
especially to autoloaders.
Eject Media before Moving
Activates cartridge unloading and ejection prior to moving cartridge
to a slot (most cases).
Can Read Barcode in Drive
Indicates that the barcode reader can read a barcode when a
cartridge is inside a drive. Used mostly for DLT.
Check media in drive on Except
status
For drives having a shutter-like door, it can happen that a cartridge
located inside is ignored after reinitialization. This property allows
for a direct drive inquiry, especially for libraries that do not use a
serial line to communicate with drives.
IES with Range SCSI Command
Support
Indicates whether or not the library supports the "IES with Range"
SCSI command.
Code Button
the library properties.
Specific Tab
Specific properties concern library handling and behavior logic with a SCSI dimension.
Warning:
If misused, these properties can prevent the library from working properly
and can force the administrator to restart the machine connected to the
library.
Property
Description
Manage Pack
For certain ADIC libraries, this property controls the loading/
unloading of the library silo.
Use "Position To Element" before
"Move Medium"
Positions the slot in front of the drive to move a cartridge. Applies
to library with a moving silo instead of a picker.
Certain ADIC only.
648
Property
Description
Read Barcode after "Move
Medium" from Drive or Mailbox
Cartridge operations do not necessarily warrant a barcode rereading.
This property forces a cartridge barcode reading after a move from
a drive or mailbox to a slot.
This property requires Init Element Status with Range (IESR)
support.
Use "Ready Inport" to manage the
mailbox
With an ATL 2640, accessing the mailbox requires the activation of
a switch.
ATL 2640 only.
Use "Init Element Status With
Range"
The Init Element Status with Range (IESR) is used to perform the
inventory when the Init Element Status (IES) is unusable.
3575 only.
Force Barcode Reading on "Init
Element Status"
To prevent rejection of the SCSI command, a barcode reading is
performed even if the Init Element Status (IES) has not required it.
7331 only.
Discard Mailbox Detection
The library geometry is usually derived from information provided
by the library. This property sets the number of mailboxes to 0.
Useful for some ADIC libraries that use their silos as a mailboxes.
ADIC only.
Use "Store To Import/Export" Bit
to detect Mailbox
The library geometry is usually derived from information provided
by the library. With this property, the presence of a mailbox is based
on a bit (STIE). Useful for the Bruce Hill Q serie that consider its
packs as mailboxes.
Bruce Hill Q serie only.
Reset Incorrect Status for Slot and
Picker
The slot or picker status is provided by the library. This property
resets the status since the library information is incorrect.
Some ADIC only.
Able to Flip Media
Indicates that the library is able to flip cartridges.
Magneto-optical drives only.
Use Drive Access Status
When a move request is initiated, Time Navigator verifies both the
full/empty status and the accessible/non-accessible status of a drive.
For libraries not returning reliable information on accessible/nonaccessible status, the Access status slot is not verified, and this
property is unselected.
(Magneto-optical drives only).
No IES Command if a Drive is Full This property concerns Exabyte EZ17 libraries only. It prevents IES
commands from being sent to the library.
VTL only: Use "info" file
Indicates that the virtual library content comes from the
vtl_info.txt configuration file.
Applies to virtual libraries (VTL) only.
Appendix
649
Property
Description
VTL only: Self Correcting Drive
Status
If there is a conflict between the library and a drive concerning the
drive empty/full status, the library status prevails unless this
property is activated.
Applies to virtual libraries (VTL) only.
Wait for End of Mailbox Scanning
For libraries with removable mailboxes, this property prevents any
cartridge move order from being issued while the mailbox contents
are being scanned.
Scan mailbox on exception
Allows the library to scan all mailbox slots in order to update their
contents, if the status of the slot has become questionable.
Code Button
Geometry Tab
The geometry properties define the library screen appearance in Time Navigator
Library Manager.
Property
Description
Slot 1 Position
Same line as Slot 0: positions slot 1 on the same line as slot 0
(horizontally).
Same column as Slot 0: positions slot 1 on the same column as slot
0 (vertically).
Number of columns/lines
Number of columns or lines displayed in the Time Navigator
Library Manager, according to the Slot 1 Position property.
Slot 0 Position in library
Assign slot 0 a location in the library.
Code Button
650
Appendix 2: Specific Library Information
Cartridge Management when Partitioning an Adic Scalar i500 Library
The Adic Scalar i500 Library allows for the partitioning of a physical library into several
logical libraries called partitions. Each partition functions as a fully-fledged library on its
own. It possesses a certain number of slots which are visible to it alone, except for the
mailbox slots (I/E Station in Adic terminology) which are shared by all the partitions.
This particularity has two consequences on cartridge import and export operations:
■
■
When cartridges are exported and a partition places cartridges into the slots of the
mailbox, these slots are seen by other partitions with a status of "Except".
When cartridges are imported: the cartridges inserted in the mailbox must be
assigned to a partition by the operator. This assignment is performed from the
library's Control Screen in the form of a selection of the partition that the operator
is required to make. The selection interface is displayed until the operator has made
a choice. It is not possible to reject or interrupt this choice.
However, the operator can forget to respond to the choice of partition proposed by the
library. In this case, all the cartridges that have been inserted in the mailbox remain
marked with the "Except" status for all partitions.
To ensure that operations of putting online and putting offline are correctly run in
Time Navigator:
■
■
A partition must absolutely be assigned to cartridges newly placed in slots or
having changed slots in the I/E Station. This assignment must be performed by the
operator from the Control Screen of the Library.
The operator imperatively must wait for the end of the reinitialization of the I/E
Station before validating a putting online or offline operation in Time Navigator.
The best practice for importing cartridges with this library consists in following these
steps:
1.
Open the drawer of the I/E Station.
2.
Insert the cartridges.
3.
Close the drawer of the I/E Station.
4.
Wait for the end of the reinitialization of the I/E Station.
5.
Assign each of the cartridges to a partition.
Appendix
651
6.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, reinitialize the barcodes of the mailbox.
7.
Put the cartridges online in Time Navigator Library Manager.
With regards to cartridge exports in Time Navigator Library Manager, the first thing
to do is to reinitialize the barcodes of the mailbox to detect the slots that have an "Except"
flag. These slots will appear hashed and be inaccessible from Time Navigator Library
Manager. You can then choose only accessible slots for the export operations.
Note
Cartridge export from the menu item Storage-Media-Management in
Time Navigator Administration Console works without these problems
because before there is any movement towards a mailbox slot, an availability
check is run. Hence, when a slot is detected as having an "Except" flag, it is
skipped in favor of the next slot.
Appendix 3: TCP Parameter Modification
If a host is behind a firewall, an inactive connection between the server and the agent
may be broken by the firewall after few minutes, usually when a large file is being backed
up, and this may cause backups to fail. In this situation, it is recommended to modify the
TCP idle timeout at the operating system level to keep the connection alive much longer.
Use the commands below to display and modify the TCP parameter:
HP-UX
■
Display
/usr/bin/ndd -get /dev/tcp tcp_keepalive_interval
■
Modify
/usr/bin/ndd -set /dev/tcp tcp_keepalive_interval <new_value>
IBM AIX
■
Display
/usr/sbin/no -a | grep tcp_keepidle
■
Modify
/usr/sbin/no -o tcp_keepidle=<new_value>
SUN Solaris
■
Display
652
% /usr/sbin/ndd -get /dev/tcp tcp_keepalive_interval
■
Modify
% /usr/sbin/ndd -set /dev/tcp tcp_keepalive_interval
<new_value>
Linux
■
Display
/sbin/sysctl -e net.ipv4 | grep tcp_keepalive_intvl (Result is in
seconds)
Modify
/sbin/sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_keepalive_intvl=<new_value>
Windows
On Windows, the following OS/network settings are implemented:
■
■
■
■
■
Idle time threshold. Any connection idle for at least this time is a candidate for
liveness checking. The default value is 2 hours.
Maximum number (unsigned integer) of keep-alive messages that can be sent
before a connection is declared dead. The default value is 5.
Minimum delay that is applied between keep-alive messages. The default value
is 5 seconds.
Once a connection is declared dead, any current or subsequent attempt to
communicate on that connection will fail immediately with an error.
The keep-alive message is a simple, low-level message. If the connection is still
present, the other end will use fundamental TCP/IP functionality to reply, without
affecting the sending application. The cost of a liveness check is negligible ;
because it is implemented via an exchange of TCP/IP ACKs, there is minimal
network or processor utilization.
Windows relies on system-wide registry settings to set a single check interval for an entire
machine. Even worse, the default is to wait two (2) hours before checking for a dropped
connection! This is usually inadequate for responsive liveness checking.
To modify the Idle time threshold, you must create or modify the following DWORD
registry key and reboot the machine for the new settings to take effect (unit is
millisecond):
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Tcpip\
Parameters\KeepAliveTime
Appendix
653
654
655
Glossary
This glossary contains terms found in this guide. Some terms are specific to the
Time Navigator software.
A
Application
A term used for databases and application software.
Applications (backup, archiving and restore) are managed
the same way as hosts by Time Navigator.
Architecture
A description of the structure and organization of a host or
an operating system.
Archive
To copy a directory or file for medium or long-term periods
onto an external medium.
Archiving
The storage of data for medium and long-term periods onto
an external media.
B
Backup
A copy of data on a hard disk or external medium.
Backup
To copy a directory or file on a hard disk or external
medium.
Backup Selection
A definition of the directories to be backed up, of the hours
and the conditions under which these directories are backed
up.
Backup master
A machine that takes on the backup process of another host.
Backup strategy
A definition of the media pool used, the date and the hour at
which an automatic backup starts.
Bringing off-line
To remove a media from the library.
Bringing on-line
To add a media to the library.
656
C
Catalog
The Catalog is the core Time Navigator database. It
contains all the information required to run
Time Navigator, such as the configuration of the platforms,
drives, libraries, users, media...etc, as well as the
description and location of all backed up files.
Cartridge
A synonym for media (see this term).
Close
To specify Time Navigator not to use a media to write data.
Command syntax
The rules you must follow to use the Time Navigator
commands and their various options.
Compressed format
A format in which data is compacted in order to free up
space on the medium.
D
Drive
Peripheral used to read or write data on a storage media.
Duplicate
To copy data from one media to another.
E
Edit
To view or modify settings.
Enabled
The state of a platform on which automatic backups are
allowed.
Encoded format
A format in which data is coded in order to avoid illicit
reading.
Extraction
A synonym for restore (see this term).
F
File tree
A graphical display of the hierarchical organization of
directories and files.
Format
The structured organization of data on a backup or archiving
media.
Full backup
A backup in which all files are backed up.
H
Host
A client computer of the application.
Glossary
657
I
Icons area
The area of the tina_adm main window representing
iconized platforms and drives in the form of a chart.
Incremental backup
A backup in which only files that have been changed since
the last backup are backed up.
J
Job
Important task carried out by Time Navigator gathering the
following session types: backup, restore, archiving and
duplication.
L
Label
File written by Time Navigator on media to identify them.
Label
To write a label.
Library
A robotized peripheral storage device made up of drives
allowing the management of cartridge mounting and
unmounting.
M
Mailbox
The library slot through which a cartridge is inserted or
ejected.
Main media pool
A media pool associated with a backup strategy or a central
archive folder.
Media
A volume used to back up or archive data.
Media pool
A pool used to perform automatic backup or central archiving.
Each pool has a name, a label, drives, and a management
policy.
Multiple writing pool
An optional media pool associated with a backup strategy or a
central archive folder in order to make an extra copy of the
backup or archive folder.
N
Named pipe
A special file that allows one process to communicate with
another process.
Network area
The area of Time Navigator Administration Console
representing platforms and drives in the form of a tree.
658
O
Object
An element managed by the application.
Operator request
A request made to the cartridge administrator.
P
Platform
Term referring to the objects to be backed up by
Time Navigator (hosts or applications).
Platform group
A group that associates platforms (hosts and applications)
with the same strategies and backup selections.
R
Reading session
The restore step during which file data is read from a
medium.
Recycle
To reuse a media once the retention period has expired.
Refresh
To update the screen display.
Retention Period
The parameter used to determine the length of time backup
files will be kept on the media before the media is recycled.
S
Storage device
A device distinct from the central unit of a computer and
dedicated to the storage of data.
Storage node
A client platform connected to a storage device, either
directly or via a Storage Area Network (SAN).
Symbolic link
A file pointing to a directory or file on a different file
system.
Synchronization
A visualization of the file tree at the backup date of the
selected file.
Synthetic full backup
A backup that is performed from other backups saved in the
catalog (option of the full backup).
T
Tape
A synonym for cartridge (see this term).
Tape file
A file composed of several files containing data backed up
by Time Navigator. The maximum size of a tape file is
1 GB. Time Navigator creates one tape file per write
session.
Glossary
659
Time Navigation
A concept that allows users to navigate through the history
of the file tree.
Time Navigator administrator
The person in charge of configuring, managing, and
operating machines on a network.
Time Navigator server
The machine hosting the Time Navigator catalog on which
the Time Navigator Server software component is
installed.
Time Navigator user
A user of the application belonging to a media pool and
allowed to use drives. The user can be assigned specific
access rights.
Time phases
The hours at which an incremental backup is initiated.
U
User group
A group that associates users with drives in order to perform
local archiving or a group defined to assign special access
rights to a number of users.
V
Version
The version of a directory or file at a given date.
W
Waiting session
A session waiting for writing or reading.
Writing session
The archiving or backup step during which data is written on
a medium.
660
Index
Index
A
Access right
application 120
cartridge 202
catalog 14, 120
default 123
drive 178
file 120
functionality 120
host 120
personal 123
platform 120
user 14, 44, 119, 178
Acknowledging
Console 523
ACL
backup 308, 312
administrative assistant 291
Administrator, media 227
Agent
Linux 373
OES Linux 384
OES NetWare 383
Unix 373
VMS 380, 381
Windows 372
Windows 2000 372
Windows 2003 372
Alarm
notifying 443
processing 440
representation 23, 29, 434
severity 29, 434, 454, 488
sorting 439
status 30
viewing 436, 487
Alarm area (tina_adm) 29, 435
Allocating
drive 161
library 161
Application
access right 120
Catalog see Catalog application
creating 81
definition 70
deleting 108
disabling 85
editing 106
enabling 84
Filesystem see Filesystem
application
List see List application
name 83
NDMP see NDMP application
Net Disk see Net Disk
application
password 120
representation 21, 28
settings 106
see also Platform
Archiving 20
Net Disk application 632
Axes, cache 364
B
Backup
ACL 308, 312
advanced configuration 69,
119, 137, 233, 285,
419
catalog 52, 54, 62, 63
definition 286
exporting 513
Filesystem application 637
filtering information 508
full 286, 288, 302
incremental 286, 288, 304,
315, 367
List application 604
manual triggering 290, 315
master 71, 77, 106
multiplexed 309, 365
On Demand 405
pre/postprocessing 308, 310
scheduling 288
simple backup without macromultiplexing 365
specific attributes 311
synthetic 286, 288, 422
tunable 300
viewing 501, 514
661
without using cache 288
see also Backup session
Backup class
creating 339
deleting 355
filtering 347, 352, 353
information 353
nested 352
parameters 341
settings 339, 340
syntax 347
viewing 354
Backup information 389
Backup selection
editing 355
filtering 341
overview 289
Backup session
multiple writing 290, 422
writing 290
see also Backup
backup strategies
pending 322
Backup strategy
creating 301
deleting 316
editing 316
importing 302
overview 289
representation 196
settings 301
Backup to disk 531
Backup Wizard 291
Bar code 201, 235, 238
Boot catalog
definition 52
restoring catalog 64
viewing 59
Bringing a cartridge off line
definition 161
with/without a mailbox 220
Bringing a cartridge on line
definition 161
with/without a mailbox 249
C
Cache
662
axes 364
creating 40
disk 364
editing 367
free space 27
information 27
memory 364
Modifying Size in MacOs 42
reading 27
size 366
use 364
volume 27
writing 27
Cache area (tina_adm) 27
Cache space see Cache
Cartridge
access right 202
adding in the silo see
Cartridge, bringing
on line
bar code 201, 238
bringing off line 161, 220
bringing on line 161, 249
cleaning 229
cleaning settings 229, 230
closing 207, 217
copying see Cartridge,
duplicating
definition 200
deleting 208, 218
duplicating 208, 219, 422
erasing 208, 219
externalization 203, 224
identifying 200
information 221, 241
known status 201, 204, 247
label 200, 202
label prefix 228
life points 172, 203
Lost+Found status 196, 201,
204, 208, 218, 247
mount request 161
moving 251
priority 202
recycling 202, 205, 215, 216
removing from the silo see
Cartridge, bringing
off line
reopening 208, 217
replacing 226
spare status 195, 196, 201,
202, 204, 208, 209,
218, 226, 227, 247
viewing 221
Virtual Library System 546
wear 172, 203, 228, 229
writing 308
writing format 202
see also Cartridge pool
Cartridge pool
creating 196
definition 195
exporting information 213
information 210
limited retention period 195,
215
main 290
multiple writing 290, 422
recycling policy 195
retention period 195
storage policy 195
viewing 210
see also Cartridge
Catalog
access right 14, 120
backing up 52, 54, 62, 63
Boot catalog 52, 59, 64
connecting/disconnecting 15,
448, 469, 521
creating 39
dedicated 422
definition 38
editing 45
free space 26
identifying 13, 15
information 26
instance 26
known user 13, 121
maintenance, see Jobs,
maintenance
name 43
object 26
Parameter for On Demand
Backup 408
parameters 43
password 120
privileged user 13, 14, 44,
119, 121
remote 63
restoring 64, 67
restoring limits 47
selecting 469
settings 46
size 43
starting 17
stopping 50
suspending 51
tunable 39, 215
unknown user 13, 121
volume 26
catalog
increasing the size of 45
Catalog application
backing up
remote catalog 63
several catalogs on the
same server 62
simple catalog 54
configuring 53, 59
definition 52
environment variables 54, 55
restoring
another catalog on the
same server 67
catalog with Boot catalog
64
viewing 59
Catalog area (tina_adm) 26
Catalog Information area (tina_adm)
25
Changing
drive mode 182
user identity 132, 178
Cleaning a drive 243
automatically 169
definition 168, 184
editing 185
manually 169, 185, 243
request 168, 184
settings 229
Cleaning cartridge
settings 229, 230
wear 169
Client, NDMP 385
Closing a cartridge 207, 217
Compressing
file 203, 288, 344
Configuration
devices 139
libraries 139
Configuring
Index
advanced backup 69, 119,
137, 233, 285, 419
Catalog application 53, 59
macro-multiplexing 366
Time Navigator over a SAN
425, 428
Connected mode
Console 13
Time Navigator Event
Manager 446
Connection to SAN 78
Connection, broken 651
Container 365
Copying
cartridge see Duplicating a
cartridge
cpio
Unix command 203
writing format 202, 203, 309,
422
Creating
application 81
backup class 339
backup strategy 301
cache 40
cartridge pool 196
catalog 39
drive 170
event redirection 90
host 74
host automatically 79
library 161
platform 74
platform group 33
SAN 429
shared drive 429
user 129
user group 133
Critical data 216
D
Data integrity 216, 222, 223
Data stored during 215
Dedicated catalog 422
Default access right 123
Definition
application 70
application Filesystem 70
application List 70
application Net Disk 71
backup 286
boot catalog 52
bringing a cartridge off line
161
bringing a cartridge on line
161
cartridge 200
cartridge pool 195
catalog 38
Catalog application 52
cleaning a drive 168, 184
events 445
filesystem application 637,
661
host 70
jobs 467
library 159
parallel backup 286
Console 519
501
user group 122
Deleting
application 108
backup class 355
backup strategy 316
cartridge 208, 218
drive 187
host 108
library 166
platform 108
user 131
user group 135
Detected host
creating 79
Deleting 110
ignoring 110
Device
About Devices 137
automatic declaring 139
automatic discovering 139
configuring 139
663
138, 147
Device Detection Wizard 138,
140
Device List Window 148
Properties 151
serialization 423
Properties Window 151
Device descriptor 78, 164, 173,
423
Devices
Time Navigator interfaces for
138
Disabling
application 85
drive 182, 242
host 85
platform 85
slot 252
Disconnected mode, Time
Navigator Administration
Console 12
Disk cache 364
Disk Drive see VTL Disk Drive
Disk space allocation for VLS 542
Disk to tape
Application 549
Display, variable 11
Displaying a platform in the
Network area 31
Drive
access right 178
allocating 161
automatic cleaning 169, 184
changing mode 182
cleaning 168, 184, 243
cleaning request 168, 184
creating 170
deleting 187
147
Device Detection Wizard 140
disabling 182, 242
display 24
editing 186
ejecting media 188, 244
enabling 182, 242
664
information 240
loading mode 168
local 167
manual cleaning 169, 185,
243
manually loaded 168
modifying the drive connection
type 192
position, index 157
representation 22
robotized 161, 168
settings 171, 186
shared 79, 167, 429
test 174
testing 183, 243
testing position or index in
library 157
VTL Disk Drive 167
web supervision 182
Drive cleaning
automatic 169, 184
definition 168, 184
editing 185
manual 169
request 168, 184
settings 184
Drives
list administration 189
Duplicating
jobs 497
Duplicating a cartridge 208, 219,
422
Duplicating a job 497
DVD-RAM drive 167, 173
E
Editing
application 106
backup selection 355
backup strategy 316
cache 367
catalog 45
drive 186
drive cleaning 185
environment variables 58, 609
host 106
jobs 500
library 165, 235
password 131
platform 106
slot 253
user 130
user group 134
Ejecting media from drive 188, 244
Enabling
application 84
drive 182, 242
platform 84
slot 252
Encoding a file 203, 345
Environment variables
Catalog application 54, 55
editing 58, 609
Filesystem application 640,
641
information 58, 609
Erasing a cartridge 208, 219
event file 289, 446, 463
Event redirection
create 90
delete 96
edit 95
Events
Connected mode 447
definition 445
exporting 459
filtering 454
notifying 465
purging 462
redirecting 459
severity 454
tunable 462
user preferences 450
viewing 447, 483
Export from disk to tape 549
Exporting
backup 513
cartridge pool information 213
events 459
jobs 495
513
Externalization
cartridges 224
Externalizing
cartridges 203
selecting cartridges 248
F
File
access right 120
compressed 203, 288, 344
encoded 203, 345
File mode, Time Navigator Event
Manager 446, 447
Filesystem application
backing up 637
backup class 641
backup strategy 301
creating 638
definition 70, 637, 661
environment variables 641
restoring 642
Filtering
backup class 347, 352, 353
backup information 508
Events 454
jobs 489
information 508
Firewall 71, 651
broken connection 72
Free space
cache 27
catalog 26
Full backup 286, 288, 302
Functionality access right 120
H
Help on environment variables 58,
609
Host
access right 120
automatic creation 79
automatic detection 79
creating 74
definition 70
deleting 108
deleting detected host 110
disabling 85
editing 106
ignoring detected host 110
password 120
settings 74, 106
see also Platform
hosts file 75
Index
I
Icon area (tina_adm) 28, 435
Identifier, SCSI 423
Identifying
cartridge 200
catalog 13, 15
user 132, 178
Importing a backup strategy 302
Inconsistency see Library,
inconsistency
Incremental backup 286, 288, 304,
315, 367
Infinite retention period 195
Information
backup class 353
cache 27
cartridge 221, 241
cartridge pool 210
catalog 26
drive 240
jobs 470, 476
slot 241
Installing Time Navigator over a
SAN 425, 428
Instance, catalog 26
J
Jobs
definition 467
duplicating 497
editing 500
exporting 495
filtering 489
information 470, 476
maintenance 206, 216, 467
parallelism index 301
priority 202
processing 494
purging 492
report 499
simultaneous backups 300
sorting 474
status 471
tunable 500
viewing 468, 476
Juke-box see Library
K
Keyword
Known
cartridge status 201, 204, 247
user to the catalog 13, 121
L
Label
cartridge 200, 202
prefix 228
reading 238
viewing 235
writing 209, 227
Library
allocating 161
contents 159, 238
creating 161
definition 159
deleting 166
147
Device Detection Wizard 140
editing 165, 235
generic properties 646
geometry properties 649
inconsistency 160
kinds of Library 137
kinds of library 159
mailbox 159
reinitializing 160, 163, 237
settings 165
slot 159
specific properties 647
splitting 422, 425, 427
standard properties 645
testing drive position 157
viewing 233, 234
Library Drive Position Test 157
Life points, cartridge 172, 203
Limits
parallelization 345
Linux agent 373
List Administration of Drives 189
List application
backing up 604
definition 70, 589
keyword 592
665
List file 620
raw device 589, 596, 620
restoring 612
syntax 591
use example 620
List file (List application) 620
Loading mode, drive 168
Local drive 167
log file 463
log_debug file see log file
log_debug.catalog_name file 464
Lost+Found, cartridge status 196,
201, 204, 208, 218, 247
M
Mac OS X
Modyfying Cache Size 42
Macro-multiplexing
backup 309, 365
configuring 366
definition 364
incremental backup 367
SAN environment 422
Mailbox
library 159
slot 252
MAILBOX_DIR, VLS parameter
547
Main cartridge pool 290
maintenance job 206, 216, 467
Manual triggering, backup 315
Mapped network drive
under Windows 2000/2003 see
List application and
Net Disk application
Master, backup 71, 77, 106
MAX_NB_CARTRIDGES_MBX,
VLS parameter 547
Media
administrator 227
Media see Cartridge and Cartridge
pool
Memory cache 364
Menu Bar (tina_adm) 19
Mixed, SAN architecture 422
Mobile platform 78, 308
Mount points, NFS 307
Mount request 161
Moving a cartridge 251
Multicatalog 38
666
Multiple server, SAN architecture
420, 422, 425
Multiple Writing
session 308
Multiple writing 290, 422
Multiplexed backup 309, 365
N
Name
application 83
catalog 43
logical (VMS) 381
user 44, 129
NDMP
application 79, 202, 309
client 385
NDMPApplication
NDMP see NDMP, application
Nested backup class 352
Net Disk application
archiving 632
backing up 627
backup class 631
creating 628
definition 71
parallel backup 631
restoring 632
Network area (tina_adm) 20, 435
Network representation 25
NFS mount points 307
none, writing format 202
Notifying
alarm 443
events 465
NtmsSvc, Windows service 428
O
Object
catalog 26
selecting in the Network area
(tina_adm) 20
odb file 39
OES Linux, agent 384
OES NetWare, agent 383
On Demand Backup 405
Catalog Parameters 408
Configuring 406
in Time Navigator Job
Manager 414
Limitations 405
Strategies 407
Time Navigator Agent Job
Viewer 411
Unavailable 414
User Rights 406
Windows Taskbar 413
Operations
on slots 252
Overview
backup strategy 289
P
Parallel backup
definition 286
Parallel backup limitations
Limitations
parallel backup 286
Parallel restoring
limits 47
Parallelism index
jobs 301
Parallelization
limits 345
Parameter see Settings
Parameters
backup class 341
Password
application 120
catalog 120
editing 131
host 120
platform 120
user 44, 121, 131
Pending backup strategies 322
Personal access right 123
Platform
access right 120
adding in a group 33
deleting 108
disabling 85
displaying in the Network area
31
editing 106
enabling 84
group see Platform group
mobile 78, 308
password 120
removing from a group 34
removing from the Network
area 31
searching for 32
sorting 35
Platform group
adding in a platform 33
creating 33
removing a platform 34
see also Platform
Platforms
creating 74
POSIX standard 203
Postprocessing 308, 310
Preferences tool 443, 459, 465
Prefix, cartridge label 228
Preprocessing 310
Priority
cartridge 202
jobs 202
Privileged user 13, 14, 44, 119,
121
Processing
alarm 440
jobs 494
Console 522, 524
Purging
events 462
jobs 492
R
Raw device 589, 596, 620
Reading
cache 27
label 238
Recycling a cartridge 202, 205,
215, 216
Recycling policy, cartridge pool
195
Redirecting
events 459
Reinitializing a library 160, 163,
237
Remote catalog 63
Removable Storage, Windows
service 428
Removing
a platform from the Network
area 31
Index
user from a group 135
Reopening a cartridge 208, 217
Replacing a cartridge 226
Replica 200
Representation
alarm 23, 29, 434
application 21, 28
backup strategy 196
drive 22
host 21, 28
library 159
network 25
platform 21, 28
slot 235
Console 18
503
Request
cleaning a drive 168, 184
mount 161
operator see Time Navigator
Media Request
Console
Restoring
catalog 64, 67
Retention period
cartridge pool 195
infinite pool 195
Robot see Library
Robotized drive 161, 168
S
SAN
configuring Time Navigator
425, 428
connection properties 78
creating 429
installing Time Navigator 425,
428
mixed architecture 422
multiple server architecture
420, 422, 425
settings 78
storage node architecture 77,
288, 421, 422, 428
testing a drive 183
Web supervision 428
Scheduling a backup 288
SCSI identifier 423
Serial number, SCSI device 423
Serialization 423
Service, Removable Storage
(Windows) 428
Settings
application 106
backup class 339, 340
backup strategy 301
cartridge wear 172
catalog 46
cleaning cartridge 229, 230
drive 171, 186
drive cleaning 184, 229
host 74, 106
library 165
see also Library
properties
SAN 78
user 130
user group 134
Severity
alarm 29, 434, 454, 488
events 454
Shared drive 79, 167, 429
sidf, writing format 202, 288, 309,
422, 428
Silo
adding a cartridge 161
removing a cartridge 161
Simultaneous backups
jobs 300
513
viewing 514
Size
cache 366
catalog 43
Slot
cleaning 230, 253
editing 253
enabling/disabling 252
information 241
library 159
mailbox 252
operations 252
representation 235
Snapshot 200
667
Some Time Navigator applications
such as Time Navigator
Task Viewer, Time
Navigator Job Manager or
Time Navigator Media
Request Console, will let
you access several
catalogs at the same time,
while others, such as
Time Navigator 38
Sorting
alarm 439
jobs 474
platform 35
Spare, cartridge status 195, 196,
201, 202, 204, 208,
209, 218, 226, 227, 247
Specific Attributes
backup 311
Splitting a library 422, 425, 427
Status
bar (tina_adm) 27
of a job 471
of an alarm 30
Console 527
Storage node, SAN architecture 77,
288, 421, 422, 428
Storage policy, cartridge pool 195
Strategy
Syntax
backup class 347
Synthetic backup 286, 288, 422
Synthetic full backup see Synthetic
backup
System.dat file 372
T
Tape see Cartridge
tar
Unix command 203
writing format 202, 203, 309,
422
TCP Parameter 651
TCP parameter 72
Testing a Drive 243
Testing a drive 174, 183
SAN environment 183
668
Time 386
Time Navigator
configuring over a SAN 425,
428
installing over a SAN 425,
428
Console
Alarm area 29, 435
Cache area 27
Catalog area 26
Catalog Information area 25
Connected mode 13
Disconnected mode 12
Icon area 28, 435
Menu Bar 19
Network area 20, 435
representation 18
status bar 27
Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer
386, 411
compass icon (Windows) 386
main window (NetWare) 394
main window (Windows and
Unix) 387
more on backups (Windows
and Unix) 389
starting (NetWare) 392, 393,
394
starting (Windows and Unix)
386
Time Navigator Event Manager
Connected mode 446
File mode 446, 447
viewing 447
Time Navigator Job Manager 467
Display of On Demand Backup
414
Console
acknowledging 523
definition 519
processing 522, 524
status 527
viewing 520, 524
definition 501
exporting 513
filtering information 508
representation 503
zoom 505
TiNa, writing format 202, 203,
309, 339, 422
tina_acct 499
tina_adm see Time Navigator
tina_backup 71, 289, 372
tina_cart 203, 208
tina_cart_control 225, 248
tina_daemon 10, 372, 463
tina_export 288, 422
TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR variable
641
TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR, variable
640
tina_job see Jobs
tina_library see Library
tina_library_control 225, 239, 248
tina_report 499
tina_restore 380
TINA_SDB_BOOT_HISTORY
variable 56
TINA_SDB_CATALOG variable
56
TINA_SDB_HOME variable 56
TINA_SDB_LIB_PATH variable
56
TINA_SDB_MAIL_FROM variable
56
TINA_SDB_MAIL_SERVER
variable 56
TINA_SDB_MAIL_TO variable 56
TINA_SDB_MIRROR_PATH
variable 56, 61
TINA_SDB_RECOVER variable
56, 67
TINA_SDB_RESTORE_PATH
variable 56
TINA_SDB_SAVE_EVENTS
variable 56, 61
TINA_SDB_SAVE_HISTORY
variable 56
TINA_SDB_SAVE_PATH variable
57, 61
variable 57
Tunable
backup 300
catalog 39, 215
device descriptor 423
events 462
jobs 500
U
Unix agent 373
Unknown
user to the catalog 13, 121
writing format 202, 309
Use cache on server 307
User
access right 14, 44, 119, 178
changing identity 132, 178
creating 129
default access right 123
deleting 131
editing 130
group see User group
known to the catalog 13, 121
name 44, 129
On Demand Backup Rights
406
password 44, 121, 131
personal access right 123
privileged 13, 14, 44, 119,
121
removing from a group 135
settings 130
unknown to the catalog 13,
121
User group
creating 133
definition 122
deleting 135
editing 134
settings 134
see also User
Users.dat file 372
V
Variables d’environnement
ORACLE_BASE 607
ORACLE_HOME 607
Viewing
alarm 436, 487
backup 501, 514
backup class 354
bar code 235
Boot catalog 59
cartridge 221
cartridge pool 210
Index
Catalog application 59
events 447, 483
jobs 468, 476
label 235
library 233, 234
Time Navigator Event
Manager 447
Console 520, 524
Viewing Requests 520
adding cartridges 546
bringing cartridges off line 547
bringing cartridges on line 547
configuring 532
disk space allocation 542
editing 545
exporting to a tape library 549
file location 542
Virtual Library System Application
549
defining a backup strategy
564, 582
defining catridge closing
options 563
defining metapool priority
566, 582
defining metapools 560, 579
deleting metapools 564, 582
displaying information 568,
584
duplication and removal
options 556, 576
editing metapools 563, 581
emergency data removal 571,
587
exporting the monitoring report
570, 586
monitoring 567, 583
prerequisites 552
principles 551, 573
testing 567, 583
Windows Schedule Service
556, 575
VLSA
cartridge duplication 551
duplication mode 549
job duplication 572
VMS
agent 380
logical name 381
Volume
cache 27
catalog 26
VTL Disk Drive 167, 529
W
Wear
cartridge 172, 203, 228, 229
cleaning cartridge 169
Web supervision
drive 182
SAN 428
Windows
backing up files 372
registry 372
restoring files 372
use 372
Windows 2000
agent 372
mapped network drive see List
application and Net
Disk application
Windows 2003
agent 372
mapped network drive see List
application and Net
Disk application
Writing
backup session 290
cache 27
cartridge 308
label 209, 227
multiple 66, 290, 422
Writing format
cpio 202, 203, 309, 422
none 202
sidf 202, 288, 309, 422, 428
tar 202, 203, 309, 422
TiNa 202, 203, 309, 339,
422
unknown 202, 309
X
X-Window display 11
Y
Yellow triangle
drive 240
slot 246
Z
Zoom, Time Navigator Task
Viewer 505
669
670

Time Navigator Administration Guide

Transcription

Similar documents

The 1897 Sears, Roebuck and Co. Catalog

Georgia Navigator – Past, Present and Future

NAEIR Fact Sheet

Manual - The Unofficial P

comedian runs for president ginnie spring adventure picasso meets

CBeyond BeyondMobile

Issue 122 - Jan 2002 - Isle of Wight PC User Group

Disk to Disk Backup for IBM Midrange Servers

The Space Catalog Mission and Conjunction Analysis

Ziua doctoranzilor